A New Portuguese Grammar in Four Parts ...

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

¥"

.•>'.

/-.

ANEW

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR.

k^'

r.

A NEW

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR.

\

<

/"-«

^ •

> •

St

A NEW

I %

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR

IN FOUR PARTS;

CONTAINING

J. Rules for the combination and ufe of the different Parts
of Speech.

IL The Syntax^ in which aref explained, after a mdre
copious maimer than hitherto attempted, the peculiar ufet
of the Portuguese Particles.

III. A Vocabulary, more particularly containing the Terms
of Commerce, War, and Navigation, wuh a variety
of Phrafes and familiar Dialogueaj taken from common
converfatipn and the heft authors.

IV. Various Paifaffes extracted from the moft approved,
ancient and modern writers, in profe ^and verfe, with a
view to facilitate the reading of the moft valuable Por-
tnguefe books.

By ANTHONY VIEYRA, Tranftagano.

THE EIGHTH EDITION,

CAREFULLY REVISED AND CREATLT IMfROVBDf
WITH THE PORTUGUESB WOEDS PROPBELT ACCENTED,
ACCORDING TO THE LATEST AND BEST AUTHOEITlBSp

By Mr. I. P. AILLAUD.

f

JNecefse eft enim inter quos mercaturm £<? contraQuumfint^
inter eos quoque jermonis ejse commercia. Ubertus

FOUETA.

,1 " ^ . r ' ' ' 1

LONDON;
Printed epr F. WINGRAVE, inj thb Stbak p.

^!- 7;f

J ^ I i i o . . ^ : t .

I

I ••

r I • ■

\ m %

I , -

I

PREFACE.

jf^^^ HM^^f of ipePortugu/^i language
is fo well known to all Englifti mercbants
wbQ4wry on a general trc^ie<witb the t^frent
tB^U^ the kmxffjij^ V)orid, if xmllj}^. needles 4o
^e wiy arguments here 40 Jf rove ii ;. ^n^ JJhall
i^r what Jb^e^iq fay ofi the mpiovftp^s and
0^r^ "cf "this lojiguc^e ^ to the Preface to n^y
£x^Ufli and^ Porti^guefe X>idlijonary.

.\

- ■ - /

The itdder willjind in tht Firfi PaKLjfftiis

^rsimmar, what is material as ^ Jb^ndationrpf

the tufbole. ^

^ At the end of tbe Second Part is a full ex^

planation of tbe Particles, on wbicb I bave 6e-

jlowed more time and labour^ becaufe this fub»

jeSl bas been bitberto much negledled, although

tbe princ^al ornament and elegance not only of

tbe

Cviiil

Ufe Portuguefe, hut of every other language,
chiefly conjijl in the proper arrangement and
judicious interjperjion of thefe words.

■■ 1 ■ . '■■ ■• '. •■■

In the Third Part is a larger colleen than
hitherto ^uhli/bed of the terms cf Trade, War,
Navigation, &c. 'which the prefent intercourfe
'hitween the natioThs renders particularly uj

■ ' ..... . ., . ^ ■ . - • T .

Having found a great difficulty in pfoturing

Portuguefe hooks in this Coitrttry, I have beSfi

commonly obliged to furnifk with part i^^^

priifatS cblledlion thofe Gentlemen whom LhTtoe

^badthe honour of affijiing in the Jiudy of this

language', during my refidence here ; tbertfirre,

in the Fourth Part I have given fome paffdges

feUSledfrom the heft Portuguefe Authors, and

\wbicb will, at the fame tme,facilitdte the reikiing

cf their mojl eminent writers. "* ^^-'

- > * \ ' » • ^

■ I .

I

9

Advertisement to this Sfew Edition.

4

npHIS new Edition of Mr. Vieyra's Orani'-^
I mar^.has been not only accurately marked ^
with the proper accents to facilitate the Rro*
nunciation and the Intelligence of the tiaft^
guajge^ but even materially altered in ^e
bpidy of t\i^ Work. The accentiiation is a
matter of fo much confequence in the Pprtu-
guefe Language, that one accent u fed ih the
room of another^ often changes entirely the
lignification of tjie wOrd, as for in^ahce ill
the words Av6 and Avo ; the former, when
marked with an acute, meaning ^rawrf-mt^A^,
the latter with a circumflex, meaning ^a«^
Jatber^ This interefting part, in which all
the former Editions have been fo deficient,
(ufing only the acute) has been fcrupulously
corredled' in the prefent one. In that part
which treats of the Pronunciation, fome very
neceffary corrections have been introduced.
The pronunciation of the cb, wrongly ex-^
plained in the other Editions, is here intbiS^t
brought to its real found.

I •

New paflages from the beft Modern Wri-
ters, have been fubftituted for fome of the
Ancient ones, to enable the learners to form
a proper idea^ <if the variations and j^ogrefs
of the Language, down to the prefent time.
A new Vocabulary of the Military Words of
Coihihaftd'and ifr^IhlVariflationof the Com-
meircial Letters have alfo be^n inferted in this
Cisifion.

»' ^ — '

• »*'■■*

S.u6Ti are th6 principal alterations ma& in
this VjTork, which, it is hoped, will meet witK
the approbation of the public.

« ^

r » «

London, i8th July, i8u»

■.'.<.

r • • ■ r

1 • ■ -

'A:

♦ •

• '■ .* ■ ' ...

. .' i • • » ' < '■ J K

»

I

- • I

' 'if'-' .

/ - ■ : I ... J ' •>.

-' • ' •

t

{ .

• ■. ' • ■'

■^>

CONTENTS.

FAK'T L

I

/IF the Portuguese Alphabet, and the manner of pr^*
^^ nouncing each separate Letter . - - . I^agc t
Of the manner of pronotLncing 4he P^tuguese Letters
as combined in Syllables -•»--••-
Of the AHicles - • - - - • . ... * , .-
Of the Nouns ' -^ ^ ^ - . • - ..».». ^i

fOf the Pronouns -.- -.'-- . - . . -,«
Verbs .-..-... ^ ...... 44
the Participles •--..-.....113
thk Adverbs 114

Of the Prepofitions - - - - -/. - -. - - 117

df the Conjunctions ' ..........iiS

Jnitrjective Particles -.-----.--120

Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese Language ist

P A R T JI.

Of the Ditfifion of Syntax ..--.--.. nt

Of the Syntax of Articles - - -.- - . - - .isfi
Of the Syntax of Nouns\ and firfi^ of the Subftan^

tives - --- 131

Of the Syntax of Adjectives - - . - - • - -13s
^t/ie Syntax of the Comparatives and Superlatives • 135
df the Syntax of Pronouns ........136

Of the Syntax oj Verbs • -..-.•,.-'- 13(9
Of the Syntax of Particles and Gerunds - - - - 4 152

Of Prepofitions -.-.-.----- * 154

Vf the Portuguese Orthography -.-•--- 191
6f the Quantity of Syllabus^ and their Sound . • • 209
fttymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the Latin -915

PART

Contents.

-. ^ A RsT III, . .

The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese Lan^-
guage .-....-.. ti8

A vocabulary oj Words mhst'used inDiscourse - - i
0/ the Portuguese Coin ..-.-....^8
jI Condition 0/ Portuguese Proverbs ' ..-..- 59
^ Fdmiltar Dialogues -----./••... 69
Letters on Mercantile Affairs^ &c» .-•.-. 84

■ *. ■ . • ^ \

PART IV.

---...'•■.

Several useful and entertaining Passages^ collected
Jrom the be/l Portuguese Writers - . - - - - - 1 a^x

. , ... . _ - ^>. - • . • '

^ ' - .. " .'

^ _ -

k ^ • • -^

• , ■ /

f -^ I ^ . .. - . - - - ■ ' I . \*> ■ . ' \ /■-,

• i^i:-- - . - - - ^ •■ ■ \v •■ ■ "" , r.

it-----------;;-

.y-.l - ■

;:i: . ■ ['■ : ■■ :r^- ■ ■ ' ■■ ■■■■'■

... ^ A NEW

^^9i

ANEW

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR.

■^"e*

PART I.

CHAP. I.
Of THE PORTUGUESE Alphabet.

And the manner of pronouncing eackfeparate Letter.

npHE Portuguefe alphabet contains twenty-four
letters^ viz.

A, B,C,D,E, F, G,H,I, J, L, M, N,0, P, Q,
R,!S,T,U,V,X,Y,Z.

The A is exprelTed by a found like that of a in
the Englifh words j/, rat, fat, &c.

B is exprefled by a found like that of the be, in tfa6
firft fyllable of the Englifli word Betty.

C is' exprefled by a found like that of the firft
iyllable of the Englifh word celebrated.

' D is exprefled by a found like that of the firft
fyllable of the.Eogliih word declare.

. '£ is exprefled by a (bund like that which we give
to the Englifli a when we pronounce the word care.

B Fis

2 PORTUGUESE

F is expxdEkd \jy the fame fi)UDd aaia^EDglxili.

G IS expreffed bv a found like that of the firft
, fyllable of the Engh'ih word yneratkm.

H is expreffed by a found like that of the Eng-
li(h word aghast if you cut off the two laft letters st,
and ke^p tpe accent oa thq fecond 9.

. I is exprefled by the found of our ee.

J is called^ cotifidntej it is expreffed by the found
oiee; and bwh^ faqie p^er ^ ihi^g hefofe c or i.

L> as in Englifh.

M^ a^ in £i)g4iih.

N» as in Englifh.

O has nearly thi faiqe found ais in the Engliih
word slore.

P is expreffed by a fotind like that of pe in the
Englifli word penny.

Q is expreffed by a found like that of the Eng"
lifhit. /

R is ^oreffed by a fbund like that of the Eoglilh
particYpre Vr^i if you cart cut off the laft fetter A

S, aji lii En^iffi.

T is e;(preffc4 by a found like that of iha in the
Ebglifli Wofd TPhams.

y i^ expi;^ffedl>y a found like that of ^f in. fBe
Engtilh word poi^.

Vis eitpieffed ^y a fiwind Jtke tha^t oj[. qo'i t^y
call it alfo i> canJmUs^* i. e, tjjt^ y.^mtomj^

X is e3i|)mffed by a found like thfit.pf puj; pro-
noun perfonaljft?! i|!^^y^^4^ri^^tq it,qr ^$>&^

T 1^ expreifedby a hmsA like lh|M: f^.mi i|i Ifie
Englifh word vi/Usk^v^ m e»Sttd

Z is expmfled by this finuidt o£ 4>uil IBoffUSkk^^
iefffing out ^he i4 w aMi

0/

Q RAM M AR. . ^

I . y ■

m

Of tie manner of pronouncing the Portuguefe Letters as

combmed in SyU^Us I and first

Of the Vowels.

A.

A in Portuguefc is commonly pronounced like a
in the following Englifli words adapted^ castle^ &c.
It is fometitnes pronounced with lefs ilrength« and
clofelyj a$ in dmboSy where the a is pronounced fike
a in tlie Englifh word anibition. ,

• E.

The letter e has two different founds ; the one
open like ay in daily y the other clofe, like that in the
Englifli word mellow. Examples of the former,/^,
faith, piy foot> &c. Examples of the latter, ridty «
-Mt^fmide^ a wall^ &c. In this confifts a great part
of the beauty of the Portoguefe pronunciation, which
however, cannot be learnt but by a long ufe, not*
withftaniding all the rules that can be given.

I.

t% proBOUdced like ee in the Engliih word steely
4^ 3 or like i in the Englifli words stilly ainda*; w^
jJiW#,visM.

O.

This vowel has two founds \ one open, as in the
"word ^, pity, where tbe'^ is pronounced like our
in the word store \ the other clofe, as in the Por-
tuguefe article do^ of^ and th^ word r^J^i/f^/t^, round,
where the o is pronounced like our u in turret' or
stumble. It is likewife in the different pronuncia-
tion^ of this vpwel that confifts the grenteft part of
^c beauty of Ac Portuguefe pronuncf^on; but
it can be learned only by a long.ufe.

B SI U- The

Contents.

-. aP a R/T III,

T%€ most elegant Phrases of the Portuguise Lan-

guage ti8

A vocabulary of Words most used irrDiscourse - - i
OJ the Portuguese Coin ........ .58

A Condition of Portuguese Proverbs " ...... 59

^ Familiar Dialogues .---../•.... 69

Letters on Mercantile Affairs^ &c» ...... 84

P A R T IV.

Several useful and entertaining Passages^ collected
Jrom the befl Portuguese Writers • - - - - - is,i

^

\

'V

h

4 ' '

I'. ':■■

'' V

• \^

V

5 r

,)M -

"»'■

u.^ .-.

< »

f \%v

I <

ANEW

^^•^I

A NEW

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR.

'—I f

P A R T I.

CHAP. I.
Of THE PORTUGUESE Alphabet.

Ai^ the manner of pronouncing each fepar ate Letter.

TTHE Portuguefe alphabet contains twenty-four
letters^ viz.

A, B,C,D,E, F, G,H,I, J, L, M, N,0, P, Q,
R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z.

The A is exprelTed by a found like that of a in
the Englifh words j/, rat, fat, &c.

B is exprefled by a found like that of the be, in iht
firft fyllable of the Englilh word Betty: ^

C IS exprefled by a found like that of the firft
fyllable of the Etiglifh word celebrated.

D is exprefled by a found like • that of the firft
fyllable of the Eogliih word declare.

< '£ is exprefled by a found like that which we give
to the Englifli a when we pronounce the word care.

B Fis

2 PORTUGUESE

F k cxpxdEkd fay the fame fiiuod aaia^EngliilL

G IS expreffed by a found like that of the firft
. fyllable of the Engliih word yneratkm.

H is expreffed by a found like that of the Eng-
li(h word aghast if you cut off the two laft letters st,
and ke0p tpe accent oa thq fecond ^.

. I is exprefled by the found of our ee.

J is called^ cot^fidnte^ it is expreffed by the found
of ^/ and h^the faqie p^er jig tb^^ hefofe e or i.

L> as in Englifh.

M^ aj^ in £i)g4iih.

N, as in Englifh.

O has nearly thi faiqe found ais in the Engliib
word store.

P is expreffed by a fptind like that of pe in the
Englifli word penny.

Q is expreffed by a found like that of the Eng"

R is^preffed by ^ fpV?^ ^^^^ ^^^^ of theEoglilh
partictpfcVr^i if you cart cut off the laft fetter A

S, zi In En^iffi.

T i$ e^tpreffed by a found like that of iha in the
Etoglifli wofd TiJtfwrx,

y i^ expii^ffed l>]r a found like that of o(i in. fBe
Engtifli word /to6|^.

V is exp;»effed J^|r. a fiwind iac;e that; ojf QQ.i t^y
call it alfo i? cai^mUi^ u e, ijjfcp Y<:p»f^ajRtt /

X 13 e:t|)i^i&d by a found: like ^hfU ^f PH)>r pro-
noun perfonal j&?^ h! yw .^d^iR, ^ t« it> qr a^yJcrju;

T 1^ expreifed by. a CmumI IHce lh|M: pf.w. <' Ui Ifie
Engli {h word v^fi^nfeyd « alalM^^^^;

2 is exprcfied by tfaisfiMiiidt of 'CUIL Eo^ltfiLi^lM/,
leafing out ^he i4 o)^ aMi

0/

Q R A M M A R. ^

Of tie manner o/pronauuing tie fffrtupufe Letters as
camimed in SjiitUts I aadfirst

Of the Vowbls.

A.

A in Portuguefe is commonly pronounced like a
in the following £ngli(h words adapted^ castle, &c.
It is fometimes pronounced with lefs ftrength, and
clofely, a$ in dmbosy where the a is pronounced like
a in the Englifh word ambition.

• E.

The letter e has two different founds ; the one
open like ay in daify; the other clofe, like that in the
l^gliiSi word mellow. Examples of the former, y!%
faith, fi^ foot, &c. Examples of the latter, ride, «
uteUfofide^ a wall, &c. In this confifts a great part
of the beauty of the Portuguefe pronunciation, which
howetver, cannot be learnt but by a long ufe, not*
withftaniding all the rules that can be given,

I.

ts pronounced like ee in the Engliih word steely
i^o 3 or like i in the Englifh words stilly ainda*; vt*^
JfiMi, visivd.

O.

This vowel has two founds ; one open, as in the
"word d6j pity, where the* is pronounced like our
In the vf or A storey the other clofe, as in the Por»
tuguefe article do, of, and th^ word reddndo, round,
where the o is pronounced like our u in turret or
stumile. It is likewife in the different pronuncia-
tion^ of this vpwel that confifts the grenteft part of
the beauty of Ae Portuguefe pronunciation s but
it can be learned only 1)y a long ufe.

B« y.The

P O R TUG UE S E

U.
The vowel u is pronounced like 00 in Englifh.

I

Y.

Y has the fame found as the Portuguefe vowel/*

Of Consonants.

B

Keeps always the. fame found as in Englith.

C

Before a^ o, », and the confonants /, r, is properly
pronounced asi&; but before e and / it takes the
hilling found of s : it takes alfo the found ofs before
a^ Of u, when there is a dafli under it thus f.

f^ I could wijh the learned in Portugal would follow the

, resolution of the Royal Academy of Madrid^ hy expunging

such Jajht and placing the s in its steady Jinee they have

in both languages the same hijjing sound which frequent^

ly occqfions great confujion in the proper use of them.

« ■

C before h is pronounced like sh in > the Englifli
worAsfitneifiape^ &c.

Double c is founded only before e and /> the firft
with the found of k, and the other with the hiffing
found of si as in accidinte, accidents pronounce
aksidfyile.

D

Is pronounced ,in Portuguefe as in Englifli. ^

Is pronounced always as in Englllh.

G

'*■ ' Before the vowels a, o, ir» and before confonants^
h pronounced as in Engliih : example^ gdsto, tafte ;
^aiola, cage 5 ^ilCj a cry.

G before

. Q R A M M A R. f

G before e and i denotes the found of ^ confo- .
nant.

Gna fqunds almoft like our wa : example, guirdM,
jpronounce gwarda.

. Gue^ gui,2,K pronounced as gwe in the word F«fi/,
and^* in the word g^ ; but in the verbs argw- and
redarguir, it is to be pronounced as if it were written
4rgu€er, &c.

H.

The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced at
the beginning of words^ as Adra, an nour ; Aomem,
a man : but, according to the modern orthography^
aU thofe words are written without an A.

H when preceded by a c^ makes a found with it
like our jA. See the letter C^ and alfo the letters
L and N.

J

Is pronounced like our^ confonant.

K. :

The Portuguefe have no fuch letter as k.

L. .

Is pronounced in Portuguefe as in Engliflu
US is pronounced like g before an / in the Italian
words/iglio^/og/io, &c.

M

Is pronounced as in Kngli(h^ when placed before
a vowel with which it forms a fyllable s but, when
it is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter
e, it forms in Portuguefe a nafal found like that of
the French words vin, wine ^ pain, bread ; except
/dem, t6em, from the verbs foiir, to&r, and fome
othei^s.

M at the end of words, preceded by an a, o, or
I9 has fuch a liafal obtufe found that can only be
learned from a matter's mouth.

B 3 N being

8 PORTUGUESE

Ey^ as in r/y, king.

£/, as in amei, I loved.

Eu,'B.seu, L

Jo, as via, he faw*

Oc, as in poemy they put ; compoim, they compofe ^
meioes, melons, &c.

Qy, as in i(^, an ox ; f/fy, he was.

Ou, as ^(}», I give ; /ou, I am,

Ue, as ^2»^J, blue :

JT The two vowels in the following words must
be plainly and distinctly pronounced ;

^i, as in paiz, a country, pronounce pa^iz.

Ea, as in lampria, a lamprey, pronounce^ lampri^a^

la, as- c/emfyicia, clemency, pronounce^ clemind'a. .

lo, as in navio, a (hip, pronounce, navi-o.

luy as i/i^^^tf^ a widoWj pronounce, vi-uva.

Od, as Lhbda, Lisbon, prda, a prow, pronounce,
Lisbd-a, &c.

O^, as z^^;?/, /^i^;;;, from the verbs, to&r, and /o4r,
pronounce /^ ^t;;, &c. . >

V. Oiy sts ro/;9i, bad, pronounce, ro-im.

Oo, as ,coop^raf4m, co-operation, pronounce co-
eperafSo.

Ui, as ruina, ruin, pronounce, ru-ina.

CHAP. 11.

Of the Articles.

'T'HOSE particles called Articles, are properly
prepofitions, commonly put before nouns, to
fliew their gender, number, and cafe. . .
Thefe articles are definite or indefinite.

0/ the Definite Article.
•I. The definite article marks the gender, i^umber,
and cafe, of the nouns which k precedes. \ .

. . *!• The

1 ■*
i"

GRAM MA R. 9

The Englifli tongue has but one definite article,
namely the, which lerves for both numberi

The Portuguefe has two, vii. o for the mafculinc
and a for the leminihe.

The definite article has five cafes, the nominative,
genitive, dative, accufative, and ablative ; becaufe
the vocative in the nouns is defigned and preceded
merely by the particle o.

The Declenfion of the Mafculine Article o.

Singular. . Plural.

Nominative, 9, the^ - Nominative, os^ the.

Genitive, do^ of the. Genitive,, ^^j, of the.

Dative, ao^ or o^ to the. pative, aos^ or os^ to the.

Accufative, ao^ or o^ the. ' Accvifative, aos^ or oi the.

Ablative, do^ from or hy the. Ablative, dos, from or by the.

The Dec/efifion of the Femimne Article a.

Singular. * Plural.

Nominative, a, the. Nominative, as^ the.

Genitive, da^ of the'. Genitive, das^ of the.

Dative^ <i, to the. Dative, as, to the.

Accufative, ^, the. Accufative, jj, the.

Ablative, da^ from the. Ablative, das^ from or by the.

■ pr Obferve, that the Portuguefe have an article
for each gender, both in the fingular and the plural.

Of the Indefinite Article.

[[ The indefinite article may be put before the maf-
xul}ne as well as the feminine gender, before the
plural as well as the fingular number.

The indefinite article has but four cafes, the ge-
iiitlve, dative, accufative, and ablative.

One may. put de before a noun mafculine as well

as a. feminine, as huma cordade riy, a king's crown 3

tbip word r/y \% ihafculine; hutfi chapio de pilha, 9k

, hat of straw , . the word p&lha is of the femitiine

gender.

TJie indefinite article de is alfo put before the plu-
pal as well as the lingular number \ example, huma

corda

10 PORTUGUESE

<wri4 ti§ Jttres^ a ciimtk of fiowers^ ^bM prkto dt
4mr6zy a ptete of rice.

Detlenjion ofiht IndefifAie Article.

GenitiTe, de of. AccuAtive, a.

TinAvt, d, lo* Ablacive, 4(^, fixMti.

ijpr The accufatire of this article is not ^cpin^fed
iti Engliifal example, Eu conked a sSu pAy^ I loiew
his fattier, in conked a sua may^ I knew his mother.

The indeiioitc article may aifo be put before infi-
nitives, and then it fimifies to ; as he Umpo defalldr^
dc dormir^ de Hr, &c. it is time to speak^ to sleep, to
read, &C« iu v6u a vir^ n fallhr^ I am going, to iee^
to fpeak.

:N. B. Whenever we meet with ^dnd io in Ejifij-
lifli, followed by /^tf, remember they are the indefi-
nite artkies, and theh ^e muft make tife of the
indefinite article de^ or a^ in Portuguefe*

When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and-
ferves as nominative to the followmg verb, they put
the article o before it ; as o cbmtr e o dortfiirfdo as
<6ujas mats neceffarias n^a vida^ eating and ileeping
are the greateft neceffaries of life.

When the prepofition in is followed by the article
Mr or by a pronoun pofieffive^ as initio m my^ in
tky^ in iis, we muft render «it in Portuguefe by em -
^ or no, em os or nos, for the mafciiline ; and hy ema
or na, em as or nas, for the feminine : example, inthe
l^den, em o jar dim, or nojardim-, in the ftreet, em a
ria or naria; in thy book, em o tiu. Or no tin ihro;
In his bed, em a pa, or nafHa coma, &c.

When after the prepofition wM, which in Portu-
gtiefe is expreffed by com, we find the articles the, or
a pronoun poflefiGlve, as whh the, with my, &c. we
tnky hy^ctmi o, or eo, cma or coa, etm os, or cos, am
m, or toMS : example, with the prince, com 6 or co
prhuipe-y with the iword, com a or coa ejpida^ with
the eyes, c^m os or cos olh0s -, with ray oooks, am os
M COS mim livre$,8tc.

WJien

GRAMMAR. li

When the prtf)0&ian wiik is-fellowed by a pro-
tiotin poflefiive, and this by a noun of quality or
kindred, as wit A your majefyy wit A your highnefs^ t$kk
your excellency^ wHA Ids brother^ &c: wkA muft then
be rendered by the Portuguefe word com^ as com
*u^uli^^A4e, corn vdffa A4r/M, tcmjiu trmao^ wi^ut
ufing the article.

Obferve, that fotnetioies th^ dative and acculatife
of the indefinite article are not exprefled in Englifliy
piarticularly before pronouns perfonal and proper
names ; example, ctmv^ a n6s, it behoves us ; Ai^
torn mat^ M P^dro, Anthony kUled Peter.

,ji' i ' iii i T'^^iifn

C H A P. IIL

Of ths Novns.

•ITHE Porluguefe nouns hav« various lermiiria*
tlons, as will appear hereafter.

They have but two genders, the inafculine and
feminine.

The Portuguefe nouns have no variation of cafes,
like the Latin> and the article only diftinguifhes
the cafe.

a r

f

Of muns ending ih i ; and of their dectenfion.

Sibgular. Floral.

Norn, a rainha^ the queen. Norn, as rainhas^ the queeai.
Geo. da rainha^ol^t. queen. Gen.^jrAiiiiaj,ofthequeeni.
Dat. a rainidf to the queen. Dat.^^i ratnhas^ to the queenf •
Act. a rainlia^ the quetn. Ace. as rainhas^ the queens.
Voc. 6 ratnha^ O qu^en. Voc. i rain^^aSt O qaedhs. .
AM. da ou pitla ramAa^ ftom Abl. da oapeiius ramhas from
or by the queen. or by the quems.

We have alreadv obferved that the Portuguefe
Nouns have no variation of cafes y ther^ore there k

no

12 PORTUGUESE

no occaiiori to difplay more examples of tlieir de-
clenfipnSt becauJfe you need but change the article
according to their gender.

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. .

Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine
gender; as rofa^ a rofe; janilla^ a window, &c.
You muft except dia^ a day, planSta^ a planet ; and
other nouns ending in a^ belonging to a man ; as
mamla^ a porter; jtfuita, a jefuitt thofe derived
from the Greek are likewife mafculine ; as dogmoj
epigrdmma, clima ; except fcientific names as mathe*
mdiica, theologia^ &c.

Except alfo from this general rule fome nouns
that have the accent upon the laft fyllable ; as alva^
ri^ a charter, or a prince's letters patent ; Pari, one
of the captainfhips of the Portuguefe America, &c.

Obferve, that the plural of nouns ending in /i is '
formed by adding the letter s to the lingular ; as
likewife the plural of all nouns that terminate in
vowels.

Obferve alfo, that nouns ending in aa are of
the feminine gender, and form their plural as thofe
ending in a.

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in t.

Nouns ending in e are generally of the mafculine

Sender ; as dente, a tooth ; v&lle, a valley ; vintre,
e womb, &c.

The exceptions are /e, faith; fonte, a fountain;
chive, a key ; tdrre, a tower ; Ave, a fowl ; cdrne,
flelh or meat ; gSnte, people ; nicfte, death ; neiJe,
snow ;. ndite, night ; pdnte, a bridge ; p^Jle, plague ;
parte, part ; ferpbtte, a ferpent ; /Sr^, a hare.

Except alfo all names of virtues, vices, faculties,
and thofe expreffive of the pafSons of the mind ; as
vktitde, Viiiue ; fantidhde, holinefs ; bandide, good*
ntU ; vaidade, vanity ; ociofidide, idlenefs^ &c.

Thirdly,

GRAMMAR. is

Thirdly, idide^ age ; velhice^ old age ; ruJKcidade^
Tuftidty; capacid&de^ capacity; feitciddde^ happl-
neisj forte, fortune; arte^ art;* irvore, a tree;
fertUidade^ fertility ; ftde^ third ; febe^ a hedge ; cduve,
cabbage; herdade^ a farm or manor/ chaminiy a '
chimney ; pnide^ a wall ; fa&de^ health ; ride^ a net ;
mare, the tide ; fibre, fever ; gale, a gallery. Sec,

Of the Gender of the No$tns ending in i.

Nouns ending < in i are mafculine ; as i^adfi, a
rapture ; nibri, a hawk, &c.

Of Nouns ending in o.

Nouns ending in o are of the mafculine gender ;
as Uwo, a book ; ftlho^ a fon ; brigo, an arm ; vejiido,
a garment ; efpelho, a, looking giafs, &c. Except
mdo, a fliip; fUho, a fritter or pancake; nr6,zxi
cej.

Of Nouns ending in u.

Alt nouns ending in u are mafculine; as peri, a
turkey j grdu, a crane.

'Of Nouns ending in y.

Nouns ending in j^ are of the mafculine gender ;
as r/y, king; p&y, father; b6y,o%, &€. except liy,
a law ; may, a mother.

« ■

Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of thofe termi^

nating in confonants.

1. AH Nound ending in' at, are mafculine; as
^niU, a fign or token ; fal, fait. You muft except
cal, lime, which is feminine, and has no plural.

The plural of thefe nouns is formed by changing
^ the letter /of the (ingular into^i; ^9, ftndesftomfi^
nU\ anim&es from anhnil.

2. Nouns ending in at are of the mafciiline gei^
der; asiir,air.

Tbe-pluriil of thefe nouns k formed by adding es
to the ungular> as ares frbm ar.

H FOR T y G*U E-S E

SwM nouns endiDg in as ia the plaral are femi-
otoe^ and Imve no lingular; as migas, exeqmas^

3. Nouns ending in 42: are of the iQafculine gen*
der J as rapazy a boy ; except pifz^ peace. jThe
plural is formed by the addition or ez to the finguhur.

4. Nouns ending in </ are mafculines as annil}
a ring 5 papely paper, &C;

.TTie plttf al oi thefe nouns is formed by ehanging
Ae i of the fingular into is ; as amiijy from amel ;
j^tf^/Zr, from papel.

5. Nouns ending in ^/^ are of the mafcuh'ne
gender; as homeniy a man; btniy benefit, &c.
Except briemy order; viAgsm. a voyage; virgem,
a virgin, &e. but /ahigim, a K>rl of beafi, is com-
mon.

The plural of thefe -nouns is formed by changing
the m of the fingular into ns ; as homens from kontemj

tf. Nouns ending in er are of the mafculine
[ender; as pod^r^ powder; prazfyr, pleafure, &c.
Iircept colhety a fpoon ; mulher, a woman.

The plural of tbefe nouns is Yor med by adding es
to the ungular^ as collUreSy from colhir^

1. . Nouns ending in ^z are of the mafculine
gender ; as fregukz^ a parifhioner or a cuftomer ;
mezy month; arnezy UviZy revezy &c. Except
Jurdhiy deafitiefs ; Mrpdzy vSZy Sec.

The plural of thete nmms is formed by adding es
to th^ fingular, as/irjt^^^y, from fregtUz ; but liz
t^as-oo pJural.

8. Nouns ending in // are of the mafculine gen-
der; UB/mii, a funnel ; iarrii, a barcdL

Xbe plural of theie npuns is formed by changing
the / of the fingular into Sy ^funk% homjmiiyi^c.
JB^ept oftisify ficUy pensile &c. which change the
i^iiito eis m the plural, ^sficeisy frotQ/icU.

j^ Nf>uii8 endiQ|; jniw are of the mafeulioe gen-
det, as is fa Jim, a little fword.

9 , The

GRAMMAR, if

. The piural of thefe flouns is formed by changing
\he^ m of the fiogQiar into hs, a^ efpadins froai «»•
paJsm.

10. NoBBS ending in ir or yr are of the ntaC
caline gender ; but mdrtir or martyr^ a piartyr, 13

coAwnw^

Tbe plural of t^fe nouns 19 formed by adding es
tp the angular.

U* AU Nouns, ending in iz are of the mafcu*
hne gender ; as apprenaix an apprentice ; . nwriz^
Q0& \ vwiity varoiih ; m4ti%^ a ihadowing in paint-
ing ; chafarizy chamariz^ &c. Ei&cept aboiZi perdiz^
riuz, cod0miz, tnatriz^ &c.

The plural of thefe nouns is formed by adding cs
to the ungular, as perdizes from p^djz^

12. N^Mios ending 10 &/ are or the mafcnline gen*-
der ; m anzplf a hook ; fil^ the fun, &c.

The pluri^ of thefe nouns i% formed by changing
tbe / or the fingular into es^ as anzoes from anzoiy^

13. Nouns ending in om are of the maCculine gen^
der ; d&f&mi fouckl ; ii6m^ gift, 8^:^

'tht plural of thefe nouns is formed by changii^
the 4l^of the finguladr into «5, as>MJ (rom/om^ &c.

. 14« Nouns ending in or are of the ma&uline gen-
der; as amAr, love, /rwdr, fear, &c. Except d^^
pain ; cifr, Qolour, &c.

The plural of thefe nouns is formed by adding #>
to the fingular, as iiw^r^i fromamdr.
- Nounis ending ia os are oi the mafeuline gendfiir f
aaZ>^0j,Qod.

' The plural of thefe nouo$ is formed by chaogtng
the s into zcs, as DicMs from I^s.

li. N<>un3 eliding in ^2 are of the mafeuUne gpn->
dw ; as aiiernSz, a Moorifli coaf ; arrdz, rice 1 ^^^
hangman, &c. Except tr^z, a walnut ; voz^ vivc^ii
/{«, the mouth of a river.

The pLuraL oCthefe aouns i» formed by adding «tf^^
to the Angular.

Ii6 PORTUGUESE

t

16. Nouns ending in ul or um are of the mafcu-
line gender ; asy«/,,the fouth ; Sail, Saul, a pfoper
name of a man ; atum, tunny-fifh.

The plural of thofe ending in ir/, according to the
learned B/uteau, is formed by changing the /of the
fingular into €s, as /ties from /ul, az&es from azU
blue, &c. Except cSn/ules from cSn/ul, a conful.

The plural of thofe ending in «w, is formed by
changing the m of the fingular into ns, as atins
from atum. .

17. Nouns ending in uz are of the mafculine
gender ; as arcatiz, an afquebufs.

The plural of thefe nouns is formed by adding es
to the fingular.

18. Nouns ending in^ are of the mafculine gan-
der; as maS, hand^ campqfifao, compofitiou, ora-
faS, oration, &c. Except paS, bread; anaS, a
dwarf; cmfaS, a hand-worm ; fravaS, thunder ; es-
quadrao', a fquadron; piao, a child's top; borraSy
2l blot with ink ; papelaoy pafte-board ; chao, the
ground, quinkaiy a (hare. .

There is no certain rule for the formation of the
plural of the nouns ending in uS ; becaufe fome
change the at of the fingular into aes, as Alemaes,
from AiemaS, a German ; capitaes, from capitaSi a
captain; cais, from cds, a dog, pais, from pao, a
loaf ; &c. S6me change the a8 of the fingular in-
to Tos ; as cidadaosy from cidadad^ a citizen ; chris-
fins, from chriftai, a chriftian ; cortexa&s from cor^
ttzaS, a courtier ; viltaos, from villao^ a villain, &c.
Some change the ao of the fingular into Ses ; as ts-
quadrfies, from e/quadraS, a fquadron. ; trovSes, from
travai, thunder ; - ctmclufiies, from conclu/ai, a • con-
clufion ; aragSes, (torn ' orafaS, an oration; and

Enerally all the Portuguefe nouns that may
■ cafily made Englifh, by changing their ter-
mination faS into the Englifli termination/^^* as de-
cRnofdi, declenfion or declination, re^^/^^f^S, con-
fidcration^ &c. and thefe are of the feminine gender.

. 19. All

GRAMMAR. 17

19« AH noups fignifying a mak, muft be of the
mafculine gender^ as ihiqucy duke ; tnarquJz^ a mar-
quis s cSnde^ count, and thofe denoting a female are
always femirtine.

You may form two general rules from what has
been faid concerning the formation of the plural of
nouns, viz.

I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels
have their plural formed by adding the letter/ to
the fingular.

IL That the plural of nouns ending maz^ ez, i9,
0Z^ MZ, is formed by adding es to the ungular.

0/ Augmeniativis.

The Portuguefe have their augmentatives formed
by the increaie of one or two iyllables, which
they; add to the end of their nouns, and ferve
either to augment the fignificatioh of nduns, or to
declare a thmg contemptible ; and fo, from homem^
a mao» they forn^* AomemzarraSy a great ftrong
man; fS/o, a fool, toleiraOy a great fool, &g.
and fonr>e others that may be learnt by ufe. They
have alfo their augmentatives for the feminine i af,
moHurina^ a great ftout woman s tQleir^m^ &c.

There are a great many nouns that appear^ by
their termination, to be augmentatives, though tbejT
are not ; as, forao^ a ferret ; ai^ffma^ an ait or a
borfe^mill, 8fc.

Of Dimmniivis.

^

The dimiuutives leflen the fignification- of their
primitives. .

The diminutives in the Portuguefe language are
always formed by changing the laft vowel of the
. primitives into inio ; but they denote either fmall*
ncfs of things, or kindnefs and flattery ; as bichinho,
a little worm, from^i^ii^, a worm ; cgsUu^nho, frorn
soitiJp, a poor Jittle man s btmitinhp a little pretty

C perfon

• t

Ig' PORTUGtJESE^

pMon or thing, from hnko, pretty. Sometimes
thejr are formed by adding zinho to the primitives ;
as caSzifthOf a little dog, from cao^ a dog, irmagzinAo,
dear little'brother, from irmaS, &c.

The diminutives that ferve for the feminine have
their termination in inAa^ or. zinka; as maozinhay
a little hand, from mcoy a hand ; tabednha, a little
head, from cabeca, a head. You may fee in the laft
example, that the diminutivals ferving for the femi-
nine and ending in hka, are formed by changing
the laft fyllable a of the primitive mto inha.

Oblerve" that many nouns appear to be diminu-
tives without being io ; as moinho, a mill ; tfpinha,
a fi(h-bone.

Note, the diminutives in Portuguefe convey fome-

times a bad meaning, and denote contempt.

. * •

Of Noum AdjeBive.

All adjectives ending in o make their feminine by
changing o into a\ as ddutay from dtnHo^ learned ;
but mhoy bad, makes ma in the feminine.

Thofe that end in ao have their feminine in aa ;
. z&yj&a^ from fao^ healthy ; lougaay from loiigaoy brifk,
^y, beautiful; meaa^ from i^/^Jo^ middling, ordi«
" nary. *

Thofe ending in e are common to both genders ;
as, firtey ftrong, &c.

Thofe that end in m ihake their feminine by add-
ing an a to the mafculiney z$. huma^ from Aum,
one; aiguma, from algum, fome, &c. and fometimes
by changing the m into a; as, commuay from com-
mum^ common ; boa, from bpmy good.

Thofe that end in i^ make their feminine by add-
ing a to the mafculine, as nudy from ««, naked ;
• nua^ from n», raw.

Thofe that end in ez are common to both gen-
ders ; as cortizy civil, kind ; capdz^ capable, &c. ex-
cept fome which make the feminine^ by adding a
, ♦ to

GRAMMAR. 19

to the mafculine; as, Franctza^ from Franciz^
French ; Partuguiza, from Portuguiz^ PoVtuguefe.

F^pankoij Spanifti^ makes Efpanhbla in the ferhi-
nine ; but generally thofe that end in /are common
to both genders ; ds, affdvel^ affable ; cmil^ cruel,
, &c.

Of the Cpmparifin of jidjeHwes.

The comparifon of. adjeftives is the way of in-
creafing their fignification by certain degrees, whicK ,
are three, viz. the politive, comparative and fuper-
lative.

The pofitive lays down the natural iignrfication
of the adjeftive ; as, nohrcy noble*; ^Snde, great.

The comparative raifes it'to a higher degree, by
comparing it to thp pofitive, which in Portuguete
is performed by the adverbs /w4^, more ; mSnos, lefs ;
as, m^ nobre^ more noble ^ minos hiila^ Idfs hand-
fome.

There arefome adjectives which do not admit ot
mhh or im^oj before them ; as celeftt^ nasctdo, compri^
. do^ dejmado^ &c.

There are four Porluguefe comparatives wlych
txA in nr : they may alfo be exprefled by mats,
more, before their pofitive 5 as.
Mayor y greater, mais gr&nde.
Menor, lefs, maispequino, ,

PeoTj worfe, fnais roim.
MelUr, better, mats b6m.

To which may be added fuperidr, fuperior j ««-
fer^y inferior; deteridr-, and feme others.

Obferve, that there ^can be no comparifon made
without the word than*, and that. this woird is ex-^
pre0edi in Portuguefe bv ([ue. Ex. Mais clbro que
fit, clearer than the um '; nUiis brdnco ^ue a neve,
more white than the fnow. The particle que is
fometimes preceded. by the word do. E:^. ifio he
m&is doqueiu Ike dije^ this U more than I told him ;

. C « he

20 ? O R T U G U E« E

hi mats prudbue do que pcsrece^ he is mofe wife than
it appears. ' .

N. B. The comparatives fnpetibr^ inferijk^ and
fome others, do not require que before the fecond
term but,»tlJ'? dative or the articles, viz. 4, ^9 ao,
aos: Examp. O 6urro he fuperidr a eje, the other 19
fuperior to this.

When the Portuguefe have a mind te heighten
their comparifons, thty make ufe of, mw/o mqfSf a
great deal or much more { as alfo of muito minos^ a
great deal, or much less. Ex. Cajar he inuiio mats '
efiimhdo que Pompio, Caefar is much more efteemed,
than Pompey ; Pompeo foi muiiG niinos feliz que C^-
far^ Pompey was much less happy than Caefar,

0/ the Superlative.

The Portuguefe fuperlative is formed from the .
noun adje£tive, by changing the^laft letter into
iffimo for the mafcuHne, and into ijjima for the femi*
pine: thus, from hello is formed hel/iffimo ^nd belts-
Jima^ moft handfome* But fometimes the fu{ier}a^
tive is formed' by adding muito ^ very, to the po^
tive ; a$, mutto iUo^ very tall.

Obferve that fome fupcrlatives are differenitly
formed ; zsyfrigidijfmo, from frio^ cold ; amicij^m&%
from amigOy friend ; aiUiqwJfimo^ from antigcl^ an-
cient ; capaajfimo, from capaz, capable ; noSUissimOy
from nobrey noble ; acerrimo, from ofre, (harp, or
acerb J riquksimo, froo) ricQ^ rich; fertilksimOy from
fertily fruitful 5 bonissimo^ from bdmy good; fidetis-
simoy from fiily tiithful ; Jacraiissiigio^ from fagr^^
iacred, &c.

The mofi is expreffed alfo in Portuguefe by miis
^l}4 a mats ; a^ the mod fair, dr faireft, mats beU
ig, a mats billa. But you muQ: phfer?^, that ther^
are fome adje^ives which do not admit of msi^Uo^
ver^,, maisy or 4 nutis ; as mdrtOy dijlerradoy &c.

Qbfcrve, that by changing the laft kU«f of tljie
foperlatives into amente, iuperlative ^verbs are

compofed ;

GRAMMAR.

21

cotnpofed ,• ^s, from doutijjimoy learned ; doutijjima^
minte^ moft learnedly, &c. But the pofitive adverbs
are formed by adding m^nte to the feminine of the
pofitive ; as, doutaminte^ learnedly, from dbuta^ the
femmine of 'dijtox) ; prudenteminte^ prudently, from
prudente^ prudent. '

Of Numeral Nouns 3 and firjl^ of CardhUiL
The cardinal nouns are fuch as exprefs the num-
ber qf thitigs^as,

Vinte e dius^ twenty tTVo
Vinte e tris^ &c.' cwehty-

three, G?r.

Htimy

Huitro,

Ctnco,

Sets^

Site,

Ouio or oiia^

Nave,

Dit,

Onzi,

Doze,

Treu,
iiatorzc^
,uin%e, '
^ezq/asj

Dexajetc,

Dezouto,

t>ezanive,

Vinie,

Vinte € him.

one
', two
three
four
five
fix
feven
eigbt
nine
■ ten
eleven
twelve
thirteen
fourteen
fifteen
fixteen
feventecn
eighteen
i^ineteen
twenty
twenty -one

Trinia,
\utirinta,
lincoenta,
Sejfenta,
Setenia,
Oitenia,
Noventa,
Cem,

Duzentos,
Trezintos,

Hous'.mil,

thirty
fprty

fifty

sixty

feventy

eijghty

ninety

a bttndrea

two hundred

three hundred

a tbdufaod

two'thoufand
Milhao^ or conto, a millic^
Hima dezina, half a^ fco^
Hiima duzia, a dozen

Hima vintina, a fcoi«

Diias vintinas, two Icore
Tris vintenas^ three fcore

Observe, that all the cardinslls that are adjective
Iipunr8,are no^ declined, being of the common gen-
der, except A«;», A»«^tf, one ; dous^ diias^ two; and
ftofe compofed of chitOy a hundred ; as, duzinioTy
iuzhtas, two hundred ; qudtro cintos, qu&fto dntaiy
four hutl'dred, &C. and when the reminihe kuma is
preceded by a, and followed by a o&ira, then hhna

\ \ ngnifies^r^, «nd & dutfa^ Jecondly.

'' The ][)lural, hins^ h^mas, is taken fometitnes in-
AtBd of algiinSj algimas, fignifying forae ; as iuns

1. rg^/f fome kings ; Mmas rainAas, fome queens.

C S ^,\i

\

22 P O R T U G U.ES E

N. B. Cinto lofes to before a noun, either mafcu-
line or feminine, and the n is changed into /»; there-
fore you muft fay, tern fold&dos^ not cento foldados.
^It only retains to and n when it is followed by ano-
ther number, as cinio e ki^f&cc. a hundred and one,
&c. and when it is fubftantive.

N. B. Sometimes c^to is made a fubftantive; as
ium cfyitpde cafl&nhas^ one hundred of chefnuts ; and
fo all the cardinal numbers, when preceded by an
article, or by another noun of number, as o cinco
de paos, the five of clubs ; humfite^ a feven^

The* cardinal number is renderedioto Engliih
by the ordinal, when it eXpreffes the day of the
month, or the date of any act ; as, cheg6u a qu&tro
de Mayo, he Arrived the fourth day of May.

«

Ofdinal Nouns. /

s.

Ordinal nouns are fuch as exprefs the order of
things s as.

Primeiro,
SegHnda^
TtrceirOf
ludrto^
^uinto^
\£xt0^
Setimo,
Oitdva^
Nono^
Dicime^

firft

fecdnd

third

fourth

fifth

fixth

fevcuth

eighth

ninth

tenth

C/it^(frm^,or^»2e/i^,e1event^
Duodecimo^ twelfth

DtcimO'tercio^ thirteenth
Dtcimo-qudrto^ fourteenth
Dicimo-qiunto, fifteenth
'DicimO'Sexio, fi xteenth

DicimO'SeptimOy feventeenth

Dccimo* oitdvOf eighteenth
Decimo-nonOf nineteenth
Vigefimo^ or vtntifvmo^ twcn-

[tieth
Vigifimo-primeirot one and

twentieth
Trigejimo, thirtieth

Quadragifimo^ or quarentc-
Jmo, fortieth

Quinquagefima^ fiftieth

SexagefimOy fixtieth

Septuagifimq^ feventteth
Octagtfimo^
lionagefimOt
Ceritefimo^ the hundredth
Milufimo^ the thoufandth
U'Jtimo, . the faft

eightieth
ninetieth

' The propoftionable ,n umbers are, simp/iz^ dup/f-
iado or dobr&do^ triplichdo or triplice or trefdobrado,
fuadruplicado or quadruple, dntutlo ; a fingle, double,
threefold, fourfold^ a hundredfold. ^

The

' GRAMMA R. : " «$'

The diftributive nouns are^ hfmhlmm^ one by
one y dims h dous^ two by two.

Id EngUfh a]) ordinal numbers may be formed
into adverbs ; but in Portuguefe they have only
frvmwramiMUy and JecutidariamerUCy or fepmianamb^
Uy firft, secondly ; and to exprefe thirdly, fourthly,
&c. they (ay, em tercihrdlugar^ em quarto lugar^ in the
third place, in the fourth place.

A mihod (for thoje who underjiand French) to learn m
great many rortnguefe words in ajhort time.

We muft obferve, that the French fyUable cha is
generally exprefled in Portuguefe by ca^ rejeding
the k. ]^xamp. CharboHy charite, chajleti^ chqpbn^
• chapHle^ chafitre^ &c. the Portuguefe fay, carvaS^
caridade, cq/fidade, capag, capel/a, capltuloy &c. Ob-
ferve alfo the following rules.

French words ending in ance^ or eHCi\ as, con-
fiance^' vigilance^ clemence^ prudence^ &c. in Portu-
guefe end in dncia or inctd\ as conjidncia^ vigildncia^
^lem^ncia^prudSncid, &c.

Jigfu makes dnha-y montagne, montanha-^ cam-
pagne, campdnha.

It makes ia ; con^iedie, comidia. Here you lean
the accent upon the e, and not upon the /, as in .
French'; poefie,^o«/i.

QiW makes (9m; g\o\XQy gloria i yi&oire, viSioria.

Ure makes ura-, impollure, impojlura-y figure,
jigUra.^

Ifon makes %ao ; raifon, razaH^ ; prifon, prized.

0« makes tfS; charbon, r^iri^^S ; hzron, bara?<
; Ulier makes uldr : regulier, regular^, particulicr,,
particul&r.

. V tench Terminations ending in J^muguefe in e.

jlntjdnte; Y\gihnt» vigilante *, ^mzutj amante.
Ent, adjeSiive, ^«/^; prudent, prud^nte\ diligent,
diliginte. - m^

V-

e

f# P It T UO U ES^

iiralidide.

f tench TermttMtioHs ending in Poriuguefe in vel.

Freneh Terminations ending in Portugueji in tz.

Oisj names of nation^ ez -, Francois, F^^andt %
Anglois, Ingliz.

French Terminations ending ht Portuguefe in o.

' Ain^ and />», names of nations, dno% Romain,
jLomdno : \t7X\^r\^ ItaUdno \ Napolitain, Napolituno.
Aire^&rio: falairc,yii/4rw ; temeraire, /m^rir/b.
EaUy eoi chapeau ; chapeo.
Mntf fubftantive, into; facrement, facramento.
' EuXy 6fo ; g€tiert\xxl gefierd/o ; gracieux, graciofoi
' Jfji^o; z&lfy aSivo, p^ifify paffivo.
C, CO; pore, pdrco ; Turc, Turco.

French Terminations ending in Portuguefe^ in or.

Eur, or 5 terreur, terror ; humeur, humdr ; chaleur^
cal6r.

Change of Terminations^of the Verbs' and Participles.

£r, in the infinitive mood of the firft conjugation,
makes &r j aimer, amar; chanter, cantdr^

Ir makes /r, in the infinitive mood: as, part ir,
partir; (cniiTyfentrr.

Oir makes^ ir in the infinitive mood ^ as, concevoir^
conceb6r.

The participles in ^ make ado; aime, amhdo ^
pzrMjfaUido.

The participles in / make ido; dorm:, dormido}
menti, mentido.

The participles in u make do^ zs,jConfMy concebido,
entendu, eniendido^ %cc.

There are a great manjr Portuguefe words that
htvene manner of analogy with the French, which
pre ve4|~ thefe rules from being general.

GRAMMAR. 25

CHAP. III.

Of Pronouns,

17HE pronouns are perfonal, conjunftive, mixed^
- poutive, demonftrative, interrogative, relative^
or improper. ,

Of perfonat Pronouns » .

The pronouns perfonal are iu and «wfor the firft
perfon ; they (erve for the mafculine and the' femi-
nine.

Tu and "dos for the fecond \ thefe ferve alfo for
the mafculine and feminine.
• Blle^ for the third perfon of the mafbuline gender)
and ^//?j in the pluraL . ' >

Ella^ for the third perfon of the feminine gender^
makes in the plural Silas.

Thj? pronouns perfohal are declined with the arti'
cle indefinite^ ^5 €1, ^,V<(r.

The Decltnjion of perJhnaiPrmouns.

Firft Perfon,

t

Sii^lar Number.. Plural Number^

Nora. •£», I. Noni. Jtat, we.

Geo. de mim^ of me. Gen. de nos, of us. '

Ddt* * & fniin, to me. Dat. a n$s^ or ncSi. us.

Ace. a mm, me. 'Ace. a nos^ us.

Abl. de mim^ or p§r mim, Abl. de. nis^ or por nos,
from cr by me. from or by us.

fFiii me is rendered by comigo ; and fometimes

. they add the pronoun piefmo to it ; me is exprefTed

by me in the Portuguefe ; as fpeak to tucy^falldi'me^y

tcU me, diziUme : lend me, mandaume ; write to me,

irfopevii^mei eUe diJje^mej\\Q told me, &c.

fF/lfA ifj is rendered in Portuguefe by €om nofco.

r Vs

26 ..PORTUGUESE

V

Vs is rendered by nos. Examp. tclf us, dizei-nos ;
give us, ddi-nos j (how us, mojirai-nos ; ^i/^ dlffe-nos^
he told us, &c. In'thefe examples us is not a pro-
noun perfonal, but coojunftive, as you will fee
hereafter.

Second Perfon.
Singular. ^ Plural. -

r{om, /tt, thou, Nona, vis^yc ^r you.

Gen. de ti^ of thee. Gen. de vos^ or vos^ yo«.

Dat. a ti^ or te, to thee. Dat. a Vos^ pr x/^j, you.

Ace. a Hf or U^ thcc. Ace. a vos^ or voSy you.

Abl. 4/e /t, or ^(?r //, from Abl. devis^or per vSs^ horn
' orhy thee. ^r by you.

fVifh thee \s rtti^txt^^y corhtigoy and fometimes
they add to it the pronoun mifmo. You, or yourjelfy
after imperatives are rendered by vos^ aiid not vos ;
as, be you contented, conierUai-vos i (howyourfelf,
mofir&Uws\ hide yourfelf, efcondei-vos.

Thee or thyfelf^ are expreffed after vpperatives by
te ; as mbfiraie^ (how thyfelf.

Wkh yw is rendered in Portuguefe by com v6fco.

Third Perfon. For the Mafculine.

Stngolar. * Plural.

Nom. elU^ he, or it. * Nom. elUs^ they.

Gen. <////^, of him,<?r of it. Gen/ deiUst ot them.

Dat. ^ ///<f, to bim, or to it. Dat. a tlUs^ to them.

A£C. a ilU^ hira, ^r it. Ace. a iiles^ thero»

Abl. ^dillc Of por clle^ icQOi Abl. delics or porcU^s^ from
^rbyhim^rit. % ^r by them.

Th^ Portuguefe have no partlculai; pronoun,- as
our. it, for thingii that are inanimate.

Ren[)ember that the pronoun him^ or to him, when
joined to a verb, id always rendered in Portuguefe,
by /he, and fhem, or to them, by Ihes. .

fVith him is rendered in Portuguese fometinaes by
com Hie, and fometimes by comjigo, to which they add
the pronoun mtjmo.

Third
8

GRAMMAR. 37

Third PeribiK FeminiDe.

Singular. PlOral.

Nom. iUa^ file or it. Nom. illas^ they.

GcB. JtUa^ of her or of it. Greo. dillas^ ot thenu
Dat. a illa^ to her or to it. Dau a, eltas^ to thdm«
Ace. a ///a« her ^r it. Ace. a cllas^ thecn.

AbL dilla. Of poreila^irom ^hh dillas or ^^r f/ik5,
<ir by her or it. from ^r by them.

Remember that . the pronoun her or to her^ when
joined to a verb, is always renderd in Portuguefe
by Ihe; and themy or to them, by Ihes ; as you will fee
in the pronouns conjunctive.

fVith her is rendered in Portuguefe by com ilia or
comfigo.

Of the Pronoun if, himfelf, or oneV felf.

There is another pronoun perfonal that-ferves
indifferently for the mafculine and feminine : this is
^, one's felt. It has no nominative.

Gen. deji^ of one's felf, himfelf, or herfelf.

Dat. aji^ tobne*s felf, 0c.

Ace. ajiy one's felf, 0c.

Abl. dcji^ porji^ from or by one's felf.

It is joined with the pronoun mSfmo or mif-
i»^ ; as de oV por Ji mefmo^ by himfelf ; porji mifina^
or defi tnifma'i by herfelf ; o hbmem ntfi Ayin femfi 4
^ m(fmo^ man loves himfelf only ; quem nao hi b6m
fent0 para Ji, nao he bem que viva, who minds no
body but hiihfclf only-, don't defervc to live ; q vicio
he abominavel de Ji mijmo, vice is hateful of itfelf ;
a terra defi^ or deji mejma^ he fertile the earth is fruit-
ful of itfelf.

^ Ohferve that they join alfo the pronoun mSfmo to
pronouns pcrfonaj, as the French do with their pro-
nounmeme,y]z.

^

i

/ •

as P OR T U G U E S E

Ed. mismo^ myfelf, nis mismos^ ourfelves. . ^

Tu mesmo^ thyielf« zfis me^mos^ yourfelvcs. ^

Elle mesmo^ himfelf. ilUs miimos \ ^i I %

Ella misma, herfelf. tllas^ mismasf thcmlelve^.

kimtm mesmo^ man himfelf ;^a mesma virtide^ \ixfM€ itfelf.

. ift. Obfefve, that mSfmo with the article is alfa
an adjeftive, fignifying the fame \ thus o m/fmo, ar
mifmay os mS^mos^ as ^S/mas, the fame, relating £6
fbme nouns exprefled or underffood.

2dly. Note, That they alfo join the adje£live 6u^
t¥o. Other, to the plural of the pronouns perfonal,
/and fkou ^ fo they fay, nos diftros, we ; vos dusros,
yott.

3dly. Comsip may be rendered in Englifli (as* we
harvfc laid above) by with him and with her •^ biit you
muft obferve, that it may be rendered nlfo by w$k
thm in the plural; and fomerimes by about him,
about her or about them. Exam. Elh or eila, nUnca
tf&z iinheii'o comsigo, he, or Ihe, never, haa mdhey
ai)out him, or about her.

Of conjunctive Pronouns.

The pronouns conjunctive are fo called, becaufe
they always come immediately befor-e or aftcir the
verb that governs them.

' The pronouns conjunctive bear a great refem-
blftiice to the pronouns perfonal ^ the pronouns per-
fonifl arc, .

£ 4^ I; /tt^hou; «7/tf, he; nis^ytt; vos, ye; elUs, they.

There are ieven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me^
tp me, or me : /«, tcr thee, or thee; fe^ to himfelf,
or himfelf, to herfelf, or herfelf; Ihe to him, or him,
to her, or her ; nos^ to tis, ^r us ; voSf to you, or you ,
Ihesy to them, or them.

Example.

,LSo me agrada, this pleafes me ; hi-me mcejfario^ I wanu
7}eos tevij God fees thee.
Ella se louva, ihe praife3 herfelf.
^ Eu

GRAMMAR. 99

. Eu Ikedireit I will tell him, or I will tell her. .

Eu Ikes promeHiy I promifed them : as well for the niaC.
culine as the feminine.

■

The pronouo conjunctive, Ihe^ is always put after *
the verb, when it is in the imperative mood ; as
dizSi'lke, tell him j cort&i4he as SzaSy cut his wings ;
but when the verb is in fotne other mood, it majr
be put either before or after it^ ^s i/le the cQrtdu, or
: ille cort6u4ke acabiga^ h^ has cut off his head. The
fame obfervation takes place in the other pronouns
conianfiiye.

The pronoun conjunftive, /<?, is fometinies fol-
lowed by me^ Ihe^ &;c. as offeyec^fe mty it is offered
to me i reprefentou^fi Ihe^ it was reprefented to \(\m^
&c.

iff. Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are
very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed
by the verb Aifv^. Examp. Darlhe hSitdnta^ptm-
chda^ or h the hit de dor tdnta panc&da, que^ &c. ' I
will cudgel him fo much, that^^ &c.

2dly. Lhe is fometimes rendered in Englifh hy
you. Examp. Que lhe pare ce aquil/o ? What do you .
think of that ? ajhia no que the digo, be perfuaded,
or believe what 1 tell you.

0/ Pr^noims mixed.

There are fome pronouns^ in Portuguefe which
are compofed of the pronouns perfonal aiid con-
jun6live, and which therefore are dallcd mixed.

To clear up this matter, you muft expr^fs them
as underneath, changing the letter e of the pronoun
' conjunflive into c> for the mafculine, and a for the
feminine ; as to fay, to me of tt^ ioftead of me o, or
me a, you muft fay, mc or ma- in the like ngianner,
inftead of lhe q or lhe a you^ muft fay, Iho or Iha^ &c.
as yjQu may pbferve in the following pronopni mix-
ed, or rat her contracted.

' ' . mo^

y

so P b RTU G U E S E

me of it, ftheeofit

mo, m. < ^ td < or .

or him to m<i. Xj^o^ him to thee*

me of it. fthee of it

or ta < pr

or her to me. \jx. or her. to- thee,

me of then)» ' * ^ , f thee of them •

them to cie ^^.'* (^them to thee.

s^lo, m,Vit to bimfelf, to herfelf, rr to themfelves.
sila^ f. /it to herfelf, to himfelf, gr to themfelves.
j^foj,m-1 them to himfelf, to herfelf, or to themfelves.
^lai, f- J them to herfelf, to himfelf, or to themfelves.

{to him, or to her of it
or
it to him, or to her.
{to him, qr to her of it
or
it to him, or to her.
Ikos^m. 1 to them of it, to ^im of them, or to her of them.
lias, U^ J to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them.
nolo, m. 1 us of it, or it to us.
nola,L /us of it, (>r it to us. ^

nolos, ro. p. \them to us.
nolas, f. p. /them to us.

jyW-^ you havefome examples.

Pdra ddr-lho, to giv^ it to him or to her.
Ddf-mo, give it me.

£u to dareiyVW give it you." »'

Entrego-to, I deliver it to you.
Dize-iho, vou tell it him, or her. ,

. EniriM'fhos, deliver them to him, or to her.
Ld seto haja, leave that to himfelf.
File nolo aisse, he told us of it.
Eu volos mandarii. Til fend to you.

If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns
mixed may be put either before or after the verbs ;
as, pAta dizirmOf or para mo dizSr, to tell me it;
but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns

mi^ed

GRAMMAR. 31

mixed muft be tranfpofed ; as» dizindomo^ and
not mo dizindo, in telling me it.'

Yjoix muft make ufe of thefe pronouns, both mas-
culine and feminine, according to the gender of the
thing named, fent^ or delivered, and not of the per-
fon to whom the thing is faid, fent, given, &c.

Of poffeffive Pronouns.

Pronouns poffeffive, fo called, becaufe they denote
that the thing fpoken of belongs to the perfon or
thing they are connected with, are of two forts, ab«
iblute and relative. See the remarks hereafter.

Th^ Englilh have no article rn the nominative
Before the pronouns poffeffive ; but the Portuguefe
have, as, my, o miu, a minha, fern.' Plur. os mius^ as
m/nAas, fern.

The pronouns poffeffive in Portuguefe a>e the
following: • *

Sing. meUf m. minha^ U \^^

Plur. mf f^i, m. mtnhas^ f- J ^'

Sing, teu^ m. tHa, f. \ ,

Plur. 4eys, m. tHas, f. / ^^^^

Sing. j^K, m. \ f .

•Dt ^ - > his ^r us«

Siog. nossOy m. nossoi, f,

Plur. nissos^ in. nissas^ (.

Sing, vosto^ m. vossa^ f.

Plur. vissos^ m. vossas^ f. J X^"^'

The pronouns poffeffive are declined with the
definite article o for the mafculin^, and a for the fe-
minine.

Example,

Singular.

T^om. o meu Ihfro^ my book. .

Gen. do mtu livro^ of my book.

pfti« aa fneu livro^ to my book.
'Acc« meu tivrOt my book.

AbL d0 ou feUfi meu tivrP. from <?r by my book.

Plural

our.

n PORTUGUESE

Plural,

Noin» OS mti^s Hvtos^ my books* ^
. Gjcm. dos mius livros, of my books*
■ Dat. aos mens livros, to my bool^i.
Abl. dosoMpellos meus Uvros^lrom <7r by my books/

Decline all the other mafculincs after the fame
inanner, and their feminines by the article^; as'
my houfe ; a mSnha cafii ; of my houfe, du minha

, Note, you rauft not life the definite article when
the pronouns poffeffive precede nouns of quality, as
well a^ thofe of kindred, but the indefinite artick
de, a, &c.

Example.

Vo^a magejlade^ your majefly.

Dt vojfa magejtade^ of your, majelly, &c.

Af/w ;&tfy, my father.

De miu pay^ of my father, &c. '

From the above examples it appears that nouns
declined by the indefinite article have pp article in
the nominativ^.

Though the definite article is fometimcs ufed be-
fpre nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to ufe it,
according to the old proYcrb: /» vivenda bonos^Jcru
bendo fequare peritQS.

Seu is fonjetinies made ufe of in rooni ofvSffo and '
vojffa, in the polite way of fpeaking : fo they fay,
tSnAo feu livro^ I have your book: fallei ao fiu
criado, 1 fpoke to your f^rvant ; osfius olhos fai for-^
mSJos^ your eyes are handfonie. '

Remarks upon the PoJ^eJ^ves.

The pronouns pofleflivc abfolute ahvayscome be-
fore the noun they belopf to. We have expr^ffed
them above.

' Pronouns

GRAMMAR. SS

Tronouns pofleffive relative are fo called becaufe
they not being joined to their fubftantive, fuppofe
it either expreffed before^ or underftood^ and are
related to it. They are the following :

Mafc.
Sing. Mim^ nanha^
Plor. Mtus^ minkas^

mint.

}

Sing. 5fii, fua^ hers*
Plur. iS/nj, ftHas^ theirs.

Sing. Niifo, niffa, \

ours.

Plur. Nbfos, nSfa

Sing. V0^o, vS/a. \

To exprefs in Portuguefe // is. mine, ii is thine^
&c. we muil fay he men, he teu, &c.

The pronouns pofleflive abfolute do not agree, in
Portuguefe, in gender with the noun of the poflef-
for, as in Englim, but with that of the thing pof-
feiTed s as, ^ mai ama a Jeu filhoy the mother loves
her fon ; o p6i dma a fHa filha^ the father loves his
daughter. So you fee that the pronoun mafculine
feuy in. Portuguefe is fometimes rendered by her in
£ngli(h, and the feminine^ by his.

The ^ fame obfervation is to be made upon the
poffeffives relative/ according to the gender of the '
noun that is underftood ; therefore thev fay of a
hat, (for inftance) belonging to a lady, \he o flu^ it
i^ hersj becaufe the noun underftood, viz. chapio^
hat, is of the m&fculine gender.

We have already faid, that fh$y znd/Aa^ are fome-
times rendered into £ngli(h by your^ when they are
abfolute : but you muft alfo obferve, that they are
fometimes rendered into Englifh by yours, when
^y are pronouns relative, and that in the polite
way of fpeaking ; and fo they fay, fpeaking of any
thing belonging to a gentleman or lady, he o/iu, or

V

34 PORtUGUESE

he a J&a, it is ycur3 ; but if the gentleman or kdy
are not prefent^ or if. they do not fpeak direfllyto
then)} though prefent^ thfen the pronouns Jhi and
jtia muft be rendered into Englifti oy his or hers.

Note, That the pronovins pofleffive abfolute, in
Portuguefe, agree alfo in number with the riovin of
the thing poSeflfed ; hence it is that ^hey fay aj&a
hijloridy its hiftorf, fpeaking of a kingdom, province,
&c. or, his hiftory, fpeaking of any hiftory corar
pofed by a man ; or, her hiftory, {|)enking of that
written by a woman ; or, their hiftory, fpeaking of
W^^t written by feveral hands, or of fev^ral people.
And from this example you may learn, that the Por-
""tugucfe have no particular pronoui;i pofleffive for
things that are inanimate, as vfre have the pronoun
iis, Htnce at laft it followsj that when the Portu-
guefe pofleffives fin and ^a are relative, they are
rendered into Englifti by his, GT ierSy at i heirs , ac-
cording to the gender arul numl)er of the noun of
the poflfeffor that i^ underftood.

You muft alfo obferve> that they fometimes add
the third pronoun personal, d^iUy of hitn, dii/es, of
them) d^i/a^ of her, dei/as^ of them ; to denote morb
plainly whofe thing it is they fpeak of 5 as /6n /i*
vro dalles y their book 5 as, mf&as pslMjrtn Jffla^ hdr
W6rds> &c*

Note, that the pofleffives abfolute are left oift
when they are preceded by a verb> or by a j>ronoun
conjunftive, which fufficiewly denote whofe thing
it « they fpeak of; the Portuguefe being then con-
tented with the article : as d6v(hlhe a vida, I owe
my life to hlrtif or to it -, dSe^me a barrigay my belly
/ Bches%

When the pronouns pofleffive abfolute are before
*pouns of differeflt gertders in the fame fentence, and
ai^ith which they are grammaticaUy tonftrued, they
<iught to be repeated j as, Jiu pile Jia mSi, his fa-
ther and mother: not fhf pUe mat.

Moreover,

GRAMMAR, '35

Mowpv^r* the Portqgqese usf the pr<>nQqn pos-
sessive absolute in the following case, when we 14^5
the possessive relative; a friend of mine, hum dos
miusamigos. '

The possessives minha^ tua^ sua^ nossay yossa^ may
be alfo relative, but with 9 different meaning. Ex-
amples; Levarii a minka avdntc^ I will insist upon
it, f rvJlJ obtain it 5 ^//<? levara a sia av^^, h« mU
insist upon it, he will do it; /^v4i (f vassa dvanie^
goon with your rcfolutipn ; fazSr das fias^ to play
tricks,, to dodge.

Or miuSj os sius^ Sec, signify my -relations, or
my &lec)ds, thynelations, or thy friends; *s, os s^us
nan -0 au^remy his parents or rdations dp not like ,
Jlill)} dfixa-Q hir com os s^us, l^t him go with his
people, his couofrymen, &c.

Tak$ notice, that when the pfotioun possessive is
' accompanied hy a pronoun demonstrative, they
do fjqt, put t^ie article in the nominative ; tb^y
do nat fiay fsff mh livro, but ^ste mh //Vro, this
.book of mind. But in all other case^ they make
use of th^ iodefi^ite article ; as ZT hie or deste vbsso

Of the Pronouns demonstrative^

They are called pronouns derponstr^tive, because
tliey' serve to point out oi' demonstrate any thing or
•person^ as, this book, iste Ihro; that imn, aqueUi
iofifetf^.

TPiere w^ tbrjee principal demonstratives in Por-
tuguej^^ viz. isU, this j 6^<?, that ; aquilhy that ; but
X>Wcf»rje thgt iSf/i^ shews the thing pr.perspn that is •
just near gr by us ; e^j^shevvs the thing that is a little
fartljier, or near the perfon; and aqu^Ue %htyjs vf\\?Lt
i? wry distant from the perfon who speaks, or is
spoken of, and is eKpres$ed in £ngli3h by that ther^y
or yonder. You must also observe, that isse, essa^ is
Uft^ in writing to any person to express the place or
town whereia he dwells ; as tMofallado nessa cidade

D 2 cQm

i

S6

PORT U G U E S E

commuiios tfw/jf^j, I have fpoken in your city with
many friends. ,

These Pronouns are declined thus:

Mafc. Fem.

rNotn. 5^^ eft a,

I G^n. deftc^ iijia^

Singular* <. Dat. aifit^ ^i^^>

I Ace. iftt^ iftai

lAbl. diftc, dijta,

rNom. iftes^
J Gen. defteSi
PluraU < Dat. a ijles^
I Ace. eftes^
» LAbl. defies^

Mafc.

J Gen. aeffe^
Singalar., < Dat. a $Jft^
I Ace. iji

Law. %ir,

, j Gen. .dijfts^ dijfas^ .

' PluraU < Dat. ae/fes^ aijfas^

j Ace. iffts^ i^s^

LAbl. di/fcs^ deJfaSf

Mafc.

Neut.

ifto.
dtfto.

a ifto^

iftOr

difto.
No Neut.

this,
of this.
to this.
thi«.
irom'thif.

thefe*
of thefc.
to thefe.
thefe.
from thefe

that or \U
of that &C.
to that,
that. .
from that*

thofe. ^
ol thofe«
to thofe,
thofe.
from thofe

Neut.

Fern.

{Norn, aquille^ aquilla^ aquillo^ that.
Gen. daquilU^ daquilla^ daquillo^ of that. ^
Dat. daquillt^ a aquilla^ a aquillo^ to that.
Ace. aquilU^ aquilla^ aquilb^ that.
Abl. daqueile^ daquclla^ daquillOf from that.

^ No Neut.

r^om. aquelles, aquetlas, thofe.

j Gen. daquSlUSf daquilUs, i»f thofe.

< Dat. aaquelles^aaquillas^ , to thofe.
I Ace. aquelleSf aquellas^ thofe.

(.Abl. daquclleSt daqueilas, from thofe

Plttrak

\ -

Y<m

GRAMMAR. S7

YoQ miift ohSerre, that there is an difion of the
vowel of the indefinite article in the genitive and
abhtiTe of the pronouns ^e and (ffi^ both in the
fiogular and. plural ; and that the^ write and pro«
noonce difie^ defias^ &c. inftead ox^de ifit^ dc efims ;
and fo in the neuter they write diffo^ difio^ inftead of
de iffk^ de jfi0. Tiie fame obfervation jou muft make
upon the pronoun oijpitlte^ wherein you will fee
>another elifion befides, . in the dative cafe. ,

Note, Hiat both the Portuguefe and Spaniards
have demonftratives of the neuter geiider ; though
tbey do not sigi'cc with the fuhftantives as in Latuit
becaufe they do not fay ifio homem^ but ^e homem^
this man. But the word cfmfa^ thing, is aJways un-
derftood,, though the neuter denonftrative does not
agree with it ; fo that \t is the fame thing to lay
ifto^ or ^a cfnufa^ this thing ; ijjo^ or i£a c^a^ that
thing, &c. Example, Iffb he ot ejfa he a cCufa de
«# mbs eftdmos falldndo^ that is the thing we are
ipeaking, of; aquillo he or aquilla he a cdmfa que vos
dev&sfazfyr^ that is the thing you muft do, &c.

When the prepofition em^ in, comes before the
pTonounis demonftrative, they make an elifion of the
vowel of it, add change the confonant m into n ;
and fo, inftead of writing and pronouncing m ^Jle,
em efta, em ijlo, em /Jo, em aqwi/o, they write and
' pronounce nifte, nefta, nrjio, niJsOf&LC. in this, in that,
&c.

The words dutro^ Aulra, are often joined to the
pronouns demonftrative, taking off tne laft ^•. as
^6iUro, efs6titro^ aqueJl6utrq. Example ; EftSutro hS-
iffii»», this other man; eftiutra molhir, this other
woman ; efs&utro hbmem^ that other man.

They alio join very often the pronoun mifmo^ the
' fime, to the demoiiftrative ^ as ^Jle mifmo homem,
this very same .man ; aqui//o mi/ma, ^tbat very fame
thing.

Aqtti, idi, and /i, are ibmetimes added to the de*
monftrative, sor on the noun that comes after it^ in

H P d R t U G U E S E

order to fpecify and pirtieularize it ftlll more i as
^5/1? hofkim aqu/, lhi§ rtiari ; aquelia ntdket la^ that
woman : aqui^ denoting a tteafj or prefefil objeEl \
and /ii, a diftant and abfent 6h6.

The prbinouns, aqu^Iley aqueila. A^tilis^ aquiUax^
when they relate to perfons, atid aiie tt>lloWe<i by the
Relative que, are f^ndered into finglirti by iit ww^ or
hi tMt, sh, wh or ihat^ they who ot thdl ; as aqu&ltt

Jue drnaa virtude he ftliz^ he who lovcS virttife i^ '
t&ppy ; aqu&les que desprezao a t^itncia H^o tdnhhem
t) vdlSr delta, thby Who defpife leatfiittg know ttCt
the Value ^ of it/ Yoa mud obfet^, thai whin
#^/A?, aquelld, &c;/ ate preceded by hte^ hta^ &ti.
thfeA ^j/)? fignifies the laft tM^g 6r perfon fpokert of,
iLXX'draqueUey fee. the firft; as CMos fU ^&nde^ />-i?A-
Hro ambietSsOy isle i/alentCy aquHlle poderdfo^ Charles
wais great, Frederic ambitious, the fil-ft poWeif\3il,
the hft coiitageou«.

The pronoun poffeffive ibr^latte A/I5 i^r, /*^,
tbnfttutd in Englini With a tiblin follow^ by thte
pronoun nelaiiint who 6\ that bbforfe a v^irb> is Aia4e
hito PoVtugUfeffe by the genitive nf th^ pr^tt^uns
'Oqu^Ue, aquilla, afStei^ followed by pe, ^attd the
pbffeflive is Jeft out j aS> all men blatfte his matttieTs
who often fays that, which hittfeff do^s fiot think,
tddo mindo cens^a procedimento da^ft^e ^e i^efm f9r
^Mtne dizdr que nao tern no pensakSmO % Pro vMewce
does not profper their labours that flight their . bftft
frf e-rtds, n Provideficia nod ai^nc66 d trMAlkd ddquMes
ijue desprSzcA'os fSus methSres onAgds.

The Englilh pirmoun such followed ^ astif timt
(biHt not governed of the verb fuftafitivfe h be}i is
alfo rendered irtto Porlugufefe by ^qnti/ks que^ or
tqudfks tifs que^ bx aqnelie que 1 asv fuch as do not
love virtue do not khOW iX^'aquillei ottitfui/Zts tdes
que nai dma^ a %/iffiidf, frag a coHh^ifm.

The pronouns issOy isto^ aquillo^ before jw, are
Engliihed by tJohetts as etle ^ik iiqfuU/d ^e.Jaitt, he
fe/is what ht ktioVrft. i

Aquille

GRAMMAR. Sf

Aqu^Ue vs a]fo ufed to (hew contempt ; as que quir

xqutiU

Of the Prmiouns hacrrogiUive.

The pronouns interrogative ferve to alk queftions,

and are ^Sl follows; wha> what, which, quern,
^^gual.

■

Example.

• •

\uem he? who is it ?

|irrt» vas dyTt ijfo ? . who told yon fo ?

\ue qurreisr wbat wiH you have f

Com qutje/uftinta ? what does he Baffstrai him«

^ felf with ?

Qjue ejldisfa%indaf what are yov doing ?

De queftfazjjlo ? from what is this done ?

^jBLt livro ht tft€ ? what book is this P

tujgScufj tendes ? what affairs have you ?

\Me fiua he? what houfe is it ?

)e qualf allots vis f which do you fpeak of ?

^ualdelUsf which of them ?

\vemor quatios iSus9 which or whether of the

two ?

Thefe pronouns are thus declined.

SinrfeUr imd Fhirai Siofular and Plusal.

Maf^ine and Fcininiae. l^afculiAe and Femjnine*

NflHD. quicm^ who. Nora, que^ what.

Gen. dt quem^ of whom. Gen. i/e qut^ of what.

I3at. a quem^ to whom. Dat. a que. to what.

Ace. , plenty whom. Ace. que<^ what. ^

AW- tk quern, from whom. AbU de que^ from what.

Qudl is ufed in fpeaking both of perfon^ and
things^ and is declined thus: ""

Singular. Mafcflfline and feminine.
Nom. qual. which or what.
Gen. de qumL, «af which sr what*
Dat; u f«^4 to which cr what. ^

Ace. quaL. which or what.
AfaL de quaii from which ^r ^h91^ \
. , D 4 Plural.

40 P O R T U G UE S E

PluraU MafcuUne and Eeminine.

Norn* fudes^ which or what.

G^n. de quSes^ of which or what*

Dat. a qudes^ to which ^r what.

Ace. quaes ^ which ^rwhat.

Abl. de qudes^ from which (?r what.

Obferve, that when the word quer is added to
quemy or qual, it quite alters the meaning.; quemquer
fignifying whoever, or any pcrfon, and qualquer
any one, whether man, woman, or thing ; and
fometimes they add the participle que to them, as
ifuemquir que^ &c.

Of the Pronoum relative.

Pronouns relative are thofe which (hew the rela-
* tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows
it. They are the following ; qualy which ; que^ that
or which 3 cujoy whofe^-.^^^^w, who.

Qualy iii'a fenfe of comparifon, is followed by tal,
and then qual is Engliffaed by as^ an4 tal by of.

N- B.^ When qual is only a relative, it is declined
with the deffnitiel articles $ or a.

The pronoun que may be relative both "to. per fons
and things, and is common to all numbers, gen-
ders, and cafes; as o livro quey the book which ^
OS Ihros que, the books which ; a carta que, the let*
ter which ; as cirtas que, the letters which ; o mefirc
que enftna, the' n^after who teacheth ; a tnolhSr pte
iinio, the wife that I have ; o honiem que iu mo^ the
man whom I love ; and it is declined thus :

Singular and Plural.

Nom. quCf. • which or who;

Gen. de que^ of which or of whom.

Dat. a que, to which or to whom.

Ace. que, which ^rwhonu

AbK de que, from which or from wboflu

r

Que

G R A M M A R. ^M

Que 18 (btnetimes a conjun£lion ; as cfiyo que Ur&^
I believe that I fhall ga. See the Syntax.

The relative queniy who, is only relative 16 per-
fons ; but in the nominative cafe of the fingolar is
rendered into Englifh by he whoj or whp-^ zsy ptem
fUla'divi confider&Tj &c. he who fpa^KS ought to
confidcr^ &c. iu na$ sH quemy I know not who. '

Obferve, that quern is common to all numbers,
genders^ and cafes s but it has no nombative in the
plural.

Qir^/0 is declined thus :

, Singular and Plural.
Kom. quem^ he who, or (he who, or whoever.
Gep. de quem^ of whom.
Dat. a quem^ to whom.
Ace. quem^ whom.
Abl. de quern, from whom.

Quern is fometimes a particle disjunctive^ and then
it (ignifiesy^f;?^; as^ quern cdnia. e quern ri, fome fing,
and fome laugh ; and fometimes it ferves to excla-
mation ; as quem me dira eji&r em eafa ! How fain
wou^ld I be at home !

Cujoy cujay is declined thus:

Mafc. Fern.

rNom. cujo, cija^ whofe.^

I XJenr de cujo^ "de ciija, of whofe«

Sing.< Dat. a cujo, a cuja, to whofe.

J Ace, ^cujo^ cuja^ whofe. ^

Labi, de cujo^ de cija, from whofe*

The plural is formed by adding # to the fingular ;
as, cujoSy cwaSy whofe, &c.

Note, tnat cijo muft be followed by tihe noun or
' term which it refers to; and with which it agrees ia
gender, number and cafe ; as, a peffSa cuja ^epuia^
^dmvbs admirbhy the perfon whole reputation you
wonder at ; o dh cujo/occorro n&nca fhltay heaven,
whofe afliftance'iiever fails ; citja bella ram, whofe
fair vifage: ei^as teUizas, vifhok beauties s a cujo

44 PORTUGUESE

4

C H A p. IV.

Of Verbs.

TTHE Terb is a part of. fpeech which ferves to,

exprefs that which is attributed to the fubject
in denoting the being or coHdition of the things and
perfons fpoken of^ the actions which they do, or the
imprefsi^ns they receive.

The firft and the moft, general divifion of Verbs"
is into perfonal and imperfonal.

A verb perfonal is conjugated by three perfons. -

Example.

I love.

thou loveft.

he loves.
Cnos amdfnfis^ we love.

V\^t*\vos amdisy ye love.

\iiki dmaS^ tbey love.

feu dmot
Sing.^ tudmaSf
\elie dma.

A verb imperfonal is conjugated by the third per*
fbn of the finguj^r number only ; zs, ckove, it rains,
com^em, it behoves.

A verb, confidered in regard to the fyntax, is of
four forts, viz. a^ve, paffive, neuter, and' recipro-
cal.

Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre-
gular. '"

Some are alfo called atixiliary verbs. We (hall
giye their definitions in th^ir proper places.

Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it
will be proper to obferve, that all the verbs may be

conju-

CRAM MA-R. 45

conjugated with the prohcmns perfonal^ en, iu^ elle,
&c. or%^ithout them. ,

Of the auxiliary Kerbs.

The auxiliary verbs are fo called, becaufe they
help to the conjuration of other verbs. They arc
four in Portuguele, \\t. hawr, tir^ to have ; /^r,
^Jidr^ to be. The auxiliary verb/A^, to be, is alfo
called the verb fubftantive, becaufe it affirms what
the fubject is, and is always followed by a noun
, that particularizes what that fubje£l is ; z.%jtr tico^
prudimt^ Mttfo, &c. to be rich, wife, learned, &c.

Tie Conjugation of the auxiliary Ferb t6r, or hav6r,

to have.

I

The Indicative Mood.

Prefcnt.

*€u itnko^ ou hey^ I have.

Sing.*^ tu tins, ou A^, thou haft.

^eUc tern, ou kd, , he has ^rhath. .

{nos temos, ou havimos, ou kemoi, we have.

vos tindes, ou haveis, ou hits, you have. -

ellcs tim^ ou ha^, they have.

PreterimperfeCh

fetf Anha, ou havta^ ou hia, I had.

Sing*% tu tinhas, ou havias, ou hias, thou hadft*

\,elletinha,ouhavta,ovihta, he had.

{nis iinkamos^oii haviamosy ou kiamos, w^ had.

v6s tinhleis, ou havieis^oM kieir, you had^

e/tes tinnaS, ou haviao^ ou hiao^ they had.

Preterpcrfect definite.

C eu tive, oxkhouve, ^ I had.

Sing,^ tu tiviste, ou houviste, thou hadft.

\ellc teve, ou hSuve, . - he had.

{nos Hvimos, ou Jiouvcmos, we had.

vis iivistes, ou houvistes, you had.

tiles tivfraS oixhoviraS^ they had.

Prettf-

46 P Q R T U G y E $ E

I have had.
thou b^{l had.
he has had.

% fnos ttmes tido^ Vfo have bad.

Plur.< vis tenses tido^ yovi have had.

X^ilfes Um ^fdo, they ba^c had.

{eu tinho tida,
tu'tens tido^
ille tern tido^ '

C 1104 t/nhama^ tidi
Plur.^ vis thikieis tido^
/ (^ ilUs tznhao tido^

.\

Preterpiuperfefi.

{(u iinka tido, ' 1 had had.

tu tinhas tldp. • thou l»d hid. ^
eUe tinka ttd^, ' be bad bad. ^ ; .

7104 tinhama^ ttio^' we had h^d*

you had had.
they had had.

This tenfe may alfo be conjugated tlwis; thuiraj
tiveras, iivera, iiveramos^ tivereis^ tiverao.

Firft Future. ^ '

{iu terii, ou haver ei^ I (hall /^r will have.

tu Uras^ ou havtras^ thou (halt or wilt have.

ille terd, ou haver d^ he ftaH 9r. will have.

{nos teremos, ou hav^rcmos^ we (hall or will have.
vos tereis, gu havereis, ye (hall (7r will have,
///^j terity o\x haver dS^ they (ball or will have.

Second Future.
Sing, eu hci de ter^ ou kavir^ &,c. I muft have, &c:

Third Future.

* Sing, iu haver ei de tir, ou haver, &c. I fhall jbeoWIgcd to

have, &c.

Fourth Future.
Sing. €u havia dttir^ <m kavir^ &c. I was tofaave, &c.

Imperative.

«• ' ftem tUy ou hdjds tu, have thou.

■^ "»• ^ f^nha elle^ ou hdja etle^ let him have^

Ctenhdmos, ou kqjdmos nis^ let us havew
PlWt'x tende, ou Aflr;/i, i;^j>, bave ye.

l^tiphaa, ou A4;'a3 ///^ j, lei them have^

9 The

\

GRAMMAR., 4T

• *

The imperative has no firft perfon, becaufe it is
knpoflible to command one's felf. r ^.

Optative and SubjQnctive.
I join them together, becaufe their tenies are fimtlar.

Prefent,

ft

, Cfue eu tcnha^ ou hdja, that I have, or that IjnaAr hav6*
Sing.< que 'til ienhas, ou k4jaSf tboQ haft, or tndyek have.
i^que elk tenka, ou hdja, he has, 4fr may have.

Cifue ni^UnhdmoSi ou huJamoSf we have, ormdj hkve^
Plur.< (juevos tenhais^ oukajaiss ye have, ^r m^y faavfe4
^ l^que elUs tenhao, ou hajai^ they have, or may haVe*

Firft Preterimpcrfeft. ^ ■ • .

^qut eu tivira or tiveffe^

Sing.< ^"^ '? ''^"/"^ *"■ r^^^' > fliould. would,
^ g^ houver as or houveff-es, r ^,. j^a Qr.

kouvera or houvijfe^ J

que nis tivtramos or tiyejfemos^ "^ .

houvcrarnos or houvejfcmos | that we liad, i?r '

p, r f lu t/^j tivertis or tivejfeis^ I we (hould,

"'^ j hour^reis or houvejfeis, [ would^ fi?c.

j ^tt^ <^i tiverao or tivijfem^^ \ bav^ £?r.

t^ . houvirao or houvejfcm^ J

Second Preteriaiper£e£}.,

Sing.-! ^« urias ou A«i;.r/^J, V ^^"^^3 ?^^''

{msieriamos ouhaveridmos.'\ » /t ij n

r/^j UrUis ou A<2z/«r/«j. . I ^'^ ^^'jft '"P"''^'

Pre^rperfca. -

Cque eu tinka tido ou kavido^ that I have had^
Sing.-^ que tu tenhas tide ou kavido^ thou hall had.

^futf ille tenia tido ou havido^ he has had.

r^w^ noj tenhdmos tido ou. havido, we have had.
Plur. < f «^ I'^J tenhdis tido om kuvido^ you have had.

\que illes tenhai luUf x^xxhi^do, they have had.

Preter-

crcis ou tivijjeis j
iveraS ou tivijftm J

48 PORTUGUESE

I

Pretefpluperfefi*

It is comppunded of the firft preterimperfeft fub-
junftive and the participle.

{7^V« tivira ou tivtfft « "^ f

ft tu Hveras ou tvotjjts v I

Ve e//<ff tivira ou tivijfe I ^ i / if I had had,

Plur. ^ ^ t/« J liver eis r ' " '

^ e/fej tiveraS

Second Preterpluperfefl.

It is compounded of the fecond preterimperfed
fubjud£tive and the participle.

{eu Uria "" ''

tu terias
{illettria Ktido^i IfliouW have had, 0f.

nos tertamos f ^ '

vis terias
itUs teriao

Firft Future.

{'fe iu tivir^ if I ftall have.

tu tivera^ jhou (halt have.

llle tiver, he fliaH have.

rji nos tivSrmosi^ if we fliall have.

Plur. < vSs tiverdes, you (hall have.

I, ilUs tiverem^ they (hail have.

This tenfe may be conjugated alfo thus : houvSr^ .
houvires^ houver*y hotwermos^ Jiouverdes, houvirem.
See the fynt. of the auxiliary Verbs.

Second Future.

|t isk compofed of the Firft Future aud the Parti-
ciple.

tje iu tiver '^ f

.Sing. ^ iivires

liS^rmos 't'''^'*\ iflftallhavehad.&c
Plur. ^ fiver Jes

tiverem

Infinitive Mood.

Prefent.

tifg to have.

Prctcr-

GRAMMAR.

iir tidd^ CO bare hid.
Fntidples.

Ficcciit. Siag. /i^. iida. Piur. iidts. iiJss. bad.

Future.
c^: . ftu kddtier^ihilutohKvc.

'. itjub, haring •r in faiviiig. iautm^ 64^^ \BKmg blKl.

Supine.

'It is fapplied in PoitiJ^niefe by the prepofitioos «

or para, and the verb in the infinitive ; as,

. ■ • ■■

para tir^ to have.

• In like manner are conjugated its compounds
continboy Jetenko, mantinko, &c.

. . Rtmark upon the aaxiHary verb, tdr, to have.

The verb //r, to have, is an auxiliaiy or helping
verb, which ferves to conjugate other verbs: ex*
anapIe,7^V lidp^ to have read ; nos timosfeitOy we have
done ; ilks iem vifto^ they have feen, &c.

When the verb tir is followed by the participle
ipi^, before an infinitive mood, it denotes the duty,
inclination, &c. of doing any thing ; as, que tinaes
quefazSrf what have you to do ? tSnko que/az& huma
visita, I muft pay a vifit ; i//e tern muitd que diztrvos,

he has a gi^at many things to tell you.

<•-'•.■ I • _

h Of the auxiliary verb h av6r.

This is one of the moft ufeful verbs in Portuguefe,
fince it jsvnot only auxiliary to itfelf, as iu nil de
iav6r, I muft have ; eu iavia de iavSr, I was to have,
&c. but alfo to all forts. of verbs; as £u kiL de can^
tal^y I. will fing, or I muft fing, or I am to fing;
iu ta deJiir^ \ muft go; ^ havia defallir^ I was
to f{^ak ; (m hii de efcrevhri I muft write, &c. In
which examples you n^ay fee that the verb ha^r,
when auxiliary, has generally the particle de and
the verb of the infinitive mood after it; and

.. .i; Ti/l i. ::■.;... ,E ■ "- - that

f -

iQ P O B TUXJU;E.S E

that then it denotes a firm refolution, poffibiKty,^r
^eceffity of dokig any thiiVg> therefore it is not to
be rendered into Engliih by the verb to have ; as
you tfiiy fee by the fec6nd> third, and fourth fMbre
of the indicative mood..

The verb kaviti with the particle de^ and the verb
Jcr^ to be, after it, is an^up^Uiary both to the paflive
verbs,^ and Xometirofes to the yfcrb jfiSr itfelf ; us^hei
de ftrfelizy I (hall be happy^: O prindpe ha de fir
f^fp^itA4o^i^^^,^^ViQ^ o\ight to be> «r muii; be, re-
ipected. ^' ,, . : y-.. . . ./-. ^ .,-^ -,:•.

The lame verb haver is alio auxiliary witKoijt the
particle de \ but then it is put after the verb to
tvhtfch it IS auxiliary ; &iid fo they {sLy,.JarvoS'Ae$\ }
will give you; dar/he-^hei, J'^iW give td him, &e.
In which exat6pIeA^yotl may obferve, that th^uxi-
liary verb havir is put after the verb and ^hfiipi'^
bouDs conjunctive, i/^,ii^, &c^and (bmet^mfs jt; i^
put; after the yerb^ and t^ pronoun mi^ed^ a9»
^ mand&rvoio'Ui^ Siy fend it to you.- Talpe notice^
however, that in the foregoing examples the verb
havir Bjiiy be put before the other verb ^ bu^ then it
4re(}uires the partiple de^ and has a different fueankig $
as, in th6 firft e;(i: ample, you may; faoTji .4f i' de, d^rvoi^
1 m^& ^ive to you. You muft alfo ^bferve^ tb^
when the indicative prefent of the^iiuxiliary veij^
haver is auxiliary to ether verbs, as in the foregoing
examples, you muft cut off the laft letters ei from
tbr future ^(^ the verb^ : and fo you may fay 'dhclhe-
kih OT:hSi dS-^r-ihei but not darH ike^kHy nor Sfi
^dt dor&ikei. ' Morcovefi. when the prbterirtipcrfcit
JkavfA\9^A> \k, auxiU^ry.'tb ady V^rb, and k h to Mt
;^ced .after It, you; mufi make wfk of bid; kia^ Ma^
ziiarrios^rMihi^'si/ao ; and fo •you 'may ' fay« dar-iik'Aim,
,ikhs,i^. hutnotdar'/ie'hiiuUiJ^t^ lihbM

•give to him^ ctthtrtil (houldrfti' 800. : u ' .

r We fliail iBot ht at k loss how to tfx^re& the in*
terrogalion ih.jP6rtQgue{ei)Kft<ilve do bi^iit the ptro-
imins perfonal after the verbsj as in Englifh^ and

we

G R AM M AR< 51

we (hall never miftaj^e in) faying tet^iSu? (hall I
have ? timos nos f have we ? tens iu ? haft thou ?
fwmilkf has b^F but ibonetimes they do.oot irrtn-
tjim the pronouniat all $ asy jikf /i^rib^iLf what Oialk
we do ; cantor imos f (hall we fing ? ^

Obferve, that havjtr i^ foimetimes Engliflied by to
if ; as^ que ha de0'de mfmr what is to becocne of

When we fp^'Jsjrrnelrtttioni we jmilft ufe the
word iwo before the verb ; as, nao fenho^ I hav^ not ;
wj nai cot^$cets^ you do ijot know, &c.

The conjugatbn of the. auxiliary venhfir, or i^ar,

to bew

; Indicative. .

t ■ -

.1 ■ . ■ ' .

, Prcfenu

' • ■ » * ' . .

{iufSa or estSu^ I am.

tu is or ^5/a>» i thou art.

e7/f ^/ or ista^ ' he is.
ntf ^ f$ihoi or ^siimps, vtt art^«

Plur. ^ vos fSis or riMi^i you are.

, Hits fat fx estd8i khey am ^ .

. :PwterpIupprfect; ^ >

«tf /m or eslata^ I was.

^roj or €StdvA)h: ; fhou waft.

era or estdva^ he was.

'»^i frames or e^avamos^ we-^fei '

Plur. ^ /r«V or est dims ^ you ^wft.^^ "

trao CT kstdvoSi - tfiifcjr\«ii6

Pf<ct«rpcrfccl ilefliA^ >-

\

f;

. \'

^ _ WW W-- -— -- ■^-J

'. .fiSmos Of 6siw(m^s^ we wtffft.

nor. <{ ' :/^^i or tstkfistes^ yau ^w€r^ .

E2 - PttltXm

1«. I

52 PORTUGUESE

...... ^ ^ . .

Preterperfect.

It is compofed of the prefent indicative of ^tb#.
aiixiliary^ verb tir^ to have^ and its own participlciif

fido^ ox i^ido. ' r jv/

Prctcrpluperfcct, '"•^^^.

• f :j : v

^ It is compounded of the preterimperfect fnd(c}|n
tive^ and the participle <f/(tAp«^or (/9i^^

/•t) . .

{'cu tinhif, ft do or eftddq^ X had been*

tinkas sido or estidb\ thou hadft been. , '

tifiha sido or e^tddo^ he had been.

{tinhamos side or e^ddo^ v^e haid -been* " '^ ' (

tinheis stdo or est&ia^ : you had been.

tinhao sido or estado, they had been.

This teiife n^iy allb be coujngated thus; /Sra, or
fftwira-y fbrasy or ^ftiveroi ; ^firay or eftivera ; fdnh
fkosy or eftiveramos 'y fbreisy or ejlivereisi fdroQ, ox

Future.

^

feujerei or esiarei^ v^yLfbM or will ^^
Sing. < Jetas oxMUivas, ^hou {halt be. . , ^.

L Jerd or esMd^ ^ be A^U jbe.

r jiremoSt or estarimos^ we fliall be.
. Piur.< feriis ox estariis^ . you '(hall be.
(, Tir^S or estardo^ they Qiall hc^

^^''' Imperative; ^

6* ^ f// /« or «j/^, , he thou.

^'""^'Xfija or ziii^eUc.^ X^imht.

{'/qdmas,orre^lgdMos nos\ let \jshc. i ' "

fide or € sin vis ^ ' be you.

fijao or tsti^Qi^ilUsy .Jp^,tl|i«nbe. -

Qptatiyfe ^nd Subjunctive, ^ /r

[ Prefent. .. j

f qu€ tu f^a or ^siija^ that I nw be, ^ r that I be.
Sii'S* 1 y?^*^ ^' tstija^y r tbou mavft be ^r bf .
t ji^^resUja^ hemayfae^&CA J

Plur,

«"'•{

G R AM MAR* 6^

fejdmos or eflejdmos^ we may be.
Jijdis^ or e/tejais^ you may bei

y{/fl3 of ejiijao^ they may be.

Ki-ft PfctcrimpcrfcfiL

tjiivira or eftivejfe^ f bc4

° ' e/itveras or tjhvtjes^ \

foraatjqffe, \. _^^^

ejttvtreis or

eftivejfeis^ J
efiivejfm, J

you were.

- f6ra6 ox foftm, \ ,

Seeond Preteriroperfefl,

{€u seria^ eUaria^ . I (bould ^r would be«

;f^mi or estarfdSf thou ibouldeft be.

i^rw or tftarta^ he (hould be.

{, striamosox tstatiamos^ we (hould be.

seriiis or estarieis^ you ihould be.

jerlaS or ^fj^riao, they fliould be>

Prctcrpcrfe^.

It is compounded of the prefent conjunfiive of
the auxiliary verb ifyr^ and its oWn participle sido^
or est&doy ' ' \

que eu ieuka sido or estddo^ that t have beefi«»
! iihhas sido^ or estado^ thou baft been«

//sAa i/^^» Itc* he has been.

ienhdmas sido, &c. that we have been.
Flur.^ ienhdis sido^ &c« you have been.

\ » ienhaS sidif, &c. they have been«

Preterpluper{e£^.

It is compounded of the firft preteriniperfefl fub*
jun^ive of the verb Ur^ and its own participle*

•. E 3 Sing.

y

' \

/

S4 PORTUGUESE

^fi €U tivira ot ttvifft 1 -r t t. j l »
.. . / sidooxestiS ^»fH»dbeen.^ -

^*°8* ^ tiviras, &c. thou hadft ht9h.

tivira^ &c. . hc Had been.

tiviramos^ &c. we had been.

Plur> ^ tiyirds^ 8cc. you h^d ^een^

tiver^S, .&c* i)i^y had been. ,

Secpnd Pretcrplupepf^

It is compounded of the fc^eond preterimperfeft
fubjun£tive of thd verb t/rf and its own participle
si Jo or e/tido.

Ceu ttria sido or €stddi> I piould or would hatfc been.
Sifig/< ttrias^ &c.^ tHou fi^ouldfi have boen.

L teria^ &c. lie (hould h#ve been.'

r Uriamos^ &c, weihould have been*

Flttr.Y terieis^ &c. you fliould have been.

|[ icriaSj HjLCm ihey (I^iiild have been.

Firft toimtS^t^

qudndoiu^or or efiivir^ ythth I QpII be.

Sing.^ /!7r^j ox ejfHvires^ ' thM ihalt be*

^(?r or ej^vivy he (ball be.

JSrmos ereflivirmos^ we ftdl be.

Plur.H^ Jordts or eftivirdes^ you (hall be,

ybVtfftt or efttvcrem^ they (hall be*

Second Future*

It is conapptinded of the fiitnre fobjtinQ^Ve of the
verb //r, and its own participle.

qudndo iu /tWrji^^ or ^^^(?,when I (hall have been*
Sing. ^ iiyetes sido, '&c. thou (halt lave been*

/ti;/r i/i9» &c* he (hall have bfecB, ,
tivirmos sid^. See. we il^all have been*
Plur.^ fiver dcs sido, ict. youfllall have been.

tivercm sido, &o* diey (kail have^^MBtti

Infinitive. '

I^«ft{ftt*

fit^^i^rf^ tpbt*

Preterperfeft*

ier sido or €/l4(lo. ^ tohavebeest

• Ptoi.

. HR A MM AIL S BS

Furticijde^.
;. . Proi.

r

1

^J0 or isijd^, been.

f oftore.
puH dt //r, or esfdr^ that is fo be«

Grerunds*

stndo or esidmio^ being.
tindc sid§ or estido^ hiving bc^iv

Sophie,
^ara iir or ril^r, tp be;

Rcfo^ks open the rerb/^ and tjl&r.

There is a confiderable di^ence })etweea t^efe
verbis j^ and eft^i Wh in Pprtii^Me^ and $pani0).
In Engliih there is no word tO <liftingui()i theQiy fin<;r
they are both repdered into Eng]ifl]i by to be. Sir.
fignHtes tKe proper and infeparable eflence of a thing,
its quality or quantity; fir komem, to be a man ;
fer Mnty to be good ; fir aUo^ to be tall s fer lirp^
to be 'wide ; fer brdnfo^ to be white, &c. But.g^or
denotes a place, or any adventitious quality; as»
e^ m LdnJres^ to b^ in London > eJlAr de^faide^ Ko
be in health \ efikrfrio^ lo be cold ; est&r quente^ to
be warm ; eubir dointe^ to be ficfe > ^^tor infadhdo^ to
,bc angry ; eUl^r alU^re, tQ bq ro^rrv, S^e^
. Take liotice, that you may ule estar before £he
gerunds, but not/^; therefiore you may fay, estSu
fmlldndoy lendo^ &c. I am i^aking, reading, &c,
tlMt ifiQiJ^/i^lIandQ^ &c,

- T}lr three Conjugations of regular 4eth)C Fer 6s.

A Tegular vf^rb is fuch u l& confined to geneml
iiito> m jti cPii}«f^tion.

E4 A verb

I

56 PORT-UG.UESE

A verb/aftive denotes. the aftion or impreffionof
thc'fubject, and governs a noun which is the objeft
of that action or impreffion ; as, amar a virtide, to
love virtue ; recebir c&rtas; to receive letters. '

The regular Portuguefe verbs have three difFeT
rent terminations in the infinitive ; to wit„ in ar^ ex^
ir ; as, am&r ^io love ; tem^r, to fear ; admit tir, to ad-
mit.

An eafy Mtthod of learning to conjugate the Portuguefe

Verbs.

I .have reduced all the tenfes of the Portuguefe
verbs to eight; four of which are general, and
have thp fame terminations in all the verbs ; and
the otl)er four may be Jikewife ma^e general by
changing fome letters, and all the conjugations re-
/ duced to one.

The general tenfes are, the ftiture indicative;

the firftandfecond preteVimperfeft fubjunftive,and
the firft future fubjunftive. '

The future indicative is terminated in all the

verbs, in

V» .- / - .L • — ' > •

reiyTas^ra-, remosj rets, rao. ->

The imperfe£l fubjun£iive, in ;

ra or sse^ ras or sses, ra or sse-y ramos or ssemos, reis;

; or sseiSy rao or ssem. .,■..;, -^

' ^

The fecond imperfe£l, in
\ ria'.rias. ria ; riainos.rieis.riao.

Theiirft future fubjunfitive, in .

eSy moSf deSy em. '' " \

■

Note, that I have only put the termination of the
fecond perfon lingular of the future fubjun£tive,
becaufe the firft and third of the fame number are
like their respeftive infinitives of the three conjuga-
tions^ which however keep both their laft cohfonant

and

y*

.: G R;A M ;M A It i 5,7

and vowel before the termioations I havfe marked
for the fecond perfoa fihgular, and for the iwholc
plucal. As to the rfuture indicative, you have no-
thing to do but add /i tothe refpe£tive pi'efentinfi-
tiitive* of the three conjugations, in order to form
the firft p^rfon Angular ; and if you add to the &tne
infinitive prefent as^ you will form the (iecond peribo
fingular of it, and fo of all the reft, by adding fo
the infinitive prefent, tf, tfwoj, w, ^.

The imperfeS fubjun£Hve has two termination;
Tor every perfon, both in the. 'fingular and phiral;
"liut if you cut off thip laft cotifohiEmt V of theinfint-
tive, and then ^dd to it the tcbrmihations above-
mentioned, yoii (hall* form the itoperfeft fubjunc-
tive, acco^rding to its two different terminations.
Laflly, *if you cut off the laft . confortan t of the infi- .
nitive, and add to it the terminations above men-
tioned^ you will form the fecond imperfe£l fubjunfc-
tive.

The prefent indicative of the three conjugations
is formed by changing the lafi letters of the infini-
tive, yiz. ar^ er, /r, into o ; as, dmo^ entihdo^ a^mittOy
itom af^&Ty entendiry admit tir. , ,,/

The preterimperfeft indicative is formed in the
firft conjugation, by changing the laft confonant of
the infinitive, viz. r, into ^tf, vas^ va^ vamosy veis^ vat ;
but in the (econd conjugation it is .formed by
changing the termination nr of the infinitive into ia^
. iaSi ia^ iamos^ ieiSy iaS j and in the third by changing
the laft confonant r of the infinitive into, a, as, a ;
amos, eisy ao.

The jierfeft definite in the firft conjugation is
formed by changing the termination ^r of the infini-
tive into //, aflty h, imos, ajiesy araS; and in the
fecbnd conjugation, it is formed by changing the
termination er of the infinitive into t, ejle^ co, imos,
eftes, eraS. In the third conjugation, tl^ fame tenfe

is

I

58 PORTUGUESE

is formed by changing the termination it of the m*
$nrif ive into /, ifte^ /«, /i»«r, ijles^ trap.

The prirfent fubjunOive in the firft conjugation
18 formed by changing the termitiatidn or of the
infinitive into r, ^^ e, emoSy iisj tm-y and in the
iecond conjugation, it is formed by chaoging the
termination /r of the infinitive into a, as> a^ imas,
SiSf agi, In the third conjugation, the fame tenfe s
formed by changing the termination ir of the infi>.
nitive into the fame terminations, a^ as, a, &c.
*• A» to the [mperatiye mood, you may only oh-
fcnre, that the £econf] perfon fingular j^s always the
iamc as the third p^^fon fingi^ar of the prefeqt indi-
g^tiye, in all the conjugations. '

Tlje participles ot tne preterperfeft tenfe iq.the
firft conjugation are forq^^d by chwgihg the laft
/confonant r of the infi.nitive ioip ^0 for the m^^ii-
lpe»and da for the femiriin^; and into dosid^^
tor the plural • but when you come to verbs of ti^e
fecond conjugation, you change the termination r
of the infinitive into idoy ida^ &c. * '

In the third conjugation, you muft change the laft
confonant r of the infinitive into do for the mafcu-
line^ da for the feminine, &:c.

Thtfifft Conjugation of the verbs /« ar.

The Iei4icative Mood.

I ihall put the pronouns pergonal, ia^tu^ ille^ 4cc.
nomorci

Prefem*

, .mao^ '■ {love.

4ma^^ thou. JoVdL

4maj helovp^.

lamdmesp we love.

aptdis, ' ye lave.

Jimai, tfaeylave.

Fcpter«

G R A M M A<R.

Preterimpcrfed.

«

amava^

dmavas^

amdva,

amdvamoSf

umdveis^

amet^
kmafte^
amou^
amimes^

amdrao^

I did love^ ^
thou didfl love,
he did love*
we did love,
you did lovc."^
' they did tore.

Preterperfed definite.

I loved,
thou lovedft.
he loved,
we loved,
you loved,
they loved.

'^' Prcterperfea.:

This tqpfe ' IS compofed of the jiarticiple amido^
and the present indicative auxiliary verb; ter.

tinho amado^ I have loved.

tens imddo^ thoa haft loved* ^ r . ^ . . .

Um MmSdo^ he has loved. '.

tetnas amdd^^ we have loved^, -^'^

iinde4 amadou ^ yofi have lov^^ .

t€i^ amddo^ th#y have loved*

I Prcterpluperfea.

This tenfe is compofed of the participfe dtfido^
and the iftipKsrfeft of the auxiliary verb W.r \y

N. B. This tenfe njay be conjugated thus, Mmkrs,
Mthrasy amdra, am&ramos, amareiSy aminrAS^ or,

I.ha4 loved*
thou haft loved*
he had loved.
,we had loved,
you^had loved,
they had lovpd. ^

Future.

I-fliall or i^ill love,
thou (halt love.
/ he (hall love^

%

iinhAamid^^
tinhaj amado^
tinkd amddo^
iinhamtfs amaddt
tinheis amado^
tinhai amidc^

amarH^
amards,
amard^ •

ama*

«D

P Q R T V G U E S E

^maremos,

amareis^

amardor^

we (hall love,
you (hall love-
they (hall lore.

Imperative.

dma tu^
dme, Slltj
amemos nis^
amdi vos^
dmem elUs^

love thou,
let him love,
let us love,
love you.
let them love.

Optative and Subjunftive.

que eu ame^

* dme^

amemos^

that I may lov^. '
thou tnayeft love,
he may love,
vre may love,
you may love,
they itiay love.

Firft Preterimperfea.

que eu amara or amasse^
amdras^ or amdsses,
amdiraf or afndsse^
amirambSf or amdssemos^
amiteis or amdsseis^
amiraS ox amdssem^

that I might ^r could love,
they mighteft love. >
he miffht love*
we misht love,
you might love,
they might love.^

' yWhen we find the conjunction if before the in-
dicative imperfefil, we muft ufe the imperfeft of the
,fubjun£liye or optative, when we fpeak. by way of
wifti or defire \ as. If I did love, fe eu amajfuy or
amhra^ and not Je h amdva^ if I had loved ; if I
had, fe hi, thera, tivej/e, and not fe iu tlnha-^ and
fo in all the verbs.

Second Pretcrimperfefl:.

^mariaf \ I (hould lovct

amarfaSf ' thou (houldft love.

amarial he (hould love.

amariamoSi we (hould lov^.

amarieis^ you (hould love.

emariaS, they (hould love.

. V Preter-

G R A M M AiR. «)

Preterper{ie8>

J It is-c6chp6feit of the participle 4^4!0^m4 the
prefent fubjun3ave, of the auxrlia^ vecb /fJTKl :. : i

^t« it^icnha dmddo^ that I have Ipved«^ :>

tSnhas amddo^ thou haft loved.

tinka amado^ he ba$ loved. ^

ttnhawkosi amado^ we have loved.

tenkais amido^ you have loved.

. tenhsAamddo^ they have loved.

Pre^erpluperfefi.

It is compofed of the participle^ amido and the
firft preterimperfeft fubjunaivc of the auxiliary
verb tir.

ft iu tivira or tivifst amddo^ , if I had loved.

iiveras or tivifses amado^ thou hadft loved.

tivira or t^vijst amddo^ - * ' > he Had loved.
tiveramosortivifsempse^m^o^ we had loved.
tivirtis or tive/scis amddo^ you bad loved.

HveraB or tivefsem amddd'^'^"' *'lhey had loved.

Second. Preterplupeffcfi.

It is compofed of the participle iiwirfo and the
fecond pretje^drnperfisS fubjim^ive of the auxiliary
verb tir. '

. ■» » r ■ tf

Uria anUido^ I fiiould have loved.

ttrias amida^ . ' ' ^ ^ ' thou Ihouldit have loved.

teria amdio^^ ?';,:. /f; -^ fliouid have loved.
teriamcs amido^ we (hould have loved.

terteis amddo^ ''-" ^' y^flioiild have loved.

teriaS amddOf .t> v ' thfiy fliould have loved.

' '• ■■'••■■■■:• 'Future.^ -^ . . ■ .. .-.;■.'

^itdndf iu amir, wlien I (ban love.

• amdres^ ' ^p (halt love.

Nl-

.'J

dmdri he (hall love.

dmirmos^ we (hall love. *■ .

amirdes, ". you (hall love.

fimmrtm^ . they (hall love..

V ' Second

CS P O R T,!; G:U'^S E

Sccmtd- Fnearo.

ft

tt b«offi{)<&fed 5f^ the pdt-tfdpl&kifmto, aixl llie
future faljlmQiVd df the taxiliar/ verb /^; ^ .. j'lvi^r

qudndo fu tiver dfrnido^ when L(^»U have l^v«d;> '}
iivfreS affiidif^ •thouA^U hsMe loved.

tivir djimdd, be {h«li havaloved.

tivirihbs amado^ W€ ftaii hav^ loved.

tivirdes di^do, ■ ydo feaH ha Vfc laved.

- H'^tmamido, , tWfUiiHlia^e loved.

PrcfeiUw

»>-!'-• r-

.J 'vrir:

• / • •

^ PretcrperfeQ.

icr mH^db, to tkaivc klV«^^

' • . . /

9 ' • *^ < ■ •

' » »

.•.•; •• •}.: :

Participle* --\ . v - •«
Prefciit.
f n^ dma^ or amtinkt Chat Ip\^6|i. ,

Pret.
amddOf male, dmida, felt). loved.

• ^ '•-*. 'Future. ..) :..i.,qf-..--:. . ;1

.. .J.
... Ge;'unds.

.1/ i,u..amdn,dQt loving. ,.'

, - - Undo amdot,^ having lovc^./

,,v>y ^i:. Supine.

,1. :>. . . ij^ard amdr^ to love.

Note, the verbs teiupinating in^ the infinitive in
« ^ir take ^u ii^ Ab^fe tenJfes, where th^s, c would other-
wife mwt:w:it^i^^, vowel /; andtbiWe terrtriiiating
in the infiditp m\.gar take an »,^ thofe tenfes,
whereMhe g woiiki otherwife m^t with the fame •
vowel rj that* i^to fay, in the firft perfon fingular
of tlie ^rtietp€t(i& definite, in the third perfon

fingular.

6 R A M M A. R. 04

fingular, in the firft and third plural of the impera-
tive, and in the whole prefent fubjunftive, whicb
afe the tepfes 1 (hall give you by y9aj <^ exainple
in the .verbs pcaar and p0g^n

P«'cv^;t6fin.

PMfterperftft' dditike. '

iu pequii^ I finned — in^tdAm pettH*

Imperative. ,

pcjjui ille^ let him iiii: pequemos nis^ let us fin; piquem
ilUs^ let them fi^r^iui taoi-jpecce clU^ &c.

Ptefett fubjunftivc

que in piquf, iu piques^ that I ^ay fin-—
an^xiotfuf eu pecce,ficca^ ccc.

iVfelerpfeifea definite.
pdg^uH^ I pA(f.

• i'- c'-i 'v ' lir^ratiJttiLV : " ■ fi'.-J -• ' '^
pigue^ elle^^paguSmos nis^ pagifcm -eilss^ let him^pay, &e.

' ' '- Prefent fubiunflive.

f uf ^21 P^g^^t, P^g^^^9 pdgueypaguemoSf pagucis, paguem^
that 1 may pay, £?c.^and not page^pa^e:^^ &c.

The other tenfet^ arc conjugated liKe amdrm
Regulai''' verbs in ar.

Abafdf^ to choke, or to ^di- Agarrar;\K> lay hoW of.

. ther^ \i4/<flij€rr, to overflow.

Abalar^ to fhake. AmaUifoar^ to curfe.

^ian^zr, to fan. * Annular^ to annul, ^r to

Abaftdr^ to fadate. . make void.
Abaxar^ to bring ^tkt dowii. Aprefsar^ to pr^fs, ^ hafien*

Aben f oar t to hlth. Aquenldr^iovfgtiti^

Abocankar^ to carp. Argumentar^ to aft'gtie«

Abomxndr^ to dominate, ^ Ajsoprar^ to blow.

>i^0/tfar,\to button* jJ^ir^nStie.

Aiabdr^ to finifh. Avaffal&r^ to fabdoe, t9 con-

Admoeftdr^ to adni|iKU#i» quer. ^r

Affrontit^ to abufe.*. A%cdar^ to fooTt

&4ri

PORT UGUE5E

I'Ofjhe Kerbs passiye.

Before we proceed- to the fecond conjugation, it
is neceffary to Icnow that' the Verbs paffiVe, whith
cxprefs the fufferingpf Jip ^aion, are nothing more
than the participtesof verbs a£liYe> conjugated with
the verb y2r, to oel

ii< — .

< > ' . i

•I

E X A M P L £• ^

f< *

*--.T

> >

Prefent tenfe.

y

' vindes^ \ ,
vihdt^
vendemos^
vendiisy
• vind^m^

veiaidia^
' vendias^
; txendia^ ^
vendiamqs^
.vtndieis^
rfendiaSt

I • »

/Ky<?tt amid(fi . . I am kiVcd/

/ii h amddot ; , ^ , thou art loved.

elU hi amSdoy ' he is loved '

nSsfomds afiidibs^ we are ld<red.

vosfS'tsimdfl^^,\ . you arel<>ved.

tlUsJai arndda^s^ , they are loved.

and fo throughout . the other , moods and tenfes.

The second conjugation of the verbs in 6r.

* • ..
Indicative Mood*.

' i*fcfcnt,
.::iiell.

*' "thou felleft'.
he fells. -^ ^"'
we fell,
you fell,
they fell.

Pi^ctcrimperfefi.

; I did fell.

thou didft fell.
he did fell.
wc did fell,
you did fell,
they did telU

Preicrperfefi definite*

*^ vtndU, I fold.

vendefitM thoo foiifei^

vcndiii^ ' he fold.

' venm

\ . :

' -^

o

,«

GRAMMAR. «»

pendemos, we fold.

vendeftcs. you fold.

vindcrdSj tby fold.

Preterperftfi*

venJiJt, < I have foM, 9c.

FMerpluperfed.

itnka '\
iinkas I

Sw >-""«''•• ^bw. feline.

This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus; vcndcrat vendirasg
vehdei^i venderam^Sf vcndireis^ vendM^

Future*

VtHdtf&t

venderdSf

venderiis^
vtnderaS^

Imperative Mood.

vtnde tu^ fell thois*

VEnda ille, kt him fi&lL

venddmos nos^ let m felL

vendei vos^ fell ve.

vendaS ilks^ let them fell.

Optative and SubjunQive.

vindas^ J

*2^W. r^' ^ '"^ ^^' ^'^^

vinddiSf 1 '

ifcndaS, J

5 Prctcf*

66

P O R T U G U E S E

t PrecerimperfeQ.

f Iff eu vendira or vendesse^ that I might or could fdll,

vender as or vendisses^ &c. .

vendira or vendesse,
vendiramos or vendessemos^
vendereis or vendesscis^ .
vehderaS or vendissem^

Second Pfetcrimperfcct.

vtnderia, I (hould fell, 0f.

venderias^

venderia^

venderiamos^

venderUiSf

venderiaSt

Prctcrperfcfl.

que eu tenhd
tenhas
tenha

tenhamos f
tenhdis I
tinhoB J

vendido, <

that I nave foM»&f .

Preterpluperfeft,

/e eu tivera or tiveffe^
tiviras or tiveffes^
iivira or tiveffe
tiveramos cr tivifiemos^
tivereis or iivijfas^
- tiveraS or tiviffem

yvendido^ < if I

had fold, &c.

Second Preterpluperfe£l.

eu teria
terias
teria
teriamos
terieis
teriaS

vendid^, < I fliould have fold^ &c.

Future.

GRAMMAR.

fmmMd0 em vemder. vlnIfaHlcll.9

vtmdirdts.

Second Fuduc

qmmmi0 em tivir
iiveres
tivir I ^^jf, } when I OmII bm tM.

Infinitive Mood.

Prefcnt.
vender, to TdL

PrctcrpcrfcQ.
tcr vendido^ to have fold.

Participle.

Prefent.

qmt vindCf that fell» that fells.

Preterit.

a

vemdid^^m^tc. vendida, feni. Plur. vendidos^ vendidas^ fold*

Future.
fui ha de vender, that is to fell. '

Gerund.

vendendo^ felling.
tindo venliido^ having fold.

Supine.
para vender^ to fell.

After the fame manner as the verb vendir^ are

conjugated all the other regular verbs of the fecond

conjugation ending in er s as the following -,

18 Mfimetir.

v-t8 PORTUGUESE

Acometir^ to attack. Efcondir^ to hide.

Bebir^ to drink. Emprendir^ to undertake.

Comif^iO€k^ jW^/tfr> to put in.
Comprekisnaer fto^erceive, or Offender ^ io oStnA.

apprehend, jFr^^^/Zr, to promife,

Comttir^ to commit. Refpondir^ to anfwer.

Concedir^ to grant. Reprthcndert to reprove.

^ Corrir^ to run. Tenter^ to fear.

• /)«vdr, to owe. ^^arr^ri to fweep, €?c.

.• . . .

The third conjugation of the; verbs endingJnJrr.

t -

y-" " '*' IrtdkaUye Mood.

Prefent.

admitto. I admit, &c. admUtimcs.

admUteSf • -'^ • admittis,

admitte^ admitUm.

PreterimpAtftft.

admlttia^ I did adttiit».^€« admitttamos.
admittias, admiiticisi

admittia, ' adiAittiao. ^

Preterpcrfcfl definite.

admiUi^ I admitted. admittimos.

admittijie^ aimit^s.

admittio^ admttirdo*

Prcterperfeft* .

This tcnfe is composed of the participle admittido,
and the prefent indicative of the auxiliary verb tir.^

tinho admitiido^ I have admitted.

tins admittido^ &c. thou haft, tec.

P»etcrplupcr£ea.

This tenfe is compofed of the participle admUiido^
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb t6r.

iinha admittidp^ I had.a'dmitted; ^ i

tinhas admit tido, &c. thoU ha(itt,&c.

This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus ; admiHtra^ ai^ .
mittir^s^ admttira^ admutiramos^ ^tdmittlreisp admiii^S. j

Futare.

GKAMM^It. 69

Future.

admUHrii, t flidi ^r wiU admit.

admitirms.
admittird^

admitfirfmpt»

admidifiis^

admittifdOf

admtieii^ admit thoy.

admitta itk^ ^ let him admit.
.admittdmcsnift, let us admit.

udmitti V0S9 admit ye.

admUtao ell^s^ let them adom*

Optative and Subjunctive.

Prerent.

fue iu admitia^ that I may admit, &c»
admittaSf
adfAitta^
admtttdmos,
admiitais,
admittaS.

Firft Preterimpc rff6l.

que eu admiiirm or adtkittijfe^ that I might admit, &c.

admittiras or admittijfes^ ^
admit tir a or admit tiff e^
admittiramos or admittijfemos^
^ admittireis or admitiifseis^,
admitttraS or admiiifjfemt

— Second Preterimperfefi.
admttiiria^ . I ibould «r ^Mrould admit, &c.
admittirias^
. admittiria^
' admittiriamoSf
admittirUis^
admktiridSp

Preterporfiefi*

This tenfe is eotnpdfed of the ptrticle^ admittido,
and the prefent fubjunctive of the verb /ifr.

f 11^ /tf ienha admittidc^ that I have admitted.

' '"^^fftcc. . «Imu haft admitted, &c.
f 3 'Pretcr-

70 P O R t U G U E j5 E

PreterpI^pe^fe3.

It is compofed of the firft preterimperfcQ? fub-
junClive of the verb Ur and the participle admitti^o,

ft eu tivira admittido^ If I had admitted,

ttverasi &c. thou hadft admitted, ice.

Second PreterpluperfeQ. ,

It is composed of the fecond preterimperfect fub-

junctive of the verb iir and the participle admittido.

eu teria admitlido^ u I ihould have admitted.
terias^ &c. thou fhouldft, &c.

Firft Future.

■

fe eu admiitir^ If I (hall admit, &c.

admittircSf
admittir^
^ admitttr^ n^ .

admitttrdeSf
admittirem^

Second Future*

It is composed of the firft future fubjunctivc of
the verb tir and the participle admittido.

fe eu tivir admittido. If I (hall have admitted.
; tivires.tcCt thou (halt* &c.

Infinitive Mood.

. Prefent.
admit ttr, to admit.

Prcterpcrfeft.
tlr admittido^ to have admitted.

• Participle. >

Prefent.
admittido, for the mafc. admittida, for the fem. admitted.

Future.
' que ha de admittir, that is to admit.

Gerunds.

;' admittindo, admitting.
tindo admittido, ^ving a&iitted.

Supines. '
para admittir^ • to admit*

Conjugate

GRAMMAR. 71

Conjugate after the £ime manner the following
verbs:

Abrir, to opeii« Nutrir\ to nourifli*

Conduvir^ to conduA. . ReduMir^ to reduce, to
Intro Ju%2r^ to introduce. to.

Induzir^ to 'induce. Traduzfr^ to traoflaie.

Produzir^ to produce. Deduzir^ to dedufi, &e.

Luzir^ to (hioe.

, Q/* tie irrepilar Verbs in ar.

There are in each conjugation fome verbs which
jdo not conform to the common rule, and on that
account are called irregulars.

There are but ttvo of the firft conjugation, which
in fome of. their tenfes depart from the rule of the
verb ^^4r^ viz. ejlar and dir. We have already
conjugated the firft, and the fecbnd is conjugate4
in the following manner.

Indicative.

Prcfent.
dou^ I give. dimos^ we give.

- dds^ thou givefi. ddts^ you give.

di^ he gives. dai^ they give*.

. PretcrimperfcS.

dava^ I did give, &e. (as in regular verbs of the firft

divas^ Sec. conjugation.)

Prcterperfeft definite.

dei^ I gave. demos, we gave.

defte, thou gavefi. defies^ you gave.

deu^ he gave. diraS, they gave.

* Preterperfefl.

This tenfe is compofed of the participle d&do and
the prefent indicative of the auxiliary verb //r; as
iessko dadoy I have given, &c.

PreterpluperfeS.

This tenfe is compofed of the participle dado and

the imperfect of the auxiliary verb tir\ as iu tinha

iUo^ &c. I had given, &c.

F 4 Future.

n PORTUGUESE,

^ • -

Fatnre.

d^rh, I (hall or wHI give, &c. (as in the verb amir)
dards. &c..

Imperative.

dSmos nSSf let us gi^^.
di /B» give tfaoQ. ' ddi vos^ cive thou.

di ilk Jet him give, ^ dcm Ules^ let them, gi^tt

Optative and Subjunctive. ,

Prefent.
fue eu de. that I may give, &c»
deSt

dl -
dimos^
' diis,

Preterimperfefi*

qui iu iira or disscj that I might give, &c«

deras or desscs^
dera ox desse^
deramos or dissewufs^
direis or desseis^
deraS or dissent.

Second Imperfe£L .
darUt I (hould ^vCt Ax. dariamos*

darUkS^ darieis.

daria^ dariaS.

The preterperfect> preterpluperfect, and the fis

cond preterpluperfect, are oompofed of the participle

dido, and the auxiliary verb Ur, as in the regular

verbs.

Future.

^ fudndo cu der^ wbtt I (hall give, &c.

dirts,
dir.
dermos,
dirdesp
direm^ ^ .

Second Fntore.'

It is compofed of the p^u-ticiple dido, &c. as the
regular verbs.

Infinitive.

GBAMMAK. 7S

Infinitive.

4mr^ to^ve, &cim ia tbe K{ular verbi» •
Of the irregular F^bs in er.

I begin with fazir^ poder^ ^nd/Mbir^ bccaufe they
; occur afieneft in difcourfe.

■

Faz^, to do tr make. .

-Indicative.
PreTcAt.

fofo^ I do, Jmximos^ we do.

Jdzts^ thou doft. fazeis^ you do.
fdz^ he docs. fiztm^ they do.

Imperfect.

Jaxiaf I did ^r did make; &u faiLiamos.
Jazias^ Jazteis.

faziOf ' faziaS. \

Preterperfcft- definite. *

fiz^ I made» &c. Ji^fiws. , *

fizijie^ Jiztjits^

fi%9 Jiz€Ta%,

Preterperfcft.

iink^ftiU^ I have done, &u

iensJcitOi &c.

PreterplupeiitfiS.

iinha faito^ I had dooe« Qcm
tinhasfeito^ &c.

Future*

Jarei^ I £baU do, &c. (according to the regular verb.)
JardSf &c.

^ffi^ratire.

' fcfimos niSf let us do.

fizeiu^, dothoQ. fuzeivSt. dbyou.

fifa eikf let him do. fifao illes^ let iboi

Optative.

■\

74 PORTUGUESE

«

Optative.

Prefcnt, ,

fue eujidfa^ that I may do, &c. (according to the regu-
jdfas, lar verbs.

Pretcrimpcrfcft.

^ue eujizera or^z^, that I night do, &c.
Jiziras OTjizeJfts^
fizera oxjixejfe^
Jiztramos or fizejptmos^
fizSreis or fizejffis^ *

Jizerai oxjizfffem.

Second Imperfeft.

faria^ I (hould do, &c. fariamos.
Jarias^ farUis.

Jaria^ foriao.

Future. •♦

qudndo eujizir^ when I (ball dp, &c.
Ji%eres^
Jizer^
Jizirmps^
jizirdes^
Jizirtm^

Second Future.

qudnio iu tivirfeUo^ when I Oiall have done.

ttveresfeito^ &c.

. Infinitive.

fazer^ to do.

Gerunds.
Jazinio^ doing or in doing.

Participle.
JeitOf inadf,^r done.

After thCjfiame manner are conju|[atcd iesfazir^
to undo.; conirafazir, to counterfeit; refazir^ to
make ajg;8in.

/

GRAMMAR. 75

Podlr, to be able.
Indicative.

- * ^ Prcfent.

piffo^ I can or am able. podimoj^ we can.
pnleSi thou canft. podeis^ you can.

p6de^ ht can. pidem^ they can.

Imperfed.

fodia^ I could or washable, &c.
podias^ &c.

Preterperfeft definite.

pide^ I could. pudimos^ we could.

fudeftcy thou couldft. pudiftes^ you could.

pSd€y he could. pudiraS^ they could.

* • Pretcrperfeft.

ieiiho podidoy &c. I have been able, &c.

Future. ?

podereu I Ihall be able, &c.

poderds^'8cc»

1 - .

There is no Imperative.
Optative and Subjun£live.

• Prefent.

que iu piffa^ that I may be able.

P^Jf^^^ ^l^ou mayeft be able, &f;.

^ poffamos^
poffau,
phJfaK

ImperfeQ.

^ut iu puderui or pudijfe^ that I might be able.

puderas or pudiffts^ thou mightft be able, &c.
pudira or pud^t^
pudcramos ox pudejfemos^
pudireis or pud^ets^
pudirai Of pudeffitm^

Second

I » 1 • ■ t

1 .

- '

76 FORTUQVRSE

Second Impcrfeft.

poderia^ I iliDuId be able, &c.

poderias^ &c.

Future.

ijudndo eu puder^ when I fltall be able, &c.

pudires^
pudir,

pudirtnoi^ "

puderdes^
pudircm^

Infinitive.

Prefent,
l^^^r^tobeable. .

Gerunds.
podiudo^ hemg tble.

Participle.'
pudido^ been able.

Sabify to know.
Indicative.

Preient.

jA', I know. sabimos^ we know.

shbes^ fhou knoweS. sahiis^ you know.
skbt^ hekxiows. sdiem, iheyknow.

ImperfeR.

sabia^ I did know.

saitas^ thou didft know, &e.

saiia» &c.

Preterpcr^eft definite.

souhf Iknev, &t. soubimos.
snbififi souUJlfs.

souhf scuberttSf

Preterperfe&i^

, tinho sahido^ I havvifcpowii, ic«»

Future^

G S ▲ M M A J^.

1 1

0aksras, &c. regalar verbs.)

jmbamos no^^ let us know.
saht tu^ kacm tlunu iMMt «r«j, know you.
<£tf£&a £Ue; kt bim know^ JuiiaB ilks^ let tbem know.

Opittiipe and Sabjini^f&

Prefem,

f 8£ fv saUfA^ I may know.

saibas^ tkmm nutyE know, ^^:.

saaidis^

InperfieS*

f JET e» spuifrm or spuiife, diat I m^glit know. Jkc*
soubtTMs or smUfti^
soubtTA or S9mi^fk^
scmUrmm§s or S Bmi4 pm§t ^
souherns or somhigas^
souHrao or s^uttjfem^

Second Imperfeft.
sMierta^ I (hoaWkaow, &c. S4^riamcs.

sakcria^ ssitrtMS.

FQlure«
f%4^io iu ~j»»Mr, when I (hail know> &c.

fouHfJeSf
soubcrem^

Infinitive.

Prcfcnt.

ja^cr» to know.

Gerand.

Participle

78 PORTUGUESE

Pai'ticiple.
fahtio (for the m^{c.)/abida (for the feminine,) known.

Ill „i •.

0/the irregular Ferb trazer, to bring.

Indicative*.

Prefent.

^^^gOf I bring. trazemos^ we bring, &c.

trdzes^ thou bringeft. trazeis*

traZf he brings. trdzem.

Imperfefl.

trazia^ I did bring.

trazidSi &C. thou didfi bring, &c. (according to theregulari*)

Preterperfe£l definite*

Hrouxe^ I brought. trouximos.

irouxijltt thou broughtefi, &c. trou^ifits.
irSuxe^ irouxeraS.

PrcterperfeS.

tenho trazido^ I have brought, &c.
tens trazidOf &c.

Future.

trareif I (hall or will bring, &c. trarimos.
trarist tratHs^

trard^ trardS.

f

Iniperative.

tragdmes it jx, let ui bring.
trdze fUf brin^thou. trazH vis^ bring you.

triga elle, let hun bring. trigaS elles^ let them bring.

Optative and Subjundlive.
Prefent.

•

fue eu triga^ that I may bring, &c.
tragas^
traga.
tragdmcSf
trag&is^
trigaS,
1 Jisper|M.

. /

GRAMMAR. 7f

ImperfeA.

fue eu trouxira or trouxiffe^ that I might bring .C^c.
trouxiras or trouxeffes^
trouxira or trouxejfe^
trouxiramos or iroiixMtmos^
trouxereis or iroux^eis^
^ trouxerai or trouxejff'em^

Second Jniperfe6l.

eu traria^ I (hould bring, &c. trariamcs.
trarias^ trarieis.

traria^ trariao.

Future.

qudndo iu trouxir^ 5vhen Oi^ll I bring, &C/
trouxeres^
trouxer^
trouxSrmoSt
trouxprdts^
trguxirevif

Infinitive.

Prcfcnt.
trazer^ to bring.

Gerund.
trazendo^ bringing.

Participle.
if^azidoy mafc* trazida^ fern, brought.

The conjugation of the Irregular Verb v^r, to fee.

Indicative.

Prcfent. .

vijo^ I fee, vemos.

vis^ thou feeft, vides^

ve, he fees, &c* vim.

Imperfefl*

via^ I did fee, &ۥ

vias^

via^ &c.

10" PORTUGUESE

' Prcterj)|crfcfl definite.

vif« Iikw» &c, vimps.

' vijfe^ • vifies.

WfOf vtraS.

Prettrperfea.

tinh^vifto^ I have {eett» &c.

//n^ ^ijto^ &c.

Future,
fifr/z, I (ball fee» &c.

Imperative.

t;/ /», fee thou.

vcja ille^ kt him fee*

vcjdmos niSf

let us fee*
fee you.
let :bem fee.

vejai elleSf

Optative.
fue iu veja^ thai I may fee, &c. vejamos.

veja.

vcjats^
vejad.

Dnaperfeft,

qut iu vita or vi^t^ that I might fee, &c.
vircLs or vijfes^
vira or vi

viramos or viffim^s^
vtrcis or vij^s^
tiraS or viffim.

vtrfast
vtrta^

Second Imperfefi;.
I ftvobld fce^ &c.

virkis.
veriao*

fudndo iu 9tV,

vires^ .

virmpSt

virdeSf

vircm.

Fbtnre.

when I fliall fee, &c.

Iniini«

G JL A,MM A R.

Si

lufinuive.

/

»/r; to fee.

^

Gerund.

vendo, feeing.

'

Particip]|e.

Vififi^ vtfia^ feen.

In like manner are conjugated the compounds
fintevbr^ ^w^r,and revir. .

The verl> prover^ when it fignifies to provide far ^
Off to take care ofy\% conjugated in the prefent indi-
cative thus ;

eu provinho^ I take care of, (3c. . provimos.^
provenSf propindes.

provim^ privem.

But when it fignifies to make provifiony it is conja-
gated thus: '

iu provejot I make prbvifion, &c. provimo$.
proves^ proviis.

prove f privtm.

The conjugation of the auxiliary verb ^ziry to fay.

Indicative.

Prefent.

iigo^ I fay. @c. dizimos.

df%^St dizHsu

Ji9^ dizem:

Pretcrimperfe^.

dizia^ I did fay, (3c.
dittos^ i&c.

Preterperfeft definite.

dffe, Ifadd,®<r. dijimos.

dtfjftt, Mifies.

<Me, dtfiraS.

G Pret(nr<

12 FOR tM 6 U ES £ .

. itnko ditto ^ t have fai^, 8€.
tins dittOt &c.

Fulure.

Jirei^ I (hall or will fay, &c.
dirdSf &c.

Imperative.

' dize iu. fay thou,

iiga (lUf let him tvf,

digdmos nis^ let tii fay.

ill»/< t/j^, fiiy you.

iigiA Hies, let them lay*

Optativc^^

fue eu diga, that I may fay, &e.

dtgaSf &c.

Imperfect.

f tt^ eu dtjjera or diffiffe^ that I might fay, &c*

dijfiras.ox oi0l[^^%
dtjfiruix diffigh; ^
differamosxitai^effemos,
mfereis or dijftjjcis,
Jijferad ox dtjejfem. , ;-

Second Imperfect.

diria, Iflilmld fay, ^f.

diriaSf &c.

Future.

qudndo eu dtjsir^ when Ihall I fay^ ^i^.

dij^irit^
difsir^SLC.

, Infinitive.
dizir^ to f^.

Gerund. .

dixendo, faying.

Participles.

Obferv^

G R A MM AH. iw

Obferve, that the compounds dejdiztxy to unfay,
and cantradizir^ to contradi£t^ are in all points con-
jugated like dizAr. ,

rttrm^^^ » ■» <> it

The Conjugation of the irregular Verb querir, to be

"toifling. ,

Indi^Uve Mood.
Brofem.

fuerOf I will, ^r am willing. ^ '

quires^ tbou art williog.

^ti/r, he is willixig» Sc.

querimosi

queriis^

qnerem^

Imperfecta

queria^ 1 was willing, &c.

querias^ &c.

. Prcter'perfect definitCL

quix^ I have beea.wtUtng, &c.

quizejlii

quiz^

quizimas^

qmxiJleSf

qviz^faSi ^ . .

Future. •
qucr4rH^ X fliill he willing, €?^.

gnerctdiss IkC'

Jbipetative*

quArasiUt . be thou willing*

queirailk^ let him be vrilfing.

queirdmos 4$/, let us be willing.

queirmstnisi be you willia^.

queiraS illes, let them be wiUing.

OptAthre and Sutrjunftirc. .

que eu qu£ira, that I inay be wilUni^ &c.

queiraSf ice.

C ft Iiaper*

84 P O R t U G U E« E

imperfect. -

fue eu (juizira or quizefse^ that I were w^lllnj^.

(/uizeras or quxzifsts^ thou w^ert willing.

guizira or-f«tW/A/,- he were willing,

tfuizeratnos, ox jfiuizifsemoSy we were willing. »
ifutzerels or ifuize/seis, ' you were willing.
quizcmo or quize/sem, they were willing.

SeciMid Imperfect.

<(/ qusferia^ I (boulder would be willing, &c.

quererias, &c.

Future. .;^'

qudndo eu quiter^ when I (hall be wiiiing^ tfr.

quizeres^ &c.

Infiqitive.
.• • • ■

quercr, to.be willing.

Gerunds.

. quertndo^ being willing.

. ./.Participle.

querido^ been willing.

Note, that qucr is fometimes a conjuft£Mon,.whca
repeated in a fentence, and that it is rendered into
EngHfli by whether and or^ as, quSr vos o-tenhais
feito, quer nao, whether you have done that or.no.
But when it is not repeated, and is joined to the
particle y^, it is foinetimes rendered into Englifh
Dy at leajly as, humfe quivy one at leaft ; and fome*
tinf)es by hoiveveVy when joined in the particle que\
as c6mQ quer quefeja^ however it be. In all which
cafes, it is not to be confounded wjth the,third pcr-
fon Angular of the indicative of the verb querSrl

Take notice that the verb querir is fometimesx
ufed with the particle/^ inltead of the verb deviri
as, as cdufas nadfe queremfeitas d ^r^, things muft
not be done in a hurry.

Of

\,

/

• G R A MM' A K. 85

Of the imgular Fcr^val^r, to be worth. ^

I (hall put no other tenfes of this verb than the
prefent indicative, the imperative^ and the prefent
of tbe-fubjuixdive, none but thefe being irregular.

Indicative Mood.

vilAog

vote or vai,
valimos^
valets^
vdtem^

vale tUf
valha illt^
valhamos nos^
valii vis^
vdlhao ilUs^

que eu v&lka^
vafhas^
vdlha^
. valhamos^
valhais^ ^
valhao^

Pre/ent.

I am worth, &c.

Imperative.

be thou worth,
let him be worth,
let us be worth,
be you worth.
Jet them be worth.

Subjunftive.

that 1 may be worth, ^c.

Of the irregular Verb perddr^ to lofe.

This Verb changes the c before o of the prefent
indicative into d in the other perfons of the fame
tenfe, as well as in the other tenfes, if you except
the imperative and prefent fubjun£tive ; in which it
is conjugated in the following manner :

Indicative.

Prefent.

' phcoy 1 lofcj &c. ferdemos.

ptrdes^ ferdeis.

pirde^ pirdtm.

G 3 ' Impcra-

\

/

86 P O R TU G U E S E

'" Imperative. '

^ ptrittXL^ lofethou.

^Tca ilUr let Him l<^c. /

percdmos noYy let us Ipfe.

perdii vos, iofe you.

fercaS illes,, let them Iofe.

Subjunctive.'

« I

que eu pircd, that I may Iofe, fff^.

percas, '

pirca, &c. '

The compounds of the verb /er, as, continho^ I
contain ; detinho^ I detain, £f?r. are conjugated like

it;

Some verbs* pf this conjugation are only irregu-
lar in the participle paflive; as, efctito^ from cfcre* ,
ver ; abfdItOy from ahfoh^. . .

Thofe, that have they before o in the prefent in-
dicative change the j into g in all tenfes and per-
fons, in which the^ would otherwife meet with the
vowels / or ^ ; as, tlegfr^ to elect 5 eu^ elijo^ iu elSges^
&c. I cleft, &c.

Imperfect. Preter-def.

^elegia, &c. ^Ugi, elegejle, &c. I eleSed, &c.

The verbs ending in eyo in the prefent indica*
tive, change that termination into ia in the imper-
fe£t, and into/ in the preter-definite, and are fo con-
jugated*

Indicative. '

.

Prefent.

•

eu leyOf
les.

I readi &c.

tem&s.

ledes^

Urn.

•

Imperfefi.

eu lia,
lias, &c.

I did read, &c.

Prctcr-

GRAMMAR. 87

Pjreter deEnite.
€M /i, I read, fffr.

isfl^. ate.

Imperative.

Udmos nis^ let us read.
// /», read cboD. Udi vts, read you.
Ua /ili, let him Tead. ieao elUs^ lec tbtm read.

Subjtta£li¥e.

fue €u leaf that I may read, &c.

You may obferve that they lofe the jf through all
the other moods and tenfes. The verb crity to be-
lieve> is conjugated in the;, fame manner.

Of the frregu/ar Kerbs in Ir.

/r, to go.

Indicatire Mood.

Prefent tenfe.

vSu^ I go. vdn^oif we go.

vdSf thougoefi. ides^ you go*

vdi^ he goes. vaS^ they go.

Preterimperfcct

ita^ I did gO| &c» hiamos^

hiaSf hieis.

hia^ hiaS,

Prctcrperfect definite.

ySf, I went, /dmoSf we went.

JVfte^ thou weAteft* Joftes^ you went,
y^i, he went* j6rM^ they went.

Fretcrpcrftct.

64 Prettr

Preterpluperfect.

^ ^ Future.

irii^ I (hall or will -gOt &c«

IiDperativei.*

vdfkos nSst let ui go.
vdi tu^ so thoUy ide vis^ go ye.

va clle^ let him go, vao elUs^ let them go.

bptative and Subjunftive.

vd,
vds^

that I may gp» &c

vdmos^
vddis^

X

vaOf

%

Firft Preterimpcrfect.

fui iujora or Jo/sty that I might go, &c.

Joras oxjofses^
f3ra ox JSjse,^
fSramos ox fS/semos,
Jorcis or fS/seis^
J6rd6 oxfojstm^

Second Preterimperfcct.
/r/a, I (hould gOj &Cf

Preterperfect,

It is compofed of the participle ido and the pre«
fcnt fubjunctive of the auxiliary verb Ur.

Prcterpltiperfect.

It is compofed of the participle ido and the firft
preterimperfea fubjunflive of the auxrjiary vtfrb tbr^

Second

y

G R AM M A.R. ^ 89

^ecoMd Preterpltiperfefi.

It is compoied of the participle iii$ and the fecond
preterimperfect fubjunctive of the auiuliary verb

Futuit.

fiidndo eufor^ wheo 1 (bill go» &c*

fSres, '

Jor^

fordeSf

Jortm, J

Second Future*
qu&ndo eu tivir^ S ^j \ when I (hall have sone,

Hvirts, Sec. V '''*' / &c-

Infinitive.

Prefent.
ir, to go.
^ Gerunds.

indOf going.

Part.
idOi done.

Vify to come.
Indicative^

^ Prcfent.

vtnhOf I coQe>&c. vim&s^
viiis^ vindeSf

vfm^ Vem, •

Imperfed.

vinka, I did come, &ۥ vinhamos.
vinkas^ vinheis.

. ' ' Preter defitlit^.
vim, I camei &c. viemos.

9aff9 tnerdi.

\

Jrrecer%

m> PORTUGUESE

Prcterimpcrf€&»

iM0 vindo^ 1 have come, &c.
* tins vindo^ &c«

Future.

virH^ I fliall come, &c.

virdSf &c.

Impersltive.

venhdmos nSs, let us come.
vfm tUt comer thou. vinde vis^ c«me you.

ffinha elU^ let him come. tfenhao clUs^ let them come..

Optative.

• ^ Prcfem.

fue iu vinha.

I

ImperfeS.
que tu vtcra, or viefst.

Second Imperfe£l.
viria^ viriaSfScc.

Infinitive.

Prefeot.
viti to come.

Gerund.
vindOf coming.

Part,
^indo^ eome»

The compounds of vir ; as convify to be conve<»
nienc; fobrevir, to come unlooked for^ are con-
jugated in the fame manner.

Of the kregulir Ferksy mentir, to lie, sentir, to feelt
servir^ tofirve \ feiir^ to wound.

Thefe verbs change the / of the firft perfon fin-

gular of the prefent tenie> indicative^ into c in the

q I other

4

GRAMMA B. .. n

6ther perfons of the fame teoftt as well as in the
other tenfes and aioods> esfcept in the imperatiire
and the prefent conjun^ive, in which they are con-
jugated thus ;

Indicative.
. ^ PrefenU , ^

iujtnto. tufentes^ dU /inte^ 8lc.
eu Jirvo^ tu Jtrves^ elUjirvt, Bcc.

Imperative*

menteiu, mtnta ille^ mintdmosnSs, mcntivis^ mtntdS ilUs.
Jinit tUt ftnia ille^ Jintdmos nSs^ fmti ifos^ JfntaS elles.
Jcrv^ tu,ftrvm iUe^ Jirvdmos nos^ ftrvi vis^ JirvaZ ilUs^

Subjjonftive.

finta^ Jintas^ iccm

The compounds^ itfimntiry afsefatr^ cMfiMtr^ difi
Jitiiir^ prefentir, are conjugated like mentir and feti-
fir I and alfo the verbs affcrir, referh:, conferir, de-
ferir^ differir^ inferir.

Of the irregular Verbs affligir, to qffliS 5 conrig^, i#
corrcS^ nngir, to feign i ungir, to Mofnt-^ com-
punptr, frigir, dirigir^ tingir, cingir, &c-

Thefe verbs change the g of the infinitive mood
ioto^ in thofe tenfes where the g would />therwife
meet with the vowels 0, as in the firft perfon fingu-
lar of the prefent indicative afflijoy or a, as in the
third perfon of the imperative in both numbers, in
the firft plural of the iame Cenfe» and in the prdent
fiibjiiii£bve.

■•■■•MMii«l««MBH^M«WBHaiiMta

0/ tie irregular Ferk feguiTt tofolkw.

This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood
into iin the firft perfon fiogular of the preibnt indi-

cativCf

M PORTUGUESE

eatire, lufigo^ I follow: in the prcfent fubjondive^
fw^ ^pg^9 tb^t I max follows and in the imperative^
wbcre it is conjugated thus: figue tu^figa ilU^fig^
mos ndSjJegui vosjigao ^les.

Take notice that the u is loft in thofe tenfes where
it would otherwife meet with the vowels o and a, as
you fee in the examples; and this obfervation alfo
takes place in the verbs ^^Ar^n/r^ to dillinguiflii^
ex/inguir^ to extinguiih^ &c.

The compound are perfegulr^ to perfecute y con-
feguir^ to obtain -, profeguir^ to purfue.

Of ihe irrefftlar Verb ouvir^ to hear. .

This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood
'into f in the firft perfon fingular of the prefjsnt in-
dicative, tu Sugo^ I hear, iif. duves, &c. in the pre-
(ent fubjundive, and in the imperative mood, where
it is conjugated thus : 6uve tu, duga Hle^ mgamos nos,
l^uvi v6s, dufaS iJ^es, hear thou, &c.

0/ tie irregular, Ferb dormir, tojleep. "

This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood
into M in the firfl perfon fingular of the prefent
indicative, thus, /ir dlcrmo^ tu dSrmes, Hie dbrrhi^
&c. I fleep, iSc. In the prefent fubjunftive, que
tu iitTtnay &c. that I may fleep ; and in the impe-
Ititive moody where it is conjugated thus; dormetu^
dkrma Hie, dumdmos nSs^ dormi vos^ dirmao itUes, fleep
'thoui &r.

0/ the irregular Verb fugir, to fly away.

This verb is irregular in the prefent indicative,
' and is thus conjugated : fijoy fogeSy fogey fugimoSy
fu^s^ fozenty I run away, Qc. It is alfo irregular
in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated
thus : fqge tUy fija ilUy fiydmos n6$y fu^t visy fuJaS
Hies. Finally, it is irregular in the prelent fubjonc-
tivcj wetufigayfijaSyiK.

It

GRAMMAR. 99

It keeps the u in all other teofes and moods^ as
alfo thej-. *

The verb furgir, to arrive, or to come to an an-
" chpr, has the (^oie irregularity, and m^kef^JSrto, in
the participle paffive.

The verbs Jubirj cuhrhrj encuirir, de/cuir/r, mcu^
dir^ bul/ir, fumtr^ confumir^ cujpir^ conftmir^ tossir^ '
&c. have the fame irregularity in regard to the tetr
ter »•

Of the irregular Verk pedir, to aji.

* ' T*his verb it irregular in the firft perfon fingular
of the prefent indicative and fubjunaive, as well as
' in the imperative, in which it changes the ^ into f .

Indicative.

•■• ■ . • •

iu pffo. I aik, &c. nis ptdimos.

tupides^ vos peMs.

ilUpide^ ilia pidem^

Imperative.

. / pefdmos nos^ let ua aft.

pide tu^ aflc thou. p^di vis^ alk you.

pifdSlU^ let him alk. pi fat ilUst let ihem aft.

Subjunftive.

^ue iu pifa^ that I may aflc, &c. pefdmoi. .

P^fds^ pecdis.

pefa, pigo9^

In like manner is conjugated the verb meiir^ t#
laeafure: eumi^o^tumidesyim:. ,

Of the irregular FerS veftir, to drefs.

Indicative.

Prefent.

iu tifid^ - I drefs, 5kc. 9eflimos.

vijles^ vefiis.

vefte^ vcftem. . . ^

fchperative.

m PORTUGUESE

Prcterimpcrf€&»

tinh0 vindo^ 1 have come, &c«
* tins vindo^ &c.

Future.

virH^ I fliall come, &c.

virdsp &c. »

Impersltive.

vchhdmos nis^ let us come.
vim iUf comer thou. vinde vis^ cume you.

' vittha ell$t let him come. tfenhao cUes^ let them come..

Optative.

' • " . Prefent.

fue iu venha.

ImperfeS.
que tu viera, or viefst.

Second Imperfe£l.
viria^ tdrias^Scc.

Infinitive.

Prefeot.
vSu to come.

Gerund.
vindOf coming.

Part.
^SndOf comer

The compounds of vir; as cofivlr, to be conve*
niencs fdrevir, to come unlooked for^ are con-
jugated in the fame manner.

Of tie irrfguldr Ferh, mentir, to lie, sentir, to fetl^
servir^ toptvi \ feiir^ to wound.

Thefe verbs change the / of the firft perfon fin-
|uktf of the prefent tenie> indicative^ into c in the

6RAMMAB. .. n

dther perfons of the fame teolt,. as well as in the
other tenies and inoods» except in the imperative
and the prefent con)un£tive, in which thejr are con*
jugated thus ;

Indicative.

Prefent.

iu miniOt iu mniu^ $IU mimie, &c
hifinto. tufcntes^ eUeJenU^SLC.
iujirvo^ tujtrves^ dUJirve^tcz.

Imperative*

mentefu, minta ille^ mintamcsnis^ mentivis, minidSilUs.
Jinte iUt fmia elle^ fintdmos nSs, find 90s^ JsntaS iUes.
fifvt tu/fifvm ilU. firodmos nos^ firvi vis^ jirvtiS ilUs*

Sal]9im£Hve.

mintdf Msnias^ &c.
' finta^ /intas^ iLC
Jirva^ Jirvms^ &.C. .

I

The compounds^ difitanfir, afief^fr, r$$tf!mtSr, Jifi
jMir^ prefentir^ are conjugated like mentir and /«i.
//V; and alfo the verbs affcriry refcrir, cfmferir^ de^
ferity differify inferir.

Of the irregular Verbs affligir, to affliS ^ corrij^, H
correBy fingir, to feign i ungir, (o anoint ^ com-
punptr, frigifs dirigir^ tingir, cingir, &c-

Thefe verbs change the g of the infinitive mood
mto^' in thofe tenfes where the g would />therwife
meet with the vowels 0, as in the firft perfon fingu«.
lar of the ptefent indicative afflijo-y or a, as in the
third perfon of the imperative in both numbers, in
the firft plural of the fame tenfe» and in the preient
fiibJQii£bve.

Of the irregular Verb feguiTt tofolhw.

This verb changes the e of the infinitive niood
into iin the firft perfon fiogulw: of the prefent indi-

catitrCf

W P O R T U G O ES E /

eative, lufigo^ I follow: in the prcfent fubjun£liv4v
fw^ ^fig^j tbkt I max follows and in the imperative^
where it is Conjugated thus: figue tu^figa Ule^figit-^
mos HoSy/egui vosyjigao illes.

Take notice that the u is loft (n thofe tenfes where
it would otherwife meet with the vowels o and a^ as
you fee in the examples; and this obfervation alfo
takes place in the verbs ^^i^fn/r, to diftiinguiflu
ex/inguir^ to extinguilh, &c.

The compounds are perfeguir^ to perfecute ; con-
feguir^ to obtain; profeguir^ to purfue.

Of ihe irregular Vnb ouvir, to hear. . .

This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood
into f in the firft perfon fingular of the prefpnt in«
dicatfve, tu Sufo, I heary /i^ duves, &c. in the pre-
(ent fubjundive, and in the imperative mood, where
it is conjugated thus : 6uve tu, duga Hle^ ougamos nos,
iuvi ^6s, dufao Hies, hear thou, &c.

Of the irregular, Ferbi^oxmix, to Jleep. , '

This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood
into M in the firft perfon fingular of the prefenC
indicative, thus, iu dkrmoy tu dbrmeSy Hie dbrtke^
&c. I fleep, iSc. In the prefent fubjunftive, que
tu iUrtMy &c. that I may fleep ; and in the impe-
Ititive mood, where it is conjugated thus; dormetu,
dkrma ille, durmdmos nSs, dormi vos, dUrnu^ Hies, fleep
'thoui &r.

Of the irregular Ferb fugir, to fly away.

This verb is irregular in the prefent indicative,
and is thus conjugated : fijo, fbges, fbge, fugimos,
Ju^s^ figem, I ran away, W<. It is alfo irregular
in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated
thus : fqge tu, fija ille, fiydmos n6Sy fun vis, fujaS
Hies. /Fmally, it is irregular in the prelent fubj one-
live^ me ^/^'4,/4/iii,&c.

It

. . < -"

It keeps the u in all other teofes and moods^ as .
alfo the J-. *

The verb furgir, to arrive, or to come to an an-
chor, has the (^oie irregularity, and XMkeffJSrto, in
the fiarticiple paffive.

The verbs Jubir, cuirify encnirir, de/cuir/r, mcu^
Sr^ iul/ir, fumtTj confumirj cujpir, confimir^ tosslr^ '
&ۥ have the fame irregularity in regard to the tetr
ter »•

Of the irregular Verb ipeAir, to mji.

' 'This verb it irregular in the firft perfon fingular
of the prefent indicative and fubjunaive, as well as
in the imperative, in which it changes the ^inxbg.

Indicative.

iu pfgo. I zfkt &c. nis pedimos.

tupides^ ws pedis.

ilUpede. ilia pidemi

Imperative.

pefdmosnos^ let ua aft.
pide tu^ aflc thou. pedt vis^ alk you.

ptfdillt^ let him alk. pifat illu. let ihcm «ft.

' • ■

Subjunftive.
^ut Su pica, that I may aflc, &c. pefdmoi. . '

pcfa^ pega9'

In like manner is conjugated the verb medlr, t#
laeafure: tumigo^tMfnfdesyia:.

Of the irregular FerS veftir, to drefs.

Indicative.

Prefent.

€u tAfo^ I dreft, Sec. wefitmos.

vefies^ ^ vejits.

Iihperativc. /

94 P O R T U Q U E S E

Imperative.

vijleiu^ cirertthou. ve/litiSs, dfefs you. *

' xHjfla ttU^ let him drefs. viftdS itits, let them drefs*

Subjundive.

Prefipnt* »

queeuiAJa, Uiat I may dfeff , Ice. viftdmos.

ylftaSt \ vt/idis.

vifta^ . viftai.

In all other tcnfes and moods it keeps* the letter
Vtxe\ and in like manner is conjugated the ifterb

OftU irrfgniar Verk forlir, iofurmfi^ or ftock.

Feyjo fays, that the o of this verb is to be changed
into «, in thofe tenfes where the / is followed by e
or tf, and that it is to be kept, when the / is followed
by/; but in the F&kula dos planHas we read, furtk
^iytOy it took effeft : and \x\Andrade 2 part. Apohget.
we r^zd, nao fortirao fffeyti^^ where the ytxhforthai
is in the fame tenfe^ viz. in the preterperfeft defi-
nite ; therefore nothing can be determined about
the irregularity of this verb.

0/ the irregular Verb carpir, to weep, ,

This verb is^ defeftive, and is only ufed in thofe
tenfes and perfbns where the^ is followed by / ; as
carpimos^ carpk^ we weep, you weep* Preterimper-
fc£if ^arpiOf car^ss^ &ccJ 1 did weep» i^c.

Of the irregular Verb parir, ft Mngforih young as 4mf

female d$th.

Indicative Mood.

iu petiro^ I bring foni^ iftc* parim^s.

p&res^ par IS.

ftbrc^ pdrenu

Imperfefi*

Imperative*

/

GRAMMAS. !l!5

• • .y

n .

Imporative MoocL

faitmnosm
pin iUt bring thou forth^ &c. far/,
pairaillat piiraS.

Subjun£live.

Prcfcnu *

que iu paira, that I may fay, &c* pairamos.
pairas^ ' pairais.

paira^ • pairaSm

• • *

' . fadicativrf.

' Prefcnt.

repilOy I repeat, &c« repetimos.

repetts^ * v repetis.

Ttpitt\ repHtm.

Imperfe£l.

teptAa^ rtpetias^ Bcjc'^

Pretcrperfcft defiote.

repeti^ repctiste^icc.

Imperative.

teplUtUy repeat thou, &c. , repitdmos^^.
repita elU,

Subjun£tlve.

Prefent.

que iu repita^ that I may n^peat^ ^c.
•repftns.&c.

Imperfe£l. *

repetira\ (x repetifse^ that I might repeat.

Of the inefftlar Verhi sahir^ to go ot$t, and cahir^ to

fall.

^ Indicative.

. Pfefent.

Jh^% Igoout, &c» fahimoSi,

Jakes. fahis.

jHfuf: ;: Jdhem.

^ Pretenmperfea, ;, , ,;

Jahta^ fahiqst &c.

Pretcr-

\
1

S6 PjQ R T U G U ES E

f, Fretoperfm definite.
fahi,JakisU, &c.

Ifpperative.

fahdmos nos.
Jake /»• J^f ^^•^•

Jay a clle\ j4/^ Hies.

Subjun£live.

^ue eu fdya^fayas^Scc.

This is the common way of writing the irregular
tenfes of the vtthfahir as well as thole of the verb
Cflhir^ viz. ou cayOi in cihesy &c. I fall, i^c. according
to Ftyjo. . '

Of the irregular Verb, ordir, to warp in a horn.

Feyjo fays that this verb changes the o into «, in
thofe perions where it would otherwife meet wifh
the fyllables da^ de^ do.

Of the irregular Verb advertir, to warn.

Advertir is irregular in the following tenfes j. only
by changing vir into vfyr^

Indicative.

Prefent.

advirto^ I warn, &c. advertimos.

advirtes^ advertis.

adverte^ advertem.

Imperative.

advirtimos nvs.
adpirte ?», warn thou, &c. adverti vos.

adviria elte^ advirtdS elles.

Subjun£tive. .

Prefent. v

*qtu iu advfridi that I may warn, &c. adviriimos.
advirtaSf Mdtnrtiis.

adviria, advirtai.

The

-\

6 R A M M A R. 97

Tie CiM^gatwM ^tit hregubr Feri pdr> to pUce.

Indicative.
Prefeou

pSnho^ I put, Sec. pomos.

pSens^ ' . ' \ ' pondes.

Preterimperfefi. '

pinhd\ I did put. pUnhamos. ^

pinkaSf * piinheism

piinha^ punkaS.

• Preterperfe^ definite*

/,^p^%^ Iput, &c. pttzemos. ' *

putefte^ puzejies.

pSz^ pu^ra5,

,.; Preterperfect.

It is compofed of the prefent indicative of the
auxiliary verb /^^ and tht participle pdfto.

Preterpluperfeft,

It is compofed of the participle pd/lo, and the
imperfe£t of the auxiliary verb tir.

Future.

pord^ I fliall or will put, &c. poremos.
poras^ poteis.

pora^ porao.

Imperative.

ponhdmos nis*
^o^m, put thou, &c. ponde vos.
ponh^iUe, ponhaiilUs.

Optative and Subjun£);ive*

Prefent.

que iu ponha^ that I may put, &c.
ponhos^ &c.

Firft Prctcrimperfeft.

que iu, puzerm or pu^iffe^ that I might put, &c. '
puziras or puM'tSi &c.

H Second

4

9», PDRTU^GUESE

eu porta, I Offfi^ {|ut, &c.

poriss^ Sec. ' -

Prcterpcrfcft,

. It is compofed of tl;^^ participle pSJIo, fj^uj. the
prefent fubjvinftive of ^auxiliary verb //;;*

Pr^^pJiMf,^Kfei^
It is compofed 9j(thje p;^rticiple)^safid^^l^ firft i
preteriniperfe£); fubJ^^xl^^e of the aaxiliarjcy^m^f^*

Second Pr^t^rpluperfed.

It is compofed. o& tioe ^axtkiph pdfio, and the
fecond preterimper^^^ 6lbjun6):iye of tho aiudtjarjr
verb /^r.

Future.
quando eu pufir\ - wfaen I (hall put, &ۥ

r

It is compofed of tl;i^' ^^iciple pdjo, and the fv* '

tn^it^Vjei.

Gerund.
p4,ndOf putting*

. txA<{K put-
After the fame 9»aimei^ are cosju^atedc the lAprbs

derived from p(m\ as C99vp6r^ to compoife j ^^pAr,

to difpofe ; prpp^.^if^ propqfe, %.

Some verbs are irregular only m the participle .

paffive ; as aterto, from ahir ; efcrito, from e/a-e-

vir, &c.

Of Virb^^ H^tm^

Verbs ^uter. a;cfrt|iQfe whiQ^gDfcfil((^at<jQTO^^
fente of themfelves> and da ^o& ^m^em anji^ c^ie af--

.1* ter .

as A u M A%. «y

tQt tkMi^ like tfie trei^s »B!i ve ; di iAr^r^ t • fliee^;
tfickijir,. f o go I tnsmir, to ttemble, &c. But yoit
mull take notice that we meiet with fome- verbs^ieu^
tef which may govern, an accqfetive ^ as dormir hum
fdno pqfiiHils^. tp flectp foundly j ^»/«/ anddndo mS%
canitnh^ t iu6 d^ bumo: paiavra^ I went my wa5r;
and fflid not a Wdrd. We may alfo fay, that the^
T#ri)». «Mt!e[f are l^boTi)' whtcl^i in their compoundi
t«olSr%.af^feIdi^m orf Qj9v<9r conjugaited with the vesbi
^^fc^i to^bd 5 m% I iteepk, I tijcJmbJe^ I f^aJc, &c. We
mtgf? mfioed ^y. ^n (inhc d^rmdQ^ I have flept ; iu
ifnhirtmijdoy. V have trembted ;. but Bot» I am flept^
&c« 1 f^JfiU^m^ beeatufe fometim;e& the verb$>
iMMter ili«j( b^ conjugated with the verb yir; as^
7^ 60mfaiiUid(^^ to h^ve a^ good oame.

Iti IS oQCfflary lo^ be aoqUajht^d witib tl^e nature
o£ « ifferb; Devter^ £o i^void nMftal^et jn tjbo partioii-
ple^ at Buijr hn* inw m tbe %QtaK of Participles.

Of SLedpocat Ferbs.

The^ ttatnp of Reciprocal Verbs fe glvM to fiich
as retUfii tl^e aOioji upon, tbe agent, a:nd affe conju-.
^ted tlhroogb alt their tenfes with t!h<e^ pronouns

Example.

ftidicatif e. Preftttt.

eVfme arrepcnd'o, ' I repent, &c«

tU tiarrtpindcs, /

IRi'fejarupindi, &c. ;

ImperfeEl.
^i >^,^ c^rrtptndiiki t did repent, &c.

aii(i£^^the i«ftw

Yet Wi3^ sfre ta t^^kOrfto^ij^ that the pronouns con*
junftive mCy te, &c. may be placed either before
W aft^ t^. yerb«. iiei. th^ indicative, and confequent-

ifW^Vf^^^x^f'^^^i^^^ Of ^ Umbff^me, Ire*

H 2 member ;

V

100 P O.'R T U G U E S E •

member y m^ /emirei, or lembrei-mey Irememheredy
8ic. But in the imperative they ought to be placed
after the verb, as in the following

, Example.

Umbremo^nos nos.
Umbra-te tu, remember thou, &c. lembrduvos v6s. . >
Umbre-Je ille^ limbremjt ilUs, , ;

' In which example you muft obferve alfo, that the •
^ firft perfon plural, which in the other verbs is like J
^ the firft perfoii plural oftheprefentfubjunftive, has
the laft confonaht, i, cat off ; arid fo from lembr6mos
we cut off the X to make lembrimo-nos ; and from
arrdpenddmos we make antpendamo^noi^ &c. In re- '
gard to. the infinitive, we ni^y fay, hi necefs&rio ar^i
rependdr-fe dos pe^cAdbs, it isneceffary to repeht fihs;
htnecefsario lembrdr-^fe fit is neceffary to remembfer ;
zmd not/e arrependir, ot fe lembrar. In like man** •
ner we may fay, lembrdndO'tney remembering, and ntA.
me lembrdndo. Yet vou muft take notice that the
prefent infinitive rriay be preceded by the particle
p^a^ (whicli forms the Portuguefe fupine)^.and
then the prftobun conj unfilive may be placed pither
before pv after it ; and fo we fay, par(i lembrir-
Je^ or para felembr&r, to remember, or in. order to
remember.

As for thefubjunftive mood, you muft put the
pronoun conjundlive before the prefent j but you
muft carefully qbferve, that the pronouns conjunc-
tive muft be placed before it when prepeded by the
particles fSy if, que^ that; ,and fo you may fay, que
in me lembrafse^ fe eu me lembrdfsey that I might re-
member, &c. but not que eu lembrafid me, &c. But
when the firft preterimperfefit is hot preceded by any
particle, then you muft place the pronoun conjuhc-
tive after it ; as, arrepe^tdiram^e iu difso^ I wifti I re-
pented it.

■- In the fecond preterimperfeft we may pkce the

pronouns conjunftive either before or ^fter it, therCr

^ -fore

^ GRAMMAR." lOi

fore 700 may fay arrependeria^me fa^ &c. or in me or*
rtpenderia fe^ &c. I fhould repent if, &c.

In the future you muft.always place the pronouiis .
conjundive before it ; and fo we noay fay, qudndo iu
me Umbriar^ when I fhall remember ; but not- qudndo
6u leTnhr&r-me.

Note, all the verb's a£live may become recipro-
cals.

Example. ,

£u nu dmOf I love royfelf.

iu te dmas, tbou loveft thyfelf.

cUeJe dnuiy he loves biinf<elf.

tips, fios amdmos^ we love ourfelves, &c.

The Conjugation of the reciprocal Verb ir-fe, iogo away.

Indicative.

Prefent.
iu me vSu^ I go away.

tu te vdsy &c. thou goeft away, &c«

♦ -

Preterimperfed.

eume hia^. I did go away.

tu te bias, &c. thou didft go away, &c.

' ' . Preterperfca definite.

eu mcfdi; I went away.
tu ttjojlty &c. thou wenteft away, &c.

Prcterperfect. * •

iu me tinho ido^ I am gone away, or I have gone away.
tu te tins ido, &c. thou baft gone away, &c.

' Preterpluperf ect.

eu me tinha ido. I was gone away, or I had gone away*
tu te tinhas idoj &c. thou hadft goile away, &c.

Future. .

^u me ireii &c. I fliall or will go away.
iu te irdsj &c. thou fhalt go away.

Imperative.

vdute^ ' go thou aws^.

vd-fe^ let him go away.

vdmo^noSf let us go away.

ide-vost go away, get away, or get you gone.

vdorjk^ : Tetthem;ffo away.

. . "^ H3 Suk.

102 FOfiTTS GXSnSE

Scrbjun€Uve.

Pnefcnt*

, jue eu me vd, ttat I ijiay py aWay*

fue tu te vms,^ &c* that thoa' mayeft go awaf « Ulc.

Firft Preteiioiperfipa.

/tf me/ora^ or mefqfse, I went away.
te/dras, or ttjojsts^ ftc^ tljP* wenteft away, &c.

Second Pret^rimi^Qrfed .

ru »^ fria» i would, ft€« |g>^^ay.

;i^ ^ 2>i«5; thou wottWlAi llt€«

Pretcrpcrfcd.
^titf iu me tinha ido^ th^t I have gon^ away, &c;

Prcterph^frfefl.
^ti^^tt m^ tivira^ or x»^ tivifse idg^ that I had gone awiqr*

SecMd Fretefphiperfeft.
eu me teria ido, | (hoiild bsiv(p ^ne away, &ۥ

f otttre;

qudndo eu meJSr^ when I fliall go away, &c.

SecoMi FttHirt.
qudndo eu fiietivir ido^ when t (hall have gone away, ^c.

In!iniliire.

^^-A » go away.

PreteryerfcfU

ier-fe ido^ Ic^ b^vt ^one away.

PreM.

^uejcfd^ thtt s gone a«Ni]^

' Pieiem*

C R A M M A IL IM

Gerunds.

Supoie;.
para irje^ to go* or in order to go away.

You muft obferve, that m tte coilif>oUnd tenfes
ihe pronouns ¥Hei ^tfSec. are pltt<^d before the aux-
iliary^verb.

2dly. This verb is alfb faid of veBBli to fignify
thv^ir beibg leaky ; as f^ai^/e a cuht^ the tab Mi1cs«
it is ^Ifo afed before the genimls; it, # dnfimt
vii'fe tKbidikhf the wibter is drawing toUrardk an
end ; ilksbad^Jeprpm^nJhi ifiey ire {>reparitig theiti^
felves : in which examples and in the like, the verb
is to E)« retidered into BngliSt by tfie yferb io ie it-
ibtf^ and willhaiii addition of the adverb awtiy ; and
fefnetim^s it is jilaqed before fhe.prefent ihfiaitWoi
as^ ir-fc dettaty to go to bed.

This verb is to b« conjugated like ^ne verb vir ;
but you muft place the pronount conjunctive^ me^
tiy &c. according to the bbfervatiohs vf^ bkve made
above.

\ m

Oftherecip^mmtf^iic-%hS^ie.

This is a compoui^d verb, vJ^KWh Is fd be conju«
gated by/ put ting; thg particle a befotfe &ih verb vir
in all its tenfes and moods ; * $ut you muft alwavs

mate

« '

J

I

104 P O R T ITG U E S E

make ufe of the obfervations alread]^ made about
the pronouns conjunftive ; and the fam6 care muft
be had with the reciprocal verb havtr-fe^ to behave j
in^ the conjugation of which, you have nothing to
do but to add the pronouns conjun£tive to the verb
kavir.

Imperfonal Verbs.

There are three forts of verbs, imperfonal, which
have, only the third perfon fingular.

The firft are properly imperfonak of themfelves ;
as, • .

. : • , fuccede^ it happens.

/ 1 . a bafta^ it is enough, or it fuffices.

chive^ it rains.

iroveja^ it thunders.

. The fecond are derived from verbs aftive, fol-
lowed by the particle fe^ which renders them im-
perfonal ; as, dma-fey they love ; diz-fSy they fay ;
nota-fe^ it is noted. They are alfo called paffivc
imperfonals.

» ^ The third, which have a great affinity with re-
ciprocal verbs, are conjugated' with the pronouns
conjundive, me^ te, He, nos, vos, Ihes ; as, dae me,
die^tey doe-Met &,c.

r

" The imperfonal verbs of themfelves are,

cofpoem^ it is convenient.
fuccede^ it happens, or it falls out.
ejid-me iem, it becomes me.
idfia, it is enough*

hd^fe^ it is neceuary. '

ehovifca^ it mifles.
chive^ or cihe pedra, it hails.
gea^ it freezes.
neva^ it fnows.

fuTila^ or rdampagufa^ it lightens*
em^^r/a, it matters/ it concerns*
parcce^ it feems.

and

GRAM M A>R. 105

aQd#4he like, which are conjognteid with the third
perioDS, fiogular of each tenfe ; as, ' .

X V

Indicative.
Prefent.
chove^ It rams.

Imperfefi.
chovia^ it did raiiu

Preterperfe£l definite.
ckoveo^ it rained.

PrcterpcrfeS.
Um ckovidoj it has rained.

PreterpluperfeS.
iinha chovido^ it had rained.

Future.
chovera. it fhali or will rain/

Imperative.

chSva\ let it rain.

Optattive and Subjunfitive.

Prefent.
que chSva^ that it .may rain.

Imperfe6l.

que chivera^ or chovejfe^ that it might rain.

Second Imperfe6l.
choverta^ it Ihould rain.

Future.
qudndo chovir^ when it ihall rain.

Second Future.
qudndo tlvir cha^do^ when it fliall have rained.

Infinitive.

choviTf to rain.

The

i

lOS P OR T U G UES E

The particle ir^ wbkth compofes the {bc^)nd -ibrt
of imperfonal verbs, mliy be placed either before or
after them ; ais, dizfCy they fay; shbe-se^ it is known ;
sabia se^ it was known; tog^ s^ s6ube^ it was imme*
diately known; sediz^ it iB faid,£5?r.T)ut fometiraes
tb^y make no ufe of the particle se^ and only put
' the verb in the third perfoo plural; as, dizem, in-
ftead of se dlz^ they fay.

In like manner all the verb9 a£tive may become
imperfonal.

In regard to thefe verbs, take notice, that when
the*noun that follows them is in the Angular num-
ber, you muft. put the verb in the Angular ; if the
noun be in th6 pltli^l, you pilt thfi^ferb in the plu-
» ral.

iExampte.

Louva-ft o capitao^ they praife the captain.
Louvat-ft OS c&pitais^ thtey praifbthe daptains*
Vi-ft hum homtm^ they fee a man,
Vim-ft homens, they ft6 taetl.

When Ihe is ufed aftfef the wdl^dj^, then Ike is to be
^ " rendered into Englifh by his or her : as, Iduva-se-lhe
valfyr^ they praile his or her courage.
' The third fort of injperfonal verbs are fuch as arc
conjugated with the pfottouns pfiffoll^, me, te^ lie,
&c. with the third perftMi fingular.

Ex^rrtpie.
Indicative.

Prefent.

defagrdda me^ I tih Aitpleafed, or it difpleafes me.

(U/agruda.tt^ tbou art lAfpltafeili

dtfagrada4hcy he ^r (he is difpleafcd.

dejagrdda-nos^ t^'eaiiS dffWeafed.

^figriia^t^ifi ]^U are drnkM^d*

dejagrada-lhts^ they are dilplea fed.

I&iperfe^,

^defagraddt^iKtt^ 1 1»^ clifpleafed.

Prcter-

V

G R A M M A K. «n

dvfagfjatiou'mt. I was di^Jealcd.

Optative*.

. Imperfefl.
fMU mc dosagraiatm •r mi desagradijfi^ that I werc4i4>tiafi94.

CoDJugatfe after tire fame tbanidtr.

iieMe, \\ g^ie^s t^^ li paths «*.

i^rsda-MbCi tt plftafcf knc4
iembr4)'me^ I reniember. ^

perfon iingular and plural ; as,

die me a pirna^ my leg pains me.
dicm^m «> ^f^s, I \xk^ Ibr^ %>1si.
o vojfo x>€]iidofarUc' me novo^ your coat appears new to me*
§s vbjfo^ sapm^ me parhenk wdiio (mmfpridos^ yoor (hoes
feem to me too long.

Of the t^erb ^x, io be.

The verb ser is alfo uf^d as an imperfonal^ as it
appears in #be foHewiAgp etMiptett: m Hr^4e U-
vanthr-sty it is time td gSet trp j ha timpo de hir^ it
was time to go, &ff. ^i^ pftrticularly when it is con-
jugated with the adi(e6lives^^<i^ori2r^ji//n(9 ; as^ he
frecijo or necefshrio fazerifio^ ih\s muft be done; era
precl/o or necefsim ^^i^NH/6^, It W»l>»eceffary to write j

i»iria,/i^pr§^^lm4^}Mto, if it ftould bene^

ceflary^

V' ^

108 P .O R T U G U E S E

ceffary ; hi precifo que iu vi, I muft go ; he prtcifo
que tu leya^ I muft read \ he precifo que tile cdmay he
muft eat ; sefia pr^^o que iu fSfse^ I fhould go.
You fee by the laft examples, that when the verb
fer and th? adjeftive are before the, coDJun£live
mood, with the participle que^ the conjun£live is ren-
dered in Englifh by the infinitive 5 but if the verb
fer is followed by the relative or particle que^ it
muft then be rendered in Englifh in the following
manner ; as iu he que tenho fe'to aquillo^ 'tis I who
have done that; tu he que tens, fefr. 'ti^ thou who
haft, &c. iUe hi que tem^ ^c. 'tis he who, &c. nos
hi que timoSj&LQ. 'tis we who have, &c. vos he que
• ihides^ tffc. 'tis you who have, &c. tl/es hi que tern,
. &fr, 'tis they have^ &c. a Ify he que mdnda^ 'tis
the law that prefcribes it ; ilia hi que cri^ 'tis (he
who believes it; Hies hi que fizirao ? \%\\ they
have done it ? iu hi que ofiz^ 'twas I who did it; en-
tio hi que iu tokio as minhas medidas^ 'tis then I take
my meafures ; entai he que tu viy 'twas then I faw,
or only then I faw. i ou may obferve that que is
not relative in the laft exan^ples, and that it is left
out in Englifl).

• Of the Verb haver, when it is imperfonal.

*

It is to be fo conjugated.
Indicative.

Prefent.

»*

hd, or naS hd^ there is, or there is not, or there are, or

there are not. ^

• • • *

Imperfefi. ^

h^via^ there was, ^r there w^re.

.Preterperfe£l definite. ./, '. . ' v ,

hSuve^. there ymr<^ there wcfe^- -^

; .^ . l^reter-

GRAMMAR. 100

* PretcrperfcQ.

tern havidoy there has been ^r there have beeou

Preterpluperfeft,

tinh4^k'avid0^ tl^c^ had bechl

■ ■ ' ■ . ^ ■ ■ .

Futui^r ^
haver a ^ there (hall be. .-' ". ^

*»••

( -•

•9

«

■ r
4.' . ^

Imperative.

hdja^ let there be..

■ ' ' '

Optative and Subjunftive. '

que hqja^ ) that there may be.

Im'perfeft. ■■ ^■

que' houvera or houve/Te^ that there were.

* . Second ImpeifeS.

kaveria, there would be.,

PreterperfeQ.
' f «< te'nha hdvidcKy if there had b^en. ..

Preterpluperfeft.
fe tivejfe kavido. if there had been. ' :'

Puture. •• :'i

^ qudndo houver, whenthere willWfliall be. ■'.';

• ■ •. ' ■

I ■ I

\

Second Future.

.^1. *

quando tiver'havido, when there iliall have been. r

Infinitive.

. ■ i A. I.'

haver ^ :»there to be* i
. . • ^ Pret.

ter havidoy there to have b'een.

Gerunds.

« . • .' _

;, havendoy there being.

tendo havidoy in there having bceh.

Thofe who learn Portuguefe are greatly at a lofs
bow to render the following expreffions,/W^w «^/;

U

8

114 PORTUGUESE

There are three forts of participles ; hamely» ac-
tive, paffive, and abfolute.

The aftive participles are corapofed of the verb
tif i as, tenio am&do^ tinha amadoy &c. ^

The paffive participles are preceded by the verb.
Jir, to be ; ikSy/6u amhdo^findo louvado^ &c. ^

The paffive participles are of the fame Mature
as thbfe called abfolute ia Latin ; and you mull ob-
ferve, that having; and bewg are often left out in P6r«-
*tuguc<fe, ,

E X A M P- L E.

4

• I ^^

Feito iftoy having done this.,

Ditd tfto, having faid fo.

Acab&da a cta^ after he or they have fupped.

The auxiliary and participle are not always im*
mediately joined together in compound tenfes; as,
Uos tSmoSy com a gydga de Dios^ vencido os nofsos ini-
mi^oSy we have, by the grace of God,. overcome bur
enemies.

SSS3S5 S!r » S

s=^ .

CHAP. VI. • .'

Of the Adverbs.

-^ ^ * ■ ■

'T'HE adverb is that which gives more or Icfs force '
to the verb.

The adverb has the fame effeft with the verb as
tlie adjeftive with the fubftantive : it explains the
accidents and circumftances of the a6tion of the
verb. * ^

There are a great man^ forts j as, adverbs oF
time, place, quantity, &c. ^

Adverbs of time; as, at prefent, prifefUemente i
noyv, agora ; - yefterday, onrem s to day, Aoje 3 neve^,

niinca;

GRAMMAR. 115

n&nca ; always^ /impre-, in the mean time ; enire-
idnio.

Adverbs of place ; as, where, inde-j here, aqui'^
from whence, dSnde-, there, aH\ from hence, da->
qui; above, cm ctma ; below, em baxo ; far, ISnge ;

, Adverbs of* quantity i as, how much, quanta ;
how many, qudntos \ or fudntas ; fo much, tinto ;
mixch^ m^iio I XiXXlty pSuco.

A great miany adverbs are formed^ from adjec-
tives, changing o into aminte ; J&taOjfantamitae^ holi-
ly-; rico, ricamfytte, ncMy I douto^ doutamhtCyW^xnc^-

ly. \ . ;

From adjeftives in ^ or/ we likewife form adverbs, ,
by adding m^nte to them ; as,

Conjidntey conjlantemintej conftantly.

JDUiginte^ diligent eminte^ diligently-

Prudintey prudefitpnentey prudently.

FiHyjUlmhtey^i2L\xM\i\\y.

in order to affift the memory of thofe who are
learning the Portuguefe language, I have here col-
lected a large number of adverbs, which, by fre-
quent, repetition, may be eafily retained, efpecially
tnofe terminated in minte.

A ColleSiion of Adverbs.

AbundantemenUy abundantly AdeoSy farewell.

Cwn razaZ^uJiamenUyjuilly Admiravelminte, "^ , .

Abfolutamtntty abfolutely. Maravilhofaminte^ > ^ /?^*

A EfcackapemaSy op a caval- As mil maravUhas,j ^^ ^*

. leirOy a-firadille. AJlutamintt^ cunningly.

Afora^ or por hora^ now at Atreifoadamentey Treacher*
this time. oufly. .

^a^tfr<i;^,now»imKiediate]y Dt maravilhay vtty feldom.

CofkcondifiZ^\vfQncolii^ilon A miudo^ often.

Depdriff afide. ^ ^^^' ^^*

De travizy aflcew, afquint; TaS/io.

», clhdr de travez^ to look A'prtjfa^ in hailei

aikew, or afquint. FacUmenU, eafily.

ASualniente^ adually. Ao aviffo^ or as apeffas^ the

DepropqfiiOf^UT^oiely, wrong fide outward.

I s Dt

H9

P Q R T V Q V E ? E

D<! u/ifirovifot or imfrovj/ar

z«/;2/tf, at' unawares. ♦
ATUigaminte^ anciently.
Quafi^ p ret ly near, alirioft.
Entdo^ then.

IXifdt tniAo^ fmcethat time.
Dtfde iiwdn4o ? fince when ?
D^ qudii^o OiCd?, from what

tirxie ? bow long ?
. De quando &m qudndo^ now

end then, ever and anon.
^udnjio btm^oxain da qudntOy
-aibrit, although it Ibould
bcw . *
Quando muito^ at the moft.
. Qucrn^p miuGS^ at leall.
X'c, here, or hither.
L&^ there.
Ali^ there, in that place.

^there, exprefles the
place where ftands the
Ahi^ < perfon fpoken to; as,
\ aju onae eft as ^ diere
(^whereyou are.
. Acola, there.
TVflz, or detrdz, behind.
Para traz,^ backward.
I'Jio he, to wit.
Em viz, inftead.
Tamhim, al fo.

Logo/{ut, J

J}<? penfddq^ wilfully.

Acafo, by chance.

FixamenU, ftedfaftly.

Final/nente, finally.

Livreminte^ freely.

Mtiito, muQh.

Deprejfa, quickly.

Aouiy here.

Ate aqui^ as far as here, or
till now, or hitherto.

D*aqui em didnte, hencefor-
ward, or hereafter.

Bim, well. : . ' -

A'manhd^, to-Qidrrow.

A*manhaa pela mahkdH^ to-
morrow jnorning.

BtfpSis d^ d mdnkSa^ after
to-morrow..

Uitimaminte^ \^9i^J^ • . ;,

Como^ as.

C6m,o^ bowt

Cido^ foon, .

Tdrde^ late.

Primeiro gue^ before tkat. "

Primeiro ^ 2^^/iik/^,be(preaU.
or in the firft place. ^ . :

Foray abroad^ avtf .

ydy already.

Defdlto, at on^ jump.

De quando em qndndo^ from
time to time.

Antes, before.

hefpSis^ afterwards,

Jfuntamintt, togeth^rk

EnteiramentCy entirely.,

A'o redor^ or em torn.o^ahcifaLl

De balde, in vain.

Loucamente, madly,

Muito, very. •

Atrevidamente^ bdidly.

Felicemtnte, happily^ . '"

Vergonho/amente^ fhamefullj

Nunc a, never.

Nui%ca mais^ never fince.

Logo^ immediately.

Ainda, yet; as, ainda nS^
ve'iOf he is not cpme yet,

Ainda, even; ^A^feriu ve**
gonha ainda ofalldr n^o^
it were a (hame ^ven tq.
fpestk of it.

Nemje quer, eveiu

Vilminte, bafely. ,

Mai, ill.

Mais, more. ■ • ^

Menos, left.

Ati, until ^r'evcn.

Sim, yes. .

GRAMMAR. 117

Kdo^no^ not. fitinrfp, trhpn.

Cniie, where. NiJa^ nothing.

De cir^ by heart. yerocdtirayfunU^ trtiiy.

A*s vezes, fiunetimcs, from Dintro, within.
ume to time. Dcvsg^r^ fofti y.

^fc faahafc^MMJi

CHAP. VIL

O/th Prepofitwns.

PREPOSITIONS are a part of fpeech indedih-
able, nioft commonly fet before a noun> a pro-
noun, or verb.

Every prepofition requires Tome cafe after it, us
you will fee in the follQwing colleftion :

Gfenitive.

^ntts do </f«, before day.break.

Didnte de DeoSy before God.

Dentro da igreja, within the church. .

De traz do paldcio^ behind the palace.

Debdxo da mefa^ under iht ttiible.

Em cima da mefa^ upon the table.

Alem^ befidfes.

JUim dos mdres^ on that fide of the fcas.

AUm diJfo^'htfiAtt that, moreover.

iAlim de qm, idem.

Aquem, or ddquem dos mares ^ on this fide of the feas.

Ao redor^ or em contorno da cid4de^ round about the city.

Per to de- Londras, near London.

Acirca da quilk-negocio^ concerning that affair.

Pora da cafa^ out of the houfe.

Ford ile pet {go, out of danger.

Fira itfii out of one's wits.

This prepofition governs alfo a nominative ; as^ f6ra fAu
\xm&S^'exQept his brother^ or his brother excepted*
De fronte de minha cd/a, over-againft my houfc.
Dejronte da igreja^ facing the church.
jbe/piis de cfa^ after fupper.

Dative.

(ludnto aquiltb, with refpeQ to that.
Femddo a murdlha^ ciofe to tbe wall.

118 PORTUGUESE

Difdt, bico dope ate a cabiga^ from top to toe.

Accufative.

Perdnte ojuiz, before the judg^.
E'nire, between, among, or amongft.
E'ntre os homens^ among men,
Sobre a meja^ upon the ubie.
Confornu^ oxftgdndo a leys according to the law*
Por amor de Deos^ for God's fake.
Pelo rndndo, thrpugh the world.
Pela rHa, through the ftreets.
^Pelas terras^ through the lands.
Por grdtide quej'eja, let it never be fo great.
Contra elies, agamft them.
Trdz do tempco, behind the temple.
Durante^ during; as, durante o tnz^/m^, during the winter.

We fhall be more particular about prep(^tions
when we examine their conftruclion.

CHAP. VIII.

0/ the ConjunSions.

A. CONJUGATION is an indeclinable part of
•^; fpeech which ferves to join the niembers and
parts of fpeech together, in (hewing the dependency
of relation add coherency between the words ana
fentences.

Some conjugations are copulative, which jpio,
andf as it were, couple two terms together ; as, ^,
and : Portugucfes e IngUJei^ Portuguefe and Engli/li.

Some are disjunftive, which (hew feparation or
dividon ; as, nem^ nor, neither; o«, either, or.
Example ; fiefn ejicy nem aquelle^ neither this, nor
that; on ifit^ ou aquillcy either this or that; ncm
maiSf nem minos^ neither more nor'lefs; quer o fSfa,
quer naS, tudo {ara rnim he o the/mo, it is all one to
me whether he does it, or no ; querfeja verd&de^quer
ffioi whether it be true, or not ; nem/e quer hum^ not
even one.

* The

f^

G R A M xM A R. 119

The advtcrfatif e denote reftridion, or contrarietjr >
^s^ mas^ or parem^ but; comtido, yet, however; mas-
dfifeSy or p^ contrurio, nay.

The conjundions conditional fuppofe a condi*
tion» and ferve to jreftrain and limit what has juft
been faid ; as; fe^ if; C9m condifdm quCyCom ifio que^
Jkdo cifa quCy provided that^ or upon condition that> *
or in cafe that, &c.

The conceffive, which (hew the aflent we give to
a thing ; as, emtdra, or feja embora^ well and good ;
tfthfeito^ done, agreed.

The caufal (hew the reafon of fomething ; as,
forcMe, for, or becaufe, or why.

The concluding denote a confequence drawn
from what is before ; as, logo or por confequcnciuy
therefore, then, or confeouently.
- The tranfitive, which (erve to pafs from one fen-
tence to another ; as, alem dijfo, moreover, or befides
that ; fobre tudo, or em fumma^ after all, upon the
whole, in the main ; a propSfito^ now 1 think On't, or
now we are fpeaking of that.

There are others of a di(Ferent fort ; as,yfc quor^
or ao mgnoSy at leaft ; amdaque, although ; dejorte
fue, fa that ; antes qtfiro pedir quefuridry I'll rather
a(k than ftcal; antes morrerei que dizer-v^lOyVWrz--^ '
ther die than tell you ; jd que, (ince, &c.

To the above-mentionid parts of fpeech gramma-
rians *hate added InterjeSIionsy which are particles
ferving to denote fome paflion or emotion of the
mind ; but there is another fort, which may be called
demonftrative ; as, jjiv/ and /a ; Ex. ejle homem aquiy
thi9 roan ; aquella molher /i, that woman, &c. and
fome others continuative, becaufe they denote con-
tinuation in the fpeech ; as, com effeltOy in effeft ;
'Hem di/soy hefidcs ; oravejamos, now let us fee ; ^naU
metue fSmonos emb6ra, and fo, fir, we went away.
To which we may add thofe invented to imitate the
founds of dumb creatures, and the noife which is
occa(ioned by the cla(hing of bodies againft on6
another; as, a«z> traZy th wick-thwack, &?c,

1 4 / Inttr*

•» -»

120 PORTUGUESE

«

htetjeeiivt Particles^
Of Joy,

Ha, ha, ha I Ha, ha, ha I .
Oh que gosto ! Oh joy !

Of Grief.

Ay ! Alas ! ah !

Jy He mitn ! Woe is me ! lack !

Miu Diosl My .God!

Of Pain.

Ay / Ay !
^ O/; / Oh i .

To encourgige.

«/wp 1 Come, come on !

Ota vqmos i y

To rail/

0,.o/i, Ho, hey, hip !

. Of admiratioiii or- farprife.

0^0 Id^ahi! Lack- a- day.
Apre ! Heyday !

• ^ \ Of aversion.

I'rra - ^ * *

N^da ! > Away, away with, fye !
For a ! J

For making people go out of the way, or ftand away^
Guardem-fey or arreaem-fe ! Have a care, clear the
way, or ftand away !

' For fhouting.
Viva I Huzza ! » '

Of silence.
Calaivos ! Hufli ! Peace ! .

Of cursing and threatening. f

At, gudi I Woe !
. - , For derision.

i<^/ Ah: oh! oh! oh! y

Of wifhing. -
Of provera a Dios ! Would to God !

Oxali!

-1

GRAMMAR. ISI

OUfi«tt/ ^imii Othat!
Oje! Would!

The intcijeQion O ferves for BiflFerent emotions
of the mind, as admiration, grief, wi(h, &c. and
ibmetimes is ufed ironically, but differently uttered,
according to the emotion which it expresses.

Same

Antenio
Sebajiidif^
Beatiffimo Padre

Companhia
Carriio
Dom or Dona
Doutor
Deos
Ditto, ditta.

Anthony

Sebaflian

The mod bleffed Father

Captain

Company

Poft

Don or Dona

Do9or

God

Said

ExceiUntiJjimo, ma Mod excellent.

VoJI'a ixcellencia . Your Excellence

Voffajenkoria Your Lordfliip.

y^lfa altifa Your Higbnefs

Vojfa merci Voa

VQfa paterniddde Your Paternity

yp/fa mageftidt Your Majefty

Sdrito

Francifco

Gudrae

MuitDs dnnos
Mijtrt
Scnhor, or a,
Btutrtndtjfimo
Para

\ue ,

\udndo
Quern
Qudnto
Supplic&nte
General
Teninte

VSrbi gratia

Saint

Francii

Save

Jefus

Many Years

Mafier

Sir, Lady

Mbft Reverend

For

That

When

Who

How much
Petitioner
General
Lieutenant
For Examplei

And many others, that muft be learned by ufc

1 M

\ ■•

A NEW

PORTUGUESE

GRAMMAR.

' * ■ j ' ' I I <

PART II.

CHAP. I.

Of the Divijion of Syntax. ^

SYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called
conJlruSlion : and it fignifies the right placing and
conne£ting of wordis in a (entence. It is divided
into three forts; the firft, of Order or Arrangement ;
the fecond, of Concordance; the third of Govern-
ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the
,fit difpofition of words in a fentehce. The Syntax
of Concordance, is when the parts of fpeech agree
with one anpther, as the fubllantive with the adjec*
tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax
of Government, is when one part of fpeech governs
another.

• ' ' For

G R A MM A R. iss

For the lakepf thole who> perhaps, have not a
grammatical knowledge of their own language, I /
ft all lay down fome general rules of Poiftuguefe
conftru6lion.

\. Of tie Order of Words.

1. The nominative is that to which we* attribute
the a£Hon of the verb, and is generally ranged in
the firft place ; it may be either a noun or pronoun,
.as, Francifco ejcreve^ Francis writes ; ^fiUlo^ I fpeak. .

2. When the aftion of the verb is attributed to
many perfons or things, thefe all belong to the no-
minative, and are ranged in the firft place, together
with their conjun^ion ; as, 'Ptdro e Piuh lenty Peter
and Paul read.

3f. The adjefiives belonging to the nominative
fubftantive, to which the action of the verb is attri-
buted, are put after the fubftantive, and before the
verb ; ^as, os eftuddtftes marlgerado^ e dilighies eftUddiy ^'
the obedient and diligent Icholars do ftudy.

4. If the nominative has an article, this article
always takes the firft place.

5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and
ftands for a nominative; as o dormir fiz iem,
fleeping does one good: and fometimes a verb with
its cafe ; as, ie &£lo de humanid&di ter compaix&p dos of-

fiiRos^ toh^ve comp&flion on the afQicted is an act
of hun^anity. '

6.. The nominative is fometimes underftood ; as,
i^/ff<7, where you^underftand . A^ 5 and fo of the other
perfons of the verb.

' 7. After the nominative you'put the verb ; and if
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately
after the verb, whofe accident and circumftances
it explains ; as, ftdro ama por extrhno a gloria, peter
is extrenpely, fond of glory.

8. The cafes governed by the verb are put after"
it ; they may be one, or niany, according to the na-
turfe of the action s as, iuamo aPMro, \\o\e Perer.

m. PORTUGUESE ,

. F&fv pr^fhUi de hum ihm it P^uh, I tfiftke fe pnfcfent
. of a book to Paul. '

9. The prepofition h always- put befor? thfe tAfe
it governs ; ^s,perto de cafa^ near the hoiife*

10. The relative is always |)laced after the ante-
cedent ; is, Thdro o qual eftiday Peter who ftudies.

IL Of Ccnc^d^nce.

!• The adjeSives agree with thert- fubftatitivefc In ,
/ gender, number, atid cafe; ag^ ^6rnem vtrtAdfo^ a
- virtuous ipan; bells molher^ a handf6nfi^ ^Vorinan ;
JumptuofospdUicioSi &c. fumptuous palace^, ^c. ' ,

2. When two or tnpre fubftantives fingular ctfttie -
toijeiheV, the adjeftive belonging to thetti tnuft be

. put in the plural; as, tdnto el rty t6fho a ramia
mont&dos a cavilh paricem l^m^ both the king and
the queen look well when they ride.

3. If the fubftantives happen to be one in the
• fin^nlar and the other in the plural, or to be of

different genders, the adjefilive common to both,
ajgffees in number and gender with the laft; as, Ule
itnha os blhos^e a bdca abirta, or ille tinka a bdta € os
6lhos abertoSy his eyes and mouth were opened. As
lugSas e rios eftdvah congeladoSy the ponds and rivers
were frozen.

'4. But when there is one or many words between
the iaft noun and the adjeftive, that adjeftive (coA-
mon to all) agrees with the noun mafculinc, thougfi
the laft nbun be feminine; and if the nouns are in
the Angular, thep the adjeftive common fliall be' put
V in the plural number and mafculine gender; as, ^
^$0 € a lagCa ejiavai congelhdos ; the pond and river
were frozen. O trabalho^ a indiftria^ t a ftfrtina
nnidosy pains, induftry, and fortune joined together.
, 6, Every verb perfonal agrees with its nomina-
tive, expreffed or underftood, both in number and
perfoft.

6, The relative?, qnai with the article agrees en-
U/eJf with the antecedent; but without the article -

8 and

GRAMMAR. m

and denoting an abfolutequality, it agrees with what
follows; as, aque//e coragad o qual^ &c. that heart
which, Ssff. ConfidereindB- qfta^ feriao as^ condicSens,
&c. confidering which would be the conditions,

7, The quefiien and anfwer always agree in every
thing ; as, a que fenhdra pertence v«r« ? ille refpondto^
pertiHfo a rdinha: To what lady do you belong, fixj
and he anfwered^ I belong to the queen*

A-

IfL Of the Dependence of the Parts if Speech in,

one another^

. ■ . *

1. ITfie nominative being the bafis of the fenJtence,
the ve.rb depends on it, as the other cafes depend oii
the verb. The adjc6Jive depends on the fubftantivc
that fupports it ; and the adverb on the verb whofe
acci^ent^ it explains.

2. The genitive depends on a fubftantive, ex-
prefled or underftpod, by which it is governed^

3. Tbe accufative depends either on a verb ac-
tive, or on a prepofition.

. ^. The abJative depends on a preppfition by
wbich it is governed j as, parto de Rdma, \ go from

5. The dative 'and vocative have, ftriflly fpeak-
ing, UP dependence on the other parts: the dative
is common, as it were, to all hpuns and verbs >
the voc&tive only points out the perfon to whom
you fpeak*

I now come tq the Conftrufilion of the feveral
pijXts. of (pcQclx.

'N

■ > ■

lae P oil T U G U E S E

CHAP. II.

• »»

Of the Syntax of Articles.

• r

r

BEFORE we come to the fyntax of tlie articles,
remember, that 0, tf, os^ as^ ^re articles only
when they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not
when joined to the verbs.

Thofe who understand Latin will quickly per-
ceive the difference, if they take notice that every
time they render a, a^ by illum^ illam^ illud^y or by
emfij eam^ id ; and os^ as, by i//os illaSy ilia y or by
eos^eas,ea; they are relative pronouns.

1. The article is ufed before the names of the foe-
cies or things which can be fpoken of; .therefor-e^
nouns of (ubftances^ arts^ feiences^ plays, metals,
virtues, and vices, having no article before them in
Englifh, require the article in Portuguefe ; as,

O duro e a prat a nao podem jaztr feliz ao hSmem,
gold and iilver cannot make the happinefs of man.

J virtude. nao hi compativel com o v/clo, virtue
cannot agree veith vice.

j1 pbUofophia he h&ma fciincia miito nobre^ philo^
fophy is a very noble fcience.

JoguSmes as cartas, let us play at cards. '

2. The article is not placed before a fubstantive
whiph is followed by the adjeftive of number that
stands for a furname, or meet with a proper or
Christian name; as, Jofeph Primeiro, Jofeph the
First.

S. When a book or fome'part of it, as chapter,
page, &c. is quoted, the adjedlive of number may
come either before or after the fubstantive ; but if
it comes after, the two words are construed, without
article ; . as, livro primeiro, capitulo fegindo, &c.
hook h chapter ii. If the adjedive of number
* comes

(GRAMMAR. 127

comes beFore the fubstantive, it takes the article s
zs, oftimtiro livrOy the first book.

4. O placed before que ^gni&es wiat, or wiici^
• ^Sffafa que qw'fer, let him do what he likes ; o que
iufiZy which 1 did.

- 5. The article is never made ufe of before proper
names of men, women, gods, goddelTes, faints.

6. The article is not ufed in Portuguefe before
the pronouns pofTeflive relative ; as, de quern he efim
cdfai heminha^hi tia^i^c. whofe^houle is this?
it is mine, it is thine, &c.

7. When a mount's, mountain's or hill's name«
is preceded by the word montey it takes nehher ar-
ticle or prepofition ; as,, o Mdnte AtUntey Mount
A tias i - OS Mdntes Pirenios, the Pirenean Moun*
tains; but after the word T^rr^,. a ridge of hills, it

. takes the article ; as(, a S^a daEftrilla^ Mount-
Strella; Serra Jo Pofqfi, Mount Potofi ; however,
they fay, alfo, Serra Lida. 9 .

8. The noun of the meafure, weight, and the
number of the things that have been bought, re-
quires thd articles ; as, o irigo vendeje a tdnto o ah-
qudre, what is fold fo much a peck, three quarts
and one pint.

A manteiga vehdf-Je a tdnio o arratel, butter cost fo
much a pound.

Os bvos vindem-fe a idnto a duzia^ eggs are fold fo
much a dozen*

9. No article is ufed with proper names of per*
fons and planets, except a terra^ the earth ; ojol^
the fun; a Uia^ the moon.

10. When proper names are ufed in a. determi-
nate fenfe, that is, when they are applied to parti-^
cular dbjects, then they take the article \ o Dhs
dos ''CAriJidSs, the God of Christians ; o Archimedes

■ de Inglaferra, the Archimedes of England. The.
proper n^mes,of renowned poets and painters keep
alfo the article ^ as, o Camtitis, o PopCf o Tajfoy #

\\. TKc

I

\

128 PORTUGUESE

11. The indefinite article de is ufed helbre nomns
following one of this, fortty efpick^ generoy'^nd aay
other noun of which thejr expre& the kind, chawac^
M% qualk^^ and nature i which fort of noans arc
ufally Englifhed by an adje6live, or even bjr tiMf
febstantive itfeif placed adjeftively.^ and making to-*
gether, as'it wex^e, but a word compound ; as, Dt^
ii cadig^y the head ach ; hfimn fine de fruto, a fort-
©f fruit ; falliir de t&hy a foolifli fpeech.

Sometimes the Englilh adle£tive may be Vnade hsf
an adjeftive too in Portugueie,as in the last examphi "
hlmfallof tohy a fooli(h Ipeech ; but fometimes too
the Portuguefe exprefs the Englilh adjefiUve bjr a
(ubBtantive of the fame fignification with de before
the other noun, though ihey have an adjeftivc' of
the fimeiiature as the Engliih adje£^ive ; a^ o didko
disf minha molhir^ my deviliili wife.^ and fametimes
the adjeftive is ufed by them fubstantively, or the
substantive is understood ; as, q velkaca de meuftUm^ .
my rafcafly £bn ; a vdhaca de fua may, hia or her ■
rafcally mother. Finally they alfo. make ufe of the
definite article; as, o di&io da homem^ or damolhSr,
l^e deviiifll man or woman > a pihre da m^lher^ the
poor woman, &c.

12. Nouns are ufed without article in the foltaw*^
ipg cafes:

1st. At the title of a per£ormaace, and in the '
middle of ientences, where they characterife in. a
particular manner the perfoh or thing fpoken of, in
which cafe the Engliih ufe. efpecially the particle a%
as. ,

Dhetirso libre as abrigac^ens da retigiai nafurai, a
difcoorie concerning the obligations of natural vtf*
tigion. f '

^ Primeka p&rte, the fijst part.

O Conde de CUrmont, ftiicipe (h &dngue^ m^rt^o^ &c.
t^ CQimt of ClenQOflt> a prince of the bloody died» *
«c - ' ' . • . '•

.GRAMMAR. 129

O ^M Mimh, n£U> de turolma p(fas, the St. An-
^Minyi a aiaety gun (hip.

2dly. In fei^tences of exclamation ; as,

jU miif biUm fiires fho as qu€ m^nos durao ; qualauir
f Ova as defmaia^ o vSnto as miircha^ o fol as queitnd,
€ ac&ba de Jechr ; fern fallar numa infinid&df de infec"
tH ^as peffiguem e deiiaS a perdir ; natural e verda--
diira migem da bellhui dasfeuhSras! the handfomeft
jRow€Fs l^ft but a very (bort time ^ the lead rain
tvniflies them» the wind withers them, the fun
(corches them, and completes the drying of them ;
vithout mentioning an infinite number of infers
that fpoil and hiirt themi : a natural and true image
9f the l^dietf beauty !

3dJy. WJicn they meet with a noun of number in
an indefinite fenfe ; as, milfoldkdos de cavdllo cdntra
<0m u^intesy a thoufand horie a^ainft an hundred
foot,

Thh^ ii4o dAus foetas, I have read two poets, that
is, any pair out or all that ever exifted.

But before a noutt of number, in a definite fenfe,
it wocdd take the article j as,

TVir^ lido OS Mus poetas^, I have read both poQts ^
beiWife this plainly indicates a definite pair, of^
whom- fome mention has been made already* -

Os €em wf antes que comhatcTG^ contra os ml de ca*
md/hj fN#, tstc, tt^e hundred foot that fought wijth the
tbouland hor(e, that, &c.

4thly/ After the verb/^r, when it fignifics to is-
^ iother snd after fir tom&do for, to be accounted;

Sajfir por^ to pa(s for ; a3> 6lle ferh doutdr com ot^mpo^
e will become a do£lor in time; ille pajja por ma- .
rinhehro^ he pafses for a failor*

Whe9 the adjedive is uied fubftantively, then it

muft have tbe neuter Portuguefe article o before it ;

O virdt fffindi tninos a vijia que o vermelhoy greea

burts the eye lefs than red.

ICbMC are alia fome adverbs preceded by the neu-

K tral

ISO PORTUGUESE

tral article o ; as the following, o tnelhSr que Su puiSr,
the beft I will be able; o menos quefdrpojfivel^ the
lefs it will be poffible.

* Articles are repeated in Portuguefe before as
many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in
the fentence ; as,

duro, a prat a ^ afaude^ as Mnras^^e os deleiies nM

podem fazir feliz ao- hbmem que ftaS temfcihnda nem

virtUde, gold, filver, health, honours, and pleafui-es;

cannot make a man happy without wifdom and

, virtoe. '

The article o is put* before the word y^»irfr, fir, or
my lord ; as,

O /enhdr duque, my Jord duke ; ojenhbr prejidknie^
my lord the prefident ; osfenhdreSy the gentlemen j .
•idos fenkdres ^ of the gentlemen. - ^

You muft obferve the fame rule for the feminine
articled, which is to be prefixed tofenhora^ my lady,
or madam ; as, ajenhdra duquSza, or condejfa de, €ffr^
my lady duchefs, or countew of, &c..

The article is never ufed in Portuguefe as it is in
Englifli, before mais more, or m^nos lefs,- in the fot
lowing fentences, qu&nto m&is vivimoj, tdnto m&is
aprendimosj the longer we live, the more we learn,;
y qudnto mats hum kydrbpico bibe^ mais fide tem^ the
' ^more an hydropicfe drinks, the more thirfty he is;
qudnfo m&iS hum hbmem he pbbre^ qudnto minos amUh
dos temy the poorer people are,, the lefs care thef
have, &c.

Sometimes the Englifh particle 40^ before infini-
tives, is rendered in Portuguefe by the article o ;
as, hefdcilo dixir^ o vSr^ i^c. it is ealy to fey, to fee,.
jScc.

In a word, the natural ajfociatqrs with artielis are
thofe cwnmon appellatives y which denote the feveral
genera and ipecie^ of beings, or thofe words which,
though indefinite, are yet capable, through .the ar-
ticle, cf becoming definite. Therefore ApollMius

makes

V

G R A M M A k- 131

makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to fefufe
coalefcence with the article ; and it would be ab-
furd to fay o w, the I ; or ^ /», the thou ; becaufe
nothing can make thofe pronouns more diefinite
than they are.

N. B. .When the adjefilive Aum, Mma, is ufed as
an article in Portuguefe, it" fefpects our primary
perception, and denotes individuals as unknown ;
tut the articles Oy a, refpeft our fecondary percep-
tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain
by an example : I fee an obje£t pafs by which
I never faw till theit ; what do I fay ? AH vat hum
pobre com huma barba compriddy there goes a beggar
with a long beard. The man departs and returns
a week after ; What do I fay then ? AH vat o pobre
da bhrba comprida, there goes the • beggar with the
loDg beard.

CHAP. III.

Of the Syntax of Nouns y and firfty of the Subjianthes.

WHEN two or more fubftantives come together
ivithout a comma between them, they all
govern each the next in the genitive, the firft
roveming the fecond, the fecond the third in the
lame cafe, and fo on ; (that is, the firft is always
followed by the prepofition dey or by the article be-
fore the next noun) but that genitive can never
come in Pprtuguefe before the nouns that governs
it, ds in Englim :

A phUofophia de Newton, Newton's philofophy.

As guar das doprincipey the prince's guards. *

A p6rta da ci/a, the houfe-gate.

K 2 Eis

182 PORTUGUESE

Eis aqui a chfa do compankeiro do irmii de minha
molker^here is my wife's brother's partner's hoafe.

When two fubftantivcs Angular are the nomina-
tive of a verb, this muft be put in the phiral^ a%
«/» irmdo e miu pat ejl&o no cdmpo^ my brother and
my father are in the country.

If the nominative is a colleftive name, the verb
is always put in the fingular ; as, idda s cidade affif-
fio, all the city was prefent.

0/ ike Syntax of AdjeSives.

Of adje£live8, some are put before the noun, and
iome after; and others may be put indifferently^
either before or after.

The pronouns adjefilive pofleflive, mAu, tiu^ lit^
fefr, and adjedlives of number, come before the lub-
ftantive as in EnglKh. Ex. M6u pai, my father ; s
fia cifay his houfe ; d&as pefdas, two people ; a jN>
metro hSmem^ the firft man.

But when the adjeftive of number (lands for a
furname, or meets with a proper or Chriftian name,
it comes after the fubftantive, without the article ;
as, Jt^oY. John the fifth.

I

Thefe following Adje^ives come after the Subflan6ui.

ifl. Verbal adje£lives and participles; as, Jmht
hbmem divert ido^ a comical or merry man ; hUm^moi^
her efiimada^ a woman efteemed.'

2dly. Adjeftives of names of nations ; a8> kum
mathcmatico Inglizy an Englifh mathematician ; kum
alfaihte Franciz^ a French taylor;, mufica Italiana^
Italian mufic.

Sdly. Adjeftives of colour ; as, kum veJUeh nigro,
a black fuit of plothes ; h$m capote vermelko, a red
cloak, &c.

4thljr.

GRAMMAR. ISS

4tlil]r> Adjedifet o/* figure ; as, iima mi/a reddh-
da^ a round table ; ium cdmpo triangulir^ a triangular
field)^ &c.

5tb]y. Adje£lives expreffing fome phyfical or na-
tural quality ; fuch are quinte^ hot ; /r/>, cold ; /W-
mid$^ wet ; corcavddoy hunch-backed, &c.

Moft other adjectives are placed before or after
the Cobftantive ; 2i^/dHtVy holy ; verJadeira, true, &c.

If the fubfiantive has three or more adjectives be-
longing to it, they mbft abfolutelf be put after it
with the enclitic c before the laft, which mull like-
wife be obferved, even when there be but two ad-
je£iives I for the Portuguefe don't fay, kima defrn^
. grad&vel fi^addnia obru^ &c. but h&mu bbrn defagn-
divel e tnfanddnha^ &c. a difagreeable, tedious work.
^ Of adje£liires» fome alwavs require after thetn
either a noun or verb^ which they gorem ; as,
dGjpw de louvSr, praife-worthy ; digno de Jhr mMk^
v^urthy to be loved ; cap&% de enfinhr^ capable to
teach i aftd tbefe have always the particle dt after
them*

Some will be ufed abfolutely without being ever
ctlendcd by any noun or verb s as, pvdinte; wife ;
imm&vcli incurable, &c.

Others may be conftrued both with and without

a noun, which they govern ; eila ke hima m&lifr

^mfe^hit^ flie is a woman without any feniihility ;

iHla he ivfurfivel ao sfmSty flie is itifenfible and aftrafir

ger to the pailion of love,

^ftie A>IIowing adjeftives, which require the pre-
pbfitioa ^ de before the next infinitive, govern the
jrenitive cafe* Obferve, that fome of tl:^m require
m £ngli(h the prepofitipn at or wit A before the tsekt
norni.

DignOf worthy: as, Me he digw de lowutr^ he is^
worthy of praite. This adjective is fometimes fol-
lowed by que ; as, digna jne JHu nSme /4^, iiit. her
name defervtd to be, &c.

K3 Indlpm^

.1

134 PORTUGUESE

Indignoy unworthy ; as^ indigno da efUma^ao que/agB
dille^ unworthy of the efteem which 1 have for him.
' CapaZy capable ; incapdzy incapable ^ as, cap&z^
ou incapaz defervir a propria patria^ capable or inca-
pable to ferve one's country.

Notado^ charged ; as, not&do de avariza, charged
with avarice.

Coftiihtey glad; as. ejou contfytte do fuccefjb que tilt
tivty I am glad or overjoyed at his fuccefs.

Can f ado f tired i as, ,canfado de eftudar^ tired of ftu-
dying.

Dezejdfoy greedy ; as, dezejSfo de gloria^ greedy of
glory, &c. as like wife adjeftives fignifying fuUnefs,
^cjoaptinefs, plenty, want,defire, knowledge, remcm-
.brance, ignorance, or forgetting.

All adjeftives fignifying inclination, advantage
and difed vantage^ profit or difprofit, pleafure or
difpleafure, due, fubmifSon, refiftance, likenefs,
govern the dative cafe; as, inftnpvel as affrAnias^
infenfible of affronts ; Jer inclimdo a alg&ma coufa^Xo
be inclined to fomething ; nocivo afaudey hurtful' to
health. ' ' -

.' Thefe adjeftives fignifying dimenfions, ^Sy alto^
high, tall ; largOy wide, broad'; and compridc, long,
come after the words of the meafure of magnitude,
both in Englifli and Portuguefe ; but they are pre-
; ceded by de in Portuguefe ; as, dh pes de l&rgo^ ten
feet broad ; feis pis de comprido^ fix feet long,'&c.
they alfo turn the adjeftive of the dimenfion into
its fubftantive, with the word^of the meafure before :
but the word of the dimenfion is always preceded
.by de*^, My feis pes de altdra^ fix feet high ; dez pis de
largitai ten feet broad.

The adjeftives fignifying experience, knowledge,
^.or fcience, require emyor noy nay noSynas, after them;
as, ver/Ado nos livroSy verfed in books ; ixperto na mC'
:didnay expert in medicine.

The cardinal nouns require the genitive cafe after
. them 3 as, kum dos ddus, one of the two.

The

G R A M M A R 135

The ordinal nouns^ as well as the collective and
proportional likewife require the genitive after
them ; as, o primehro dos riys, the firll of the kings,
hima duzia de &vos, a dozen of eggs, &c.

Of tie ' Syntax of the Comparatives and Supers

latives.

■ •

The comparative is not made of the pofitive in ^
Fortuguefe, as in L«atin and Englifli, but by adding
mJns morcy or m/nos lefs, which govern que^ fignify-
log than ; as, iddo he mayor que a parte, the whole
xh greater than the part ; o ftu amdnte he/ndis bello^
ft&is mdfOy e mats rico que ilia, her lover is handfomer,
younger, and richer than (he \% ^ iu acho-o agora
m£nos bello do que qudndo o comprii, I now find it lefs
handfome than when I brought it.

The fimple comparatives mAis, and minos, meet-
ing with a noun of number, are attended by de^ as,
eunda que Hie tpuejje mats de cem homens, though he
has abpve an hundred men ; elle tern mats d$ vinte
dnnas, he is above twenty.

When the comparifon is made \>yfo as, as much
as, they muft be rendered by cdmo.

£xample.

O miu livro he taS hello c6mo o vo/so, my book is
as handfome as yours ; hum prhicipe naS he tao pode-
rSfo edmo hum riy, a prince is not fo powerful as a
king.

They put fometimes multo zn6 pduco before the
£mple comparatives mats and m6nos ; as, ^lle hi
muito mats grinde, he is taller by much s Hie he ptuco
moisgrdnde, he is taller by little, &c.

« •

K 4

/

136 P O R t U G U E S fe

CHAP. IV.

Of the Syntax of ProHMti.

TfTE have fufficiently explained 'tlwf prMtoufur
in the iirft part ; and to avoid any further
repetition, I shall only obferve, that,

1ft. The Etiglifli make ufe of the verb to ie^ put
imperfonally through all ^ts tenfes in the thh'd ptt^
fon, before the pronouns perfonal, /, tA$Uj ht^Jki^H^
you, they ; it is I j it is he, &c. In Portugoefe the
verb to be^ On this occafion, is not imperfonal i And
they expreff, it is I -, by /oU ^u ; it is thou, is n i
it is he, Ae ilh j it is we, fimos nbs ; it iis ye, j^ Wf^
it is (he, ht ilia ; it is they, mafc.^'3 6ile$ ; it fe they^
fern. faS illas ; and in like manner through all tM ^
tenfes ; as, it was I, er^ ^ ; it was we, frames nos^ '
8tc. -

2dly. The Portuguefe feldom make ufe of the
fecond perfoh lingular or plural^ but when throifgh
a great familiarity among friends, or fpeakin^ td
G6d, or a father and mother to their children. Of to
fervants ; thus, yOu Are in the right of it, is e»*
preffed by vm^^ rem raziS, inftead of tifides razSi ;
como ejli vm^^ ? how do you do ? In the plural they
fay vm^^ .

Obfervc here, that when an adjeetite comes after
vtH^ V. S. K E. &c. it does not agree in gendet
with vm^ F. S. &c. but with the perfon we fpeidl
to or we fpeak of, therefore they fpeak to a ladyxif
woman thus 5 vm<^ he muito belU^ you are very
beautiful ; and tr> a m^n they fay, vm^ he miit^bt^^
you are very good,

Sdly. Nus is generally ufcd by the king, a goi^«
nor, or a biihop, inHheir writings, and then it fig-
nifies in Englifh we ; as, nos manddmos, oxmandimoSf
we command s but nos before or after a verb in For*

tuguefe

GRAMMAR. IS7

tagnese fignifies m in English ; »» iJ/e ms iiffe, he
told us ; diinos timpo^ give us time.

4rbly. Fos n also apoiied to a fingle person, but
only speaking to inferiors, or between familiar
friends, to avoid the word thou^ /tf, whtwh would
be too grofs and unmannerly.

Stbly. The pronouns conjunftive arc joined to
~ verbs, ahd (land for the datire and accusative cases,
a^ dhmty he gave me ; ima we, love me ; but the
pronouns perfonal are ufed iitflead of them when
they afe preceded by a preposTtJon. and not imme-
diateN foHov^ed '• by a tcrb ; (JhfalUm ciditra mim^
ht fpoke a<(a'mft me.

i6thly. When e?, a, oSy tiSy are joined to t^e pre-
ftnt ff.finirive mood, tbev change thelaft r of it into
/o, /a, i^c. thus ; para dma lo^ to love him ; fara vita,
or, vi'las^ to fee her, or them, &c. and when they
are joined to the preterpertect indicatire of the
terb/tf asfr, and some others that have that tense end-
ing in ft^ they change the last z of them into lo^ la,
fefr. ^fi-loy 1 did it ; ilk fi-lOy he did, or made it,
&c. hot Tvhen they are joined to the future indica-
tive of any verb with the auxiliary verb haver ^ then
tbey change the terminations rei, r4j,.&c. of the
fbtures into &, la, i5fc, t$ fi-lo-iei, Vll do it ; ams-
Hf-kei, 111 love him him, &c.

Remarks on the Pronouns.

iR. fltw, or //, which follow the verb in Engliffi,
muft be expre&ed m Portuguefe, as in the following
examples :

When him or // in English follow the verb in the
firft perfon of the Angular ixumber. It must be ex*
prefsed in Portuguefe by b before or after the verb.
£xam. I call him ot it, iu o ch&moy or in chdmo^o.

When khn or it in Englifti follow the verb in the
firft perfon of the fingular number, it may be cx-
preffed in Portuguefe cither by o before the verb, or
h after it, making an elifion of the laft confonant

of

IS8. PORTUGUESE

»

of the verb. Exam. Thou calleft him or it, iu o
chdmaSy or tu chama lo..

When him or it is joined wiih the third person
fingular of ayerb, it may be expreffed by o before
or after the verb. Ex. He calls him (?r it^ clle «•
chdmay or ilk chdma-o. - .. -v

When Mm or //is with a verb in the firft perfon
plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either by
before the verb^ or lo after it, making an'elifion
as in the fecond cafe. Ex. We call him or it, nos
^c ciamdmosy or nos chamemo-lo.

When him or it is aftera verb in the fecond person

Elural, It is expreffed in Portuguefe either by o
efore the verb, or lo after it, making an elifion,
&c^ Ex. You call him or it, vos o chamhis^ or vos
chamai'lo.

When him or it follows the verb in the third per-
son plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either
by before the verb, or no after it. Examp.. They
call him or it, ilks o chamao^ or iUes chdmaino.

2dly. Her ox it after a verb in Englifti is express-
ed in Portuguefe by a, according to the rules jiift
now pfopofed. ,

Sdly. Them after ^ verb is expreffipd in Portu-
guefe by c^xfor the mafculine, ana by as ior the^ fe-
minine, according to the gender and the rules pro-
pofed. • ^

4thly. The words o, a, os, as, mull always he
put after the gerunds, but not .before the infinitives.
Examp. Seeing him, we muft not fay, ovendo, but
vendo'Oj becaufe vindo is a gerund. To fee him, in
ftead of faying ^r^ vir-Oy you muft fay para o^ver^
is in the infinitive.

Sthly.. The words /(?, la^ /w, /jj, muft always be
.put after the verbs. Examp^ To fee him, you muft
uiy, para vi-lo^ or para o vcr, and not para lo vir.
.The fame, words muft follow alfo the adverb eiy
and fo you muft fay, ei4o aqui, here he is ; ei-lo ali^
there he is ^ ei^los aqui, here they are j ei-la a/i, there

flie

GRAMMAR. • 189

(he is ; ei-hs alf, there they are. They follow like-
wife the perfons of the verbs ; cu fi-lo ; tu fizif^
ti-h \ ellefc'lo ; ms fi%mo h^ &c. I made it^Scc.

Note, that I have been fpeaking of the words
Oy a, 0Sy asy loy lay los^ las, and not of the articles
0, OyOs, as ; becaufe when thofe words precede, and
fometimes when they follow the verbis, they are not
articles, but pronouns relative. They are articles
only when they precede the nouns or pronouns.

ftm

CHAP. V.

Of ike Syntax of Verbs.

npHE verbs through every tenfe and mood *

(except the infinitive) ought to be preceded
by a nominative cafe, either expreffed or under-
fiood, with which they muft agree in number and
perfon. The nominative is expreffed when we say,
iu dmoy tu cdtUa$ ; underftood when we fay, ciniOy
digo, &c. *

The Portuguefe, as well as Englifli, use the fe-
cond perfon plural, though they addrefs themfelves
"but to a fingle perfon.

Example.

Men amigOy vbs ndo tindes razdoy my friend, you
are in* the wrong.

And if we would fpeak in the third perfon, we
muft fay, vem^^ tern razaS, fir, you are in the right.

The* verb active governs the accufative ; as, ^mo

a virt&dey I love virtue.

The

,»

, 140 PORTUGUESE

The verb pailive requires an ablative after it ; as
§s MtU0s JiA mvtjkdos pillow igmrantes^ the learned
are envied by the ignorant..

You rauft obferve, that there js in, Portuguefc
another way of making the paffive, by adding the
relatiTeyif to the third perfon fingular or plural i as
ima/e Dt^Sy God is loved.

When there are two nominatives fingular before
a verb, itmufl be put in. the plural number.

When a noun is collective, the verb requires the
fingular, not the pural ; as, a genu cjii olhdndo^ the
people are looking.

Syntapc of the auxiliary ' Verbs. -

The verb ter is made ufe of to conjugate all the
compound tenfes of verbs ; as, tinhQ amadoytinha
amado, I 'have loved, I had loved,

Ter fignifies alfo to poflefs, to obtain ; as ienho
dinhtiro^ I have money ; tern nuUia ^apacidhde^ lie
Jm^ a great deal of capacity .

Havir^ in account books und trade, exprefles
^^rcdit ordifcharge.

Haver is alfo taken imperfonally in Fortuguefe,
and it fignifies in Englifli there he; m ha muit$ bwr^
no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in
Mexico.

Ha^^r-fe, made reciprocal, is the fame as to h^
havei to aS ; as hffuve-fe $ govirnadir com taifrth
dencia que, &c. the governor behaved Virith uich
wifdom, that, &fr.

We have already obfervcd the difference betwixt
far and ejiar.

The verb eftir b alfo nfed to conjugnte the other
verbs, chiefly exprefiing action ^ as ejldu Undo, ejUlt
tprevindo, I am reading, I am writing!

£flir, with the prepofition em, in, or with no, nd,
ms, nas, fignifies to be prefent in a piact; is, e/Uu no
idmfo, I am in the country.

GRAMMAR. 141

^ifj widi the prepofition parm dcnot o the m-
clinttioa of doing what the following Terb expRfles^
but without a full determination ; as, eftdm fmrm ir
mefmrm LMres^ I have a mind to go and life in
{iOndoo.

Efiir, with the prepofition ptTy and the infinitiTe
of the verb following, means, diat the thing expieff-
ed by the verb is Dot yet done ; as, (/tf^ e/lafm
^ireviry this is not yet written ; ijio ^ipor mSaipit^
Vtm is not yet cleaned ; tftar par Ugaem fignifies to
agree with one, or to be of his opinion.

N. B. See in the Third Part the different fignifi*
cations of the verbs iftir and havir.

When fir fignifies the poffefiive of one thmg, it
ffovems the genitive ; as, a rua hi d^ eUrey^ the
meet belongs to the king; ifia cafa he demcupay^
this houle l^ongs to my lather.

Emfer is taken for a thing to be whole or entire;
without any alteration or mutilati(yi ^ as, asfazcu*
das^ao emjer, the goods are not fo&L

' Of4ke Syntax of Verbs active, pafsive, &c.

When two verbs come together, with or without
any nominative cafe, then the latter muft be in the
innnitive mood ; as, quer vm^ aprcudir a foliar In-
gliz f will you learn to fpeak Englifh ?

AH Verbs active govern the accufative ; but if
they are followed by a proper name of God, man,
or woroan^ of any noun expreiiing their qualities or
title, then it governs the dative cafe ; as, conkico a
fta pdy, I know his father ; JchdraS a Joao no ca-
tninhs, they found John in the road.

All verbs of gefture, moving, going, ruling, or
doing, as alfo the verbs that have the word that
goes Ijefore, and the vc^ord that comes after, both be-
longing to one thing, require the nominative alter
them 9 as, Pidra vh trrado^ Peter goes on wrong ;

I

142 PORTUGUESE

- opSbre dSrme defcangidoy the poor fleeps without care*
Alfo the verb of the infinitive mood has the fame
cafe, when verbs of wiflbingand'the like come after
them ; as, tddos dezejaofer ricos^ every body wifhes
tabe rich ; dnfes quisera fer dduto que pareeilo, I had
rather be learned than be accounted lo.

After verbs the Portuguefe exprefs j^w and no by
que Jim and que «45, Example, criyo que firyiy I be*
lieve yes ; crijo que nho^ I believe not s digo qnefimy
I fay yes ; cutdo que naoy I think not ; apiflo quefim^
I lay yes y quereis apqftarque nao ? have you a mind
to lay not ? ' - ^

Verbs fignifying grief, compafsien,' want, remem-^
trance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as,
pifame muito da mbrte de feu irmdo^ I am very forry
for the death.of your brother 5 Hie morre defome^ he
perifhes by hunger ; Umbrefe do que me dijje, remem-
ber what you faid to me -, compadegi-me dasfuas dif
p&^aSy I pitied him for his misfortunes 5 efquect-me
detudoifto, all this I forgot.

The reciprocals of jeering, boafting, and diftruft-^
ing, govern atfo the genitive ; ^Sy jaSIarfey gloriar'
fe^picirfe, enverg^nharfe) &c.

AH the verbs active govern the dative only when
the fubftantive reprefents a perfon ; as, cu conhego a
vm^^^&cc. I know you, &c.

' The following verbs belong to this rule of the '
dative:

Jogdr, to play ;:^s,jogdr c&rtas, to play at cards^;
jogar COS centos, to play at picquet ; jogar ao xadrez,
to play at chefs, &c.

Obedecer, defobedecir^ agrad&r, comprazer; as, iu
obedego^ a Dios^e el-tey, I obey God and the king 5
€omprazio em tudo aos foldhdos, in all he pleafed the .
foldiers.

Mandir, when it fignifies to command an army,
company, &.. requires the accufative, but, when '
other things, the dative.; as ille mandava a cavalU'^
ria, he commanded the hprfe s governaddr ma$$*

dou

GRAM MA R. 14$

dAu a tSJos OS fwraddres que ft retirafjem p^ra Juas €&•
/ks\ the governor ordered all the inhabitants to re-
tire into their hdufes.

/r, to go ; as, v6u a Paris ^ I go to Paris.

jtfsifiir, djuddr, focorrcr, to help 5 as, afsifiir ao of^
Jim divinoy to affift at divine fervice.

SaudoTy to falute or greet s as> tile fauda a tddos^
he (alutes every body.

FalliTy to fpeak ; fatizjazir^ to fati^fy ; fervify to
ferve ; favorecir^ to favour ; amea^hry to threaten.

The verbs of pleafing, difpleafing, granting, de-
nying, pardoningi^ will have the person in the da-
tive cafe.

The imperfonals acontecir^fuccedery import&ry per-^
tenctry and the like to thefe, will have often two
datives, of perfon ; as, a mim mefuccedeoy it happen-
ed to me 5 a Hie Ihe con^im^ it fuits him, or\\. is con-
venient for him ; a ille nao Ihe importay it does not
concern him, &c. - ^

All the active verbs require an accufative 5 and* .
the Latin verbs which govern the accufative of the
things, and the dative of the perfon, ^f overn gene-
rally the fame in Portuguefe ; as, efcrevei que digd
a voffo irmaoy write to your brother what 1 do fay*

Verbs of afking, teaching, arraying, will have an
accuiative of the doer or fufferer, and fometimcs
verbs neuter will have an accufative^of the thing ;
as, gozarfaltde^ to enjoy health ; pego ejlefav6ry I aflc
this favour -yille idea muiio bemflauta^. he plays very
well on the jflute ; curat huma doingay to cure a sick-
'Jiefs.

Verbs paffive, and the greateft part of the reci-
procals require the ablative, with <sfe, doy day dos,
daSy pOTy or pilloy pclldy pillosy pillas ; as, /ui cha^ -
niado por el r/y, I was called by the king ; retiriu-me
da cididey \ retired from the city ; illefdi amhdo do
fSvOy he was loved by the people. But you muft
except acoft&r fe^ which requires a dative preceded
by a; encollar'JiyW\\\Q\x fometimes will have'a da-

U4 PORTUGUESE

tiye» and (bmetimcs 911 ablative pi^ded hf ern^M^
m. mSy or nas ; n^th^Je, which requires^ atriativte \
fetttar fe, introduz-rfe, &c. which muft have theidbt
Jative with the prepdfition i^» m^ na^ noSy nss.

The ttths joinea wkh a roud which they govern,
muft have the infinitive withi^i^; as tenh^v^madc
4t rify I am near laughirig.

The price of any thing bought or fold, or bar*
tared, will have thir ^^ctii^ive with^.

The vtrhpCrfiy when it fignifies ^ iftgit^ muft
have the infinitive, with the particle a ^ as,p4r-fca
chri»\ to begin to cry.

Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, UBf-
loading, win have the ablative ; as,' i0a terra abun-
de d9 tfigo ; this country abounds with corn s «^
^# (orregido de miferWy he is loaded with calami^

Verbs denoting cuftom^help, beginning, exhortar
tion, invitation, require th^ infinitive with the pwr-
ticle a ; as, ^udir afemear^ to help fowing s conviddu
mf a cekf^ he invited me to fupper.

Verbs that fignify diftance, receivifigj • or taking
away» will have the ablative ; as, a madeira difia
de MfrrU%5 ^20 miihaSy Madera lies ,320 miJes bom
Morocco.

Note, that the verbs fignifying receiving, or takiag
away, generally require the ablative of the perfoa ;
but they fometimes requii^ an accuCative : particift*
larly the verb retetir^ when it fignifies t9 welcdme^ or
/• tmertain : as, ilk re^ebe tddss com muite agrado^ he
gives his company a hearty reception, he n^akes
limsi very welcome.

Verbs denoting obligation, govern thefoilowiag
lA&iitive with the prepofition a ; as, iu obr^drUa
^ a* ifi^y I will oblige him to do it.

Verbs of arguing, qwarjelling, fighting, fee. will
%VW the ablative with C9m ; as, feiejbu fMts de hunm
hAraemfiu irm^^ he qui»flcelied more than one hoiar
witli lMa.baoAbef.

After

GRAMMA R. 1*5

"After the verb fubftantiveyJrV, to he, para is made

uC? of as well as a ; the firft is employed to denote

the uie or deftination of any thing; as^ ifta penpa

he psra efcreviry this pen is to write with. But the

' particle a is ufed to denote only the a£tipn; as, ellt

Jdi (hprimtiro afugtr^ he was the firft to run away.

The verbs of motion to a place always govern
the dative ; as, vbu & comedia, I go to the play.
Though the verb voltir^ to return, may alfo have
an accufative, with the prepofition para. But the
verbs .of motion from a place govern the ablative
with diy do, da, dos,*dasi ^^j venho do cdmpo^ I come
from the country. If the motion is through a place,
tqen .the verbs govern the accufative, with ^<jr;.
as, pajjarii por Ldndres, I vvill come by the way of
London*

Of the Ufe and ConJiruSlion of the Tenfes.

Though we have fpoken at large upon the tenfes
in the Firft Part, you muft, however, take notice.

r. That they make ufe of the infinitive and the -
auxiliary verb havir, together with the pronouns lo^
la, Iqs, las; inftead of the future indicative ; as,
fmvir40'heu I will hear him; and th?n the r of the
infinitive is changed into lo, la, los, las-, and fome-
times they make ufe of the infinitive mood and the
auxiliary verb haver, with the pronouns conjunfHve
me^ te,fe, &c. inftead of the fame future; as^
dar-lHe-hei, I will give him; agajldrfe-h&, he will
be angry*

2, That when we find the particle if, which in
Portuguefe is expreffed by fe, before the imperfeft.
indicative, we muft generally ufe the imperfefl: fub-
juo£iive in Portuguefe; example, fe iu iivefse, if I
nad ; fe eupudcfse, if I could. But fometimes they
ufe the imperfeft indicative ; as, difse-lhe que ft
rnuria^ &C.5 he told him that if he was willing* £sfr.

. L . .3. That

. i

146 P O R T U G U E »E

3. That the firft imperfefl: fubjun6tiye in Portu-
giiefe isalfo ufedin alenfe that denotes the prefent,
^ecially in fentences of wiQiing; as, qtiizera que
Domingo' fizifse bom timpOy I wilh it would be fine
weather on Sunday. But if the fame tenfe is pre-^
ceded by ainda que, although, then it muft be ren- '
dered into Englifli by the fecond imperfeftfubjunc-
tive, or by the imperfeft indicative ; as, Su ftaS a
qufzeray ainda que tivifse milhdens de jh^ though flie
was worth feveral millions, I would not have h^r;
aind0 que ille confentifse ni/so, ttaS Je podia fazcr^ al-
though he would confent to it, that could not be
done. Laftly, when the firft imperfeft fubjunSive ,
is preceded by fe^ it is fometimes rendered into'
Englilh by the fecond imperfeft fubjun6tive y as^/r
elle viefiCy if he fliould come.

The Rnglifh are apt to put the firft imperfeft of'
the fubjun£tive where the Portuguefe make, ufe of
the fecond ; as, I had been in the wrong, nao /eria
tido razao ; apd though they may fay nad tivcra tido
razaoy they may not fay naS tivefse ttdo razaS^ Xq .
exprefs the Englifti of, I Jfwuld have been in the
wrong, or / had been in the wrong.

Note, that to exprefs in Portuguefe, //J6?»g-A /^^.
Jkould be^ we muft fay, qudndoifsofd/se^ and not feria.

The Portuguefe ufe the future tenfe fubjunftivc
after the conjundtion-j^, when they fpeak of a future
a£tion, but the Englifh, the prefent indicative : ejj-
ample, to-morrow, if I have time, amanhaa fe tivir
timpo^ and not fe tenho ; if he comes, we ihall fee
\\va\yn6s veremoSyfe Hie vier.

A conjunction between two verbs obliges thelaff
to be of the fame number, perfon, and tenfe as the.
firft: example, the king wills and commands, elrii
quer e ordena ; I fee and I know, iu vSjo e conhego. ,

Sometimes the prefent is m^de ufe of, inftead of
the preter definite in narrations, as, no mefmo tempo
que hia andando, o encdnira^ o defpe^ e o &ta a huma

arvorc.

i

GRAMMAR. 147

ia-vore^ as he was going, he meets him, ftrips hrm,
and ties him to a tree.

When the Portuguefe ufe the infinitive wirh a
third perfon in the plural, thev add em to it, and it
is generally preceded by por^ for, and para^ in order
to, that, or to the end that; as illes fhrcR enforc^dos
por fwrtarem^ they were hanged for robbing j parm
Jhem enformados^ that, to the end that they may be
infornK:d ; para pod^rem dizir^ that they may be
able to fay.

Obferve, that when the Portuguefe put par before
the firft future fubjunflive, they fpeak of a time
paft ; as, por falldrdeSy becaufe you have fpoken.
But when they put para before it, then they fpeak
of a time to come ; as para falldrmos^ that, or to
the end that we may fpeak, in order to fpeak.

Of Moods.

All the tenfes of the indicative mood may be em-
ployed without any conjunftion before them ; but
they admit alfo of fome. Befides the conjun£iion
que, thofe that may be made ufe of are/^, c6mOy and
yudndqy with fome diftindtion in refped to /^f, be-
caufe this conjunftion is feldom ufed before the fu-

Jeije ha^ devW, I do not know if they
eftdu em d&vidafe os inim/ps pa/sara5 o rlOy I doubt
if the enemies will pals the river ; nao pergunto fc
partirhy I do not alk if he will fet out.

The optative or fubjunftive in Portuguefe has al-
ways fome fign annexed ; aSj omla^ prouvira a D^
os.o/e! would to God, 1 pray God, God grant 5
&c.; que.paray quCy &c. that,&c.

The - particle que is not expreffed m the prelent
of this mood, but it is H?derftood in fente^^^^
wilhing or praying ; as, Dcos fat^a bom, let ^^
amend him. ^ When

14« - PORTUGUESE

When ^ is between two verbs^ the laft is not
always put m the fubjun£tive,becaufe, thoagh fame
foy crfyo que vinha^ I believe he comes ; I think it b
better to fay cri^o que vem ; but when there is a ne»
g^tion, thfe verb following que muft be put in the
fubjunftive; as, nao crey^ que vinhayl do not beKeve
hii will come, nai cr^oque vSnha fa5 cido^ I do not
believe he will come fo fooh.

When the verbs crtr^ to believe, /J^A^, to know,
are uftd interrogatively, and followed by the -par- .
tide qwe^ the next verb is put in the indicative,
when the perfon that afked the queftion makes no
doubt of the thing which is the obje£t in queftion s
as, if khdWing that peace is made, I want to know
if ^he people whom I converfe with know, it too, \ .
will exprefe rayfelf thus, Jabeh vis que efia fiita a '
faz ? do you know that peace is made ? But if I
have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want
to be informed of it, I muft aik the queftion thus,
Jahih vbs que a pax eJlSja fiita ? and by no means
fabiis vos que eft&feiia^a paz ? . \

You muft obferve alio, that the prefent fubjunc-
tive of fai^ IS elegantly ufed when it is attended by
a negative, and the particle que in this phrafe, naS
que tujaiba^ not, that 1 know of.

All the verbs ufed imperfonally with the particle
que require the fubjunftive ; as, he precifo que iUe
venha, he muft come ; cotwim que ifia fe faga^ it is
convenient that this be done. You muft only ex-
cept fuch fentences as cxprefs any pofitive a^urance,
or <:ertainty ; as, he cerio que vem^ it is certain thftt
he comes; Jtique ejia em cafa, I know he is' at h^e.
" From thefe obfervations it follows, that all the
verbs not exprefGng a pofitive aflurance, or believ-
ing, but only denoting ignorancey doubt ^ fear ^ aflo^
nyhmentj admiration^ ivij^ingy prayings pretenfion^
or dejire^ govern the fubjunftive mood after que-y
as, duvido que pofsa^ I doubt it is in his power;
/^o que mArra^ L ani afraid he will die ; admirome

que

GRAMMAR, 1*9

que con/tnia, nlffo, I wonder he agrees to it,&G. ; to
J all which they add oxala^ an Arabic word, iSgnJfy-

^ mgGod ^tf«/, which is ufed in Portuguefe before
all the tenfes of the optative or conjunftive, as well
as praza a DSos^ may it pleafe God ; or, prouvera a
DioSy might it pleafe God.

When que is relative, and there is a verb in the
imperatives or in the indicative, with a negative or
interrogation before it, it governs likewife the fub-

" jiitffiUve ; as nao ha^ coufa que mak me inquietey there is
nothing that difturbs me more \ ha coufa no mitido
que me pc^a dar tanto gofto ? is there any thing in the
world ths^t may give me more pleafure? ' allegai-lhe

. tdntas razdens que o pojfao perfuadir^ R^ve him fo
many reafons that he tnay be perfuaded.

The prcfent fubjunftive is fome times rendered in-
to Englifli by the fecond preterimperfefl fubjunftive,
when it is followed by a verb in the future tenfe i as,
cittda que iu trabdlhe^ ndnca Mi de canfar, though I
fliduld work, I never would be tired.
, The Portuguefe ufe fpecially the fame prefent
fubjunftive for the future ; as in thefe fentences,«
and others like :

Nao duvido que venhay \ do not doubt but he will
conie. .

Duvido que o fa^a^ I doubt that, or whether he
-V^ill do it.

Therefore avoid carefully thofe faults, which io^

reigners are fo apt to make, in confidering rather

the tenfe which they want to turn into Portuguele,

' than the mood which the genius of the language

reouifes.

Th^ prefent indicative is alfo ufed for the future,
as well as in Eiiglifli : example,y(0»/a/i h^e em chfa ?
do you dine at home to-day ?

1.3 ' Of

150 P O-R T U G U E S E

. <y the particles governing the Optative or ^ub^

junSive.

The conjunftion que^ that, generally requires the
fubjun£live after it ; but antes que, primeiro que, be-
fore that, always requires it.

Take notice, that que n:)akes all the words to which
it is joined become conjunftives, as, para que, to
the end that ; bem que^ ainda que, &c, Pdjio que^
although ; ate que, till ; quando, cdmo querqu6y which
commonly govern the fubftantive. But com que
ajfim governs the indicative ; as, c}im que, or com que
ajstm vira amanhaa, fo he will come to-morrow.

In Portuguefe you muft take care how you exprefs
though^ or although', if it is by ainda que, you may
put either the fubjunftive or indicative after it: ex-
ample ^ ainda que fija horriem honrado, though he is an
honeft man ; ainda que elle faz aquillo, though he
' iJoes that. But if you render although or though ^
hy nao oijldnte, then you muft ufe the infinitive:
example, though he is an honeft man ; nao obftdnte

fer elle horn em honrado \ though he does this, nao ob-

jiantefazer ^lle ilio. ,• ■

The imperfonal. verbs generally govern the fub-
junftive with ^ue-, but with this diftinftion, when
the imperfonal is in the prefent tenfe or future, of
the indicative mood, then it requires the prefent
fubjunftive mood ; tut when the imperfonaj, or any
other verb taken imperfonally, is in any of the pfe-
terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect^ per-
fect, or pluperfect of the fubjunctive, according to
the meaning of fpeech ; as, importa muito qu^ eUtey
veja tudo, it is of great moment that the king may
fee all; fof cpnveniente que o principe fojfe com 6lle,^\i
was convenient that the prince fhould go with him.
The prefent fubjunctive is like wife conftrued,
when the particle por is feparated from que, by an
adjective; as, por grdnde, por adniiravel, por dduto

fue/eja, though he be great, admirable, learned.

• a An-

GRAMMAR^. I5i

An imperative often requires the future of the
Tubjunctive ; as fucceda o que fucced^r^ or /eja o qne
for^ happen what (hall, happen, at all events.

The imperfect fubjunctive is repeated in this-
phrafe^and others VikQ^fuccedifse^ q quefuccedtfseyXtt
happen what would.

The future of the fubjunctive mood follow gene-
rally thefe, logo que, quando, fe, cdmo, &c. ; as, logo
fue cheg&r irSrnos' a pafse&r^ as foon as he comes, w.e
.will go and take a walk ; qmndo vier^ eftarSmos
prdmptoSj when he comes we will be ready.

.Obferve, that qu&ndo and logo que may alfo be

conftrued with th^ indicative mood ; as, quando el

■ riy vi t^do^ ndS o engdmo^^v/hen the king fees every

'thing, he is not deceived ; Jogo que chegou^ fallei com

^ dlliy as foon as he came, 1 fpoke with him.

Of the Ittfinitvue Mood.

In Portuguefe there is not a general (ign before
tbe .infinitive, as in Englifh the particle /o; but
there are feveral particles ufed before the infinitive,
denoting the fame as to does in Englifh, and they

* are governed by the preceding verbs or noun^.
Thefe particles are the following : tf, para^ de, cam,
em, pory ati, defp6is dc ; and the article (?, when the
infinitive ferves as a nominative to another verb ; as,
di^tr e o fazSr fa^ dias cdufas, faying and doing
are two different things. . '

A coming between two verbs, notes the fecond
as the object of the firfl ; as, a tarddnga das' nofsds
efperdn^as nos enftna a mortificar os nofsos dez^jos, the
delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de-
fire$ ; Slle come fa a difcorrSry he begins to reafon.

Para notes the intention or ufefulnefs ; as, a ad-
verfiddde ferve para experimentar a paciSncia, adver-

. fity ferves to try one's patience. Fara after an ad-
jective denotes its object; as, efti primptopara oh*
ifer^, he i« ready to obey.
. : L4 , Dt

153 PORTUGUESE

De is put between two verbs, if the first go-
verns the genitive or ablative ; and whenvthe fub-
stantive or adjective governs either of thefe two
cafes, de muft go before the following verbs, or in-
finitive ; as, vinho de vir a miu pay^ I have juft feen
my father ; he t^mpo de hirje^ it is time to go away ;
el-riy foifervido de mandar, the king has been pleaf-
cd to order.

The infinitive is on feveral occafions governed by
prepofitions or conjuncti6ns ; as, /em dizer palavra,
without fpeaking a word, where you mayobferve
it is expreffed in Englifti by the, participle prefcnt ;
as ninca se cdnga de jugar^ he is never weary of
playing ; diverte-se em cagdr^ht delights in hunting;
tile esti dointe pot trabalhar demajiadamintey by work-
, ing too much he is fick ; perde ofiu tempo empaffeiar^
he lofes his time in walking ; heideir-me Jem me deS'
ped/r f (hall I go away without taking my leave ?

The infinitive is alfo ufed paflively ; as, naS ha
fue dizer y que very &c. ; there is nothing to be fatd,
feen, &c.

The gerund of any-verb active may be conjugated
with the verb eftdrj to be, after the fame manner as
in Englifh ; as, estdu escrevindoy ' I am writing \ tile
istava dormindo, he was afleep, iSc.

C H A P, YI-

Of the' Syntax of Participles and Gerunds.

THE participle in . the Portuguefe language
generally ends in do^ or to ; as, amad^y- visto,
ditOy%tc.

The active participles that follow the verb ter^
to have, m\xfi end in o ; as>

Tinho vistt> el riy^ I have feen the king.

1 ^ Tinho

GRAMMAR. 153

TMio vifio a rarnha^ I have feen the queen.

E% tinha am&do os iitfroSyl bad loved books.

Eu tinha lev&do as c&rtasy I had carried the letters.

We meet with authors who fometimes make the
participle^ s^gree with the" thing of which they are
(peaking ; as, in Camoens, Canto 1, Stdnza xxix.

E porque c6mo viftesj fern paflTddos,

Na vi&gem tao ijferes pertgos,
, TAUq^ .climasy e dot exprimentados, Csfr.

And Canto 2, Stan. Lxxvi.

Sio offereciminios verdadiiros^

E pal&urasJinciraSy nao dobrhdaSy

As que o reymdnda a os nSbres cavaleiros^

Qi^^ tdnto mar e tirras tern pafladas.

If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought artways
to terminate in (? : example,

El riy iemjanthdoy the king has dined ; a mMa
iim ceadoy the queen has fupped ; Ps vqffos amigos itm
fide^ your friends have laughed ; tninhas irmias tm
dormido^ my fifters have flept.

When the aSive participle happens to precede a|i
infinitive, it muft be terminatedJn o; ^s.ojuiz Ikt
Ifmha feiio cortar a caiSga, the judgp has caufed his .
head to be cut pS.

The paffive participles which are joined with the
tenfes of the verby^, to be, agree with the fubftan-
tive that precedes the verb fer ; o capitao f6i lou-
-vAdfiii the captain was praiied ; a virtude^he eftmida^
virtue is efteemed; os preguigofosfao eenfuradoSyt^it
lazy are blamed 5 as wjiasyoyasjdrai vendidas^ your
jewels were fold.

The Portuguefe generally: fuppneffr the gerunds
jiJ^ww^ and b^tig before the |:»rtjap]es.^ as, dko ijo^
having faid fo ; acabado ofermao^ the fermon beings
ended. ' T))is^ manner. of fpeAkingis called i^ gram-
marians iftblativies^iabfehtte.

Tilt particij^e of the prefeat teofc in ^ortuc nefe
has fmgUfatr^^lPid pkurai»,but one termination ferves
for both genders 3 ,as hum homem teminte a Deos^ a

J

154 PORTUGUESE

man fearing God ; hAma mdhir tem^nte a Dioiy a
^oman fearing God ; homens temtnies a DSos^ peo-
^ pie fearing God.

There are in Portuguefe a great many participles
which are ufed fubftantively ; as, ignordihei amdnte^
ouvinte, ejluddnte, Ssc. ; an ignorant, a lover» an^ au-*
ditor or hearer, a fcholar, fsrr.

It is better to place the nominative after the ge-
rund than before -, as ejldrido el r6y na comidia^ the
king being at the play.

CHAP. VII.

Of Prepositions.

A PREPOSITION is a part of fpeech, which is put
before nouns, and fometimes before verbs, to
explain fome particular circumllance.

rrepofitions may be divided into feparable and
infeparable. An mfeparable prepofition is never
ioMvA but in compound words, and fignifies nothing
of itfelf. A feparable prepofition is generally fepa-
rated from other words, and fignifies fomething of
itfelf.

The infeparable propofitions are,

^^ and abs ; as abrogar^ to abrogate ;' ^hjlfyr-fe^ to
abftain.

Arce^ or archi ; as, arceUfpo^ an archbi0iop 5 or-
ihiduaue, an archduke.

Aa-y as, advetuicioy adventitious.

Am ; as, ambiguo, ambiguous ; ampAro, prdtedion,
iheltcn '

Grcumy as circumfidnda, circumftance.

Co, as, cohabit&r, to live together, to cohabit.

JD«, feirves to exprefs the contrary of the word it
is joined to ; a6> dejucirto^ miftal^e s derfas^^ to un-

/ ' : -, do;

G RAM MA R. 155

do ; ikfenganhr^ to undeceive ; are the contrary of
mctrto^fazir^ and enganhr.

' Dis ; as, dijp6r\ to difpofe ; difiinguir, to diftin-
guiQi 5 diftribuir^ to diftribute.

Ex I as, extrahir^ to extra£t.

/«, has commonly a negative or privative (enfe,

denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word

it precedes ; as, incapdz, unable; infeliz^ unhappy;

iftacgcSy ina^ion, i^c. ; but fonOetimes it is affirma-

•tive, as in Latin.

Obferve, that in before r is changed into rr ; as,,
hregulAry irregular ; irracionali irrational : before /,
into /7; as illegitimo^ illegitimate; before m^inh
changed into im; as immateri&l^ immaterial.

Ob', zSyObviiry to obviate.

Pos ; as, i>ofp6r^ to poftpofe, or to poftpone.

Pre I as, prccedSr, to go before; predfceffdr, an an-
ceftor; *

Pro ; as, pfopdr, to propofe ; piromet^, to pro-
mife.

. Re, is a borrowed particle from the Latins, which
generally denotes iteration, or backward a£tion j
as, reedijicar, to rebuild ; repercutir, to repercute, or
ftrike back.

5^ ; as^focorrSr, to help, to fuccour.

5c?r ; as, y&rr/r, to fmile.

Sos; as, yi/?/r, to fupporfr;

Soto ; as, fdtopdr, to put or lay under.

Sub^ or fob', as, y»^^///r«(?, fubaltern; fubfcrevjir^
to fubfcribe,-y&^/)^»^,y&i&ffl/^r, iic.

The Arabic article al^ which is common to all
genders and both numbers, is found in the begin-
ning of almoft all the words that remain in the Por-
tugu^fe language from the Arabic, and it is the
fureft way to diftinguifli them. But the Portu-
guefe articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with-
out taking off their ^article, 4/, as a almofida, the
cufhion ; Alcorao, die Cdran, ^c.

The

i>6 PORTUGUESE

. The Greek prepofition anti enters into the com-
pofition of a great many Portuguefe words, which
cannot be fet down here. It is enough to obferve,
that it fignifies generally oppofite ; as in Antlpodas^
Antipodes s anu'pdpa, antipop^ ; and fometimes it
ilgnifies before; as in dntiloquio, 3, preface* a^f peak-
ing firft ; but in this laft fenfe it is derived from th^
Xiatin prepofition anie.

Offeparable Prepqfitioris .

It is abfolutely impoffible ever to attain to the
knowledge of any language whatever, without tho-
roughly underflanding the divers relations denoted
by the prepofitions^ and. the feveral cafes of nouns
which they govern ; both which relations and cafes
being arbitrary, vary and differ much In all Ian*
guages. This only infiance wiH evince it: the
llnglifli fay, io think of a thing ; the French,^ to
think to a things the Geftnans and Dutch, to think
on, or upon a thing ; the Spaniards and Portuguefe,
./« think in a thing, &c. Now it will avail an Englifh-
,man but little to know that of\^ expreflfed in Portu-
guefe by de, if he does not know which relations en^
and de denote in that language ; fince Hhe Portu-
guefe fay, to think in a thing, and not of^ thing ;
therefore we will treat here of each of them, and of
Iheir cohftruftion feparately.

Ifl. A^ or rather ao^ as, aos, (at, in, on, &c.) de-
note the place whither one is going ; as,

Eu v6u a LondreSj I go to London.
, P'^oltar a Portugal, to return, or go back to Piwtu-

A^ in this fense, is a prepofition, but in the next
obfervations, it is a particle.

2dly. yi denotes time ; as, chgar a tempo, ib^x-
TivQ in time ; a tddo o tempo, at all times.

;3dly;. A denotes the way of being, or of doing of
people; as alfo their poflure, geflure^ or a£tion| as

GRAMMAR. 157

' Efthrh f&a vontide, to be at one's eafe.

' A direfta, on the right hand; a efquir'da, on the .
left hand.

Vivir Afua vontade, to live to one's mind, as one
likps. • - '

AndaT a pi ou a cavdtio^ to go on foot, or onhorfe*
back/

Mmtar a cav&llo, to ride on horfeback,

Corr^r a rideafoltay to ride full fpeed.

Trajhr & France/a, to drefs after the French way.

Fiver a Inglixa^ to live after the Englifti fafhion.

Andhr a grander p&Jfos^ to walk at a great rate.

Andhr a pajjdi lintosy to walk very flo^wly.
' 4thly. A denotes ilie price of things ; as, a oifo
xtiinSj at eight fliillings. It denotes alio the weight :
but as the nouns fignifying weight are generally ufcd
in the plural number, hence it is that they add j to
0j when it is placed before nouns of the feminine
gender, and os when it precedes nouns of the mas*
culine gender: fo they lay, ds ongas^ by the ounce ;
aorarrdieis, by tbe pound, &?^.- A denotes alfo the
meafure ; as, medir a pa/mos, to fpan or meafure by
the hand extended.

When a is preceded by daquf, and foUpwed by a
•noun of time, it denotes the fpace of time after
which fomething is to be done: as, el rey partira
dcqui a ires dias^ the king will fet out three days
hence,

5thly. i^ denotes the tools ufed in working, as

irkewife the games one plays at ; as, abrir ao mtil,

"to gr^ve ; wherein you fee they add oio' a^ trabat--

h&r it candia^ to do any thing by candle-light; d

ag&lha^viixSx the needle.

Andar d.vila^ to fail, or to be under fail,

• Jogdr a pela^ to play at tennis.

• 7^S^^ ^-^ cirtaSy to play at cards ; wherein you fee
they add j to ^ when the noun is of the feminine
gender, and placed in the plural number.

Jogdr

158 . PORTUGUESE

t

Jorir aos cimos, to play at piquet ; wherein you
• fee they add os to a when it precedes nouns fignify-
ing games, when they are of the mafculine gender
and put in the plural number.

6thly. J fignifies fometimes as. Examp. E/fa
iflo afiugSfto ? Is this as you like it? And feme-
times it fignifies after ; as, a feu mbdo^ after his or
her way. It fignifies alfo in \ as, ao principiOy in the
beginning ; but then they add o to it.

' 7thly. A is alfo put before the infinitives, pre-
ceded by another verb ; as, enfin&r a canthvy to teach
to fing. It is alfo placed between two equal num-
bers, to denote order ; as^ d6us a ddus^ two by two ;
^utrao a quitro, four by four: and fometimes it is

E receded by a participle or adjeftive, and follo^ved '
y an infinitive mood.

8thly. -^ is a particle of compofition, ferving to
many nouns,, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often,
increafes the meanings zs, ^din&eiraii), very rich,
that has a great deal pf money ; but it generally ex* :
. preffes in verbs the aftion of the nouns they are
compofed of 5 as, ajoelh&r^ to kneel down, which
is formed from a and joilho^ knee ; airanddr, to ap-
peafe j alargir^* to enlarge ; from br&ndo^ foft ; Idrgo^
wide, &fr.

9thly. -^, when it is preceded by the verby?r, and
followed by the pronouns perfonal, fignifie? in the
Jlead ofy zSyfe iuf6f$e a vosjfaria aqul/o, if I was you
(in your place) I would <io that.

lOthly. When a is placed before cd/a, and the fenfe
implies^w^g- to, it is Englilhed by to^ but the word .
ci/a is left out 5 as, i//e fti a chfa do governaddr, he
went to the governor's. You muft obferve, that a
in this fenfe is a propofition.

1 1. Ao pi fignifies /if^r ; as, pdnde hum ao pe do
tutro, place, put, or fet them near one another.
Sometimes mi/mo comes before ao pi, to exprefs
iiill more the neamefs of a thing, and mifmo ao pi

i^

GRAMMAR. . 159

is Engliflbed by hard iy, jufi iy, &c. ; as, afia cifs
eit& mifmo aope da minha^ his houfe is juft by mine.

12th, When the noun refpeito is preceded by a^
it is ufed in the fame tenfe as em c&mparagao^ but re-
quires Qn.e of thefe particles, do^ da, dos, das, after
it, and fignifies sn comparifon of, in regard to, in refpeS
ofy zs,ifio he n&da a refpeito do que pqffo diz^r, this is
nothing to other things that I can fay.

13th. When a comes before a verb neuter, it
marks a dative ; and after a verb a£iive, an accuia-
tive cafe.

A before the verb propqfito is ufed in familiar dif-
COIirfes ;. as, a propqfiio, efquecime de dizer-vos o outro
£a ; now I think on't, I forgot to tell you t'other

14thj Ao reveZf or as ave/sas, are alfo nfed as
prepofitions, attended by, de, do, da, &c. ; and it fig-
nifies quite iherever/ej or, contrary; as i/Ie faz tiioo
aoreviz, or as avefsas do que ouvera de fer, ou do que
Ih dizem, he does every thing quite the reverfe of
right, or contrary to what he is bid.

15th. A before trSco fignifies provided that. It^
is alfo ufed before the word tiro, as, a tiro de piga,
within cannon fhot.

I6th. C&ra a cara, cSrpo a corpo,{ignify face toface,
body to body. Tomdr h^ima cSufa a h6a ou a ma
parte, fignifies to take a thing well or ill.

Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti-
. cle a. The others mull ' be learned in conftruing
and reading good Portuguefe books.

Xft. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, (of, from,
l^c. ) denote, firft, the place one comes from ; as,
fahir de LSndres, to go out of London ; vir de Frdn^
fa^ das Indias, 6?r. ; to come from France, from the
Indies, &c.

2d. D^between two nouns denotes the quality of
the perfon expreflcd by the firft noun ; as, hum ho^
mem de honra,^, man of honour : or the matter which
the thing of the firft noun is made of; as,

Huma

V

\

160 PORTUGUESE

HufM estdiua de marmort^ a ftatue of marble. '

H£ma ponte de madeira eh depidra^ a wood or ftotito
bridge. ^ ^

Note, that two nouns fo joined with de are .com-
monly Engliflied^ by two nouns likewife, but with**
out a prepofition, or rather by a compound word,,
wiiofe firft noun (whether fubflantive dr adje6liv)s)
expreffes the matter and quality, nianner, form, and
ufe of the other; as a ftone- bridge, hUma ponte de
pSdra^'j a dancing-mafter, kum mesirede d&nga.

5d.' Dcy doy da^ dos^ das^ are ufed in Portuguefe
after the participles of the preterite, with Jer^^ as^
Jer amddo, ou bem visto do pSvo^ dos fakioSf i^c. ; to be
beloved by the people, by the learned, &c.

Note, that do ferves for the mafculine, da for tbe»
feminine, and de for both.

44h. De fometimes fignifies iy/ as, denote; hy
night ; de dm, by day.

5th. De before em^ and many nouns of time de-
notes the regular interval of the time after v(Fh]d|
fomething begins again ; as, ^u vSu vHo de dim ed
dSus diaSy I go to fee him every other day ; and be-
fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or
para between, de denotes the paffing from one plape
or condition to another j as, corrirde rua em ria, to
run from ftreet to ftreet ; de ma/ para peor^ worfQ and '
worfe. ^

6tn. De after fome verbs, figni6es afier or Ar;
as, ilJe portSu-fe d^esta Jbrte^ he behaved in or after-
this manner.

. 7th. /)f isVifed before an infinitive, and is then
governed by fome preceding noun or verb j as, ca*
pim de et^nkr^ capable to teach ; digno de fer am&de^
worthy to be loved, &c. j procwrardefazfy^ to endea^
vour to dO; authoridade de pregdr^ the power or au-
tbority of preaching, ^r.

8th. De is fometimes Englifhed by on ; as, pSr-fe
dejUthoij to kneel down on one's knees.

S. De

<3 A A Sr Ma r. TWi

*!^. Dthtitwteh ti¥o Aoinid deidoteft the ulfe which

m thing i$ defigned for ; as, ,^ziite de tandU^ lamp^

oil ;: mttk dtfm^ tt fire-Artn % mfHho' de *oSni6, n win^^

Ndt«» that this rektioii \A ^iltpttStA inEngliflih^
f Wo nootas, making a^ cidtti|^6iind wctd : the fti^ of
yf9\i\t\i fign{fie» th^ thanner, form^ aind af«, d€ti6ttd
yiffUkt Pcntugdefetnrepoikiofr i as, cadiira de hr&fo$i
fkfi ani^chair. Or tsloow-chaii" ; ^Oila dccifa^ A WftX*
candle, S^. *

10. De denotes fometiriles the qualify of things;
88* m^yas de irts fhs^ fiockings V^ith three thmds..
SomiKtiaies it denotes alio the price ; as, pdnM di
dnAito^ xeltHS, eighteen fliilting cloth.

11. jD^ is fometimes Englilhed by ff^M ; as;viv&
^ff^fifitm&rje de pim^ to live upon fifli. Sonaetimes
it IS EngHAed by witAi M^m^trir dejrfsytot flvrve
with cold.

12. JDe fonietiipnies fignifiesyor ox out ofy Mjfaliir
'^M^egria^ to leap for joy ; de niodiflo^ out of mo-*

. rs. De figpifies fondetiolifes at \ as, zmbir de ai^
'pihn^ laugh at one;

14. De is foitietimes left out ill Englifh^ tfs,^
z&r de Aima cok/a^ to eiijoy a thinj^.

15. D^ followed by two nouns of oili&Bef and the
prepofition i?// between theiri, is Eriglifiied by ie*
iween-^ as^ hum hfmem de quarfftta ate eincoihia Mnos^ .
'a.maiibetweei) forty and iifty.

' 16< '2)<, preceded by the prepofition dUnti^ ift left
out 'in Engltih s ^s, didnte de rnhf, before xfie'^ M-
dnte de DioSy, before God.

17. jD^ when it is plated before cafa, znd the
ienfe ittipliietiiffrih^fh^mi is Engliflied hfjfrvm j but
the ' word V^jISr fometimes ii left out iii Englilh, and
fometimes not; a^^ vinho de cafa (meaning rriy
houfe) I come from home, from myhoufe: but
lirtiep tbcy fay, vhixf dk c^ Ja Senhdta €, we muft .

M render

^162 P* Q «^T U G U E S E

rehder it iVEnglifli thus, / am rentrtmgjrem Mrs.

Finally, de \% itifed before feveral. words; as, M
irifos, lying all along on the ground; de madrugi^
'da^ioon in the ^mqrning ; de veyaSy in- earneft, feri-
oully ; de verdS, \r\ Aimmer ;. idmem de paUvra, 4
man as good as his word ; de ro^Ar, backwards, or
on one's back; \andir de pi, to be fickly withoujt
being bed-rid : and many others wliich muft bf
learnt bjrufe. ,

jfntes.

HL Antes, before, ihews a relation of time, df ^
-which it denotes priority; and is always oppofite to
depots, after ; as, antes da criagaS do miindo,De(oK Ihe
creation of the world, ^ »

Primiiro is alfo a prepofition ; as, ille cke^dupri-
rnHro que Su, he arrived before me.

Didnte.

IV. Didnte, before, fliews a. relation of plac^,
and it is always oppofite to detrdz, behind. If fig-
nifies alfo fom^times em, or na prejinga ; as, ha Sr^ «
vores diante de fia cafa, there are trees before Ijjs ■
houfe ; ponde aquillo didnte do fogo, fet or put trait \
before the fire ; prigar didnte deMi, to preach b^
fore the king.

Didnte is alfo fpmetimes an adverb, and may be
ufed inftead o( adidnte-, as, ir didnte or adidntt, to
o before : but in the following phrafe you muft
ay, n&5 vades tdnto adidnte, and not didnte, don^t gO
fo far ; por didnte is to be Englifhed by a» in th€ fol*
lowing phrafe, ide for didnte, go on. ^ ^^^

Depots. ^[\v\

V. Dep6is,^{tT, denotes pofteriorityoftim^and
it is ufed in oppofition to dntes ; as, dep&is do diMviOj
after the delude : depois do miio-dia, after noon*

Depdis alfo is ufed with an infinitive ; as, f(dtp
a^illo, or tendofeito aquillo, or depots defaztr a^Uh^

" after ^

. G R A M M A R. MS

after having done that; and it is a)fo made a con-
jun£)tion with que^ governing the indicative; as, de*
p6is que tivtfeiio aqull/o.uf tcr he had done that,

" .- Detriz. ,

5 VI. Ditr&z^ behind, denotes pofteriority both of

place and order, and it is faid in oppoiition to didnte ;

. as, s/6a cafa efia detraz da vbjfa^ bis houfe is behind

^yodrs ; ille vittha detriz de mim ; ' he walked aft en

me. *

Em. \

VII. EtHy or noy na, ms, nas, (in^ into, withi»«

&C.) denote a relation both of time and place. The

many various iignifications in which thefe prepofi-

tions are ufed, rouft be accurately obferved, and

. much regard had to them -in the pra£Uce.

No and na are fometimes rendered into Englifh by
a ; ail, duas vizts tto dia, nafemdnay &c. twice a day,
aweek|,&c.

Noy fuiy &c^ are always ufed before nouns de-
jioting the place wherein fome^thing is kept ; as, ^i
7IO gabmitty it is in the clofet ; na papeleiray in the
bureau ; nas gavStas^ in the drawers \ na, ria^ in the
ftreet, &c. but fometimes . they are Englifbed by
np(m ; as, cahir no cMo, to fall upon the ground.

Emy noy My &c. fignifies commonly />/; as, en^
L&ndi'esy in London ; eM na graga del rey^ he is in
^ favour with the king; but in. fome cafes it has a
.very particular meaning j as, ejtiiT em c&rpOy which
ilgnifies literally to be in body, but the tfue fenfeof
it is to be wiihotti a cloak f- fo that the body is iriore
expofed to view without an upper garment. Eflkr
jem fernaiy literally, to be in legSy (ignrfies to be barer
l^^^\ J^bat is, the legs expofed without ftockings.
^&r em cami/a is faid of one that has only the fhirt
on his back. • .

When this prepoiition em is before an infinitive

iQ Ppjrtuguefe, then it is an Englifli gerund; as,

cw^fie em fallhr bem^ it cpnfifts in ipeaking well y

si M2 bat

• ■ I.

^162 PORTUGUESE

rehder it in'Englifh thus, / am retvrmigjrom Mrs
Cs.

Finally, de i$ lUed before feveral, words; as^ J^
irifos, lying all along on the ground ; de madrugi^^
da^ foon in: the mqrning ; dt veras^ in- earneft, ieri-
oufly ; de verdS, in iummer ;. Admem de palivrja^ 4
map as good as his word ; de t^/^at, backwards, or
jon one's back ; \afidiar de pe, to be fickly without
being bed-rid : and many others wliich muft, bf
learnt by^ufe* .1

Ante$.

HI. Antes ^ before, fhews a relation of time, of
' which it denotes priority ; and is always oppofite to
depots^ after ; as, antes da crkifaS do m^ndo,hefoTe the
creation of the world. - *

Primiiro is alfo a prepofition ; as, ille cke^Supri-
m&ro que Su, he arrived before me.

Diante.

IV. Duinie, before, (hews a relation of plac^,
and it is always oppofite to detrdZy behjnd. lij^g*
nifies alfo fom^tinies em^ or na preftnga ; as, ha or- -
vores diante de fia chfa^ there are trees before bj*
hpufe ; ponde aqutUo diante do fogo, fet or put tluft
before the fire 5 pregar didnte del-tii, to preach b^
fore the king.

Didnte is alfo fptnetimes an adverb, and may be
ufed inllead of adidnte 3 as, ir didnte or adidntt, to

JY> before : but in the following phrafe you muft
ay, n&S vddes tdnto adidnte, and not didnte, don't gO
U} far ; por didnte is to be Englifhed hyonin tb« fol-
lowing phrafe, ide por didnte, go on. ^ ^^^

' Depdis. -imr

V. Depdis, ^ftcT, denotes pofteriorityoftime»and
it is ufed in oppoiition to dntes^ as, depAis dodkMviOy
^hev the delude : depdis do miio^dia, after noom

. Depdis alfo is ufed with an infinitive ; as, feitp
sqmllo^ or tendo/eito aquiUo, or depots defoT^ir a^ptUk,

after

\.

. G R A M M A R. 163^

after having done that; and it is alfc) made a co|i-
jun£)tion with f»^ governing the indicative; as, de*
p6is que tivtfeiio aqull/o, sftcr he had done that,

Detriz/ / '

, VI. Deir&z^ behind, denotes pofteriority both of
place and order, and it is faid in oppofition to dulfife ;
as, s/6a cafa efia dttrazda vbjfa^ bis houfe is behind
,yoUrs ; Hie vinha detraz de mim ; " he walked aften
me. *

Em.
: VIL Em, Of noy na, fwsj nas, (in, into, withi»«
&cO denote a relation both of time and place. The
many various iignifications in which thefe prepofi-
lions are ufed, rouft be accurately obferved, and
much regard had to themJn the pra£Uce.

No and na are fometimes rendered into Englifh by
a ; 2ii^dua5 vizes tto dia^ nifemdnay &c. twice a day,
aweek»&c.

JNfe, »?, &c^ are always ufed before nouits de-
noting the place wherein fome.thing is kep^; ^^yejii
M gabintte^ it is in the clofet ; na papeleira^ in the
bureau ; nas gtru^as, in the drawers i na, rita^ in the
ftreet, &c. but fometimes . they are Englifbed by
np&i ; as, cahW no c/iaS, to fall upon the ground.

Em, nOi fia, &c. fignifies commonly />/ ; as, <79f
Ldndi'esy in London ; efla na gr&ga del rSy, he is in
favour with the king; but in. Tome cafes it has a
.very particular meaning j as, eftar em cSrpOj which
iignifies literally to be in bedy^ but the tfup fenfe<»f
ft is to be wiihotti a cloak i- fo that the body isiriore
expofed to view without an upper garment. Eflir
,em -pirnasy literally, to be in legSy (igiufies to be barer
legged \ Jthat is, the legs expofed without ilockin^s.
Epar em catnifa is faid of one that has only the fhirt
on his back.

When this prcpofition em is before an infinitive
Jo Pojrtuguefe, then it is an Englifli gerund; as,
crni/ifie em fallhr bem^ it cpnfifts jn ipeaking well ^
y : " M2 - bat

16* : P O R T U G U ES E

■

but when it is found before a gerund, it (ignifie$ itf
fimt 0s ; as, mn acabdndo irJi^ as foon as I have done,
I will geJ.

Nos nojfos tempos is Engliftied by now a^iays.

Em i^ ufed \tk fentences that imply a general ienfe \
t9, Ette tfik em mifjsr&vel eflhdo^ he is in a wretched
conditioii; and not nomijer&vel: but if the fent^nce?
imply ft particular fenfe^ you ntuft make ufe of n$^
nas, &c. as, no miferave/ eftado em que Hie ejli, in th'e
wretched condition wherein he is ; and not em mje-
rkvel YoD muft obferve in this laft example and
the like» that you ought to make ufe of ^Mr before
jw^, and not of w^ m> &:c. which are to be placed
on^ before m^; therefore you muft not lay^ m
mjer&vei eJi&M m ^e Hie efih\ but you may faj» w
imjer&vil efiido no quai tile eftd.

Note, that em cenftnied with pronouns without
an article, makes a fort of adverb, rendered itita
Ehglilb by a prepofition and a noun ; thus in thin
fbttence, wbs iiimos em cSehe^ we fliall go in d CMcb^
pm ckhev^Wi adverb of manner, whicl^ (hews bow
weihall go : but no coche denotes fometbing befides^
as if a company were cbnfidering how they (hall ride
to a place^ fomebody would (ay, v6s itHs na cadei-
ninhay e nos no cSche, you (hall go in the chair, and
we in the coach ; no c6che would be (aid in oppofi-
tiQn to na cudekinha^ and both rejjpedivelv to iome
fMCtfied chair and eoacb ; or elie they (iiould fo|r>
w ififs em cadeirmha^ e nSs em c6cie* But in thki
:jC^tber fentence^ en dUxSi o meuehapio no cockey I left
"^my b^t in the coach, it would be improper tq.&y
tm cdciey becaufe fome particular coach is roeant|
io wit^ that which has drove nie here or tbsn^ or
which has been fpoken of.

We fay de veraS, no veraS or emo veraS^ ^invSr'^
Ir6, no invirnoy &c. in fummer, in winter, &c. '

Em is alfo rendered into Englifli by or^ MB, tm
tddoo ttmpo^ ftt an times.

&n

GR A M M A R< i«5

Em h sfed, and never no^ m^ &c. before proper
Mtmes of cities and authors ; as, ille efth em IJndres^
he is in London ; nbs limos em Cicero^ we read in
Cicera* But they fay no P6ri§^ in Oporto.

Em^ and no^ na^ &c. are conftrued with the name;
of kiugdotns i us^em or na, Ing/aiirra^ in Eagl^id :
hutwifia, is mod commonly conftrued with nanies
of ptovinces; as, m> AJentejo^ na Beira^ &c» in Aien*,
tejo, in Beira, &c.

Em is fometimes rendered into Engliilh by inio ^
M Nardjo foi tranrforrnido em Jl6r, Narciflus ww
metamorphofed into a flower : and fometimes by
ioi as de rua em rua, from ftreet to ftreet.

No, ncy are fotnetiraes r^dered into EagliA bv
Mgatnfii ^dar co^ a caiifs m pMrHdc^ to dau one a
wad agaioft the wall.

. No^ na, &c. ave aHb rendered into £ngli& bjr ih
and fometimes by into ; as, Ur htm menim mi Ar^c^s,
to hold a ch^d in one's arms ; Mirejrir aJgima emf/k
j$as maos, de algn/m^ to deliver a ^ing into font-
body's hands.

Em is ufed before the word traveZf as In this
^ipbrafe, /0r/^ de mar em traiviz ^em AlgaHn^ to fallout
togethen

^Em before a noun of time^ deoofes the fpgce of
tame that Aides away in dobg (bmething j as, el-rijf
foi a HanSver, em ires dlas, the king went to Hanov^
in three days ; that is, he was no longer than three
days in going.

.:; Em is fometimes ufed after the verb ikp to go ; as,
vUtm fuatre m0es qae iu Ofat eheguiiij it is now going
-on four months fince I came hiiher.

Em before qujnto, and fometimes without it, is
rendered into Englifh by wii/e or whilfii as, em
qudnto vosfazSis aquiUo, iu JarSi yioy while you do
that» I fliall do this: but if they are followed by a
noon of time with an interrogation, then they muft
be rendered into Englifii by in how much^ or many ;
v^im fudnte tempo P in bow much time? You muft

M 3 Oe&txH^

\

iae P'O fe T u G u E s L

bbferve, that em qiidntb a mim, a tt\ a tV//, Sec. ar«
rendered into £ngli(fa by for what cmcerns me;, tkte^

'ki^l\ &c.

You muft obferve that na ferves for the mafculfne,
ua for the feminfnc, and em for both.

Em iignifies as ; as, em final da /Ua amiz&de, as a

- token of his friend (hip ; em primio^ as a reward.

•^ The prepoiitions em^ no^ na^ &c. and dentro^ have

very often the fame (ignification, thereforethcy may

Tometimes be ufed one inftead of the othei*; as ef-

'ta na^avitay or Mntro da gav^ia, it is in the

drawer ; efia na cidhde^ or dhitro da cidade^ be is in

tQwrt.

EfH before the words /^w/^r, utilidade^ cmfidera^

"yam^ razaSfZnd the like, CgHtfics ift behalf offsr

the fake of, on account of, &c. as, em razao das btUas

acfdens ^ue ille tern feito^n confideration of the great

'things he has performed.,

OpferVe, that they very often make an elifion of
rite laft vowelis, 0, a, of the prepofitioft noy w^
when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next
word^ -V iS^otf, inftead of na igoa^y they alfo cut
'off the e of the prepofition em^ and change the m'
into ny as you may fee in Camoens, Canto 2. Stan2t
XXXI 1. V alg&mp6rtOy inftead of em algumporto, where-
in you muft 'obferve that »' is to be Englifhed by

^Oy or hito.

■■ <• ■

Com*

* . VII. This prepofition fignificsw/V^, and itdenotcs

-i:onjun£tion, union, mixing, aflembling, keeping
f:onTpan}r ; / as, cafir huma donzella com hum homem
honrado^ to marry a maid with ain honeft man; *>(/>
com hlguimy to go with one ; com a ajtida de D4oSy

'by God's help, &c. .

' Obferve that moft of the adverbs formed of the

adjeftives are turned in Portuguefe by the pre-

^ pofition com and the fubftantive ; as, atrevidamifite,

voWyy^com atrevimintOy with boldrtefej elegante-
' I • mbttey

G » A MM A R. i^r-

Meir/^; elegantly ; com eUgdncia^ with elegance > iw--
tfzmifnie, politely^ com cortezia^ with politenefs, &c.
You muft obierve, that the laft confonaiit m is
very often cut o£F, even before the noun of number
ium^ one ; and fo they fay arm, iriftead of com Aumf
as you may fee in CamocnStCzM. 2. Stanza xxxvii: •

* Kote, . that zevVA me ^ with thee^ wiih himfelf^ &C4
are rendered into Portuguefe by commlgo^ comiigo,*
or comvofco, comjigo, comnS/cOy comvofco, com/fgo.

When cam is preceded by para, it iignifies Z^-
ife^tfr^, and fometimes over, in Englifh ; zs^/eJJmos
pieJofos para com os pobres, let us be merciful towards
the poor. Ter grdnde podir para com Alguim, to ^
llave a great influence over fdmebody's mind.
'Com before tbe word capa is ufed fnetaphorically,^
and then it fignifies under colour, or pretext. >

Para.

* VlU.'Pjr^ is rendered into Engli{hbyjf&r.;^but it
fignifies alfo /<?, when it is found before theinfinitiyet'
and denotes the irrtention, or purpofe in doing'
fbmethitig; as, Sfte livro he para mtu irmcA, this
book' is for my brother -, efta p6mia he para efcrev^r^-
this pen ils to write ; Deos nos ftz para amdl'o, God '
itoade us for to love him ; comtr he neceJJ&rto para
ionferv&r'a vida, eating is heceflary for preferviDg-
VSt. . ' .

" Bdrd cfue \% rendered into Englilh hy f^r whaty
M, para que he ijld ? for what is this ? andfometime^'^
by that, or in order that ; as, para que vinha virme,
tnat he may come and fee me. But porfue fignifies
ndfy, for what, upon what account, zs, porquf nSS*"
^indes f why don't you come ? but when it is not-^
fbliowed by an interrogation^ it fignifies hecaufi^

; Parakxwts likewife before the verbs, to denote'
what one is able to do in confequenceofbis.prefent
difpofition ; as, ille hi baftantemHte fbrte para andar^
'a cavSUo'y he is firoog enough to ride \ elle tem haj^

M 4 tdnte

1^9 PORTUGUESE

to Hiamtf^ia ;hinp{clf ; ocf4^ap ,ie muit^ fawrji^
pfra no5 niio jftrvir-nm d^Ha^ XkP pppjifiQii iff tpo /a^
iffi^rable to let it fji^p.

i^«r<i :e;cf)jre0i^ alfo ^ c^papity pr incapacity of
d.QiRg i^y :$^|ig ; a^y ^/c h Jibm^m p^^ j^> be it
tbft projs^^r OQan wante4 tor thi«; hekimmparflptu-
€9^ lie IS good lax littlie 3 ^ iM^^ para nAdf, l^e W
good fornQtbing. ' .

. Thi^ prepoiition is alfo ufed to depots (h^ cod or
iQf>tiv9 ^ dqi^g any thing ; aa» traMM> para i^im
fl^lk^^ \ work for the public goad ; hum hfykii
p0rd Mf^inres^ gn faofpital for the poor.

Para is a prepofitipn of time ; as iftome h&pa pmm
io4fi 4nHp y ih\^ is fufficieat tp noe for all the y^ar ;

ejlai unidos, pgra fSmpr^, they are united for ever »
j^ora dous mSfes ira muito pouco^ for two months it
was too little.

, Para i« foai^times pi:eceded by the adverb /^^ and
fpUowed by a noijin of time, and then it is ElogliAi'**
ed by againfi or tgwards ^ as. Id para ofim da femd^
Mf againft the e^d of tbp week, w towards tfaie en4

of the w^e^'

iV^. i$ fometiines Engliifaed by confiierm^y pr-
tf^^ r/y^^ /^ ; as, efit menm Sfii^ muitQ adianiida
para a idide qmc tm^ pr para 6 pouco t^rnpo q^g^
apriftdey this child is very forward for his age, or
copfideriog the little time hehas learned ; par^ IngUz
fgm dcmafiadamint$^ he talks too much cpA^ring
that he is an Engliihmant

]^ara iignifies fo^netimes juji pr ready to ^ siS, ^Uf
e04 para pafiir, he is juft gping away^ he i^ ready^

Par^ H

alfo ufed before the word grdfas ; as, 0a
n4^J^J>afa^rafaSy he takes no jeft; SUt ni^ «?i
/^^.ir^f^f h^ ^^ out ^ humour, er he is in an )1L
Kuou^ur. . -

Farajnd^ f %Qifies Vf hither i tv^^^hflt plac9 ^ %

Para

' • t' # • * •

. . ""J

ORAM MAIL 169

p4ita mf 'PT ptr^ fuifim ? %ii]fiQS it wiai md '

fyr0 k -^ £Qglift«<i by twmds^ and k faid of
p1ape« I a«, JMr^ # ^r^nr^, ^towards, ^ to the eaft.
/Wa ^M$ qmr fH$^ ^SHJfies whitMr^ ox to wA^

Pwa imttri^ pArf^i figoUiefi tfWAtM amhr fkc4^

Para comigOy towards me.
, f4ira. duit)Uf» fignifies/dir iie tint /# emu.

D0 nrim, para mm^ £gnifie$ f9r snAai coucerm mi,

Para i« ufed by CamoffHs. Cant. 2, Stanza xxiv.
bcibre the pr^epofitfon iarJ^Zy atid fignifieg i^rib-
wards, »

JRtfr^ betwi^o ^w<^ nouns of Dumber is Etigli&ed
bjr IT, and fometimes by «i^.; as^ ^«i» i<?»^#i de
fuarikia para cincohrti dmos^ a nan b^woen forty ^^
«ad Afty; ^a ff^/n? ^r^ i:incB Ugooiy it is about
f<Hur or five leagues diftvit. > ^

'. IX- PiNr,peUo,piliaypil/os^ or peUaSy{igmfy far; as .
^ 4m»^r de V(fs^ tor your iake ; p$r feis femdnasy for
fix weeks ^ paldvrapor palMfra^ word for word:

A»49 and p0la iniiead of /t^//<^ and pella^ are out of
ufc.

Par fometiines denotes that the thing is not yet
done ; as, ifia obra ejl& por acabdr^ this work is not
yet finiflied.

i'^r, byv for, over, or through ; as^ alcancSi^o p^K
0mpink$y I obtained it by prote£tion; m v6u por
dmhtrpy I am goiqg for money \ pafsh piUos ,<dmpoSy
I walk, through the fielda s P^ ^^^^ ^ rgitio, all over
the kingdom.

. When for is before aft infiajtire, and folia wed by
a negative, in the latter pv't of the fentence, it ii
Gogliflied by aUhwgb or thpugh\ ?Sf por fcr dcwia^
or p9r drvota que/eja^ na^ deim 4fi Jifr malkir, though

(he

»

170 P 6 R t^U G U e: S E

jbe is a religious woman, yc^ (hfe is. a woman \pir s(r>
poire, or 'par poUnaue sija, n&9 dcixa de ser sok/rimi
though (he has no fortune, (he is neverthelefs, or for
all that, proud. Wherein you fee, that the negative'
with the verb dtix&r, are rendei^ into Englifh by
thjB verb /o be, and the paiticles «wrr/4«toJ, j^€/, &c* ,
You muft obferve that tney fometimes put the words
nem per isso before the verb W(^/^ir, but the fenfe ii
the fame, and yoii may las Well fay, par sir p6bre,
nem per isso delxa, 8ic.

For followed by an d[dje6live and the palticle qui
with a verb in the fubjun£tive Inood, is rendered
into Englifh by never so ^ as, par grJnde que iltt s4ja,
let hi m be iievir fo great; por pimco que sija,nt*
ver fo little. - - •

Par, before menos, fignifies far less thati, or under g
as vm^^ fMo terh por minos de vitUe libras, you flii(It
Hot have it under twenty pounds. •

\ Par befote quanta, with an interrogation, fignifiet
Jar how muck, at what rate ? But if there is no io*
terrogatipn, as in the folio wing^ and the like fen-
tences, then it is to be EjngliHied by /?r ii^v^ i^^ ,
much ; as, nhS a faria por qudnto me dessem,! woufld
not do it for never fo much»

Par before c/ma fignifies upwards, and before iixa
is Englifhed by downwards-, as, a remedio obra paf
cima e par bdxa, the medicine operates, ^r works, up-
wards and downwards. • ' '>

P(ar before pSuco, muito, hem, &c. and followed by.
que, makes a iort of conjunflion governing the fub-
fundive, and is Engliflied by if, followed by ever
or never fo little, much, well, &c. as, por p6ucq ^
trr/tSf if ypu do amifs never fo little -, par hem que

^/li^^ i(^ I do never fo well, &c. •

^ jPim' before mim&gniSics fometimes as for, or* /or
itUf\ w,por mim ejiu pr6mpta^ as for me, or, for my
part i am ready y par nnm pdiii darmirfe quiz/rJes^
yo« may ilcep for 4ll me.

^ Par

V

. ; G R A M M A R. ni

Por^ ftllo^ pHUy &c. denote the efficient caufe of a
thing, as alfo the motive and means, or ways of do-
ing ; in all ^hicfa (ignifications they^ are Engh'ihed
by kf^ thrpugh^ out of^ at, &c. as,

A Afi0 foi conquistada par,Aicx4^JrCyARzvrzs con-
quered by Alexander.

Fos/ai/dis nijjojo for ettveja, it is out of envy only
you fpeak of it.

E'Ue tfUrou pil/a pSmtj mas Jahio p61la janilla, he
got in at the door, but he got out at the window^
6cc. »

. Ar denotes place,^ after the verbs it and passhr j
as, for 6nde iriis vos ? vfrhich way (hall you go ?

Eu passarii por Frdnqa^ Til go through France ; •
por 6nde passouelle f which way did he go ?

P^r conftrued with nouns without an article, de«
notes moft times distribution of people, time, znd place ;
and it is £nglifi2ed by a, or every, before the noun i
as;-

r Bile dSu tdntopor cabiga, he gave fo much a head.
- Tdnio por fotd&do, por drmo, por mis, porfemdna, &c^
(b much a foldier, a year, a month, a week ; a raz&i
de vintepor cinto^ at the rate of twenty per cent.
• lEllepide tdnto por li^oa, he a(ks fo much a league^
or every league.

' Por, between two nouns without an article, or
between two infinitives without a prepofition, de^
notes the choice which one makes between two
things, alike in their nature, but different in' their
circudfiftances ; as,

C&Jd por c&fa; dntes quiro esta que dquella,(itict I
muft have one of thefe two houfes, I like this bettel^
than that ; morr6r por mohair, melhor, he morrir comba-
tbtdo quefugindo, when a man muft die, it is better
to die in fighting than in running away*
V ^.PeUomiyo is rendered into Englifh by through^,
z^^peiio miyo dos cdmpas, through the fields. ^
'Par iniyo is rendered into Englifii by by i .as,.elle
MltaHfAko/iu iutinto.por miyot de ai$Jifias^\xQbii^ con>
pafled Kis endsli/ devices. ^oir

17S POttTUGUESE

* Per iimd fignifies n one's turn.

For before the iiafinitives is uied inftead of para
by the beft Portuguefe writers ; and perqn^ iiafteiid
of para que '9 as you may iiee particularly to C^mta^wIi
Canto Q. Ststeza vii. aod viix. and m the follawing
example, f^r naS, or para nao repeik c que ja temos
difo^ not to repeat wbat we have already laid,

^ Por is ' fomelimes Engliflied by for, upon the ac*
count if, far fah^ %cc. as» ^llefMri ifio porjtm$r de vos,
he will do this upon your account, or for yooriake ;
-deixardS'O por mvrtOy he was left for dead 5 effttnho-a
por miu smigo, I take him to be my friend; iSdos os
hSmens de berufdi, oi* ejia6 por i1/e^ zU honeft pepple
^ are for hiois or are on his fide ; por "quern me tdmiis'
vos ? who do you take me for?

We have already obfenred, that porqui without an
interrogation fignifies becaufe ; but it has the fame
fignificat^on in the following fentence, and the like;
porqut Hie hi mentirbjo Jegue-fe que tambbn Su feja e
becaufe he is a liar, does it follow the^pefeie that I
Wnone?

Por iftoy or por-ifia razalo^ fignifies therefore'.

O porque fignifies the reafon, the caufe, orthe
fubje£i ; as, fiiefe porque ? is it known upon what
account ?

Por modo de dizir fignifies as oue nutj fay^ if /y or
we^may /ayyScc.

Por didHte fignifies Jbefore^ and por detrdz fignifies
behind.
' Por Ventura figm^e^ perhaps. *

: Piiio petff&do fignifies formerly^ in time pefi^ hereto-

V Pet ftenhim cifo, by no means.

• Por mar e por thra, by (ea and kimL

Rum por hum fignifies oiu by oue.
; /V is fbmetimes Engliflied by /a ; as» 60iS /oH
viniej por 'tddos, they are twenty in all.
' When ihe terb paffibr is followed bypor^ then the
word Sta, %iii^ to forget % as, p0^tit$ eupMo foir

(3 R A M M A R. 17».

itlidy he forgot that; but fpeahing of goods it fignU
fies Xofmuggk.

Por joined wiA the verb cr fignifies to fytch, and
feek after ; as, vU par vinAo, go fetch fome wine ; vdi
pSlh midm^ go fee for the phyfician.

PfiT is commonly ufed before the fubftaotives ; as,
ftfr MAnpkfjioT example; for commodiddde^ for' con-
veniency 3 por tost/mey for cuftom. fake ; and many
others, that may be learned by ufe.

You muft pbferve, that pello ferves for the mafcu-
line, pella for the feminine, and^^r for both.

Cpntra.

X. Contra, (agaii^, contrary to,) denotes oppofi-
tion; zs, que Jiz vm^^ contra isto ? what do you fay
againft this ? It iignifies alfo over against, oppofite to.

ffi e eSntta iiguifies in Rnglilh j^o and con.

Defde.

XL JO^fJt, denotes both time and place, and enu-
meration of things, and is commonly followed in
the fentence by the prepofition atf {to) ; then defde
denotes the tertn/rom^wAenceyand ati that of hitler'^

to; 38,

DSfde oprincipio ate fim^ fro^^ the beginning to
the end.

' Elk foi a pi defde fVindfor ate Lindres, he walked
from Windfor to London.

En tinho visto todos d^fde pimeiro ate iitimo, I
have feen them all from the firft to the laft ; foraS
todos mortos difde primeiro ate iltimoy they were
all (lain to a man.

DSfde a criaf&i do mUndi^i from or finc^e the crea-
tion. ' .

De/de bergo^ ou infancia, from the cradle, from a

child,

D^/de

174 PORTUGUESE ,

Difdt ja^ even apw ; as, difde ja prev^jo^ I even
nowforefee/
; Defde agbra^ from thisr time forward.

D^fdt ^&6; from that time ever fince.

.Dtfde qkty as (bon as, when. ^

D^dt qudndo7 how long (ince,&r ago ?

Rio navegAvel difde ojeu nafciminio \ a river n^iga-^
ble at its very rife.

. \

^ Ate.

I

XII.. jite fignifies ///A even, to, &c/ as you may fee
in -the following examples.

Ate 6nde I \iov9 i^Lx'i

Ate Rdtna, as far as Rome. ;./

Ate qudndo ? till when, <;r how long ?

Ate que eu viva, as long as I live. .

He hum Homem de tout a bondade, que ate os/iusjni*
tnigos fao obrigados a iflimalo, he is fo . good a man
that even his en€;mies Jiave a value for him.

Ate OS mail vis hofhens iom&vao a liberdade de, &c.
the ve>y worft of men toolc fuchi a liberty as to,

Ate que, until, till.
Ate as ortlhas, up to the ears.
Elle veftdio ati a camifa^ he has fold the very fliirt
olF his back.

Ate ag6ta, or ate aqul, till now, or hitherto.

Ati aqui, (fpeaking of a place) to this placie, hither,

^^ Ate Iq, to that place, fo far. v

^ AjteqiieiftofeJaqa,\}A\\x\^^OTi^.

Ate entaS, till then, till that time.

.Ate is alfo ufed before an infinitive ; z%gritar ate
enrouquecir, to bawl one's felf hoarfe.

Rir ati arribent&rpellas ilh&rgas, to fplit one's fides
with laughing.

D&r de fomer a alguim ate arrebentar, to fill, dr
cram one with visuals till he burfts.

Ate

' G R A;M M A R. ' ns

. Aii iprt^ihrayXXl^^ cqr next meeting, till we meet
again. - *

XtiL Por citnd (above, over), denotes fuperiority
of place ; as,

Morar par cima da atguim^ to live or lodge above
fomebody.

A HUa the paJfAu por cima da cab^ga, the ball w«nt
over his head. . ^

Por cima de tudo^ upon the whole.

Pata cima.

. X y. Para cima (above) denotes fuperjprity of age,
and is fonretim^s put at the end of the (entence ; as^
' -Ellcs alijctri^. todos queiinhai de diz dnms para
cima^ they enlifted every body above ten*

A cima.

XV. A cima^ (abov6) denotes rank^ and (bme
moral fubje£ts ; as, ^ \

A cima dilUy above him, ar fuperior to him.
Eftbr a cima de tido^to be above the vvorld.
Huma tnolher que efii a cima de t&do^ nai Je Ikedi
^ do que o mundo diz deila, a woman who is aopve th<^
public cenfure, don't care what people fay of her.

Em cima.

t

XVI. Ei[n cima (upon) ; as em cima da mifa^ upon
the table. ,

^ 'Eni dma de ikdo ifiOf or only m cima^ fignifies and
hefidez afl that^ over and above all that.

De cima.

. XVII. De cima^ when it is ai> advcfb, fignifiei
fmn above ; but when a prepolition, it is Englilhcd
hi/rom/offtorfromoffjiz^.

Tiri

t ■ K

176 PORTUGUESE

Tirilaquilh de timm dd mefi, take thst frottt o# the
table.

Elle nuncd throu osfeus 6lhos de cima della^ he never
turned his eyes from her.

Cdhhr de chM das drvores, to fall off the treefe

XVin. The prepofitioB dehdxo, ( under ^ MdW^ or

frwn under) denafes th^ time and place ; I fajT the

time of a denomination of a reign, or fi[DVemfn'6fi^ ;

as, debaxo do impirio de Augifio^ under the empire of

Auguftus. ' f ^

Deb&xoj as a prepeficion of place, marks out in-
feriority of pofition ; asy

Tudo ^e h& ddi&xo dos cios^ aU there is under
fieaven.

Ter hima dmofada dehhxo dos pilhos,^ to havf^ a

cufhion under the knees.

Eftar debaxo da chhvt^ to be under lock and key,
JD^^oAT^ is fome times rendered into Eng^lifh by uf^

w%Ji^% affirmkr kkma eAufa deiiico di jufom^d^ to

fwear a thing, to declare upon oath*

Jiix0:

: XIX* Thia prepofiticm ii rendered into Englifli
by under, inferior^ w next; Mi affemdu-Ji abixo MUs,
be fat inferior^ or under thenrj ^s^ ajjentim-fe dbdx0 de
mm ; he fat next, inferior to me^ or he was next
man to me : abaxo deUrH elle hi o primSiro^ he is the
next man. to the kinir.

This prepontion is fometimes put at the end of
the n/^xt prafes, detSlhas abixo^h^xt below> in this
lower world, dt.eabiqa ^itoA^o^ headlong^ - -\

XX. Fora^ (outy without , except, i«/, J! , denotes jex-
clUGon; and exception. It requires generally a ge-
nitive^ before a nodn of time; or place ;,. but It goi-

Yerns alfb the nominative r a^,^

F6ra

GRAMMAR. I7t

do tJfMo^ Clot of the kiogdQm.

Fora da cidhdey out of ^oWt}.

FIta dc tempoy out of feajfonp

frocmkMfirtL d% cdfa^ kx>k ibr bitn without 'dtK>rs.
t; SIksJahiraS t^doSy for a ddus ou trhj they all went
out (except, or but two or three.

ElU the fermite t£da, fira o ir is a§embl6aSy he
mdulgM h^r in every thing, but in going to affirm** .
bliesi

BiHt Um s6dis a/ podirnyfora o de ccHf/uir^ he has
full powers, except of concluding.

F6r0 is fbcnetimcs preceded by xiS, and then it is
to be rendered into Englifh by fo far', as, Slletfik
tAS fora de Jbcorr^ n ftm allUdoiy qu€ ft declara tdn-
»a Ules^ be is fo far from affifting ni» allies, that h^
declares hinUelf againft them.

Fora js fometimes rendered into Eogliih by hi^

fidts\ as, fira daqu^Ots que^ &c. befides thofe tliat,

i^c. and fometimes by beyond y as, fora de medtda,

Iscyond tneafujre.

' Fora de koras (ignifies beyond tie Aour, or very hie.

P6r alguSm fora da portay or mandar klgHim pSlIa
pbffta foray to turn one out of doors.

De firintet oxfrSnte.

This prepofition governs the genitive, and fignl*
Ife^ truer againfi. It is foHowed by de, do, da, &c.

t>eft6Hte da fna cafa eft& hum outetro, over againft
his houfeis a hill.

Em efi&va defrtnte dSlle, I was over againft him.,

' Sem,

Sem fiffnifies without-, as,
Sem dtnheiro, without money.
Sem duvida, without doubt.
Semfm, without end.

Sem^ dor u entend/r, ottfem fmir ernhHtryllM^
out eiviiiE to undcrftuid.
. ^ ' N Sem

178 PORTUGUESE

Sem mats, nem i»/ir^j, without any reafon or- pro- .
vocation.

Eftarfem amOy to be out of place.

Sem que alg&fn i£lo precedSnte po/Ja derrogar o pre*
finte^ any former afl to .the contrary of the pretest
notwithftanding.

^ Sem governs alfo the inHnitive, which is render*
ed into Engliih with the participle; ^yfallar Jem
fabity to fpeak without knowing.

It is alfo a conjundion with j^^^ govemtog' the
fubjun£Hve ; as,

Enfida-Je fern que Ihe digaS nada, he is angry with*
out any body faying any thing to him.

Nio era iu ja baftrntdmente infeliz^ femque p'ocuraf-
feis de acrefcentar a minha infelicidade ? .was I not
miferable enough before, but you muft ftill labour
to make me more fo ?

Lembrome fern que mo digais^ I remember with*
out your telling*

Elle vira Jem que mdndem pr Hie, he will cooie
without fending ror.

Conforme, or fegfindo.

XXIII. ConfSrme or fegindo (according to, co»-
formable to), govern the nominative^ and never
the dative fis in Engh'(h : a$,

Ellefoi tratado confbrme o feu mereciminto^ he waf
treated according to his deferts.

Coftforme o miu farecSvy in my jtidgnient, in my
opinion.

In common converfatipn confbrme is ufed ad^r-
1>ially, and Engliihed as follows :

t£o he confbrme, or only jponfbrme^ it is as it hap-
pens ; may be yes; may be not; th^t is according.

Confbrme a occafiao o pedir, according as ther^ fliall
\fe need.

Sdbre.

XXIV. Sdbre^gai&esupon; bb^ fibre a mi/fa, upon
the table ; f^e o rio, upon the river.

I , $4ke

• •

GRAMMAR. 17^

Sohre tidoi or Joire tddas as coufas^ over all, above
^li, above all thingS5 above any thing, efpecially;
^SjJSiri i&do tinde cnidhdo na faide^ but howfoever
tbe matter be, mind your health.

PSr.alguhn fokre fi^ or dhr Ihe o primivro lugir^ to
place one above himfelf.

Ifjobre h&ma cid&de^ to march againft a town*

IrJobrealguSmy to fall, or to ru(h upon one.

Ir/Shr^fcgur^iyio go upon fure^ grounds.
' . Sdire a notie^ about or towards the evening.

Sobtc 9rverde^ fomewhat green.

S6brt a minha palavra^ upon my word.

SSbre paldvra, upon parole.
' ' Mand&r chrtafobre carta^ to fend letter upon letter.

Kile recebeo a chrtafobre ojantar^ he had juft dined
when he received the letter.

Elkdorme fobre ojant&ry he fleeps prefently after
dinner^

Sobre ifio^ or fdbre iftas coufas, is fometimes Eag^
fiihed by more than thaty or befides that ; as^ ,

Elle rouboU'O^ e fibre {flo matdu-o, he robbed hkn,
and more than that, he killed him.
'Sdbre que, is rendered into £ng1i(h by though
.. or although ; as,

Efle negicio fSbre que he difficult 6 fo^ naS heimpoftivel,
altbo' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impoffible.

SSbre is Englifhed fometimes by befides ; as,

SSbre as miserias dd guerra, elle tSve a difrra^a^ 8fc.
befides* the miferies of the war, he had the misfor-^
tune of, 6? f .

EfiiiT fibre Ji^ or anikr fobre /, fignifies to ftand
upon one's guard.

. Elf vos rfcrever/i fSbre ifia matira^ I will write
to you about this matter.

*. . Acirca.

XXV. Jfc/rca SffdiSeu about 'y vs^hcirca dtfio Ihi
iif^9 about this I told him ; hcfrca de l& ir the rrf-
pwdij, about going there I anfwered hioi,
" • . N2 Fht%^

178 PORTUGUESE

Sem mats, nem w/»^j, without any reafon or pro- .
vocation.

Eftirfem dmo, to be out of place.

Sem que algim i£lo precedcnte po/Ja derrogar o pre*
feniet any former afl to .the contrary of the pretest
notwithftanding.

^ Sem governs alfo the infinitive, which is render*
ed into Cngliih with the participle; BS,/ai/cir /em
fabity to fpeak without knowing.

It is alfo a conjundion with quey governing the
fubj unfit ive ; as,

Enfida-Jefem (jue Ike digai nada, he is angry with*
out any body faying any thing to him.

Nio era iu ja baftrntam^nte htfeliz, femque p'ocura/-
feis de acrefcentar a minha infelUidade ? ,was I not
miferable enough before, but you muft ftill labour
to make me more fo ?

Lembrome fern que mo digits, I remember with*
out your telling*

EUle vira fern que mdndem por ille, he will cooie
without fending ror.

Conforme, or fegfindo.

XXIII. CtmfSrme or fegindo (according to, co»-
formable to), govern the nominative^ and never
the dative fis in Engh'(h : a$„ .

Eliefoi tratado confbrme o feu merecimento^ he waf
treated according to his deferts.

Coftforme o meu farecer, in my judgment, in my
opinion.

In common converfation confbrme is ufed ad^er-
1>ially, and Engliihed as follows :

IJfo he confbrmey or ox^ sonforme, it is as it hap-
pens ; may be yes; may be not; th^t is according.

Confbrme a occafiao o pedir, according as ther^ ihsul
^e need.

Sdbre.

XXIV. Sdbre Gg^iBes upon*, sts^ fibre a mi//a, upon
the table ; f^e o rio, upon the river.

I . $4he'

• •

GRAMMAR. 179

Sohre tidOi or JSbre tSdas as coufas^ over all, above
^li, above all things^ above any thing, efpecially;
i^^JSiri i&do tende cuidado na /aide, but howfoever
tbe matter be, mind your health.

PSr, alguhn fokre fi^ or d&r Ihe o prim^iro lugir, to
place one above himfelf.

IrJ6bre h&ma cid&de^ to march againft a town*

IrJohYtalguimy to fall, or to ru(h ujpon one.

It Johre fegufyy to go upon fure^ grounds.

S6hre a nSite, about or towards the evening.

Soire ^v^rde, fomewhat green.

S6bre a mlnha palavra^ upon my word.

Sobre palavra, upon parole.
' ' Mandhr chrtafobre carta^ to fend letter upon letter.

Kile recebeo a chrtafobre ojantar^ he had juft dined
when he received the letter.

Elkdorme fobre ojant&ry he fleeps prefcntly after
dinner^

Bibre ifio, or fdbre ifias coufas, is fometimes Eag^
liflied by more than that, or befides that ; as^ .

Elle rouboU'O^ e fobre (fto matdu-o, he robbed him,
and more than that, he killed him.
^SSbre que, is rendered into £ngli(h by t/iougi
; or although ; as,

Efte negicio fibre que he difficult 6 foy naS heimpofiivel,
altbo' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impoffible.

SSbre is Englifhed fometimes by befides ; as,

SSre as miserias dd pterra, elle tSve a difrra^a^ 8fc.
befides* the miferies of the war, he had the misfor-^
tune of, 6f r.

Eft&r f&brt Ji, or a$idkr fibre /, fignifies to ftand
upon one's guard .

. Elf vos rfcreverSi fibre efla matira, I will write
to you about this matter.

* . Acirca.

XXV. ^r/rrtf fignifies 42^0«/ ; zs^&circa dlR^ Ihi
iije, about this I told him ; icfrca dtl&ir Ike rrf^
pSndi, about going there I anfwered hiin,

* . N2 P^krU^

I •

180 PORTUGUESE

' . PeriOgJirUOy a^pSfpegado.

XXVI. Per/Oy (near by, ahoiit) denotes proximJty
oF place and time, and governs the genitive cafe ; ^s
aquillo ejla muilo perta do lume^ that is very near the,
fire ; fhio das oiio ASraSy about eight o'clock.

Perto do rh, near the river.

Eftdmospirto do Natal^ we are near Chriftmia'j^

Ao p^ requires alfo the genitive cafe ; as„

AJJentMvos ao pi de mim, fit down by me, or near
me; aopJ do m, near the river, &c.

Note, that jfrf«/o (near or by) ^nd pegii^, (ha^d by)
reouire the dative cafe ; as,
^ jifUo a cidadcy near the town.

P^ado ao palicio^ hard by the palace*

Lottge.

L6ngCy hvy a great way off, go^ifcrns the gt&ltive^
and the particle, de^ or doy da^Scc. as,
Ufige- de cdfay far from home.
Zr(^/ig^^4fii/, 6ir from hence.

'- * De lofigOf or ao fSngo.

: This prcDofitioQ requires the genitive cafe*; as, '

Ao /ongo aaprayaj along the ihore.
'. 4^ Un^o^.da:4:Qfia^ do pfado% &c. along the coaA,the
meadowa^&c.

Of, further Pariidti.

Ahtda, ah$dd qui; pcJoquJ ov qudndo icfn, dtnda qfUm

or com tkdo. • .

^ Jj^d0Sv^\^^:yei^\ 2i^e/Uaindiif$a0^v/yo9hcyt,n(A

come yet. It fignifies alfo even -, as, JerU vergiiikek

ahula ojailar ntfo, it .were a fliame even to fp^^ of

it ; nem dinda per cem librasy no not for a huodied^

pounds.

Ainda que fignifies, iiA^ttl-i^ or although*^ ^s^ainjM
mf vis- fois mis vetko do que iUcy though you be
Sdet than he i atnAa que ajsimfojj^^ though it Ttqmt
fo; *

' Mndi

cfeAillMAR. ill

Ainda que^ is very ofitAi followed by com tidoy i
yet tor aU that : as, amda que SlU nifi tivhse necissijddi

diiso, cofti ittdo, Kc. thoagh be h&d no nted of it, yet»

&c.

Arnih assim, or com iido^ is fometimes ^hglifhed
by nevertlielesSj or for alt thai ; as, ainda assim stmpfe
ilU Joi /ouvdvel, he was praife-worthy iPbr all that.

Ja dcstlt^fA 'fne aad jA per que.

Jb difdi M reiidered into Englifli by cvm from ;
^ja dSfik « p^cipio, ev^n from the beginning.

J/i fUf, flgnifiesj^^fr^; as,

Ja que is so ossfm ke^ fmce it iafo.

The patticl^e qut iometimes is not placed immt*
Jliately after fa ; as, ja 1A dSus dnnos que warrhj be
died two years fince o^ ago.

Ja ha muito timfo que Jahifies de tAfa^ it is a long
tifne fince you went trom home.

Jipor^e^ \t repeated in the fame fentence^ end
then the nrft is rendered into Englilh by fir^y U-
caufe; and the fecond hyfecondlyy iecaufi; as, JM por
que ira cego^ja por que era/:6xo, firft becaufe he was
blind, andfecondly becaufe ht; was lame.

Depois que.

DepSis que is rendered into Englifb by rfter ; as^
Dep6is que hi iinha entrado^ after I was gobe in. ;

Com que.

Com que is only a note either of introduction, or
connexion ; as,

. . JCm que Imvia hum hSmem enfSrmo^ ^c. now k cer-
tjJft man was fick i fometimes they add to it the
particle afsim^ and then it is to rendered into £ng-
VtSh by mii/o,

Ou.

\ Oh Signifies or, or either ; as, oubdtn^ oa maS, either
good or bad ; miis ou menos, more or left ; M t8t
^ira, ou nhi^ whether he will, or no.

1$S PORTUGUESE

Quer.

Quer^ when a particle, muft be repeated^ and the
firft is rendered into Englifli by either or wietker^
and the fecond by or > as, quer Hie qudra qner naS,
whether he will or no ; quer vos o teniais jeito^ qu:r
naS, whether you have done that, or no. •

Se quer, or m mitm.

Se quer or ao mSnos, &c. fignifies at leafly however ;
as, Je vos naS query's fir par Hie naS fefAh fe quer
cSntra Hie, if you don't chufe to be for him, at leaft
don't oppofe him ; dai-lheje quer com que fi^fiinl&r-fey
give him at leaft a fubiiftence ; o nojfo primiiro fim hi
de livrimos de tddos os males , ao mJnos dof majbres,
our chief end is to be freed from all, however the
greateft evils.

Uem fe quer hum, is rendered into Engliih by
uiver a one, fo much, or in the following mamur ; as,
fSraS tddos mortos^anemfe quer hum efcapou, they were
all (lain to a man.

Qudndo muito.

Qudndo muito, (at moft, at fartheft, at long run), is
generally ufed before the nouns of time and price;
as> elle eftarh aqui dintro em hum mSz qudndo mu/to, he
will be here in a month at farthest -, dez libras qudtuh
midto, ten pounds at moft.

■ •

Tdnto.

' ' Tdnto, fo much, is fometimes followed by eHm,
and then it is rendered into Englilh by as well as,
as much as, &c.

AmO'te tdnto cSmo a mm mifmo, I love thee as well
as myfelf.

Elle time tdnto cdmoqualquer de v6s, que Ihe refulte
airim ddno, be is afraid of a barm as much as any
or you. •

Cakkf

6R A MM A R. its

Cmd/l qMi a eftimdsse tdnto cSmo aji mismo^ I thougkt
he made as high account of her^ as of himfelf.

BfUes Vim tdnio de dia c&mo de nSite^ they can fee as
wellby day as by night.

Eu five tdnto como vSs^ I had as much as you.

(Xutro tdfUo is rendered into £ngli(h by ihi dmble^
twice as muthy or as much ; as.

En aktmcd outro tdnto mhis p& isso, I bad as much
more for it ; eu posso fazir dntro tdnto, I can do at
much.

Tdnto followed by assim, is a particle merdy ex-
Dletive; as,

Tdnto assim que the posso iu fazir ? how can I help
, it ; vaitCi' tdnto assim nao ha mda para ti, go away^
J^evQ is nothing for you«

Tdnto assim followed by ijuc without an interro*
gation, is fometimes rendered hyfo that^ in.fo much
that\ as, tdfUo assim que elk nko quer ouvir mAUfallar
mssoy fo that he will hear no more of it.

Tdnto m&is is followed by qui, and Engliflied by
and ike more so as, as,

Eu eftou prompto para ir com vm^ hum dia dffies &
vomidiaf se vm^ qutzevj tdnto m&is quefe deverepre*
sentar h&ma nova peqa. I am ready to go with you
fome day or other to the play, if you'll give me
leave; and the more fo, as a new piece is to be acted.

Tdnto que, or logo que^ is rendered into Englilh by
as soon as ; as, tdnto que Su,o vi, as foon as I faw him.

Tdnto melhSr is rendered into Englifh by so muck
the better.

' Tdnto is fometimes preceded by com^ and followed
by que, aiid is EnglKhed by^^, provided that ; as com
Sdt^o que o/af&iSj provided that you do itj com tdnto
ifue me niofii^a mat, fo he do me no hurt.

Tdnto qudnto is Engliihed by as much as^ as^'

Tdnto qudnto possoy as much as I can.

^ Tdn.
T46, fO) is generally followed hy rchno ; as^

N4 m

rM P O R T U CU S S E

]^i Miieiii htm cSmo o S^it^^ ttiis is not fb gtiod
as the other ; iu fft ifao tai hem como vos, I know it
gjB well as yoa.

Tag is fometimes followed hy^ue^ and Engliihed

by fo J frchf ii> thai degree 5. as,
Bfi/ihetii

ftudAiU que nio tern igual^ he is fo wife
that he has not his match ; nio fSu tai iducp fue #
er^Mf I am not fo fimple^^r I am not fuch a fool as
to beKeve it ) /Az tai p&nde vinio que, &c» tfae wind
is £0 high that, &c. or the wind blows to that.4«*
gree^ &:c*

C6m0.

C6mQ^ is EngliHied by ^^> iike^ ^oxvy 8cc. as joijl
majr fee in the following ex{>refiions.

€6mo? how? ,

DkJime e6m& Ihe hit defallar / t6U use how I tlMf
fpeak to him.

CSmc afsim ? how (b ?

Como i what !

£^ fMT ^» whereas.

C6fno mer juefejay howfoevftr^ in what Biaoner^ or
faihion ioever.
" &^a iomofor, be it as it will.

X16mo i/h afsim he, iince it is £>•

(Siwio^ as it were, or almoft.

Cvmo fey as if, or ev^ as if s m, eitm Je ilki ti,
%}^m jk veuefdOf aa if they had already over*
come.
^ CijSmn tamhetn^ as well aa*

Rieocim&iiii he, as rich as hiis.

Xj6mf6is tneu mnlgOy fuero,8sc. as (sr becaitie) y6s
are iny friend, 111^ &c.

DiMMmi%i6m9j tell me how. .

Bu JH c6mfutArpAra mis iUe vM^ I koow.the^
way I (hall take to make him come.

C6mo ilU Ih niS efleja, tu hrH^ provided he is not
there^I will^lne.

Afstm^

O R A M M A R. 391

* *

.-• : Affim.

• <4^*, fO) thttt, is rendered into En'gliA as yiMi
jAtfy ie^in the folio win fT e^cpreflionis,

P6is he afsim de vhas ? de veras qui sfsim ke^ii it
eTcn &> i it is even fb.
Jt/slmfifd, oxfejn afsim^ fo be it, or be it fo.

Afsm A:-, it is fo.

JPara afftm dizer, as it were.

Afsm J6u eu I(mco, ^^ &c. I am not fo fdolifh at
to, &c.

Msim Deos mefalvf, as I hope to be iaved.

imto afsim^ fo that.

Ajs'im he que ifis, &c. is this your way, &c.

-4/}/;« cdmo afsim^ after all, neverthelefs. ^ for all
that ; as,' tm vd^ dilatdis a voffa joniada^ afsim c&mo
mfsim he prerfo que vhdes^ it is in vain for you to put,
off your journey, you muft go thither neverthelefs,
w for all that, you muft go after ail.

Af)\wi c6mo^ as well as, or as foon as.

hhftn afsim for agbra^ thus much for this time.

AjAm na pdz^ cumo na gnerra, both in time of peace
ttod war. *

Afsim afsim^ fo fo, indifferent.

Afsim queira Hie c6mo pode^ he can if he will.

Afstm IS fometimes preceded by f ; as, ^ afshn que
quer ijio dizer? how now ? what do you mean by
this? And fometimes ^iim is followed by cdmo ; as,
w/iim €6m0 o fwl tcliffa es onircs plaudtas, da mifma
firte^ ^c. as the fun eclipfes the other •plaaets^ £)^
&c.

■ Se, if; asy^ Slle vier^ if he eomea ; fe mi nmilJts^
flvcHikl you love me; fr 4Ue flffi hointm di hAnra,
y^en he but an homeft m&n : fejotikefftm yum iufiu^
tSdos dkiat^ &c. were it told Who \ M^^ evety Mic
wnuld fay> ^. Jtki xmdUk mt^ ftec«. tf io be that.

The

186 PORTUGUESE

. The reciprocal verbs, as well as tbofe that are
ufed imperfonal]y, may have two je 7!* joined toge-
ther ; vs%fefef6r, if he goes away s fefi fkUa rijfo^
if they ijpeal^ of it.

St is iotnetimes rendered intoEngh'fb by whether!^
and when it is repeated, the fecond is £ngli(hed by
^; as, *"

Quijfera faber Je a cilpa he nojfa^fe vSfsa^ 1 would
know whether it is your fault, or ours.

, Alias.

Ali&Sf is fometimes rendered into Englilh by ei/e ;
as, entr&i^ porque ali&s fecharei a pirta^ cofne in, or
elfe I'll (hut the door ; par qui alias feriOS os vofsos
fUhos immindos, elfe were your children unclean.
And fometimes it is rendered into Engliifh by (tf jbf*
wife, in other things, or refpeSls.

Embora.

Emhora is fometimes rendered into Englifh by
pro/per oujly, aufpicioujly -, but fometimes it is a par-
ticle merely expletive, and anfwers to the Italian
pure ; as, dis&ii muito embora que quizerdes^ fay w&tf
you pleafe : the Italian fays, dite.pur quel che vipi&ce.

MHito embora feja a/sim, well, let it be fo.

EmMra is ' fometimes Engliihed by awi^ ; as,
^uiitetmbora, goaway.

SenaS.

SenaS fignifies if not, did not, were it n%t tiat, lut
that I as, '

Sen&o thuefse medo de men pay, but that I fear my
ifather.

Se ilk n&6 twefse vergdnha de confefsar, but that he
v(M afhamed to confeis.

Note, that the following expreffions, in which
they make ufe of this particle^ may be Engliihed by
iit$,for, and fome other variations.

Se iUfif6fse por elle, but for him, or had it aot been
for hiro> or hs)d he not been. ,

Sen&i

\

OR A M M A R. IS7

•

Smisjfdfsepor vosy had you not been^ or bad it
not been for ydii, without you, without your help^
hindiBnce, iic.

' Sen^fdfsepor mim^ tile morreria dtfomty were it not
for roe;, he would ftarve.

Senai is fometimes En'glifhed bv but : as, ntm Hies
Sem ouiro ittf^nto^ fcniio^ &c. nor do they aim at any
thing elfe but, iSc.

NinguSm itrfse afsim feniS Cicero^ nobody iaid io
but Cicero.

Senifi may be alfo exprefled in Portuguefe by

is que in the following fentence, and the like.
" Elle nffi fa% fen&i jogar^ or Slle mS Jqz, mats que
jogdr, he does nothing but play«

Nii, n&o porqui.

NaS, n$i. or no^ when followed by pcrqu^, is
Englilhed by not that, not but that ; as, n&i porqui
Ikefaltafse engtnho^ not but that he had wit ; naSpor^
fuS na6 ftjse jufto, mas porque, &c. not but that it
was $,right, but becaufe, &c. ndo porque a cAufa/eja
mpojsively masporqfiSy &c. not that thie thing is pof-
fible, but becaufe, l£c.

Tambem^ or dutroji.

TanAim^ or Autrofi^ iigntfies alfo^ too, likemfe ; as.
vos afsim o quereis e Su tambim^ yoii'il have it foj and
I too.

Parh que i par qui.

See the prepofitions^^ira and por.

P6is.

This particle is very much ufed by the Portugucfe,
aind it is rendered info Englifh feveral ways, as you
may fee in the following examples :

p£is ide, e vinde logo, go then and come back pre* '
fently.

P6is nio f6u eu cap&z defdzHlo ? ^ wliai , am I not

-capable to do it ?

, Pdis,

1*B P 6 R t U <>V 'E if E

PtJw,' or pdis tttt&S qne ^uk dizh-lJU) ? Wfelf, ind
^hatof ftll this.

PdiSy or p6is entaS que hit defaxir ? Wh« ihall
Idothtti?

Pdis eu digo que Hie efii dhtfrff^ why, be^^is here
within, I fay,

\ PUs porqn^ me vigidis ! Why then tlo you watch
me?

EUe tern cabega ; pSis tambJm hum aljk^te a ttm^ he
has got a head, and fo has a pin.
/Pits before »4S, and precfcded by kti intdtroe^a-
tion, denotes a ftrong aflertion, at\d is Engh'fti\td t>y
tokkfmt dtmhty fes^Jurefyy to hefutt, fcc. as, wi iUe ?
p6is ndo ! will he come? yes to be fure.

Antesy or miis depfefsa.

ilone than ht in your company. Sotnetimes^;i/rj
i& Engliihed by before ; as, fde-vos dates que itte vSnka^
go away before he comes ; dtues que iu mdrra^ before
Idle.

Ma^ dntes, pelo conir&riOy mas pelo conirirw.

Thefe particles are rendered into Edglifli by cm
the contrary y on the other handy nay; as, mas dntes,
mas pelo contrarioy or peh contririo ifto he muito dif-
fer Snte^ nay it is quite another thing, ihas dnieSy pelo
conirarioy &c. elle keavarhuo^ najc* or on the contrary,
.he is fit covetous man.

Parii mlkor dizir.

, This phrafe is retidered into En^lilh by ftay^ as,
/lie tern ja bajldftte, on para melhor db^y mils dp
naefs&rioy he has ^already enough, nay too much ;
A ifto he que 'n6s ehamdmos dHito das gintesy m$parti
wnliSr diz/ry da rdz^, this is what we call the law of

nations.

GRAMMAR. .1S9

iiationst which may be called more properly the law
ofrjeafoo.

. Wc h^ve already observed that yte is a particle
which mo^ conjundions are compofed of; as, ^nda
jWf, although ; dejorie i/uey fo that, &r.
. The particle que fometimes is the figi> of the third
perfoi;t$ of the iA)perative,.as let in Englijk \ as, qm
fiUle:, let him fpeak ; que n/aS, let Uiem iaugh»

Qtie is u&d betweeti two verbs, to determine and

. Que is ul<td alio after kora in the beginning of a
{entence, and followed by a verb in the fubjunSive^
tp denote by exclamation one's furprize, averfion,
and relu^lance of fbmething ; in which cafe there is
a verb grammatically underfiood b^ore fK^ ; as,
Mra quefe efquec^fse elle deji mifmo ! I wonder, or is
it poifible for him to have for|;ot himfelf !

If he e3$jQlaa»ation, or admmttbo, is fometimes
^xprfffed without any verb ;. a», gne Fdfio^ e ao
mifmo tSmpo, que pSna / how much pTeafure and
trouble at once !

Que is fometimes repeated ; as,
. (^. bilf^ livm que tetides ; what fine books jon
baye got ! f^e killa tp^e he a vktiidc ! how beautiful
isivifttte!

Qfie is fometimes followed by de,i z$yque de iituos
ia m uf^ffdo ! how many fools there are in the world !

a^ is ufed after nouns denoting time, and is
fometimes Englifhed by laben or Jince^ 9iq. and
fometimes left out ; as

O dia que elle partio^ the day when he (et out.
' Qudnto tempo hh que efthis em Ldndres ? how long
have you lived in London ? How long is it fince
you lived in London ?

Ha dez dnnos quefa% a me/ma cdufa, he has done
the fame thing thefe ten years.

190 PORTUGUESE

Hi dez dmos que morrSo^ be died ten years ago.

(lue 38 fometimes rendered into Englilh by bicoufc,
as you may fee in Cdnioens, canto 2» ftanza xvi.
que levtniinte hum dnimOf and fometimes by tkai^ to the
end that J in order to -, as you may fee ibid, ftanza xvi i.
que c6mo vrfsem, que no rio, &c.

Que before ySr in the beginning of a fentence, is a
redundancy not eKpreifed in Englilh ; as quefe vSs
diz^is que, if you fay that, &c.

Que is u(ed after the coniun£tion a p^nar (fcarc^
or hardly); and is Engliflied by 6uf; as, a pSnas aca^
h6u de fallhr que logo morr(o\ he had hardly done
fpeaking but he expired.

Que tometimes is preceded by dejbrte^ de maiiiira^
deg^lto, -and then it is Engliflied by fotiat, infitek
a manner y infomuch that', as hi ofarii de fbrte quefi^
quits contente^ I will do it fo that, or in that manner
that, you fliall be contented.

De veras.

De veras fignifies in eamefi ; but fometimes it is
Engliflied by nofure ; de veras ! naS o po/so crSr^ no
furel

Hbra. •

Hifa, or ora, is an interje£tion that ferves \o en*
courage, as wc have feen above ; but when it is re«
peated, it is Engliflied bs fometimes, one whUe^ anotKet
while ; as, ora efih hem^Sra ejl& mal, fometimes he is
well, fometimes ill, ilk ora ejih de hum parecir, e arm'
de dutro, he is now of one opinion, and nextmoment
of another* For 6ra, (ignines now, for the prefent.

GRAMMAR.. 191

CHAP. vm.

Of the Portugtufe Orthography ; aadfirjl of Carats

and Stops.

L npHE proper names, i^s well as the- famamesi
X always begin with a capital.
II. The names of nations, kingdoms, aad pro-
vi;]ced, • alfo begin with a capital \ as, PrancSz^
Fretich; /wrf//z, Englifli, &c.

. III. All names or d^ignities, and degrees, and ho-
nours, require a capital ; as RSy^ Bifpo, &c« King,
Bifhop, &c.

IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of
a verfe, the firft letter is always a capital.

V. The names of arts and fciences, as well as
those of kindred, begin with a capitals

€f Stops.
The ufe of flops, or points^ is to diflinguiih words
and fentences. . . '

The Portuguefe have fix flops, or'paufes, v\z.

1. The pinto finily the famie as our period or full
Hop (.), and is ufed at the end of a period, to fhew
that the fentence is completely finifhed.

2 . The dius pantos^ which is our colon (:), and
is the paufe made between two members ot a pe-
riod ; that is, when the fenfe is complete, but the
fentence not ended.

3. The ponto e virgu/a, our femicolon (;), and
denotes that ihort paufe which is made in the fub-
divifion of the members or parts of a fentence.

4. The pdnto e interrogafdm, the point of interroga-
tion thus (?). -

5. Ponto e admirafam, the point of admiration
thti6(!).

6. TTje virguta, the fame with our comma (,)
and 10 the fhorteft paufe or refting, in fpeech, be*
itlg ufed chiefly to diftinsuifh nouns, verbs, and
iMVftrbs^ as lilfo the parts of a ibortet fcDtence* .

The

19t P OR TTJ G U EiS E

The conjundion e^ the relative qual, and the dif-
junQions.^i^ ziiAnem^ require a cortima befpre jhem.

The Portt^tiefe mate'ufe alfo of a parenthefis,
thus ( ); but they do not mafce ufeof the diaerefis,
cftlkdby their printers crehfa (**) ; they make'ufii
alfo of the dngulOy thus a, called by the printers

The ipoftrophe, or, as they call it, viratento^ Ii]ce<
wife takes place in this as in other ]angf^ges« being
deftgned only iix the more pieafant and eafy pro^
liunciatioa of words, by cutting off an antecedent
vowel ; as, d* irr^as^ d' elvas, anci not darmas, detvasy
Ibc. But this is fomewhat excufable in cafes where-
in, by ufe, they ieem to be one wotd ; as ttiJUg;
M^Ji, defia, dSfit^ nalgim, daquHU^ uSlIiy ntlla^
daqui, dali, attqui^ aiegora 3 and not em iih^ ik
SUc, &c.

Of the Accents.

The accent, which is the very foul of articulst^
words, is a found of the voice by which wc pro-
nounce fome fyllables iborter, others longer.

I intend to fpeak here only of the accents the
Portuguefe ought to make ufe of, according to Ma^
durtira^ in his Portuguefe Orlhography.

The Portuguefe indeed are acquainted with three
accents, but they ought to make ufe of two onlyi'
namely, the acute, which defcends from the right
to the left {'),and the circumflex, thus C).

1, The acute ferves to prolong the pronuncia-
tion, and ia put, according to Madureira^ on the
third perfi)A togular of the future tenfe^ as amara^
Ura^ &c.

fl. On the penultima of the preterpluperfeft tenfe
of the indicative mood ; as, amara^ enftnaray &c. ^
. 3. Tbc'actite accent ought to be put alfo on
tte {ifenaltima qf the third perfohs of the prefeirt
tflnfe;,af ^e vtepb rfMifr^r, pmrnnciar, duvidar, &c,
thus m m mi m, fmuumja, duvida^ia:. that they may

be

GRAMMAR. 19S

be diftlnfufflied froM tkcj tidurH) ren&nciMy prwiMclay
Mvidar&'Qi Tbef {atntt accent i^ alfa put oh efiA,
noj to diftinguifh them frotto ^/9> thi&» afwi ^, in the.
^ The vowel o btf^ two founds, according to the two
abcents that may be pot on it ; one open, when it is
marked with the acat-e accent, and is pronounced
like in ^^^; the other clofe^ when if is mark^ '
wilb the circumSex acoent^ and then is pronounced
lakt u in^ftumhle.

There are many n^uns, both fubftaMive and ad-^
jefirte, wbkh ar€f a<:cet>ted in the fingular with the,
circumflex, and in the plural with the acute ; and
the adjectives that have two terminations, particu
larly thofe endmg in ^, ^, muft be accented (in
the fingular) with the circumflex in the mafculine,
and wilh the acute in the feminine ; as,

Fchrmi oven ; pXtxt^ufornoL
^k9f eye I phiral, ilnos.
^^f ^gg y plural, avos.
disc, bone' j plural, 6ssos»
P^fe^rWell; plural, ^fdj.
PdrfOjhog; pluf^ly porcos^

R4go, prayer i plural, rogos. And fo fdjo, ttirno,
. f^rmSfo^ fifuidfo, Juppdstay pdvo^ tdrio, tdrta, copi6fo^
<cc.

The /bflowing. keep the circumflex accent in
botli numbers ; *Afc, bdlos-y hdjo^ bdjosy b6tp^ bdtos ; c6co,
coio5\ choTQ^ cfioros.'y c6te^c6tos'y forro^fSrrosi gordv^
gSrdos I ^osioy gSstos y gSzOy gSzos ; iSboy ISbos ; mSgo^
mogo^indjOj ndjos ; po/ro, polros; td/o, tolos ; /errd/Ao^
/err S lias ', raposo, raposos 'y arroz, arrdzcs; algeZfoU
ffizes. &c.

On the contrary, the following keep the acute ac-
cent m both- numbers : capo, cbpos ; mbdo^ modos ; nossa,
nossos', v6ss$fV6ssos,8cc.

When the accent circumflex is put on the ,^, then
ti&c ,e is pronounced like the French mafculine e;
hut when e is accented with the acuX^ ^cctwX^^^w

O ^^

194 FOR T U G U E S E

the e 18 to be pronounced like the e open in Frencbi
and it is exceeding fonorous and long. See the
pronunciation of the vowel e.

Nouns ending in a%^ izj oz, uz, muft have the
acute accent on the vowel before the z ; as, rapiz^
a boy ; rioz, a walnut ; alcafiz^ licorice ;. but you
muft except arrdz^ rice ; a/ghz^ a hang-man.

Nouns ending in ez generallyhave the circumfliex .
accent ; as m^z, a month 5 marqueZf a marquis ;- &a
except the furnames ; as, Alvarez^ Aniunez, Lopez,
Henriquezy Gongalvez, Rodriguez^ Pirez, Nufuzt
TeUez, &c.

Siwf ObfcrvatiouT upon the Portuguefe

Orthography.

Both the Portuguefe orthographers and beft au-
thors vary fo much in their rules and ways of writ-
ing, that it is a bard matter, and quite out of any
grammarian's way, to clear up this part of the Per-
guefe grammar: fince it requires no lefs authority
than that of the Royal Portuguefe Academy. How-
ever, not to omit fuch a material part of the Gram-
mar, I (hall prefent the learners with the following
obfervations.

I. When the Latin words from which the Portu-
guefe are derived, begin with a by the Portuguefe
likewife muft begin with it; therefore you muft'
write and pronounce the b, in the following words,
bomy bonddde^ bem, bhto^ &c. becaufe they are derived
from bonus ybonitasy &c. But you muft except bainha^
bsxiga, biirroy which begin with a b, though they arr
derived from vagina, vefica, vicus.

II. Likewife if the Latin words begin witTi a t^
the Portuguefe words derived from them muft alfo
begin with it ; as vida^ vivkr, varrtr, vtr, vinho^ &ۥ
from Vila, vivere, verrere, videre, vinum, &c.

'Though b ought to be pronounced only by clo^g

the lips, and v by touching the fuperior teeth with

the inferior lips ; yct> by a certain affinity between

thefe

GRAMMAR. IW

thefc two letters, in fpeaking theie is a great confu-
fion in the pronunciation of them in the prorince

. of Entre Dduro e Minho : and this confufion has not
been pecuh'ar to the Portuguefe language, hecaufe

" Vt^xA fays, in his Caftilian Orthography^ that in his
time fome Spaniards could hardly make any diftinc-
tion between thefe two letters.
^ •III. The^ found in fome words originally Latin,
is changed in Portuguefe into a ^ ; as, cdbra^ cabillo^
cabicaj Sec. from copra, capillus, caput y &c.

IV, The Portuguefe generally make ufe of the ^
in the following words : ay, rey, frty^' /^y, w2y, pay^
wiyoy miyoy and fome others^

^Bhiteau fays, that we muft make ufe of the j^ in
words having a Greek origin ; VLSyf/llabay Chryfopiia,
pyramided poffgonoy kydrograph/a^ hydropicoy phyjica^
hyptrMcy hypbcrita, Apocrypho, &c.

V. The ph are ufed by the Portuguefe in fome
taken from the Greek; as, philojophiay phih*

^ia^ PMladelpiia, epitipAio, &c,
k VI. The r in Portuguefe has two pronunciations,
I one foft, exprefled by a fingle r, as in arado, a
plough ; and after the confonants, b, c, d,/,g, ^, / ;
and another hard, in which two rr are ufed 3 as in
Hno^c&rro, &c. But you muft obferve,

'1. That ia the beginning of a word two rr ipuft
never be ufed, becaufe then the r is always pro-
nounced hard in Portuguefe 5 as in the words rimo^
rk^^ today &c.

3. When the confonants /, «, J, are before the r,
either in a (ingle word, or a compound one, this
letter muft never be doubled, becaufe then its ifound
is always ftrong ; as in abalroar, enriquec^r, hdnra^
d^egr&doy Henrique, Ifraelita, &c.

3. The r after a b, is alfo pronounced hard in

eotapounds with the prepofitions aby ob, fub, and

yet is not doubled 3 as in abrog&r, obrepca^yjubrepga^

VII. The 5 is never doubled in the beginning

of words, nor "after the confonants ; therefore you

* 02 ^^^

\

1^

PORTUGUESE

muft "mntfi jafkr^frnhh^falfamhue^falft^^ mififoy fee

The J is pronounced like x between twcv vt>web^-
In words derived from the Latin, as well as in f bofe
tfiat €fnd in ^fa^ and 6fo\ as. m&faf cbfo^ rife, 0m&r6fof
iwdoMfi^ c6f{i^ Sec. Yoa mu^ft aifo obferve, th^
C9fir fignifies to feWy but ewr (ignifies t$ bmt ot
bake.

VilL TA are generally ufed in words deriwdfirofn
the Greek ; as, amfhitkeatroy atheifia, thtolop^ htkkf^
gOy methodo, See.

TA is alfo ufed in th^ Portugaefe prepoStion^i/;
though feme write it thus aie.

IX. When pt is found in Latir^ words, it omft W
kept in the Portugfuefe derived from them 5 M, ip-
to, inSptOy optimOy &c. from aptus^ inepusj cprimus^ Jbr.
You niuft make the fame obfervation alx>ut rf^^.-

X. Cfi9 is founded like k^ in words derived firarfr
the Greek ; as, orchdnjo^ arcAidiique, CkryfbJiwnOy chry^
foly chriJblogQ^ Chrifiovao^ monarcksay &c. Thefe w»oflllf
muft be written with eky in orde;? to preferv« to thr
cjre the etymology of words.

Note, that ch m words that are hot derived from
the Greek is pronounced like fi in the Engliih
v^oris Jkawlyjhoot^ 8cc. but as fome confound the
cA with the x, and begin with x thofe words- tte
ihould begin with cA, I thought it neceflary to make
a coUefiion of them.

Words BEciNNtNo with

CITA,

Chi .

Ch£ca
Chacina
Ch49o
Chac6u^

Chaga.
Cbalupa
Cbimi

Cbatnal6te

Chamar

Chamariz

Chambao

Chamej^r

Chamica

Chamine'

Chamufcar

Chan^a

Chanc^Ia

Chancelaria

Chancelcr

ChafifOB^Uis

CbanmSta

Chantagem

Cbantriido

Chamrc

Cha

Chips

Chapado

Cbapeido

Chapeleta!

Cbap6o

Chapim

GRAMMAR*

197

Chapim
Chapinhir

Chaptiz

Charamela

Cbarameleiro

Cli£rco

Charneca

Charn6ira

Char6Ia

Cbdrpa

CbSrro

Cbarrua

ChAfco

Cbafona

Cbatim

Chato

Cbavad

Cbavafcal

Chave

Cbav&Iba ^

Cfaaveu

Cb^^vinba.

Chibarro

Cbibo

CbicbaroB

Cbicbarro

Cbiehelo^

Cbic6ria *

Chic6te

Cbtfra

Cbifrdr

Cbifre

Cbilindrao

Cbjlrir^^

Cbimbeo

Cbinear

Chincbeiro

Chincbprro

Cbin^la

Cbiqueiro

Cbifpa

Cbifpar

Cbiile ,

Cbita.

CHO.

Cb6§a
Ch6ca
Chocalbir

Cbofr^do

Cb6frc

Cb6ldabolda

Cb6que

Cborar

Cborrilbo , '

Cborro

Cbovor

Choupa

Cboupana

Cboupo, or Ch^po

Cbourico

Cboutir.

CHU.

Cbu^a

Cbupamel

Cbup4r

CbucburriSr

Cbiifo

Cbufa^

Cbuma^o

Cbumbar ;

Cbtimbo

Churriad

Cburdme

Cbiifma

Cbiiva

Chuveiro

CHE.

Cbea; or Cbcy^
^ Cb6fe

Cheg&r -
, Cberi^r^ and Us irCbocilhd

rivatiws Cbocir

Cherivia Cbocarreir,

' Cberne* ' Cbocarrice ctlY.

CHI* Choco and ditcot

Cfaiir Cbocoldte Chy'pre.

The, following words begin with ce and not/r.

Cea

Ceado

Cear

C£B.

Cebola
Ceboldl
Cebolinbo.

' Gedavf m

Ced^ia

Cedenbo

Cedcr

Cedilbo

Ccdo

C^dro

Cedula.

Cega

C£G.

t

I

Cegir
Cego
Cegonba
Ogude
Cegueira- ^

C£I«

Ceifa

Ccifao

Ceirao

Ceirinha

198

PORTUGUESE

Ceirmha
Ceiv&r.

CEL.

Celebra^ao
Celebrar

C61ebre

Celefie

Celefti^l

Celeftrina

Celeufma

Celga

Ceiha

C61ho

Celib&do

Celibato

Celicola

CeHd6nia

Cella

Celleiro

CeNeireiro

C61tas.

C£M.

Cem
Cemitei^io*

CEN.

Cenaculo

Ceno

Cen6bio

Cenobitico

Cenotdphia

Cenoura

Cenrada

Cenrgira

C£nfo

Cenf6r

Cenfura

Cenfurado

Cenfurdr

Centiuro

CentSna

Centeal

Centefinvo

Centgyo

C^nto

Cent6cuIo

Centop^a

Centr&l

Cfintro

C^ntuplo

Centuria

Cenluriao

Ceo

CEP.

Cgpa
Cepilho
C^po
Ceptro. -

C6ra

Ceraferdrio

Cerbcro

Cfirca

Cercado

Cerc^r '

Cercador

Cercadiira

C^rce

Cerce^do

Ccrccif

Cercilio

C^rco

Cerdofo

Cerebtp

Cergijas

Cercij^I

Cerem6nia

CerehionidI

CeriSiro

Cerne

Cernelha

Cer6I

Cerpulas

CerquSiro

Ccrrdr

Cerralh^iro

Cerr&lho

Ccrrarfc

C^rro

Ceru

Ccrto

Certaa

Certdza

Certida

Certificir

C^rva

Cervil

Cerv6j«

Cervilhas

Ccrvii

Ceriida

Certlleo

Ccrvo

Ccrzir.

CES.

Ccfar^

Cefarea

Ccfma

Cefmaria

Cefm^iro

Cefsao >

Cefla^a^

CeiTir

C^fia

CeAinha

Ceftlnho

Ceft^iro

C^fio

Cefiira

CET.

C£va

Cevida

Cevad&l

Cevad^ira

Cevad6uro

CcvAr

Ce^

%

C S A M M A R.

"1

CtztS : Cezimbar.

N. B. Cerrar, fignifies /oj^t, axjhut up ; hwxfm&r
fignifiea /«y£rw, to cut timber or other matter with
afaw.

The following words muft have ci, and not /, Jn'
their beginning.

■ CIA,

Cigino

Cintiira '

Ciirfe

Cigim

, CinM ■

Ciitica.

Cigiidc

Cinzenio

CIS.

Cigui^lha.

Cmzciro.

Cfba

CIL.

CIO.

Cibalbo

CUida

Clo

Cib6ria.

CIDiaa

Ci6fo

CiMr

Ci6ra.

cic.

Cilida

Cicatriz -

CUicio

cip.

Cicero

Cillidai.

Cipo

Cici6Ib.

Cipi«lle

CIM._

Ci^no.

CID.

Cima

CUadao

Cimilfaa

CIR.,

Cid.daoi

Ombalo

CMiuIa

Oidide

Cimeyra

Cidad&i

CimCnto

Cirandir '

Xiin

Cimitarra ' -

CIrco

Cidiida

Clmo..

Circtasao

Cidiao

Circular

Cidriira.

CIN.

Circulo

Cmca

Circililo

c«.

Ciicir

Circumcid£r

CitiKia.

Cincho

Circumcffao

Cinco

Circurafergncia

cir.

CiDco^nu

Circumfpeao

Cittr

Cmgidouro

Circumfpec^ao

CSb>

Cbgi,

Circumflancia

CiMr.

Cingulo

CircumBantei

Cinnamoiw

Cirio

CK.

Ciou

Cirargia

C%ti» .

Cintillir

CiruigiaS

04

Ciizli

20p

Cirzir.

Cifcfr

Cifco

Cifma

Cifmitico

Clfne

Cifterci^nfe

Ciilerna

FOB T UG U ES E

Cita9ad

Cu&d9
Citar

Citeri6r

Cithara

Citharedo

Citrlno

Civel

Civil

Civilid&le*

Ciu.

Cltime
Ci^met

ciz.

Cizania

XL No Pprtuguefe word begins with go ; but ac-
cording to Madweiray there an; fome that foeffin
with guj ap4 f« ; as fapafo, fapifielroy fargifo, fija,
fugidadcy gimoy f^rra^ gurrar^ and fome others.

The f is ufed ?ifter p in thofe Portuguefe wpnfJi
that have in their Latin root fi i as defcripfM^ 4^
. eepgaoj &c. from defcriptio, ace^tig^ &c.

Of Double Litigrs.

It is to bt generally obferved, that the confonant(
are doubled in thofe Portuguefe words, whofe Latin
roots have lil^ewi^ the fame do})ble confonants $ a«
accelerar^ accinio^ occidintCy &c, from accelero, accefiiuSy
occidenSy &g*. affi^gir^ qffluSndif^ (ifirmafdo, &c, frdflj
affligOy affluentia^ affirmation _9fic, ^ you will fee ip |hf
following colle£lions.

B i$ to be doubled in ahiadey ahhacial, akbadi&y ab-
badijja^ (^bheviaturay abbreviqry an4 fome others,

C 18 to ^be doubled in the fpllewing words, uA
fome of tjieir dprivatives.

A.

Accent© -

Acceita

Abftrac9ad

Ac^entu&f

Acceita9ld'

Ac9ad

Accepgad

Acccitador . ; >

'.

1

Acceitir

G tt A M M A K.

401

itir

flad

fsiveif

(To

fliSrtp

lentil

iSnte

lerada

lerido

lerir

(ipa9^P

nodado

rpmodir

mulaf^ao

mul^r

fa^ao

aao

'adof

ar

ativo

gao
:;ad.

B-

lO.

9a

dinhp
do
1.

mfptc^ao

ao

*
o.

:jao

ucfao
ic^ad

cfaa.

Decoc9af
Deduc^ao

Desjecfifi

Defoccupafs^

Defoe ciip&do

Defoccupdr

Detracfao

Dic^ao

DiccipDario

Dj/tracfind.

Eccentrico

Eccleiiiftico

Erecfao '

Evic9ao

£xac9ad

Excr^fUp.

Fic9ao
Fic9ao
Frac9ad^

h

s

Itnpeceabilidide
Impecciv«l
Inaccefsivel
Indic9ad
Indiic9aG^
Inf6c;978
Infra 0930 ■
Infpec9a6
Inftruc9ad
^Intellec9a5
Interj6c9a5
Interfec9ad^

Introduc9adL

M.
Manudtic9a)l

o.

Obj^cfao

Obflruc9ao

8ccafiid
ccafionar
Occafo
Occidehtil
Occid£nte
Occiduo
Occifao
Occurter
Occulum^nte

OccuU4r
Ocdilto *
Occupa9ad
Occupado

Occupir

Occurr^udia

Occurr^hte.

P.

Peccddo

Peccador

Peccadora

Peccante

Peccar

Predic9ao.

Preoccupa^

Produc9ao

Proj6c9af?

Prof^ecao

Putrefac9ad.

R.

Rarefac9a6

Reconduc9ad

Rcfec9a4^

Refriefi«

Refecca9aQ

Reftric9ad

Satisfac9ad
Seccir

S^CGO

Sec9ad

Secura

PORTUGUESE,

T.

TranriccaA
Traduc9aS
V.
VAcca
Vaccada -
Vftccum. "

Seccun

Succefiivo

S£cco

■ SuMefsivd

Soccorrgr

, SucceffiSr

Sbcc6rro

SucciDUmteie

SubirdcfiS

SuGcinto

Succed^r

Succo

Succeflao

Succofo

Succiflb

Saccubo.

This letter H doubled in the following wordcr
atUt'gaS, i^dduMiido, addicton&r, additaminto, additdr.

F,

jF' is to be doubled in

AfibiUdUe

Affeninado

AlBvd

Affeminirfe

ABrmadir

Affxligido

Aficmdam^te

Affirm&r

Afferrido

Affiftiilicfc

Aflcrrar "

Affiair.

ABigir

A£FcrretoSdo

Affiigos

Afferretoiir

AFFL.

AAmido-

Afferrolhado

Afflaniirre

Aaaoirfe

Aiirrolhir

Afiiccao

ABiMJo

Affervestado

Affiiao

ASilUr

. Afferventar

A«igir

Aa^zuidido '

Afiervorado

AfHulncia

hSulxlt,

Affetvorar.

AFFO.

AFfE.

AFFI.

Affocinhii

AffdJo

ABSido

Affogado

Affeir

ASar

Affogador

ASdalgido

AITogar

Affeaadamtate

Affidalgirfe

■ Affogamint*

AtTeaido

AfEgUT&do

Affcgucido

ASeatl :

ISC

Affogueir

Amao

Afforfdo

A<leaii6l<>

, AlEladei

Afforador

A8<>(>S

ABlir

Afforir

AIFei(0<da

Affiaado

AiForanlAnIo

AIMoXr

Affiair

"AfFormemar

Aleite

Affincido

A£Fbrmofeado

Aleilir

ABncii

AlTaiiiioreir

Afibui4«

GRAMMAR.

20S

Afibuti^o v^.
Affoutar
Affouteza
AfiSuto.

Attn.

Affirac&r

Affirainengido

Affreguefldo

Affreguefirfe

Affr^Dta

ABmtido

Aftontam^nto

Affrontir

AffirontofaiD^nte

Affiront6fo

Afiraxadamdnte

Affroxiio

Affroxar.

AI7U.

Affugentddo
AfiugenUr.

Affumado

Affumar

AfFundido

Affundirfe

AfFundfrfe

Affuzill&r.

DiSixnido

Difiam&r

Di£Ferinfa

Difilertn^as

DiffcrSnle

Differentemente

Difficfl

Difficuldade

Difficultir

Oifficult6fain£me

Diflkuhofo

DifiFufad

Diffufamcnte

Difiufo

G.

This letter is to be doubled in

\

\

Aggravante
Aggravir
Aggrav^do
Aggrivo

Aggreir6r
Exaggeracad
Exaggerador
Exaggeri^o

\

L is to be doubled in

Aball^do

Aballador

Aballar .

Abillo

Aballifado

Abilifador

Aballif&r.

AC

Acafellad6r

Acafelladura

Acafeil^r

Acallentido

Acallentar

Acapellido.

£•

EffeHivamintt

Effeaivo

Effeito

Effeituir

Efficazmente

££Bcacia

Efficiz

Ei&ciente '

Effigie

o.

Offender

Ofierec^r

Offufc&r.

J.

SufiTocar

Suffrigio, anifm€
^ others*

Ezaggerir
Suggerfr
Suggefla5
Suggerido.

AF. •

Affillado

Affillador

AffiUir.

AL.

Allega^ao

Allegddo

AUegSr^

Allegona

AIIeg6rico

Allegorifir

AlieMia

AUividr

Alliicina9ad

• Allucin^

PORTUGUESE

Allotinir

BA<

CavallSiro

Alludir

Bacellida

Cavillo.

Allumiir

Bacgllo

Allufc*.

Barbella

ex.

Bairelia.

Ceb611a

AM.

Cebollil

AmamclUilo

Bit.

Cebollinho

Amar^llo

B<lla .

Cbancellir

Amarellecerre

Bellamentc

ChanceJlwii

AmerelllJio

Bella'

Cella

Amollido

Bellfza

Celleiro.

Anioll4r_

Belleirufin

cu

A~inollec£r

Bcllico

AdoIIecido

BelUcdfo

ClavellfM

AmoHentif

BeU!,.m

€0.

Ampdlla.

BelluiDo.

Codicillo

AN.

BO.

•calls

Annotlarao

Bulla

Cnllado

AioolUr.

Bullarip,

Collar
Collein

AP.

CA.

CollScao

Appellajao

Appellante

Appellii

Appellidir

Appellido.

CaMfope
Camillo

Collaterfl
ColI6cca5

Cavilla^a*

Colliaa .

Cavillolamanle
Caballioa

ColleBivo
Collea6l

Cadella

Coll%a

AS,

Cadellfnha

Collegiada

Aquclla

Callo

ColIegiSI

Aqutlle

Camanillo •

Collegio

Aquell6mro

Cainbadala '

CoUigSr

Aquillo.

Cancel la

Colligir

Capilla

Cll/rio ,

AR.

. Capellau

caio

Armellas

CapelKda

Collocacao

■Arrepellido

Capellaai*

CollocSr

Arrepellao

C.pello

Colloquio

ArrepellSr.

Capillar

AT.

Callelli

COM.

AtropellUo
Atropclltr.

Caltcllo
Cafallo

Compellir
Compoll£11a

Cafiilla

ConHellafaS

AV,

Caralla

CorrolUUio

AvillanUo,

Cavallaiia

CovSlla

ComiU:

CourcUa/ '

Delia

Delias

Deiie

Delles .

Degollido

Degolia^ao

JDegollar

, DegoUadouro.

VI,

Difiillacio
Diflillador
•Dittilldr.

DO.
Donzella. •

DU. •
Duello .' .

£bulli9ad -*

ELI.

E'ila

E'llas

£11e

Elles

Elleboro

Elljpfe

Elliptico. .

Emolli^nte
Emollir

EN.

Enallige
EncapelUdo :
Encapellir
Kncaftellado
Encaftellar

G R A M AT A

EncclleirAn

EQ.

'Equipollencia
Equipollentc*

ES.

Efcabellada
Bfcabello
Efcudella
Efcudeliau
. Eflilla^ao
Eftiilddo
Ettillar
Eftiliicidio
Eftrella
Eftrelladb.

I EX.

Excellencjia

Excellcntc

Expeliir.

F41la

Fall^cha

Fallicia

Fallador

Fallir^

Fallccer

Fallecfdp

Falfencia

Fallido.

F£.

FerdizSlIo

FL.

Flagellame -
Flag611o.

FO.

F6lle

Folliculo .
- Jontollo,

R.

Gabella
Gallido
Galladura
.Gailar
Gailego
Gdllia
Gallicido
Gallicir
G^Ilico^
Gallinha
Galiinha9d
Gallinheira
Gallinheiro
Gallinhol-a
Galli6poli
Galliota
Galliza
GalJo

Gain^lU
Gaz^llrf.

905

• G611a.

GO.

US.,

a

Hellefponto*.
Hendecafj^llabo
Hoimnda
Hy pall age.

anclla
anelleira
ancllinha
armdllc^.

I.

111^930

Illaquear

Iliativo

Illegftimo ' -•

mfo

Illi^ar

,IlIiciad6r ^ .

IllicitainSnte

S06

illiciumdite

Illieito V

Illoc&vel

Itladido.

Illudir

Illuniina9a£

Illuniin&do

Illaminir

Illpminativo

lUufao

lUufo

Illuftrafao

Illuarir

Illiiftre

Illuftriffimo

Ill/rio

Imb^lla

Impeliir

Incapillato

Infallivel

Inintelligivel

Interviilio.

L.

Lib6Uo
Lordello '
Loufilla.

M.

Marc6Ua
MarceUfm

POkTXJGUESE

MartelUda

MartelUr

Mart6Uo

Maitellfnho

Mallogrido

MamilUur

Meddlla

Mellffluo

M6U0

MetUlic*

Milleniri*

MilMfino

MirandelU

Mifcellinia

M61]e

MoU^ira

Moll«za

Mollice

Mollidao

Mpllificante

Molliiicir

Mollini[r

Monofy'llabo.

N. .

N^lla

N6Uai

N«lle

Nelle*

Nig^lla

Novella

Novelleiro

Nulla

Nutlid^de

Nullo

Nuzellos.

O.

Odivellas
OUaria
Oll^iro
Ouguella.

P.

PalU

Pallidio

Pallante

Pillas

Palliido

Palliar

Pillido

pailio

Parad^lla

Parallixe

Purall61o

ParaUel9graaio

Pdle

Pellefinha

Pellica

Pellicula

Panella

Pimpin^lla

Phillis

Pollegida '

Pollegir

Pollez

Polki9ao

Polluto ' '

Polyfyllabo

Portac6Ilo

Portella

Poflilla

Poufaf611ea

Prunille

Pulm611a

Pupilia

Pupillo

Pufiilauimidad*

Pufillanime*

Q-

Quart611a

R.

Rabad6Ua

Rebellido

Rebellad

RebeHarfe

Rebelliao

R^lla

Rodof6ile

Rodopello

Rorilla

Rueila

S.

Sella

Sellido

SeUaddr

Sellagao

Sell4r

Selleiro

G R A M M A R.

20T

SellSiro

S6II0

Sentln^lla

Sibylla

Sigitlo

SigilJddo

SoDrepelliz

Sugillafao

Sy'ilaba

Syllabatico

^llabico

SyliogifSr .

Syllogifmo.

T.

Tabella^
Tabelliao
TabelliSa
Titillacao
TitUldr

ToUa
Tollice .
T6II0
Torcic6Uo
' Ti;anquilUdade
Tranquillo
Tr^lla
Trifyllabo
Tunicella
TuUio

V.

Vacilla^ao
Vaciilante
Vacillir
Villa
Vallado
^ Vallir
Vdllc
Vaflalligeoi

VaffiUIo

VE,

Velleidi^de

Vellicacao

Vellicir

Velio

Vcll6fo

Velludo

Verderella

VI.

Vflla ^

Villanla

Villaam^Qte

Vlllac?

Villao

VitcUa

Vitellfno.

N. B. JnnuUdr (ignifies to amml*^ but anrnHrl^txk
adje£live» and (ignifies amtu/ar, or in the form of a
ring. L is doubled by fome in the vrords pelo, pila,
(for) thus; pillow pella.

M.

M is to be doubled in

Acconpniodir

Commemora^o

Comm^nda

Commenfurir

Commentar

Commerciir

Commettir

Comroina9ao

Cemmiferafao

Comipiflao

Commiflirio

Commo^ao

Commodo

Comai0v^r

Commum

Commun^ar

Communicar

Communidade

Commuter

Confumm&r

Defaccommodir

Defc6mniodo

Dilemma

£inmadeirar

EmmadeixCr

Emmagrec^r

Emxnanquecte

Emmaflar

Emmudec^r

Engomm£r

Epigrjmma

Flaroma

Flammdnte

FIdmmula

G^mrna

Gomma

Grammitica

Immaculdda

Imman^nte

ImmarcefTivel .

Immaterial

Immaturo

Immediata.

s

308 PORTUGUESE

Immediatam^C^ Immoitlficado Mamma

Immemofavel Itnmovel , Maminir

Imroenfo Immud^vel Recommendiir

Immcnfufi^ef Immundo * Somma

Immobilidf4d6 Immonidide Sommir

Immoderadafll'^nte Immutavel Summa

Immod^fto Incommodo Summ^rio

imm6dico Incommutiicirel tSummidade

Immolar Incommutdvel Sjmmetria, dnd

Immortality Inflamm^r • some others

N. B. A/, and not n, is 2^1 ways made ufe of before

N is likeWife doubled in feveraf verbs compdfliYd-
ed with a>f^ en, in, con, as ame/ar, annex0, MfUii^
annata, annet, Anna^ dnno^ annul&Ty connexaoyconnesi^j
d^pennar, empennar^ ennafirar, ennegrecir, innafo,
innaveg&vel, innoctncia, manna, Maridnna, pdnno,
ftmkkt wken \l fi^ifies a peer, tyrdnftOy and Ibme

P.

This letter is to be doubled in words beginning
with p compounded with the Latin prepofitions ad,
ob^fub ; as appar&to, apparecer, oppdr, spprimiryfuppAry
Philippey pdppa, &c.

N: B. I^J^pa fignifies^jp^, or a fort of fpoon-tneit
for childWtt'; bot papa hgnifies the Pope.

The r f& doubled in,fuch wards as are ftrongly
pronounced in f he middle ; as: guerra, arranciir, ^*
redir, arrimtr^ mrruin&r, tarf^^itty carro, &c.

The jf IS to be doubled in the Portuguefe fuperli-
tives, bdeaufe tt is doubled m the Latin roots ^it ii
alfo douUfd k» the following words :

Abbad^fTa

GKJLMMJkM.

Coadefi Jb&m

AfUnbSr ^Um

£•

Aflbl£r l-ffnryry

An^flv

Tis dowBiMrg jl ^k
derivarires :

Attcmpcrzr

Attco
Att6nuo

Aura&iTo
Attrahir

Of tie

OfWvric^Uat:
N. B. Y^ ami -sr

All wora^a:itiiT^ a

s ^

, I I »«fl r^4

tbe

308 PORTUGUESE

Immediatam^HC^ Imtnortlficado Mamma

Imznemdrayel Itnmovel , Mammir

Imroenfo Immuddvel Recommendiir

ImmcnfufS^ef Immundo " Sonuna

ImmobiIidf4d6 Immonidide Sommir

ImmoderadafllSrJte Immutavel Summa

immod^fto Incommodo Summ^rio'

Imm6dico Incommuiiicirel tSummidade'

Immolar Incommutdvel > Sjmmetria, dnd

Immortality Inflamm^r • some others

N. B. A/, and not «, is s^lways made ufe of before

N is likewJfe doubled in feveraf verbs conipbflmf.
ed with a>r, en, in, con, as anne/ar, annexe, a'fifUSi^
annata, annet, Anna^ dnno^ annul&Ty connexaoyConmiK^p
depennar, empennar^ ennafirar, ennegrecir, innafo,
innaveg&vel, innoctncia, manna, Maridnna, pdnno,
fimkkf wken it fi^ifies a pe&, tyrdnmy and £bme

P

This letter is to be doubled in words begfnning
with p compounded with the Latin prepofitions ad^
ob,fub ; as apparhio, apparecer, opp6r, Bpprimir^fupp6r,
Philippe, pdppa, &c.

N- B. I^i^pa signifies p^, or a fort of fpooii-toeit
forchildWtt'; htxt papa CigniSit^ f he Pope.

The r i& doubled in fuch words as are ftrongly
pronounced in fhe middiej as: guerra, arraft€Sif,ar*
redhr, arrimifry mrrmn&r, e^tigkr^ cdrro, &c.

The $ IS to be doubled in the Portuguefe fuperli*
tives, bdeaufe it is doubled m the Latin roots ;\it li
alfo douUfd m ihe following words :

Abbadaflk

G R A MM A R.

209

Condafla

Apr.

Ailanhir

Atiegtirir

Affignit

Affolir

Acc£0b

Aggre<5&r

ApfN^ifir

.^Unauar

Arrcnteflar

ASsAukr

Afleyo

Affeflor

Afsibn

Affiftil-

Aflbmbv^

AIToprir

AGTobbir

Afluftdr

Atraveflar

Neceffitar

Niffo

N6flb
N6fla
E'lTa
I/ffe
I'ffo

Cffo /
Paffcir
Paffir
Remefla

Ingr^flb, tfn«f mm^
others.

Ti3 doubled in the following words and their
derivatives :

Attemperdr

Atten^ao

Attend^r

Attent^r

Attenuap4o

Attenuar

Att6nito

Attr&C9d5

Attra£livo

Attrahir

Attribuir
Attribiito
Attr]94o
Attrito

Commettir

Demittir

Enfittir

Rtu

Intrommett^r

Omittir

Permiitir

Promettir

Remettdr

Remettir

S^tta

S^ttftnta

Settec^tos

Tranfmittir

Of the Quantity of Syllables and their Sounds

Of Words that make their Penultima in a.

N. B. You muft remember what we have faid
above about the accents.

All words ending in abo^ hba^ heoy &ca, hcho^ hcha^
dfO'i iga^ &dOi ada^ dfo, &fa, Ago, i^a, Agem, agre, Alio,
HAa, &lo, Ala, have the penultimas long; as diibo,
ntang&ba, tnacdco, tnacaca, cavaca, mingicho, garn&cha,
V^ir&go, Imhdfa, am&do, punhdda, (except reldmpago,
waropofagp, levado, and cagada, which are ihort in
the penijitima), ab&foy abafa^ faramAgo,adaga, (except
std^go^ or fitdmagOydmago, imAraco,yrhich are Ihort,)
• ' P trab&lkOi

21© P.O R T U GJU E S E

trabdlkOi iocdia^ badalo, (except ^nbmal% bu/ah, eJcdHf^
dalo, which are (hort), tanchdgem^ vindgre. ^

' Words ending in dmo^ dmai dnjio^ dnha^ dtiOy dn^y
have their penultimas lon^j.as, efcdmo^ courdtnd^
cqftanhoy ardnha^ ^ngdno, fejldna: except pdmpano,
t^mpanoy bigamo.

Words ending in dpo^ hpa^ hqut^ aro, cim^\i^e
thfeir penultimas long ; as, guardanhpOy Jol&pay baj^
bdque, emp&roy feara ; except cdntaro^ pucarOy Ifparo,
hdfaroy liiparOy p/faroy picarOy cdmray tdmaray pafjim^
LazarOy b&rbarOy cbcaraSy &c.

Words ending in arroy array atOy at ay hvOy hva^
axoy axasy make the. penultima long ; as, biz&rro^
bizarray blfcatOy pataratay ejcravo^ ffcrava, (except
concava, and bifavo), cartdxo^ tarrdxa.

Of Words that make their Penultima in e.

All words ending \n eboy ebay edoy eday efa^ ha\l^
their pequltiraa long ; as, manceboy mancebay* oziA,
azeday fane/a.

Words ending in e/e are Jong ; as, magarefe :• as
well as thofe ending* in icoy^ca, ego, ega; as bmicf^
bonecay cabegOy cabSga»

Words ending in ^gOy egdy are long; as, moreigOf
fodgOy religOy entregay allega ; except conegOy trAfegh
cgrrego^ fofregOy pecegOyfdlegOy bUtegay cbcegas.

Words endifTg in tjoy ejay elo, klay are long ; ^
iarangukJQy bocejo, igrija^ AlentejOy enveja, m^rtih^
querela.

-Words ending in emoy ^maycnOyenay are longj aS|
mpremoy pojlemay acenoy agucena ; except apozema^

N. B. The penultima is fliort in the Word ingrtmf.

A^ords ending in epOy eparCpey eque^ eroy kra^^^
long ; as, decepOy caripayjulepeytnole^uey severOySf^ita%
temperQy,(when a noun) : and /m^/r^, (when ^ yfirb)
except isperpy prospero. ,

^^ Words eniXng in. eso^ hdySzOy eza^ eioy^itayiiet
^ffp iva, eve^ arc long) as, aceso^ acisaydesprihy

%

GRAMMAR. L«Il

hand^za and defprifoy (when a Ytxhytntremifq^^^aJ''
Wa, ramalMtCy boftte, atr&jOy atrhja^ atreve.

Of Words ihat make their Penultima in i.

Words ending in iboy iia, ibe^ icho^ icha^ icie, ico^
ica^ ico^ ifa^ ice, idoy fda, ifo, if a, ife, have the pe-
nultima long ; as, ejiribo, arriba, arribe^ efguichoy
efguicha^ azeviclie, panlco, (a fort of fluff) boticai
except mecdnicOy ecumenicoy criticx>y politicOy pdfiicoj
(panicle), and fome others borrowed from the Gfeek
and Latin. In /'fo, iqa, &c. z^jToligOypreguigay veU
hice, maridoy medida ; except humidoy pallido, horrido^
and fome others derived from the Latin. In ifo^
if a J &c. as borrifoy alcatifaypatife.
i Words ending in igo and iga, are long ; as, amigo,^
cmig^y except, pridigo^ prodiga. ^

Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long ; as, qfiijoj^
jtrtemija.

Words ending in i/iOf ilia, are long ; as, afi/Ho,
beaiilha. Others ending in tlo, ila, as, gorgomiloy
ferfila^desfda. - '

. ' Words ending in hnoy ima, have the* penultima
Idng; a&' hptimoy cadmo, ejgrima, iafiima, (when a
▼erb) ; except laftima (wnen a noun), Jeronimo, pef^
Jfev^j-^uid all the fuperlatives, an6nimOy and fome
others.

Words ending in inhoy inhay ino^ inay Ipo, ipay ipe^
bi^ve the penultima long ; as, conjiipo, conjiipay Euripo,
in^^ife, I Others in iquoy iquay ique, hoy ira^ ire ; as^
piiipft^il^quay Iambi que, retiro, menttrayfufpire.

Wprds ending in ifoy ifa, izp, iza, itOy iiayho^ iva^

Ik&^'ii^y'^rQ long in the penultima ; as, avifo^ camifa^

'j^o^ ajui^Hi altivoy altivay pro/ixo, proltxay atito^

• foirito-i^ except pilpiiOy vomiiOy decripltOy eJpritQ^

f//^/r(?, and fome others.

\lQfleT^rJluch words as make their penulfima in o.

'fords'" ending in obpyoba^ 6be^ 6bray obrq, Sbn^
' jj^te ' ihVir M^ jongj as, Idbo^ loba^ arrSba^

\

r
\

fil2 P b R t U G U E S E

aurSie^ gJSSo, a/c6va, oiro, Sira, cobre, c6brOy id-
bro.

Words ending in ocho, ockd^ dcoy oca^ 6go^ oga, odo^
SJa, -ode, Sfoy ofay vfe^ have the penultima, long ; as,
agarrdcio, garrdcha^ carochity kioco, except a/it/oep)
mafsarSca, minhSca^ almafo^ m6ga, (a girl) rndga^ or
mdfsa^ (a notch) almogo (when a verb,) carroga^ iS*
do, boda, bode, pode, (the third perfon lingular of the
prefent indicative of the verb poder\ pode. (the third

Eerfon Angular of the p;reterperfect definite of the
ime \txh)ygalh6fay bofd . . .

Words ending in bfro^ ofra, ofre, are along ; as>
alcMxSfray cofre, enx&fre.

Words ending in ogOy oga, ogue, are long; as,^
fl>gOy ^ffogay affbguty defafbgOy when a verb, and.i^-
qfvgo^ when a qoun.

Words ending in ojo, bja, hav6 the penultima kmg;
tSy defpojoy whtn a vevby no jo, defpojo when a hgud.

, Words ending in olo, bhy ble, are long; as^tiV^
lay gallinhbla, bbluy engblCy miolo^ boloy reboh^ tHh
ccbola ; except perolay frivoloy benevolo y malevolo^ ,

Words ending in pmoy Sfna, bme, have the penill- .

tuna long; as, mordokoytedomayjimey except Thm^*

Words ending in onho, onha, bnoy ^/i^, have. Ac

penultima long ; as, bifonhoy rijonhay dono, aii^m%

. dAna y except altifonoy and unifono.

. Words ending in bpla, opOy bpay bpty Spro, 6fl»y

bpre, Sque, have the penultima long ; ^s, manifki

' topOy tbpay galbpey afsopVQy when a verb, afsopna^ 4'

Jopfrty afsopro, when a noun, botbque.

Words ending in Sroy or ay ore y are long .mihe '
penultima ; as, peftAoro^ penibra, penhbrdy chorq viie&
a noun ; chbro. when a verb s except bacoroi rhmSf
pblvoray&rvore.
■ Words ending in ^rro, orra, are long; ap/^*
edrro, mStro, tachorra ; and fome others endmg in
Sfiy 6fey 6fa^ 6zoy oza^ as, pfimorSfo^ primorSJa^ %^
triofo^ mdufiriofa, ciSzo, cigza, de/co/e.

Woi

.GRAMMA R. 213

Words ending in oUy gtOy 6tey have their penulti-
ma lonjg^f ^& goto^ gota^ h6ta^ devoio^ frota^ capote^
garrote.

' Words ending in ovoy ova^ ove^ are long in the
p^ultima ; z^ 6vOiCorc6vay aprove.

Words ending in 6x0^, oxa^ are long in the pe-
nultima ; as, roxoy f"6xa^ jmtarrSxo.

IMes/or/uei fF&rdsas make their Penultima

Words ending in ubo^ uia, 0ro, ibra^ ^h^ icAa^
ieo^ iudy itq^y uga^ make the penultima long; as/^
ad&bOy ddiini'^ except//irr«^o,/«r»^^,an^d fbme. other j
incubroy inciihtUy machUthoy embdchai cadico^ caduca^ r^-

Wo]xl$ landing in ddo^ udi^ ude^ ufo^ Hf^yjfff^J^gOf^^
^£fh jf^y 4^r ]bave the penultima long^;as,y^^^a^^
fe^iJa, a/ffide, paniu/Oy adu/a, aduj^e, \[dngiufkgaj^^
cwtM^ji^ a^ambiqa. *.*...,. .,;

Words ending in ilho^ May ilhey itlbyila) ^le^ £mo^
jteOy uiff€^ iuhOy inhay Me; as, bagilha^ borbiilhay
tntilke^ engiloy engila^ bulebule\ ,ex,cept vocabulOy.vef*
tibulo, dugulo^ reg^loy ap&fculOy, iremuh, patibiUOy ihiri^
iulos and .£3me others; con/limp^ confuma^ cardume^
ttjiemiifthoy tefiemunhay empunhe. ^ - -i I

, Words endmg in unOy iinay iiney upOy ipay upey ique,
iror^^i ^^> ^^^ ]<>ng in the penultima; as^ defiina,
fcrtinay defitney apipOy api^pa^ apipe, eft^ue^ tnaduroy
madirayafiiire.

Words ending m ifoy ifuy ^/e^ uzoy i^a^ ize^ ito^
itay itey ixoy uxa, ^xe, have tlie penaltiipa |ong ^ a^^
farafiifOy parafifay paraf&fey redizo, reduza, redize, coH'
ikUOy labitay enxitOy lab&te ; except cSmpuio when a
n^un ; repAxOy empixay empixe ; and fome others end-*^
ing in iivOy uva^ ive ; as, viM^Oy viuvay envi&ve,

N* B. When the penultima is immediately fol-
lowed by another vowel, you muft make the follow-
ing obfervations :

P S A before

S06

Illicittrntnte

Illieito V

Illoc&vel

Illadido.

Illudir

inuinina9afi

lUuminido

Illaminir

Illfiminativo

lUufao

Illdfo

Illuftra^ao

Illufir&r

Illuftre

Illafirifliino

Illy'rio

Imb^Ua

Impellir

Incapillato

Infallivel

Inintelligivel

lotervilio.

L.

Lib6Uo
Lordello '
Loufilla.

M.

Marc6Ua
MarcellCna

Maitdlida

MartelUr

Mart61Io

Mattellfnho

Matfaliftnte

Mallogrido

Matnillir

Mediilla

Mellffluo

M6U0

MetUlic*

MiUeoiri*

MilMfino

PORTUGUESE

Mirandella

Mifceilania

M611e

Mol]4ira

MolKza

Mollice

Mollidao

MpUificante

Mollificir

Mollin&r

Monofy'llabo.

N. -

N^IIa

N^Hai

Ntlle

Mellet

Nigella

Novella

Novelleiro

Niilla

Nullid^de

NuUo

^uzellos.

o.

Odivellas
OUkria
OllSiro
Ouguella.

P.

Palla

Pallidio

Pallante

Pillas

Palliido

Palliar

Pallidfez

Pillido

Pallio

Parad6lla

Parallive

Purallelo

Parallelagraino

P61h!

Pellefinba

Pellica

Pellicula

Panella

Piinpinelia

fhillis

Polleglda

Pollegir

Pollez

Polki9ao

Polluto ' '

Polyfyllabo

Portacdllo

PorteHa

Pofljlla

Poufaf611es

Prunelle

Palni611a

Pupilla

Pupillo '^

Pufiilanimid&dt

Pufillanime.

Q-

Quart611a

R.

Rabad^lla
Rebellido
Rebel lad
RcbcHarfe
Rebelliao

Rdia

Rodof611e

Rodopello

RoftUa

Ruella

S.

Sella

Sellido

SeUad6r

Sellagao

Seller

Selleiro

^

. i t$ Jl A ^ M A R. 215

- CHAP. it. '

[ !E^jimd}o£y of the Poriufuefe Tonruefrdm the
^ " Lattn,

'^Tf^HE Partuguefe rdtains fo great an affinity to
X. 'the Latin, that feveral words of the latter are
preferyed in the former, by only allowing a fmall
alteration ; as may eafily be feen in the following
x>bferyations.

1. The V> of the Latito Words is preferved in fome
Portugtiefe ones; nay, fome Latin words are entire-
ly preferved in the Portugnefe ; . as, hd/pediy ^orda,
^rta\ &c.
/IL Tihe;» is changed into o\ ^Sy forca^.golSfo^
efi6pa^\m&ftay amdmos, ^cchomfurca^guloJuSyJiupa,
tfiufcaiWfiixmusi &c. . - v o ^

III. The diphthong, au^ is fi-equently chsi^d inta.
MT; My Jouv&veli Buroy couve, mouro, &c^ft6m iaudch
J^^aumn^taidiSyfttauruSyZic:.' -! ., - »

IV. The e is prcfferved in feveral PcMftu^ttefe
words J {aus, certOy fervo, erva^ terra, /erro, See., from
cirtMSiJmHtiy.herba, ttrrayferrumy &c. • i ,

V. The^-^'takes the place of i; as, enfertnayfeca^,
&c. from infirmus^Jicus, &c, 5 and the / is -fotnettmes
preier^d^^ as in - indignp^ bmgno, &c. from indignus^

VJ;.\ The b is alfo changed into v ; as, arucfre, dih .
vid&rydcve/ir^ava^ atn/eua,%LC. from arbor ydubitart^
debei[tiyabat^amabaty&cc. . •, .

VII,: The r is yerf often changed into g ; as, digo^
M^^do, amigQ, migdlAa, &c. from dica, acaius, arnicas,
lamica, 8cc. v

Vill* CI is changed into chy as, cham&r^ chaise,
from cUmarCy clavis^ &c.

IX. When the c in Latin is followed by /, this
lelteT.is changed into f ; as, bcqao, dicfoo, &c. from
affio^ diSio, Etc. i and . ibmetimes the e before: / lA

P 4 . changed

f -

308 PORTUGUESE

Immediatam^C^ Imtnortlficado Mamma

Imznemorayel Itnmovel , Mamroar

Imroenfo Immuddvel RecommeiKliir

ImmcnfufS^ef Immundo ' Somma

Immobilidfddd lmmanid4de Sommir

(mmoderadafll^rjte Immutavel Summa

Immod^fto Incommodo Summario'

Imm6dico Incommutiicirel tSummidade

Immolar Incommutdvel ^ Sjmmetria, dnd

Immortality Inflamm^r > some others

N. B. A/, and not «, is s^lways made ufe of before

iV is likewJfe doubled in fevefaf verbs comp6fli¥d-
ed with atu en, in, con, as ame/ar, annexe^ MfUli^
annata, annet, Anna^ dnno^ annul&Ty connexaoyconnen^i
depennar, empennar^ ennaftrar^ ennegrecir^ inniMi
innaveghvel, inmctncia, manna, Maridnna, pdnno,
fimkkf wken '^ (i^ifies a peer, tyrdnmy and ibme

P

This letter is to be doubled in words begfnning
with p compounded with the Latin prepofitions ad^
ob^fub ; as apparhio, apparecir, opp6r, Bpprimiryfuppdr^
Philippe, pdppa, &c.

N. B. ri^pa fignifies^»dj^, or a fort of fpooti-tocit
forchildWtt'; hxit papa hgniSit^ f he Pope.

R.

The r }& doubled in/uch wards as are ftrongly
pronounced in fhe middle; as guerra, arratfciif, or*
rtdkr, arrimifry mrruin&r, edrf^g^, cdrro, &c.

The $ IS to be doubled in the Portuguefe fuperli-
tives, bdCttttfe it is doubled hi the Latin roots ;\it li
alfo douUfd m the following words :

Abbadaffa

G R A MM A R.

209

Cond^fla
.Auanb^r

ASoMt
Aodeflb
AggtfffBr
Apwffiur

Arrcnteflar

Attnitkr
Afleyo
Affcflor
Afsirn

Affiftfr

AfTombnj^

AiTopiir

Aflbbiiir

Afltift^

Atraveffir

Neceffitar

Niflb

N6flb . ^
N6fla
FiTa
I/ffe
rflb

Cffo /
Paffeir
PiiCKr
Renaefla

Ingr^flb, tf;i4/ many
others.

. )

7 43 doubled in the following words and their
derivatives :

Attemper&r

Atten^ao

Attend^r

Attentir

Aitenuapio

Attenuar

Att6nito

Attric945

Attra£livo

Attrahir

Attribuir

Attribute

Attri9do

Attrito

Commettik'

Demittir

Enfittdr

Rtta

Intrommettftr

Omittir

Permittir

Premettir

Remett^r

Reinettfr

Setta

S^tt^nta

Settec^tos

Tranfmittfr

Of the Quantity of Syllables and their Sounds

Of Words that make their Pemdtima in a.

'N. B. You muft remertiber what we have faid
above about the accents.

All words ending in abo^ &ba^ ieo, hcay hcho^ hcha^
i^\iga\ &doy aday &fo, ifa^ ligo, i^a, igem^ agre^ hlhoy
'ilhay Uoy hhy have the penultimas long ; as dihbo^
nian^&bay macdcoy tnacacay cavaca^ mingichoy garn&chay
TfmSr&^Oy linhdfay amado, punhdday (except reldmpago,
maropbfagOy levadoy and cagadoy which are fhort in
the j)enultima), abhfoy abafa^ faram&gOyadagay (except
sidfiia^Oy or fit6mago^dmagOyam^raco,vfhich are (hort,)
^ ' . P traiilAo,

•^ '

21© P.ORTUG^UESE

trabalhoy to&liay badaloy (except ^nbmal% bkfuhy eje^
dalo, which' are (hort), tancMge^y vindgre. ^

' Words ending in dmo^ dma^' dr\ho^ dnha^ dno^ dn,^^
have their penultimas lon^j.a^, efcdmo^ [courdma^
cqftdnhoy ardnhaj engdno, pjldna: except ^dwpano,
tympanoy bigamo. ,

Words ending in dpOy apa^ ique, aro^ dm^h^ve
thfeir penultimas long ; as, guardandpOy Joldpa^ baj*
bdquey emphroy fear a ; except cdntaroy pucarOy l^paro^
bdfaroy lifparOy pifaroy picaro, camera, tdmara, paffaro,
LazarOy bhrbaroy cbcaraSy &c.

Words ending in drroy array atOy ata, hvo^ iva^
dxoy axasy make the, penultima long ; as, biz&rro^
bizarray bifcaiOy patardtay efcrdvOy efcrdv^y (except
concava, and bifav6)y cartdxoy tarrdxa.

Of Words that make their Penultima in e.

All words ending in eboy ebay edo, eda, efa^ haVe
their pequltiraa long ; as, manceboy mancebay- az£Jo,
azeday fane/a.

Words ending in c/e are long ; as, magareft .•• as
well as thofe ending* in icOy4cay egOy ega, as bonicff^
boiiecay cabegOy cabSga.

Words ending in tgOy egdy are long; as, moreSgo^
focigOy religOy entregay allega y except tonegOy trkfegHf
cgrrego^fofregOy pecegOyfdlegOy biitegay cbcegas.

V Words endifTg in tjoy ejay elo, ehy are long ; as^
tarangukJQy bocejoy igrijay Alentejoy envejay ma^ttik^
querela,

-Words ending in emOy emaySnOyenay are longj as^
supremo y pojlemay acenoy agucena ; except apozema^
N. B. The penultima is fliort in the Vvprd ingremf^
Words ending in epOy epayipe,- eque, eroykra^zte
long ; as, decepo^ carepayjulepeyfnoleguey severOySffuita^
iemperp y\when a noun) : and temperoyivrhen 9,yerh)
except dfperpy prosper 0.

. Words enAing in. eso^ esdye'zo, eza^ eio,Jta^c(el
^^p iva, evCy arc long) as, aceso, aci'say despreioy

^ RAM MA R. lJ?1i

ftandi^a and dejprkfo^ (when a verb)>»/r^w^/^,'^«/.
fi^ta^ ramalhiie^ boftte^ atrivo^ atrhja, atreve,

OfWot'ds that makejheir Penultima in i.

Words ending in iboy iia, tte, ichoj icha^ iche, ico^
ica^ ico^ if ay icCy idoy fda, i/o, i/ay r/e, hayt the pe-
nultima long ; as, eftriboy amba, arribe^ efguichoy
ifguicha, azevichCy panlco, (a fort of ftuflT) uoticai
except mecdnicOy ecumenicoy criticOy pliticOy pdfiicoy
'^anick), and feme others borrowed from the Gfeek
atid Latin. In TqOy ifay &c. ^Sy ro/rgOy pr^guffa, veU
hicCy maridoy medida ; except humidoy pallida y hbrrido^
and fome others derived from the Latin. In ifo^
ifay &c. as borrifoy alcatifay palife,
y . Words ending in igo and igay are long ; as, amigo,^
itmlg^y except, pr^digOy prodiga.

Words ending in ijoy and ijay are long ; as, afflijoj^

Words ending in ilkoy ilkay are long; as, afitho^
beaiilha* Others ending in ilo, ila, as, gorgomilo,
perjila.'desjila. - '

'. Words ending in hno, ima, have the penultima
Idng; a& t>ptimoy cadimo^ efgrimay taftimay (when a
verb) ; except laftima (when a noun), Jeronimo, pej^
jfimor-^^A all the fuperlatives, anSnimOy and fom6

Others-

Words ending in inhoy inhay inoy inay tpo, fpa, ipe^
hiave the penultima long ; as, conJlipOy conjiipay Euripo,
0^f^p€. . Others in iquOy iqua, iquCy hOy ira,y ire-^ zs^
jniJpt^iiilquay Iambi guey retire y mentirayfufpite.

W9rds ending in ijOy ifay izOy izay itOy itqyivo,^ iva^

/i^oV ifji^, 'are long in the penultima ; as, avifo^ camifay.

'j0xo^ ajuiMi altivoy altiva, prolixo, prolixay apito^

^akrito-ietcept pulpit a, vomit o, decripitOy (fprito^

fUiito, and fome others.

■\l&les ^Fjuck words as make their penultima in o.

■'^prds'encling in obpy^oba^ Sbe^ ohray obroy gbre^
%it ' iheir pcnyltim^ Jong } as, Idbo, loba, arrSba,

U2Q

PORTUGUESE

IKg^r^gj a p^ftid(f^ or langa r.

send partido ae alguem,
Ddr p/aUvra.^
i)ar hiima satva^

Dar fiador^
I^ar principio^otjim^
Dar conta^ ,
Dar-sc ao estudo^
Dar em qucfalldr^

I

Dar cntrdda^. . .

Dar cdusa,

Dar em fue entendir^

Dar de beHr,

Dar couceSf

Dar hum ccscorrdo^,

Dar pancadas^

^Dar murrast

Dar murra^aSf ,

Dar o/dro a^alguim deatgu-

)na cousa^
Darhuma estocdda^
Dar OS bins dias^

Dar aguardar^
,Dar d cista^
Dar com dlguem^

Dar em alguim^

Dar cafiAif

Dar sobre o inimigo^

Dar OS parabfm^

Dar OS pdrabins a alguem

itsiteck^gada^
Dot a wldS ajuddnda,
Dar d tStdSiir,
Dar enfddo a^dlguim^
Dar no alvo^
Dar /OS castas^

Bar parte dit l^in ne^Scic^,

To fide with one, to be for

him.'
To promifc. ^

To give a volley of fliot, or

to make a difcharge of

guns in honour of fbme

perfons of quality^
To bail.

To begin, or end.
To give an account.
To apply orte's fetf to fludy.
To make one fpeak, to give

an occaflon to be talked b£
To give acceTs to.
TogivecaUfe.
To vex one fadly, to troubb

one.
To give drink.
To kick.

To give a box on the car.
To beat with a cudgel.
To cuff

To butt, as rams do.
To fmell out a matter.

To give a thru ft.

To bid one goqd-tnori'ow.

To give in Kecjring.

To run a-groifno:

To meet with one by chance,

to light upon a perfon.
To ftrike one, al/o to accufe

one.
To deal, or give^the cards.
To fall upon the enemy.
To congratulate.
To bid one welcome.

To give a helping hand. '

To let »ne take his choice.

To moleft one. '

To hit the mark.

To run away, to betake on€*s

felf to flight.
To impart a hufincfs.

Dar

4G It A M 11 A ft.

«tfl

Dar peBo amor it Dios^
Dar ytwutJUirra^
Dor kkma^Situ em redSudn^
JUar hiima^ifia de Mox^
Darulcdnct uo queje desgrja^

Darfuipiros,
Dor amides^
Dor em rSfio^

Did,

Biu^me bima dor,
Dar quefaa^tr a ulguam, or
Dccupar alguim^

Dar kiraSy

relogio d£ hircs^

Dar a Mma a Dios,

Dar comsigo em aigumapartty

Dur kit^,
Dar garrdte^
Dar vizes^
Ofol da nos ilkos,

Dar ra%oenSf

Daf comsigc ^o ckaS^

Dar/nttc,

Dar as mdSs,

Dar com a pirta na car a dt

alguem^
Dar com a pirta nos olhos a

algima couja^ (metaph.)
Dar priffdy

Dar tregoas^ (metaph.)
Efta travejfa vai dar a ria

larga,
Dei no penjaminio dt^ &c.
Ouem me air a cjtdr em caja !
lia$fabt aonde hade dar com

a caiica^
IJlo vos na dt dar na cattfa^

Dar com a calrifapillas pa»
redest

To ^ for G0ift fiite.

To beat one hunify.

To walk a tom.

To caft an eye on.

To obtain, or coofpafe dM's

wi(b.
Teii^b.
To give hearing*
To upbraid, to Oift in ilia

teeth.
Give hither.
I was uken with a Mpn^
To employ one, to m him ^

work, to fet him upon fome

hafincfs.
To ftrike.
The 'Clock ftr?ke».
To give up the ghoft, to die.
To caft one*is felt into a place,

or to go to a place.
To fuckle.
To Ibangle,
To cry out, to hawl.
The fun (hfties in one^s

eyes.
To debate, or contet^d.
To fall upon the ground.
To hear rruit.
To (hake hands-
To (hut the door upon one.

To flight, to d'cfpifc a th^g.

To prcfs, or haflen.

To refpite,togivc fome refpjte

This lane ftrikes, of goes into

the broad ftreet.
It came into my head to^&c.
How fain would 1 bfc at home I
He docs not kuQW.which way

to turn hirafelf.
The mifchiaf will light upon

your own head. . , "
To beat one'i iie«a ligaina

the wall.

U2Q

PORTUGUESE

Dfl^r^se^ a p^ftidif^ or lang^r.

se fid partido aeaiguem,
Ddrfialdvra^
i)ar hfima satva^

Dar fiador^
U^ar priruipio^ Of Jim^
Dar cSnta^ ,
Dar-sc ao estudo^
Dar em que/aildr^

Dar cn^rdda^.

Dar cdusdy

Dar em (jue entendir^

Dar de behir,

Dar couceSy

Dar hum coscorrdo^,

Dar pancadas^

^Dar murrast

Dar murra^a^^ '

i)0r ofdro a^alguim dedlgu-

)na cousa^
Darhuma estocAda^
Dar OS bins dias^
Dar a.guardar^
,Dard cSsia,
Dar com diguem^

Dar em algucm^

Dar catia^,

Dar sobre o inimigo^

Dar OS parabfm^

Dar OS pdrabins a alguem

iiAsia chf^gada^
Dot 'a WU& aiuddndfy^
Dar dtstolhit^
Dar enfddo a'dlguem^
jPar no alvo^
Dar fos costas^^

Dar pirte ii i%m ne*gSti&^

To fide with one, to be for

him.'
To promifc. ^

To give a volley of fliot, or

to make a difcharge of

guns in honour of fbme

perfons of quality^
To bail.

To begin, or end.
To give an account.
To apply orte's fetf to fludy.
To make one fpeak, to' give

an occaflon to be talked 6t
To give "ai'cers to^
To give caiife.

To vex one fadly, to trouble
' one*

To give drink.
To kick.

To give a box on the ear.
To beat with a cudgel.
To cuE

To butt, as rams do.
To fmell out a matter.

To give a thru ft.

To bid one gopd-tttorrow.

To give in Keej|[ing.

To run a-groUnd:

To meet with one by chance,

to light upon a perfon.
To ftrike one, aljo to accufe

one.
To deal, or give the cards.
To fall upon the eneniy.
To congratulate.
To bid one welcome.

To give a helping hand. "

To let »ne take his choice.

To moleftone. '

To hit the mark.

To run away, to betake on€*s

felf to flight.
To impart a hufincfs.

Dar

G R A M M A R.

2(21

•

Dar peU$ amor dc Deos^
Dar hduajirra^
Dar hima^Slta em redoi^do^
Dar kHrna vijla de, olhos^
Daralcdnce ad quejt dtxija^

Dar fuspiroSj

Dar duvidoSy \

DaremrSflOy

Ddciy I '

Diu^me kitma doty
Dar qiitfaxir a alguim-y or
occupar algaem^

Dar koraSy

relogio dd horas^

Dar a alma a Deos,

Dar comsigo em algumaparte,

Dar leitfy
Dar garrote^
' Dar ^izes,
OJ'ol da nos olhos,

Dar razoenSy
Daf comsigo tio chao,
- Darfrito,
Dar as maSsi
Dar com a porta na cdra de

alguemy
Dar com a porta nos olhos a

algima cSufa^ (metaph.)
Darprijfd,

Dar tregoas^ (metaph.)
Effia travejfa vai dar a rHa

larga,
Dei no penjamento de^ &c
Quejn me air a tjidr em caja !
liaBfahe aondeha de dar com,

a cabica^
Ifio vos na de dar na cabega^

Dar com a calrecapellas pa*
rtdesy

To giTC for God^ Cike.

To beat one foundly. - -

To walk a tarn.

To caft an eye on.

To obtain, or coin|)afs one's

wifti.
Tofigh.

*ro give hearing*
To upbraid, to caft in tht

teeth.
Give hither.
I was taken with a psgnw
To employ one, to fet him iit

work, tQ fet him upon foipe

bufinefs. /

To ffrike.
The clock, ftrikes.
To give up the choft, to die.
To caft one'is felt into a place,

^r^o goto a place.
To fuckle.
To ftrangle.
To cry out, to bawl.
The fun Ihrhes in one^s

eyes.
To debate, or contend.
To fall upon the ground.
To bear fruit.
To (hake hand«-
To fliut the door upon onj?.

To flight, to defpife a thing.

To prefs, ^r haften.

To refpite,togive fome refpjte

This lane ftrikes, c^f goes into

the broad fireet.
It came into my head^o,S?r.
How fain would \ be at home !
He does not koQ^.wbic}^ way
, tQ turn hirafelf.
The.mifchief will ^iffht upon

your own head. ' "
To l>t»t one's lieiS' a^inft

the wall.

Dar

224

P Q R T U G U E S E

A iifficuldide ejld em, &c.
Efiar par alguem,

E/ldr por^ or cm lugdr dt^ (ffc.
E!IU ejldva na altura do Ca-

to de Boa Efperdnfa^
Eu naiquero ejldr asrazoens

comvSfco^
Efld qudnto quizercs^
Aonat eftdis de caja ?
EJiarii pillo que dijferapef^

Joa que for de vojfo mayor

itgrddo\
Nao podemos efidr por ijfo^
Nab quero efidr pella vojfa

fentincay
Cimo ejta vm"f How do you do, fir.

Esiar, joined with the infinitive of a verb and the
particle para, fignifi^s to be ready, or about doing a
thing, which has always reference to the fignification
of the verb; as.

The difficulty c6o(ifittfi,^<r«
To ftand for one^to be of hit
. fide.

To ftand for, or fignify.
He flood off the Cape Df

Good Hope.
I won't ftand, ^r difpute, with

you.
Stay as long as you pleafe.
Where do you live ?
ril refer it to whom jrou

pleafe.

We can't ftand to that.

I won't uke yotir judgment.

Esiou para ir^

Estoupara comprdr hum ca-

vdllo^ '
EsTSu para fazarme^
E'sta aya estd para cahir,
Esiou para dizer^
Nao estd no miu podir^
Estdr co^ a hoc a aberta (mc*

taph.)
Estir de regiminto^
Estarjiado em dlguitH^

Estdr noJUndo^
Esiir dejronte^
Estdr em compttincia^
Estdr ao limcp .

Estdr de ISnge^
Estar ao ar^
JEstdr dlto^

Estit a mftS direifa 4^ dl*

I am going, I am ready to op.
I am about buying a Horfe

I am going to be married.

This houfe is ready to fall.

I dare fay.

It is not in my power.

To fiare, to look, to hearken

attentively.
To keep to a diet.
To truft to, to rely ^r depciui

upon one.
To lie at the bottom.
To lie over-againft.
To ftand in competition*
To ftand by the fire.
To ftand at a di^ance. /

To ftand in the air.
Tq ftand high, or in a high

place.
To be at one's jjght hand» to

have the firil pbccev

. * ElU

G R A MM A R. i»5

Elle iftiu^ em pertgo Je ufo" He vas like to be clrownedL

JNi6 efidr no cdfo Je^ &c. Not to be aUe, or in the cafii

of, &c.
Efiit.a irian dt alguim^ , To beat one's dirpofal.
M^ na6 eftdnos tirmot^ That is not right, it won't do.

/roS tjliu no cif9, I don't underftand the cafe.

EJlar as razoens^ To contend, to ftrive, or

quarrel. ^ .

Eftdrtem com ilgutm^ To be in favour irkh one, t^

live in friendAip with faiffi.
Efidr Bern, . To be well, to beat one's eafc.

Bern aviido tflariaiu^ft^ &c. Ic would be very bad fcH* fne^

indeed, if, £?r.
EJldr em Qonciito dt himtm To be looked upoB as an

honrdd^^ honeft man.

Eftdr nafi^ To believe, to &ink, or fiip-

pofc.
Eftdr depiffi^ Topofleft^tohavethepofleT-

nonpf a thing. .
JDeixdi eftdr iffo^ Let that alone.

EJidr tmfi^ To be in one's riAt wItt.

Eftdr Jir^ de Ji^ To be outt)f one s vrits.

Deixaivos eftdr ( a fort of 1*11 be revenged on you, jgu
threatening.) IhaU pay for it.

We have already obfervcd the difierence between
ffyr and ejar. See page 55.

Of the different Signification of hzer and ftazfyr ic.

Fa:i^ir fignifies to do, to make^to create y alio tofm$
ef materials ; alfo tofeign^ to feem^ to make as if.

Eilefiz. sue nac o Mfia, He made as if he did not Ssr H*

I Ea%er humafaude. To drink, 0r to toaft a health.

E'lle the fez cort&r a cabiga^ He caufed his head to be out

oflF.
Tajier pi atrdz (metaph.) To fall, or draw back, to give

ground ; alfo jrield, to lub-
mit. ^ ^.

Que tindes Hfis quefa^ com Whgx have you to do with it?
ifto. or what is that to you ?

Q Fa«itT

326 PORTUGUESE

Fa%er brio it algCtrfia coufa^

Faxirjim ao dtzijo^ ■
Fazir por alguma coufa^

F&^o por ijfo^ X

FcL%ir ao negocio^ kx ao cdfo^

Fazir efmolas^

Fa%ir gojio^

Fazir gojio^

Fazir o gofio^ or a vontade

a dlguenit
Fazir pdrallilo^
Fazir de comir^
Fazir fumot
fazir auzintt a diguim^
Fqzfrio^
Fazir ginte^
Fazir em pedagos^
Fazir zombaria de dlgutmt

Naofafdis cdfo dijfo^

Fazir agodda^

FJio mefaz vir a dgoa d bo'

ca.
Fazir dlio^
Fazir cdfa (in playing at

back|^mtnon.}
Fazir a cia^
Fazir cdras^
"Fazir enridos^

, • Fazir carrdncds^
Jtazir c&Jo^

Fazir de tripas coragaOf
Fazir mHito cdfo de alguma

coufa^
Naifdfo cdfo dille,
fazirfejia^
f^xir A6ma Jijia^

To make a pride of a thih^

totako gtoryin it.
To faiisfy one's defire, or

longing.
To take pains, to endeavour,

to labour to a certain pur-

pofe, to work for a certain

end.
I endeavour after it.
To come to the purpofe.
To give alms.
To fpend.

To like, to be pleafed with. .
To pleafe one, to comply

with one's deGre. '
To parallel, to compare^
To cook.
To fmoak. -
To believe one abfenc.
It is cold.

To raife men, foldiers.
To pull into pieces.
To mock, or to laugh ait a

pcrfon. *
Do not mind that. -
To ta£e in frefh water.
This makes my teeth^ or

mouth, water.
To halt in a march.
To put two men on the fame

point.
To get fupper ready.
To make mouths.
To form a fecret defigM

againft another. V

To pout.
To make account of, or

efteeni.
To make one's utmoft efiForts.
To make great account of a

thing, to make much of it.
I don't niind him.
To endear, to fondle.
To give an entertainment, to

feaft.

Faxir

GRAMMAR.

Fazir as vezes dt dlguim^
. Fazir irapdfas^ .

227

Fazir lugdr.^
Fazer merce^

To make any bufincfs for'

another.
To chicane^ to civil, to ufc

tricks.
To make room.
To grant a favour.

Faxir oupidos demtncadof^ To make as if one. were deaf.

To bebufy.
To ufe excrcife.

Tir cue fazir ^

Faxtr excrctclOy

Fa%ir exCfcicio (a military To exercife.

word.)
Os foldddos tjlab Ja%^ndo The foldiers exercife.

txtrxUxo^
Qucfazeis hqui?
Fa%ir hum ve/iido,
Fazir kuma liy^ hum difcur- To make a law, a^peech.

' Fazir ffutrra^

What make you here ?
To make a fuit of clothei •

To make war.

Fa%irfabir algdma coufa a To makeoiie acquainted with

dlguim^
Fazir tnraivtcir dlguim^
Fazir hdma conta,
Fa^er conta^

a thing.
To make one mad.
To call up an account.
To intend, or to propofe.

EHU fazia hUtma conta^ efa» He was much diiappointed.
AiO'lhe Sutra ^

Fazir conias com dlguim^ ^
. 1^0 ndo mefaz ndda^

To fettle the accounts with

one.
It makes nothing to me, that

does not concern me.
To make a iland* v
To make a fool of one. *

Favxr pdufa^

Fazir dc dlguefh tolo^

Fi^xif dinkiiro dt alg'dma To make money of a thing,

cSufa^ to fell it.

Tornar a fazir ^ To make again.

fazir a ra%ao. To pledge one.

TJrr qut fazir com alguim^ To deal with one, or to have

to do with one.

' Fazir a dlguipi hum gilvdz To mark one in the face.

' F/i%ir hSnra^
laz^fi.:

Faz^rfiric^

To honour. •

To make known, to teftKy,

to witnefs.
To fortify, or ftrengthen*

Faxh

tt«

it26

PORTUGUESE

Fazir mtttfaS,

'Fazen mal^

Fazir de alguem o fue hUma

pessSa qucr^ •
Tazir hima apista^
Fax vinto^
Fat'hojt outo dias,

Tazer vida com dlguim^
Fazer a sua vontdde^
Fazir o passively

Naojariis ndda com tsso,
Nctojafdis fhdis assifh^
Se torndrdes a fazir assin^
Dezijo qu cjd^d a 54iajortkna^
Cusiou-'me muito afazilloviry

Fazir a dutremopiefuizird''

mos que dutrem Tipsjitisse

a niSf
Naotinho qu$ fazir doin isso^
Fazir o que mguim mdnday
Paz de mm o que vos pa-

recircy
Fatlr humgrdnde estrondo,
E'llefdi que fez tudonaquelle

negi€i&9
Qfufariis hdje f

'FMir siuciUrs^^

Fa%ir hdrnd hSa cosa^
Fazir a bdria^ '
^Fazir a cdma^
FiaS sii que Iheftiniry
Fazir grdnde mjgkio^
Fazir seu officio^
Fazcr profissd6j
Tddps pfatiaS fUSrh^

FmSr W-,

To ibtentioii*

To huru

To difpofe of one.

To lay a wager.
The wind blowt^
This day fe^nnigfat, «r a week

ago.
To cohabit, ^rdwelltogethet.
To do as one pliafai.
To dp one's beft, or endea-

vour« to do one's utmoft.
You will do no good in it.
Do fo no more.
If ever you do lb agdiin.
I wiib he may do well.
I had much to do to get him

to come. .
To do by others as yoli would

be done by.

I have nothing to do with h*

To do as one is bid.

Do with me at you (hall thiift

fit.
To mike a great lioife.
He was , the do-all in that

bufinefs.
What will you do to-day ? or

how do you employ yout-

felf to-day.
To finifli its courfe at a ibr

does.
To raife, to fetup one's fotuly
To (have.
To make the bed^
I can't help it.
To drive a grwt trade.
To exercife, or ditfclMr^.
Toprofefs..
They fgave out thiit lie 'wlis

dead.
To call, or fend 'fbr.

Faz€r

GRAMMAR.

92t

Fsi%ir entrdtt ou ^Mr ah

guSm^ •
I'sto naSfaz ndda,
NaS sHauefazerdisso^
Ja naS ienheau^Joitr com ilU '
Fazir hum livro^
Fazir anUzitle com al^ucm,

Faxcr cximplo em dlguem^ or
CAStigdlla para dar exem^

Faster hUma cousa muito ao
destntendido^

' Fazer das silas^

Ulte semprc cstdfatindo das

sHas,
Fazer jfoscaSf

Fazer depessoa^
Fazir jurdr alguSm,

•' Fazer' saliar, or vodr pellos
ares,
Fazir tSa vezinhdnfa,

Fazer lenha,
.F$izir a rSnda^
Fastlr dividas^

Fdz lua,
Fazer violencia,
F^zir^e ao trahdlho^

Fazer -se ttlo,
Fazir-se vilho^

Fazer 'Sejiioy
FoMr^se soberho,
Fa^^se idrdiy

' To call in, or ^nu to bid one
come in, or ouu

It is no matter.

I have no need of it.

I have done with him.

To write a book.

Tq mal^q friendlbiR» |o get
into friendfliip with bne.

To ipake one a public exam-
ple.

To do a thing very covertly,
fo tliat people can't appre-
hend that it is done on fet
purpofe, and with adefign.

To play the fool, to dodge,
to play tricks.

He is always playing his fool-
ish tricks. ^

To bully, to provoke, to ex-
cite by wordSi or actions 6i
contempt ; alio to elude, or
deceive by falfe (how.

To behave ccoirageoofly.

To ten46r the oaths to one,
to put one to his oaths.

To blow up.

To keep fair with one*$

neighbours.
To fell wood.
To walk the rounds*
' To rnn in debt, Uf contract

debt|».
The moon ftines.
To offer violence.
To inure one's felf to hard-

(hips.
To play the ninny.
To grow old, or to grow is

years.
To grow ugly.
To grow proud.
It grows late.
Q 8 Fazir

«30

P O R T U G U E S E

Fazh'/e fignifies 'alfo tofeign^ to preten^y tofeeniy U
make as If.

FaZ'fe mSuco^

He won't bear.

The different Signijicalions of th and ter-se.

Ter.quefazer^ ,
Ter odiot
Ter por cO flume ^
' Ter algu^m per ignordntt^
Tercuidado dty
Tetjcuidados^

Ter fajiio,

' Ter dnimo^
Ter boafdma^
Ter ccura d*ago^
Ter necejfidade^
Terprejfa^
TermuitosfiinKK^
Tergrdnde prefumpgao^

Ter razao,
Nad ter razao^
Ter algiima coufa debdxo da
lingua^

To be bufy.

To ha(e.

To be wont.

To believe one ignorant.

To be careful of.

To be full of care, or ibouglit-

ful.
To loath, to fee food wish

diaike.
To have courage.
To be well fpoken of.
To have a brazen face.
To be in want.
To be in hafle.
To be very proud.
To prefunie much on one'i

felf.
To be in the right.
To be in the wrong. *

.To have a thing at one's

tongue's end. ^

Ter alguma c6ufa na p6nta da lingua^ >ye fay, to
have a thing at one's fingers entls, to have it perfect.
Theyalfo {zTj^fabtr alguma cdufa nas pdulas dos didps-,
which exactly anfwers to our' Englifli phrafe.

Terfeifoensjeiiiceiras,

Ter mdfdma^

Ter ciumeSt

Ter m^yos,

Ter no penfamento^

Ter obrigafdor

Ter medo^

Tcrra%aQ^ e m&is que razao ,

To have a taking look.

To be ill fpoken of.

To be jealous of.

To be able, or have means. ^

To bear in mind.

To be obliged.

To be fearful.

To have reafon, to fpare.

Hue

G R A M M A R.

231

Hue tiwdes pis comi^o f
Ter carruagem ( criados^
Ter a ilgu^mfuft^nfo^
Himen que tem boafeifao^

Ter m&fa franca.

Terfridt

T^r as ciflas quintes com alf

guem, ^
• Ter for iim,
TennO'O por doudo,
Ter maS najud refolucdo,
Ter com que,
Nao tendes' de que vos quci

Jcdr,
Nao tSndes que, &c.

•
lyto nao tem ndda quefaz^r^

com que eu dtgo$
Ter enire maos,

.'Tenho ijjo por cirto, "
Ir ttr comdiguim,^
Venho ter comvm^* para fab er
comopdffa afenhorajultd'

Jr ter a algim lugdr,
" EJia rua vii ter ao mercado^

Ter ilgu^mporjiy

T^mos por nos a autkoridadt
dos maisprud^ntes,
' Ter patafi,

Ter em mdito,
Terempouco,
Ser tido em boa cSntqi

Ter mao,

Ter.maS falguma c6uja.

What is that to you ? •
To keep a coadi and fcrvanii*
To hold one' in fuTpence.
A man of good addrefs, a^po«;

lite man.
To keep- open table, to keep

a table where a man may

come without bidding.
To be cold.
To be backed, or fupported,

by one.
To approve of, or confent*
I take htm to be mad.
To be ftill in one mind.
To have wherewith.
You have no reafdn of com-

plaint.
It i^ ufelefs, ^rit will be to no

purpofe for you to, 0r.
That is nothing to the pur-

pofe.
To have in hand, or in one's

pofleffion.
I hold that for a certainty; v
To addrefs. one's felf to one.
I addrefs, or apply myfelf to

you to know how mifs such

a one does.
To go to a place.
This ftreet Jlrikes, or goes

into the market.
To befupponed, or prote6led

by one.
We have the wifeft men of

our fide, or of our opinion.
To think, or imagine, to

reckon.
To fet much by.
To value but little.
To be efieemed, regarded, or

valued, to be. in great

efteem.
To hold ^r keep in; to reftrain.
To bear up, to fupport, to

prop, to keep up, to holdup.
Q4 AiO'

\

fiftf

P O R T U G U £ S ?: '

Atoms Ibife fticl^ tc^gidier*

Atomos\qu€ i/tm mai hunsnas
4utrQs^
eidia nuAf or Um wuiit

* f
'Seempe^ -

, Ttr*s€,bcm a ^mtdlU^
Tcr^sc com diguem.

Nao me p&ff'o tercom rlso^
Naisep^deUff que naojille,'

Hold, ftop«

To coDiaku .- .

To fiand, to fiaad up.

To fit faft, or wcU, on borfa*

back.
To keep at home.
To hold out, to refifti iH^ ftaod

agakift one, to cope w^

one, to oppofe, or refift

him.
I can't forbear laughing.
He can't' forbear fp^ing*

Tie different Significations of quer^r.

Querh fignifies to willy to be willing, and to if-
lieve; as.

l^uirem alguns,

^jucrer,bem^ .

^uerer mal^
Antes guerer,
Qjueira Deos^ .

Mas quero que assim seja,
Qjueqiter dizeraqucllehomem?
Que quer dizir tsto f

■ I'sto quer ditir que^ G?c.
Eu quero absolutamente {jue^
Eu assim o quiro^
Elle quer que vis obedefais^
Nad quero,
Elle ofard qudndo quiver,

Elle quer partir amankaa,

malque eu Ae quero me,
venia a mim^

Some believe.

To love.

To hate.

To have ratber.

God grant it, God fend i

may be To.
I grant it, fuppofe it were fo.
What does that man mean ?
What means this ? what*«tbe

meaning of that?
The meanmg is that, &c.
I pofuively rcfolve that, &c.
I'll have it fo.
He will have you obey.
1 will not, I won't.
He will do it when he pleafei^

or when be has a mind to it.
He intends, or has a mind, to

fet out to-morrow.
I wifli hina no n^ore barm

than I do myfelf.

Havir; to have.

Tukasdekir^ Youmuftgo.

XV/<f h€ 4e wirk^y He is to come to day.

Se

GRAMMAR.

m

Se iu howvir de kir.
Mndrnqme ijfo mt kowvijt de

cuftar a vida^
M'Ueefid todo ni^ tkadt tit

Jbufiis vis di ejldr em cdja^
JSu h£i de Uekdrme Id^
if lie k4i de sir enforcido^
£m kit de receier dinkeir^f
Vis ke que haviisffe jugur^
^^dbf^i/lo ke^uevis kawUde

^ Haver porbem^
Be»et for mdl,
Que ka defer ^
jtifuillo nunca ka-defer^
tJuhei defer a cdu/a dafua

morte^ ou ruink^
Para kaver defalldr^ ouvify

&c.
Due kd defer de tnim f
Ravirfilhos^

9

Uvros do dive^ ekade kavtr^

Bavir miftir.

lid miftir apreffdrfe^

If I (ball be obliged t<ii go.
Though I were . to loife my

lifeTor't.
He is all naked, he muft

needs be. ytr^ coldt
Sbslli you be at home ?
I muft be there.
He is to be hanged*
I am to receive money.
You are to play.
You (boul,d do that.

To take in ^ood part.

To take.in ill part.

That is to be hereafter.

That will never be.

I ihall be the death, or ruin

of him.
In order to fpeak, hear, &c«

What is to become of me.

To beget, to become the fa-
ther of children.

Books of debtor and creditor.

To want.

It IS neceflary to hafle, $r to
make hafte.

HovStj when itnpcrfonal, is rendered into Englifh
by the verb lo ie, preceded by ikere 5 as.

Hi kimems iaS mmlvddos^

Hanfiu kjUnMi molkir^

Hi aigins b^ns e outrosmaes

*

Hd muitas cdfai^

Hi ai^dvM, coufa de nSvo f

Hi mdis ke k6ma kka^

Hd mdito tempo^

If d per to. dekdma kdrm que,

elle fakio^
Ha kum dnn^t

There is, <>r there are.
.. There arc men fo wickeS.
There was a woaum.
There are fome good, and

fpme bad.
There are feveral houfes.
Is tiaere any new« ?
It is above an hour fince.
Long iince^
It is almoft an bour fiooe be

west out.
Ayc?T«fo. ,

Ha

234

PORTUGUfeSE

Ha htio di'aSt

Hd per to de so legoas daqui

Idj
Hai kd^
JUIU cuida que naS hd mats

que purgdr^

Haver fe^s. r.

E'lU fdhr romo ff hd- df ha-
ve f , <>' e'ujdbt cpmo ha de
haver.Je^

Ellt h&uvt'fe de maniira que,
fee.

Eight days ago« '

It is near upon . to leagues
thither.

There is not.

He believes that purginris
all in all, 0r that purgiM
is the only remedy, in fnco
a cafe. ^

To carry, to behave one's
self.

He k nows ^ bow to bebave
himfelf.

4

He behaved himfelf in fuch
a manner that. &c.

N. B. . When this verb is ufed iniperrohally^-it is
always followed by the particle de ; as,

Ha-Je de mi//er dinheiro. Money is wanted.

Ha-Je dtfazer^ ou d^%er iflo^ This muft be done, or faid, •

Ha-fe dejazer que elle qui- People muft do what he

zer, I pleafes.

. Hiry a neuter and irregular verb, to go^ to walk, t9
march ; alfo, to grow, to reach any ejiate gradualfyf
to ^e going.

Hir por mar epor terra,
CSmo vao os vojfos negocivs ?,
Tudojudi bent,
Asfuas coufas vaSmuifo mat.

Hir a mdo,

Hir pajfdndo,
' Hir anddndo.

Hir anddndo, or fajfdndo.

Que vii de novo f
Que v6i nifto ? . or onde vdi
(Jloa dar comfigOsf

To travel by fea and land.
How go 3'our concerns ?
All is well, all goes well.
Things go very ill (cm: very

hard) with him.
To hinder, to obftruct, to

obviate.
To grow out of faihion or ufe.
To go on or forward, to keep

or hold on his way ; .ayo

to proceed, to continue

on, to profecute.
To fliift, to pafs life n^

quite well, to live thou^

with diflficulty.
Is there any thing ncw_?
What of all this ?

. ^ • .

Hir

GRAMMAR.

S35

Hir debdxa^

Mir fartf^

Quant0 mats vim^s para a

primavirai mais comprU

dos /fl6 OS dias,
Hir dt mal para peor^
Sir di&nte^
Bir por didnU,
Hir ao.encSntro,

Hir e vir,

Nai fafo mais d^ que hir ^
• voltdr^
Iffo ja la vdif
Ezlo Id vdi^
Eilo vdi^ .
Que vos parice daquilla moL

hir f etlo vaijlla nao hefia^

« -I

Ltio vdi^filga queajfimjeja^
Co mo as coufas agora vao^

Por que parte ides^
Digs vd comvofco^

' Hirdrodadomundo^
' Hir com dlguem,

E'fia irave^a vdi ter i rua
Idrga,^
' Eu irei ver de caminho^

#

To come by the VrorlL

To approach, to go near. •

The nearer the .fpring, the

longer the days.

To grow worfe and worfe.

To go before.

To go on, or forward.

To go to meet.

To fink, or fall to the hot- '

torn.
To go to and fro, to go and

come.
I will not ftay, Khali be back

prefently.N
'Tis a thing pad and done.
There he goes.
So fo, pretty well.
How do you like that wo*
' man ? She is fo fo, flie

may pafs.
Well, well, I am glad oa't
As things go now, as the

world goes.
Which way d'ye go ?
The Lord of heaven go with

you. :
To go about the world.
To go along with one.
This lane goes into the broad

ftreet.
I will call upon liim as I go

alcng.
Hir continudndo ofeucaminko To go along.
Hirfora do feu caminho^ To go out of one's way.

Hir hum de huma bdnda^ e

Sutro da Sutra^
Hir para traz,
Hir detrazy
Hir atrdz de digue m^
Hir em alcdnce de digue nt^

Hir bufcdr^
Hir para dentnt^
Hir para Jo ra^

To go af under.

To go backward.

To go behind.

To purfue, to go after one.

To go after one, in order to

overtake him.
To go far, or fetch.
To go in.
To go out. •

Hir

236

PORTUGUESE

■ \

Hir pere^rindndo^
Hirfazirhuma embaixida^
Hir ver^ cantar^ &c.
VdmoSf

Hirjaxir hum negocia,
Hir com a marf^
Hir par d par com dlguim^
Vdipara qudtro mifes que
eu aqut cheguei,

rdeempaz^

timpo vat ahanddndo,

Hir (at cards),

Hir-fe^ v. r. ,

I

Hir-Je a olha^ ou a panillai

Hir^i enfirmo^

A ^uarifma vai'Jt acaidndo^

Hir^fe,

Ndda Je vdi mats dtfrijfa

que tempo^
AquiUes monies v&i'fe eftcn^

dendo^
Hir-fe embSra^
Efper&i at^ que a cdlma/e va

embira,
Vdi'te embdra ; que ndijabes

engoddr agenie^
Hirrje de kima carta[zicdsi%)
Vai'Jefazendo tirde^
Va-Je ckegdndo a noite,
Vdi'Je chegdndo o timpo da

Vai^fe

-fe acabdndo o meu conju^
lado^
'Hir-fe efcapulindo^
Hir-Jc d maS,

To go a pilgrimage. "

To go on an cmbafljr.

To go^to fee,. to fing, &c.

Corae» come on*

To go upoii a bufinefs.

To go with the Ude*

To go cheek byjole with one.

It *i8 now goinff on four

months Gnce I came hi*

thcr.
Depart in peace.
The wekhcr grows mild.
To go, to lay. to fiake. to feu
To go, to go away, to go

one's way, to depa|t, aifo

to run, or leak.
Is for the pot to boil over.
Is for a iick man to die.
Lent draws to an end.
To flip, or pafs away (as

time.)
Nothing goes fader thaQ

time.
Thofe mountains extend; or

ilretch tb^mfelves^
To go away, alfo to be over.
Stay till the heat be over.

Away, or go, you know not

how to wheedle people.
To throw away a card.
It grows late.
The night draws on.
It grows iiear harvefi.

My confulfbip is almpft at

an end.
To fneak away.
To refrain, to fprbear, to ab*

ftain.

Hir-fe imperfonal; as, vai-fe, they goj ^i'/f»
they are gone ; Mr-Je U, they fhall go.

ScnMr^ cSm$ amg^^ fifamc

£u v0t pig0^ or pfctfoos^
Pifolke tm cortesia^
PtfoltU encartcidaminUi

Ptfdtke^brJavSr fo^, &c,
F.dcamt ajini%a^
Pc^oihe perdao^

GRAMMAR. s«7

Tq praj; -^

Dear fir, do me the favour.

I praj you.

I befe^chyou.

I intreat, or conjure, you to

doit.
I beg of V6utfaat, &t.
Do me the kindnefs.

1 beg your pardon.

Expreflions of Kindnefs.

-Minha vidd^

JAinha alma^

Meu amor^. '

Meu querido^ minha ^uerida,

Meu cordfao^

Hike do meu coragdot

Filha da minha dlma^

My life.

My dear foul.

My love.

My little darlingk

My d^ar love, my l0ve«

My dear child.

My little honey.

To ifliew Civilityj

Hgradifo a vfi^^
DSu a vm^ as agradecimintos^
Beijo 0s maZs de vm^t
Falo-fieicom tSdo o gofta^
Oom todo meu corafdo^
De miito boa vontade^
Veja vm"Jeop6Jfo/ervir'naU

g&ma cSusa^
Dtfponha vm'* como Ihepare^

cir dejle Jeu ciiado^
EftSu esperdndo pellas or-

-dens de t/m*,
Ja que vm** afsim ordina.
As or dens de vm"^
JFico muito obrigddo a xmf^
Qjuer vm" que eu/£fa algima

<oufa,
Semceremima,
Jfiaotemvm^ mdisquefaHar^
Fdfame a honra demepir
i aospSsdafnr\

I thank yoii.)

I ffive.yoQ thanks.

I kift your hand.

I will do it chcarfolly.

With stfl my heart.

Heartily, willingly.

See if it is in my power t#

fcrve you.
Do what you pleafe with

your fervant.
I wait Tor your commands.
Sjnce^you will have it fo.
At your ferrice.
I am very much obliged to
.' you.
Have you any thing to com-

maiidme.
Without ceremony.
You nci^ but to fpeak.
Prefent my reipects, crJtaty^

to my lady.

NaS

338

PORTUGUESE

Nt^ Jei como dgradedr a
vjif' tdtitos favSres,

Nao foa de comprim^ntos^
Detxemos eji^s comprim^fitos,

Iffo he mtlhor^

I know not how to make a
proper return for fo many
favours.

I am not for ceremonies.

Away with thefe ceremonies
^r compliments. *

That It the beft way.

To give tokens of AfBrmation, Confent, Belbfy

arid Refufal.

He verddde^

He ijfo verdade f

He muito verdade^

Para dizervos a vetddde^

Com efieito he ajfim^

Quern duvida dijfo ?

Nao ha dUvida nijfo^

Pareume quejim^ que nao^
. Apoflo quejim^

Apoflo que naS,

Cr^ame vm"?

Ella vm" zombdndo ?

fdlla vfn^ de veras ?

Fallo de veras^
. PSis^ ejtd feUo^

Pouco a poucx)^

Ijfo nao he verdddc^

NaS ha tal coufa^

He menttra,
' Efidva zombdndo,

Seja muto embira^
\^'ao quira^

It is true. ,

Is it true ?

It is but too true. >

To tell you the truth.

Really it is fo. '

liy ho doubts it ? ,

There is no doubt of it.

I think {o^ not.

I lay it is.

I lay it is not.

Do believe me ?

Don't you jeft ?

Are you in carnell ?

I am in earnefl ?

Well, let it be fo.

Softly, fair and foftly.

It is not true.

There is no fuch thing.

It is a lie.

I did but jeft.

Let it be fo.

I woa',t, I will not.

To confult.

Que fe ha defazir ? '

'^ue faremos ?

^ue Ihe parece a vrr£* que cu
fdfa?:
fittir remedio tern iJfo f
Fafdmos ajfim^
Fafdmos huma ccufa^
Sera melkSr que^
"Seria mdhir qme^

What is to be done ?

What ft all w« do ?

What do^ you advife mc to

do?
What remedy is tKere for it I
Let us do fo,«and fo.
Let us do one thing.
It will be better thaj.
It would be better that.

^ Efperai

GRAMMAR.

239

Esperai bum pouco,
Deixdinu comijfo^
Antes gutzera^,
Se ifo/ije comtgo,
Tudo ne b mifmoi -

Stay a little.

Let me alone.

I had rather.

Were I in your place. '

It is all one.

Of Eating arid Drinking.

TtnkojoMe,' '

Morro defame^

CSma xrm" alguma cousa^

Que quer vm'' comir f.

Quer vm'* comir mdis ?

TenhoJUe,

Ja matH afbme^

Tinho muita stde^

Morro defede,

beme 4e beb^r^

Viva VTif' miitos dnnos^

EH beberia hum copo de vinho

Pdis biba vm'\

Tenho bebido bajidnte^

Nao phjfo beber mdis^

Ja matH ajede^

I am hungry.
I am almoft ilarved..
Eat fomething. - "

What will you eat ? •
Will you eat any more ?
1 am dry, or thirfty.
I have no more flomach. ' .
I am very dry.
I am almofl dead with thirft.'
Give me feme drink.
I thank you.

I coul.d drink a glafs of wine*
Drink then.
I have drank enough.
I can drink no more.
I am no mpre thirfty, or my
thirft is quenched.

Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &c.

Donde vem vm^' ?
Para onde. vdi vm'^ f
Vinho de; vou para^ or <2,
Quer vm 'Jubir^ ou defcer f

E'ntre vm'\fa^a vm^,
Nao febula ifaqui,
Chigue-fe para mimy
Va-Je tm'\
Vem ca^

Efpire por mim^
Nao vU ta5 deprejfa^
Tire-Je df didntc dc mim^
Na&^metbque^
Ddxe eftdr ijjo,
EHou bem aqui^
Jtbra vm" a porUit

From whence do you come ?
Where do you go ?
I come from ; I am going to.
Will you come up, or comt

down ?
Come in in, go out.
Do not ftir from hence,
Come near to me.
Go your way, )3e gone.
Come hither.
Stay for me.
Do not go fo faft. «
Get you out of my way.
Do not touch me.
Let that alone,
I am well here.
Open the d«or. '

Fichi

240

PORTUGUESE

FSche a porta, •

J^ira, o\xJiche afanclhy

Vinha vm^ por sfutj
Pdjfe pot Id,
Qutprocuravtn!* f
Que perdio vm" ?

Shut the door.

Open the wtiMloyr, ^r fliUt

the .window.
Come this w^,
Pafs that way.
^ What do you look for ?
What have you loft ?

To wifli well to a Perfon.

Ceo vosgudrde.
Dios vos di boa fort^na^
Dezija-vcs tod9 o kem^

Diosvos ajide^
D^os vos per doe J
tdt com Vios^
Ate ver^nos,

^6m pToveitoJa^a a ^m**,

Heaven prefcrrc yon.
God fend yoa good luck,
I wi(h yoo ev«ry tbicg thj^

is good.
Godallift you.
God forgive you,
God be with you.
Till I fee you agai«»
Much good floay. do you.

To wifii ill.

didbo tt live. The devil take thee.

Maldfto sejas tu, A curfe on thee.

Vtti para os fuintos infirnos, Away, go to hell.

Faite enforcdr. Go a(nd be hanged.

Enforcddo sejas tu^ Would thou wert hanged.

To fwear.

Assim Dios me sdlve^

Arrebentadi seja iu^
Em conciencia.

As God fhall help me, ftfl

faveme.
May I bur ft.
In ray confcience.

To threate n and infult.

O'lha (jue te hei de dar,
Diixa-te eftar, or cala^te

que me has defagdr,
yiiroqut ti farei arrependir

disso.
Seme imfaddres^
Coitddo deti,
J^6ucas razoew-Sf or c6la issa

boca^
I^fbafta.

Take carc,i wiH l^eatibeeii.
Thou wilt pay it me.

I fwear thou ihalt repent <f
it. -

If you put me into a pcflib^.

Woe be to thee.

Hold your tongue, donH
fpeak to me. ••

It is enough, k if fufficient,

.To

Ct R A M M A R.

041

^

To mock» to blame, and to caff one names.

[tf^ bilofocinko !
Ittt caradcmono!

Trapacnro^

EmkufitirOf

Aiexeriqueiro^

Que belo/offiito.

FM6co,
I MarSto^
' Ma cajla^

TontOf

A/heirdo,

O the fine fnout !
What an apcV face ] .
A chicaner. .
\A cheat, an impofior.
A tale bearer, a tell-ule.
O the dull thing.
A knave.
A rogue, a rafc^.
Curled race.

Giddy-brains, bkLDderbuft.
A great beaft, a Uiick-lkull.

To admire.

Me pofsivil!

OGodI

Is it poflible I

QutmiertaimagtnddOfCnJOf Who would have thought.

believed, faid !
What a bead I

I don't wonder.

diioJ
\ut animal !

\ue maravilka ! or que laii- O flrange !
Idgre!
Nao me maravilho !

Coma pidefer ifiv ! or Cmo Ho,w can that be !
.. hepo/sivel!
Eis aautromo fdo as coufis So goes the wdrld 1
dine mindo I

To (hevsr Joy and Difpleafure.

\ue gSfta !
[utgfir%a!\
ategfia !
>ue contentaminto heo meu !

Sinto tjfo na dlma^

Slnio ^0 no corafaS,

(y que defgraga he a minha I

What plearure i

Wbiatglofyl

What joy !

How pleafed I am i

What happinefs I

I am forry for it.

That touthes my very (but

It pierces me to the heart.

O now unhappy am 1 1

R To

\'

242

FOR T U G U E S E

frontdume diflafirit !
im he quejetrata f
Olha maroto !
Que bella cortesia !
riao deveria tratdr comigo

dejlajorte^
Parece-te hem f
^ Aprinde^ peddfp d^dfno^
(yiha como me trata eji'e anu

Olhdi que velhaco he efte^
Que diabo tern ellefeito ?
rois^ axnda teimdis?

To affront me thus !
Do you deal thus ?
You rogue !
O what fine manners \
Thou oughtest not to treat
, me thus.

Doft thou think that it will ?
Learn, beaft as thou art.
See the brute, how he ufes

me. '
Do you behold that rafcah
What the devil has he done?
What, are you obftinate flill?

To call.

Ouve •!

O'nde efiSs ?

HUma patavra,

Diias palavras Jomtnte^

Hark !

Where art thou ?
A word. '

ril fpeak- but two words t» ^
ypu.

To (hew Uneafinefs, Trouble, an|3 Sorrow. '

Sinto or pefame^
Deixame^ '

PefO'te que me deixes,
Nao fne qnibres a cabif^^
Or a vdmos, deixdme^
Deixame^ vdi com Deos^
Vdite daqui, or vdite embora^
Vdi tratdr da tua vida,
Faite nd md hora^ OT vdite

cd' diabo ^ '

Nao mejdfas a cabica tdnta,
Jfd me tensdito ijfo hum cen-

to de vizes^

I am forry.
Let me be quiet.
Prithee get thee gone.
Do not break my bead.
Away, away.

Go, go, God be with yoo.
Get thee gone fromhencc^
,Go mind your own bufineff*
Go to the devil.

Do not make me giddy. -'
You have told it me a hoD-
dred times already.

To afk.

Que novas hdf
Que he i/io ? que hd ?

\ -

What news?

What is this, what is tbf
matter?

\

GRAMMAR.

24S

Cndt ides f
DSnde vindesf
Que quer dizer ?

De qutjirvt ?

^uevos paricef

^uem live tal atreviminto f

j^U€ dizem f (jueje diz ?

fOmo diz vra^ ?
Par que na8 me- rr/ponde ?

Where are you a-going ?
Whence come you ?
What do you mean ?
To what purpofe ?
What do you think ?
Who Is that has heen To bold ?
What do they fay ?
How do you fay ?
Why dori't you anfwcr ?

To forbid.

Ddxdi efldr ijfo^^
Nao toqueis,
Nao digdis nida^
Guardaivos,

Let that alone.
Do not touch.
Say not a word.
Have a care.

Of fpeaking, faying, doings &c.
Fdlfe vmf alto.

Fdlle vrnf* mdnfo^

Com quern Jd/fa vni^f

Fdlle »w" comigo ?

FalleJhe,

Fdlla vm" Portuguez f

O'ue diz vm" f

riad digo ndda^

Ella naS quer caldr-Je^

Ouvi dizer que

Afsim mo dt/serao^
Afsim. dfzem^
jsfsfm dizem iSdos^

Suem Iho dijfe a vwf ?
^iffemo Sr, A,
Pais elle he que Iho diJfe f
Pois ilia he que o dijje?
Quando o ouvio vm. dizer f
Di/fertti-mn hSje,
Uao pojfo cri'lo^
^ue aiz elle f
iue pes diJfe Hie f •
E'lle nao me dijse ndda^
Nai Iho diga vm.
E'u Iho ditei^
Nao diga nada^
Difse VM. aquillof

Speak loud.
Speak low.

Who do vou fpeak to ?
Do you (peak to me ?
Speak to him, ^r to her.
Do you fpeak. Portuguefe ?
What do you fay ?
I fay nothinff.

She will not hold her tongue.
1 was told that-*—-
I was told fo.
They fay fo.
Every one favs fo.
Who told it you?
Mr. A. told it nie.
Did he tell you fo ?
Did (he tell it?
When did you hear it ?
I heard it to day,
I can't believe \U
What does he fay ?
What did he fay to you ?
He faid nothing to me.
Do not tell him that,
ril tell him, or her of it.
Say not a word.
Did you fay that ?
R s Nai

844

PORTUGUESE

NtA disse,

Nao dtsst vm» assim t

\ue ejld vm.fdtindo f
2u£ tern vm.jiito ?
Naofd<^o nada^
Nai tinhojtito ndda^
Tern vm. acabddof
Que efid elkfazindo t

\uejaz elU ?

^ue quer, or gue ordina
Que Ihejdlta ?

vm.f

I did not fay it.
Did you not fay fo ?
What are you doing?
What have you done !
I do nothing.
I have done aotbing.
Have you doiic ?
What is he doing?
What does (be do ? .
What IS your pleafurc ?
What do you, want*?

Of underftanding or apprehending.

Entende^o^ or percibe-o vm*

hem?
Perceie vm^ o que elle dif^e ?

Percebe vm. o que ilk diz ?

Entind^me^itrpfrcibenu vm;?
Entindo a vm* muilo bem^
Nao entenxlo a vm.
Sabe vm. a lingua Poriu-

gueza ?
Nao ajet\

Tem^mt vm. fiercebido ?
ji^ora percebo^
Naofe percebe o que Hie dh^

Do you underftand-faim weU?

Did you ijinderfiand what he

faid?
Do. you underfiand what lie

fays ?
Do you underflshd me ?
I underfiand you very well*
I do not underfiand you.
Do you underfiand Portu-

guefe ? .
I do not underftand it. ''
Did you underftand me ?
Now I underftand you.
One cannot uoderuand what

he utters.
He fpeaks.like a ftammerec^

/

Par ice gdgo^

Of knowing, or having Knowledge of.

Sabe vm. if so ? ' Do you know that ?

NaS ofti, I dQ not tpow it.

Naojii nada dUso^ I knew nothing of it ?

Ella bem o fabia. She knew well of Jr.

Porvehtira napjabia Hie if so} Did he not know of it ?
Dimos que iu ofoubi/se^ Suppofe I knew it.

Bile naofaberi nada difso^ He (ball know nothing of it.
Elle nuncafSube ndda difio^ He never knew any thii|g

about this.
E'ufSube-o primiiro^ or antes I knew it before you.
que vm. ofoublfst^

Hi

GRAMMAR.

2H

Is it fo, or not ?
Not that I know of.

He ifto ussim ou naS f
Nad que iu saiba^

Of knowing or being acquainted with« forgetting*

and remembering.

Do you know hiio ?

Do you Icnow her ?

Do you know them ?.

I know him very welL

I do ju>t know them.

We do not know one another.

I know hi(p by iighu

I have heard of her*

He knew me very well.

Do you know me ?

Conhece'O ^m. ?
'Conkcce^a vm. ?
Conhicf^as vm. ?
ConkefO'O muUo iepif
JfaS OS conhego^ " -
Nis nap nos conhecimos^
Canheco-o de vifia^
Conhefo^a de nome^
E lie conheceo^me muxto iem^
Conhece-me vm. ?

Tenho'tneesquecido do stu nome I have forgot your name*
Tem-se vm. esquecido de'mim? Did you forget me ?

Docs flie know'.yoQ ?

Does the gentleman Juiow
you ?

It appears he doei not kivHr

me.
The gentleman knows me

well.
>He knows me np more.
I have the honour to be

kfiowp to him.
Do you remember that ?
I do not remember it.
I do remember it very well.

ntws eila?
Conkece Sr.. a vm, ?

Par ice que naS me conhece,

Sr. bem me conkece,

. ^

iElleja me naS conkece,
Tenno a k6nra deferjeu^con*

hecido,
Lembra'Se vm. disso ?
. Nao me lembro dUso,
JJmbrO'-me miito bem dUso,

Of Age, Life, Death, &c.

\ue idddt'tem vm. ?

\ue idade tern seu irmao ?

^enko vinte e cinco dnnos,
Tim vinte e dous dnnos,
Vm. tern mats dnnos do que.iup
(h$e idade terd vm. 7
ne vm. casado 7
Qudntas vezes tern vm. sido

casado 7
Qudnias molhhes tern ' vm*
iidoJt

How old are you ?

How old.isyour brother ?

I am five, and twenty.

He is twenty-two years old.

You are older than I.

How old mafyou.be ?

Are you married 7

How often have you been

married 7 .
How many wivet have yeu

had?

Tern

tie P 6 RTUGUESE

Tern vm. ainda piy^ e may ?

Miu pay m^rria^

Mtnka miy morrio^

Ha JSus annos que msu pay

Minha May casou outra ve%^
QudntosjilhQS tern ym. ?
Tenho quitro^
FilAos, oujilhas ?

Have you father and motlier

flill alive ?
My father is dead.
, My mother is dead*
My father has been dead thefe

two years.
My tno[her is married again.'
Howmany children have you?
I have fi^ur.
Sons or daughters?

Tenho humfilho^e ires filhas'i I have one fon and three

daughters.

Qudntos irmabs iem vm, ?

Nao tenho nenhim vivo^

Todos motreraSy

Todos havemos demorrert

How many brothers have

you ?
I have none alive. '
They are all dead.
We muft all die.

Que horas sdS ?
Sao sit

Of the word hora> as a Noun as well as an Interjecfiofu

Hira^ An hour, also a particular*

time.
Euejlareili^dfntrodehiima I will be there within an
' hora^ hour.

What's o'clock.

It is feven o'clock.

At what hour\^r time will

you be there ?
In due or good time, at the

time appointed.
Leifure hours.
The lad hour, or the dying

hour.
Every hour. ^

Hourly, every hour.
Half an hour.
A quarter of an hour.
An hour and a half.
About nine o'^clock.
An hour ago, or anhour (ince.
Beyond the hour, or very late.
In time.

To keep good hours.
To keep bad hours.
Dinner, or fupper time.
About dinner tim^.

site horas f
A q,ue hSras eftariis vis id f

As horas que for preciso,

Horas desoccupddas^

A tiltima hbra ou a hira da

morte^
Cada hora,
De hora em hora,
Meya Aora,
Hum quarto de hora^
Hima horae meya^
Phto das nive kSras,
Hd huma hSra^
For a de horas,
AhSras^

Reeolher-se a boas hiraSf
Recolher-sefSra de horas,
Hiras dejantdr ou de cehr,
Pirth das hiras dejantdr,

f

s

J

GRAMMAR.

247

AindAiJIiAs nd cima a ijias

hSras f
retorio da horas^
yd diraS Snze koras^
Ileiigio dt hira^
Muito a boas hiras^
A boas horas^

Na md hira^

Vdi tc na ma-hora^

Tdda a hora que^

A tSda a hora que.quizerdes^

Hbra^

Mother que an da para cida

hira^
Hiras defaxir orag^S,
Horas dt hir a igreja,
fforas de hir para a cdma^
\ H.ras dt comer ^
Jd nao /do horas^
Chegar a hora^
E/idr efperdndo 'pelta fHa

hora^
Nad ver a hora.

Si6 horas de^ &c.
"^ Horas caninicas^

Hiras,

As quarenta hiras,

CiSnta das horas,
^r$e de dividir o idmpo em
Mras,

Are you a-bed at this time of

the day ?

The clock firikes.

It (Iruck eleven o'clock.

Hoiir-glafs.

Elarly, betimes.

In ^ood time, in time, at the
time appointed.

In an ill hour, unluckily, un-
fortunately.

Go to the devil, go and be
hanged.

Whenfoever, at what- time
• foever.

At what time you will.

Time or hour of child-birth.

A woman near her time.

Prayer-time.

Cburch-time.

Bed-time.

Times of eating.

The time is p^fl, it is too late.

Is for a perion to die.

To wait for God's time.

To long, to defire earneftly,
to wiCi^ with eagernefs
continueid, with em, or de
before the thing defired.

It is time to, £?f .

The fet time for the clergy to
fay their oflBce ; alfo thofe
parts of the ofSce itfelf,
called Priw^, Tterce,Sixth,
None, &c.

Any little prayer book, but
particularly that in which
is the office of the Ble/sed
Virgin,

3o they call the fpace of three
days, in which the confe.
crated Hoft is expofed and
laid to public view.

Horography .account of hours

Uororaetry.

PORTUGUESE

As nHvens,
veniOt
A ckixfti.*
irovao^
rel&mpago^
Sardiva^
rayo^
A nev€^
Agedda^
carqmctc^
ervalha^

Nevoiiro^
tcrrimSie,
dHivic^
tatSr.

The clouds.

The wind*

The ram.

Thunder.

The lightning.

Hail.

The thunderbolt.

The fnowl

The froC, :

The ice.

The dew.

A fo^, orraiR,

A thick fog.

The earthquake*

The deluge^ or floo^

The hes^t.

The cold.

..♦

Do Timpo.

Odh.

A niiU^

Miyo dia^

Meya nSite^ *

A maniaa,

Defpiis do fkiyo dsd^

Huma hira^

Hum qudrtb de hira^

HUma meya hora^

Tres quartos de hora^

Hoje^

O'niem^

AmanhSa^

Antes d* entente

BepSis de amanhda^

Depots dejantir^

DepSis- de cia^

Himafemdna^

Hum mis^

Hum dnnOt

Diajdnto^

Dia de tnthalho,

nacer do fit^

Qper dojil.

^ »

Of the Time*

Jhe day

The night.

Noon.

Midnight.

The morning.

The afternoon.

An hour..

A quarter of an hour.

Half an hour.

Three-quarters of an hour. '

To-day. .;';

Yefterday.

To-morrow.

The day before yefterday; '

After to>morrow.

After dinner. -, i

After fupper. ^ \

A week.

A month.

A year.

A holy-day. '

A working day.

The futt-nfing.

The fun>fet«

Tempi

G R A M M A It

Taihir,

Affkcureirot

JoAyxiUa oujirvip de praia^

Praio^ guarJandtp^ fica^
gitfo^ colkir {tudo junto)

Jarro^

Huma bdcia^

Hum cipo^

Himagarrafa^

Hum0 ticu^

Caftifdl,

Vela,

Tt/ouras de e/pevildr,

ifunui sdiva,

Huma escudilia^
^ Cefto para por a paS.
, DpnzSlla^

Faqueiro,

Louga de Bdrro,

Loufa de ejiinko^

Acruei*fiamL

Suffar-bafin.

A tei of filver plate*

A coMrfe.

A cover.

The ewer.

A bafin*

A glafs. • .

Aboule-

A cup.-

A candleftkk.

A candle.

Snuffers*

A falver,

A p<Mrringer«
A bread-balket.. .
A duinb.waiter«
A cafe for knives.
Earcbjen ware.
Pewter*

Do Comer, e Beber.

Vdca,
Carniiro^
Vititia,
Cordeiro^
^ Gailinha,
Gdllo,
Peru^

AlmSndegas,
jantdr^
AlmSgOf
Via, ^
Merinda,
Confodda,

BanqueU,
Fime,
Side,
Fdftio,

Pa,

Of Eating and Drinking^

Beef. ^ ^

Mutfon.

Veah

Lamb.

Hen, a fowl.

Cock. ^

A turkey.

Force mestt balls.

The dinner.

Breakfaft.

Supper.

The afternoon's luncheon.

A liffht fupper, as upon a

fali-day.
An entertainment, a banfi[uet«
Hunger. "•

ThiiS.
A loathing.
Bread.
* A 4 P^5

PORTUGUESE

Pufificagdo^

Enirddo,

Quaria fcira da Cinzas^

A Quarijina^

Annunctafddf

As Qudtro ^emporas^

A Scmdnajantdy

Domngcjit Rdmos^

Qudrtajeira de Trevaf^

Quinlajeira de EndficnfaSf

Slflajiira da Paixdb^

Pdfcaa da Rf/urreyfda^

Ajfumpgdo dt N, o".

As Rdffafoens^oT LadainkaSf

Afctnjao^

Pentecifte^

Dta do Corpo de Dio$^
Dia de S, yoao,
Dta de S. Ptidro,
Dia de tSdos os Santos^
Dia dos Fxn&dos^
Dia de Sn Martinho,
Dia de Natal,
Vigilia^ or vifpera^

Da Igreja e Dignid^det £c*
clefi^fticas.

A ridve^

Zimborio^

Pindculo^

CorOf

Cape/ia,

EJIante^

Sacrijlia^

Campandrio^ oixturre dos si-
no s^
Si/iOf
Baddlo,

ffy/op^f _ .

^^nfeffionin&y

. \

The Purification.

The Carnival, or Shrovetide.

Afli Wednefday.

The Lent.

Lady Day in March*

The Ember Weeks-

The Holy Week.

Palm Sunday*.

Wednefday before Eaften

Maunday Thurfday, the laft

Thurfday in Lent.
Good Friday.
Eafter Day.
Lady Day in harvefl.
Rogation Week.
The Afcenfion.
The Pentecoft, or Whitfwh

tide.
-Corpus Chrifti Day.
Midfummer Day.
Lammas Day.
All Saints Day.
All Souls.
Martinmas.
Chriftmas Day.
The eve.

Of the Church and Ecclefiaf^
tical Dignities,

The aifle of the churchy

The dome.

Pinnacle.

The choir.

The chapel. "•

A reading defk, or chorifi'er'i

defk.
The veftry.
The belfry, or steeple.

The bell.

The clapper of the belK

The font. .

A fprihkler.

A confefiion feat..

TrttuM,

G A A At M A ft

Tribind,
Cemitiridf

Carneiro, .

Altar.

Frcniml.,

JPdllio^

Todlha do alUr.

Sobrepdliz^

pdpa^
Hum cardcdl^
Hum patriarch.
Hum arctbifpQ^
Hum bifpo^
Hum legddo^
Vice Itgado^
^ Hum fiinciOf
' Hum prelddo^
. Hum commendadSr^
Hum abbddc^
Hdma abbadfffdt
Hum priir.
Hum reitor^
Beneficiddo.

Frdde. or religiofo^

HumguMrdiidy
Hum definidor^
Hum provincial^
H%m gcril^
Hum vigdrio^
Hum vigdrio gerdl.
Hum dedS^
Hufkarcediigo^
DidconOt
Subdidcono^
Hum cSncgOf
Arciprejle^
HMm clirigo.
CupdM.

A tribune, or gallery.

A church*yara, a boiying-

place.
A cfaarneL
An altar.

An andpetidiaim ' .

A c,anopy.
The altar cloth.
A tniflal, a mafs^hook,
Aciflbck.
A furplice»
A fliort furplice, a bifhop't

furplice.
The pope.
A cardinal.
A patriarch.
An archbilhop.
A bilhop.
A IcH^ate.
A vice-legatt.
A nuncio.
A prelate.
A commandier.
An abbot.
An abbefs.
A pnor.
A re£lor.
Beneficed clergyman^ or4st^

cumbent.
A friar.

A fliaven. crown.
A guardian.
A definitor.
A provincial.
A general. *

A vicar.
A vicar-general.
A dean.
Archdeacon.
Deacon.
A fub-deacom
A canon.
Arch-prieft.
A prieft.
Acbaplaiiu
• A 8 IJum

PORT U G U E S E

Hum tJmMlir^ •
Hum pdrroco^
Beneficio simples^ .
Fretra^

HumprigadSr^
Sacrtfiad^ ox fdnctifiao^ -^
Mentne ds coro^

An almoner.

A curate.

Sineeiire»

A. iiufi.

A preacher, cr le&urer*

A lextoDy a veftry-keeper*.

A finging boy.

Nomes das couras que geral
m^nte fe comem.

Agoa,

Vinho^

CarnCf

Peixe^

Came coziJ-i^

Came afdda^

Hum bocido de pao.

Hum paftel^

HumajSpa^

Hum cildo^

Mmajalada^

Hum molkot

Fruia^
(hteijo^
manteiga^

Names of things mqft ufuully
eaietu

Bread.

Water. '

Wine.

Meat, or flefli.

FiOi.

Boiled meat.

Roall meat.

A mouthful of bread. .

A pye.

Soup.

Broth.

A failad. • <

Any kind of fauce to dip: in,

provoking appetite.
Fruit.
Cheefe.
Butter.

Do Servi9o de huma Mefa. 0/the Covering of the Table,

A me/ky
Huma cadetra^
A todlha da mifa^
Todlha de maos^
Hum guardandpo,
Hitmafica^
Hum gdrfo,
Hima colhir^
Hum prdto^
Humjaleiro^
€alheta do vinagre^
Galkita do taeitei ^

The table.

A chair.

The table cloth.

A towel. ,

A napkin.

A knife.

A fork.

A fpoon.

A plate.

A faltfeller.

A vinegar bottle, or cruet.

A cruet, or vial for oil. •

TaiAer^

AffkcuTiiro^
. JaAyxeUa oujirvip de praia^
Hima cnifrU^
Praio^ guarJandfi09 Jaca^
gmrfot cMir {tudo junto)
Jarro,
Hima bdcia^
Hum cip0^
Bimagarrafa^
Huma ticu^
CaJHfdl,

Tefouras de e/pevitdr,

iluma sdiva,

Huma escuddlia^
^ Ceftc Par a por a paS,
. DoinUlla,

Faqueiro,

Ldufa de Bdrro^

Liu fa de ^iinho^

CRAM MAR.

A croet'ftaiid.

Suffar-bafin*

A tei of filver. plate*

A coMrfe«

A cover.

The ewer.

A bafin.

A glafs. • .

AboiUe-
A cup.-
A candleftick.
A candle.
Snuffers.
A falver,

A pcMrringer-
A bread-balket.. ,
A dumb-waiter.
A cafe for knives.
Earcbien ware.
Pewcen

Do Comer, e Beber.

Vdca^
Carniiro^ .

rttitia,

CordeirOt

GaUinha^

Gdlioy

Peru^

Almondegas^

O jantdr^

AimSgOf

Via, ^

Merinda^

Confodda^

Banqucttt

Fime,

Side,

Fdftio,

Put,

Of Eating and Drinking.

Beef. *

Mutton.

Veal.

Lamb.

Hen, a fowl.

Cock.

A turkey.

Force mestt balls.

The dinner,

fireakfaft.

Supper.

The afternoon's luncheon.

A liffht fupper, as upon a

fali-day.
An entertainment, a banquet,
Hunger.
ThiiS.
A loathing.

•A4

?&?

P O RTUG U ESE

- \

Pdd/rc/io, or ]M milU^

PaSquinte^

PaS dc tSdAfatinha^

Pad branco^ or pd9 ah^,

Pai dt rdla^

PaS de cevdda^

Pdo dc centeo^

Pan dt avia^

Pao dt mxlho miudo^

Pat dt milho grdnde, ^ de

maiZf
pao itvtdo,
Pao a/mo^
BifciutOy
Jdigdlha depaoy
Fatta dt pad^
Cidta dtfiao,
Majfa^
ToTta^
Rofca^
Ejtofddo^
riambre^

Cdrnt affadafobft grilhas,
Cdrtit frila^

Picddof or carnt picdda^ .
y avail J or porco n^antiv^^^
PrtfuntOf
Porco^
CabritOi,
Toucinho^
Hum ISmbe^
MaSs dt carntiro^
Frtjfura^ or forgura^
Cachola dt porco ^
Linguigaj or lingoifa^
Chourigo dtjangut dtpSrco,

Fricajfe^

FigadOf

jJttt^ '.

Ndia^

Soro^'

Jttqutijii,

ppalhadi^^

New bread.

A hot loaf.

Cbminon br^iid; . ,«

White bread*

Rice.

Brown bread.

Barley bread. '

Rye bread*

Oaten bread.

Millet bread.

Indian corn bread*

Leavened breads

Unlevr^nfcd bread.

Bifcuit.

A crumb of br^ad.

A (lice of bread.

A cruft of bread*

Dough.

A urt.

Bread made like a rolL

Stewed meat.

Cold meat.

Broiled meat.

Fried meat*

Saufagemeat.

A wild boar.

Ham, gammon of bacoa.

Pork.

Kid.

Bacon.

A loin»

Sbeep^s trotters.

A pluck.

A pig's head.

A faufage. .

Black-pudding.

A thick and ihort raufagt* \

A fricaffee.

Liver.

Milk.

Cream,

Whey.

A kind of new cfaeefe*

Curdted milk.

\.

R AMM A R.

ivo^

Gemma do &vo^
• Cidra do ovo^

Sf^oJreftOi
- ovo motley

&U0 dUro^

ivo ajfddo^

ovo gall ado ^

ivos redes^

ivos ejcalfidosy
ovosfrttoSy
ivos mexidos^ ejrfios^
BoiinholOy
ivas de peixe^
Do^es^
Conjeitos^
' Marmeliddi

OqucfeA'ffa.

Hum capad^
Hitmajrdnga^
Hum frdngo^
PSmboSy
Pimbo trocdx,

Qallinhilay

iluma tfpicie degallinkilape'
quena a qual os Cafielkdnos
chamdo gallinita ciega^

Perdiz,

Tordo,
. Faifdo^

Faisaosinho^

Hum leitaS^

Veddo,

Hum Coilho^ *

Ldparo^

Leore^

idem^

Gi^fot or mdcho da

Pdta..

An egg.

The yolk of an egg. . >

The white of an egg.

AnewUidegg.

A foft egg.

A hard eg^»

A roafted egg.

An egg with a chicken in it.

Sweet eggs fpun out like

hairs.
Poached eggs.-
Fried eggs.
An amiet.
A fritter.
The rocs of fifli.
Sweetmeats.
Comfits.
Marmalade.

M ill i l, ■ „ .

What is roaftid.

A capon.

A pullet.

A ghicken.

Pigeons. . .

A wood culver, or ^,#oti-.

pigeon.
A woodcock..
A fnipe.

A partridge.
A thrufli.
A phcafant.
A pheafant-powt. ,
A roafiing.pig.
A flag.
A rabbit.
A young coney.
A hare,
A duck.
A drake.
Goofe.

Gander, the mile ottbe gteTe

Calkandr^,^

le

CulhindtMi
Codorntz^

FOR TUG U ES E

A iky-lark.
A quail.

i*M

De 6atro8 PiiTaro^.

iguiaf

3fuia nivd^
Hire. ,
Jlbtfir&s^

M/merithaat
MScho^

Falcdd que ainda naS via,

Gerifalte^

Sdcre^ .

Garfdy

Melharica^

Garfota^

Milhdno^ or milhifre^

Corv09

Grilha,

Grilho,

AhelSa^ox raiiiUt

Omirio^ '

Piniacilgo^

Mith,

Teniilhda^

Rouxinilt

VerdelhdS,

fapagiyo^ -

E/ferninko, or zor%H,

FrancSlhCy

M6ck§^

Corija^

MoTcigo^

Arc n^Birna^ cime milrc^

que mama as cdbrss,
Ofraneolim,

Cerctta, ^

Cdrvo mar^h0,

0/ ether Mirds.

m

An eagle.

An eaglet»

A vulture.

An oftricb.

A merlin.

A fparcow hawk.

The horned owK

A falcon.

A iafs-bawk.

Ager^faicon.

A laker, a faker*hawk.

A heron*

Tomtit,

A little heron.

A kite.

A crow, or raven»

A rook.

A jack-daw.

A wag-tail.

A canary-bird.

A gold- finch.

A black-bird.

A chaffinch.

A ni^tin^le.

A green-burd.

A parrot.

A magpie.

A ftaniog.

A hobby, a mufket^

Owl.

A fcreech owl.

A bat«

A goat milker.

A godwit, a moor-cock*
A nigl^t crow, 0r ravens
A tcaL
A cormorant..

GaivSUt

• r

<\

GRAM MAR.

II

Gtnvita,

Gaivie,

AnJorfnha.
Merfulhai,
Marrica^ .
Picinco^

PazfiS,

Pavoa,

Ardra^

Pardil.

Jto/a,

Atcyon^

CeEonha^

Cifne^

FiniarrSx^i

Grou^ ,

PavoncinOf

PelicdnOt

TaramiSia,

Pifco,

A moor-ben, or goU« . k
A martlet* or martin* a kiihl

of fwallow.
A fwallow.
Adive* ^rdtdapper.*
A wild-duck.
A wren, a little bird.
A kind of ortolan.
A peacock.
A pea-hen.
A macaw.
A fparrow*
A turtIe-dove«
A king's fiflier.
A ftork.
A cuckow.
A fwan.
A red robin»
A crjine.
A lapwing.
A pelican.
A plover.
A DuUfincb, or red-tail.

Para os Dias de Ptixe, ou de
JcjtSm.

Sopa dc ervas^ &c.

Piixe,

Peixe do mdr^

Peixc do rio^ ou da igoa dSce^

Sdvel^

Anchova^

Anguia^ or Enguia,

Barbo^

LuciOf

Vdrpe,

Siba^

Ulal

Cmirat

CordZf

CongrOt

Dourdddp

For Fijk Days^ 9r Faft Days.

Soup meagre, or leoten pot*

tase.
Fiflif
Sea-fiDi.

Pre(b-water fiffa.
A (had.
An anchovy.
An eel.
A barbel.
A pike, or jack.
A carp.
A cuttle.
A calamary.
The miller's thumb.
A rochet, or roach.
A conger. [the gilt head.
Dorado, St. Peter'a 6S\t or

ijjptff-

Lingfiiii

Ugtfis,

Bordilo^

P O R T UO U E^S E

RodavUhe^

Sdrda^

Cavalla^

Sardinha^

Bacalhao^

Arinque^

Voad&r^

Arrinquedefit9U\

Arrinque con ixkis^ '

Pe/caaa^

Cadoz^

q/lra,

Lampria^

Lamprea pequetut^ • #

PSrco marinho^ •

Polvo^

Pirca^

Tincai

Trita,

Aiim^

SalmaS,

Camario,

Caran^uijo^

AmiijdA^

ErvilhaSf

Favast

t^finndfreSf

Alcachifras\ \-

Effdtgo,

RepolhOf

Nabos^

Grilos de cSuf^^

CSuve irtfpa^ \

Coiive Flor^

Bddroigas^

Ceniuras^

Cilgas^ or acit^ds;

A/ole.

A lobfler.

A fturgeoo ; fomd call il

{had-fifii.
A mullet.
A byrt er turbot.
A fort of little mackaffd.
A mackarel.

A pilchard.

Dry cqd. -

A herring,

A flyins-fifli.

A red herring.

A hard-rowed herri^.

A kind of cod-fiiK>

A gudgeon. /^

An oyfter. ^^

A lamprey.

A lampern.

A porpoife.

Pourcontrell or many-feet.

Perch,

A tench.

A trout.

A tunhy.&fli.

A falmon*

A flirimp,, or prawn.

A crab.

A cockle.

Peafe.

Beans.

Spinage.

Artichokes.

Afparagus.

Caobage, colewort.

Summer cabbage.

Turnips.

Sprouts.

Curled colewort.

Cauliflower.

Purflane.

Carrots.

Beets.

Apples of love.

• Piifj

1 -u

GJIAUMA tL

1%

P&ri Moperir o Cein£n

Pimtnia,
PimentdSi

Vindgre^
Moftarda^ .
Crdvo da Indid^
Canild,
Ldureiro^
' Alcap^rras^
CcgumeloSf
Tabara da terra,
CebSlas,
OuregaSf
Fiinch0,
Cebolinhas,

Lardnjas,'
lintoenSy
jPinhSens^
PerrexU^
Sdlja,^
Ortdddf
' Aipo,
A'lhopirro,
Cointro^
Afafrdm^
Cominhos,

T^fimf0nmeaimM.

Salt.

Pepper.

Cayan pepper.

Oil.

Vinegar.

Muflard.

Clove».

Cinnamon, '

Laurel.

Capers.

Mufhrooms.

Truffles^

Onions.

Organy.

Fennel.

Young onions.

Garlick.

Oranges. ' . •

Lemons.

The kernels of a pine apple.

Wild parfley: '^

Garden parfley. ,

Mint.

Cellery.

Leek.

Coriander.

Saffron.

Cummins.

T '

Para Salada*

For a Sallad.

Almeirao,

Almeirao horUnfe^ovtndivia,

Aljdce^

Chicoria^

AgriSens^

Mafiriifcs^ or maft^rfps,

(krefilio,

Ribag,

Wild fuccory.
Endive.
Lettuce.
Succory.
Water crefles.
Creffes.
Chervil.
Raddilh root.

P&ri

.t

14

P or: T U G U E S E

Para Somfaremefiu

Mafais,

Ptras,

Pita btrgamita^

Pii^cgos^

Camoezg^

AlhUoque^

Cerejas dtjaco^

GtnjaSf

Ginja garrafal^

Laranja da China^

Uvas^

Pdff'as de Hva^

Uva efpim^

Figos^

Figos limpos,

Amiixas^

Piffas de amiixas^ ,
Amirasde gdrfa^ or defylva^
AmSras que n&cem de hUfna

forte defyha tenra^
AmSras que nicem da amo^

riira^
Marmilos^
Romaas^
Lima^
Axeitinast
Amindoas,
Ncfperas,
Mem, ,

Melancia, or bulancia,
Cafldnhas^
Nozes,
AveldnSt
Morifsgos,
MedritthOf

-:•

For tie Dejfert.

Apples.

Peart.

A bergamot pear.

Peaches.

A pippiiK

Apricot.

Cherries.

Hard cherries. •

Sour cherries.

A very large fort of chcriy,

the fruit of the , dwarf

cherry-tree.
China-orange.
Grapes.
Raiuns.
Goofeberries.
Figs.
The. firft figs that come k

May.
Plums,
prunes.
Blackberries.
Rafpberries.

Mulberries.

Quinces.
Pomegranates.
A lime.

Olives*

Almonds.

Medlars.

A melon.

Water-melon.

Chefnuts.

Walnuts.

Hazelnuts.

Strawberries.

A fort of fruit they have in
Portugal like a flrawberry,
eating whereof, they fay;
makes people drunk.

Timara^

GRAM MA R.

Tdmaraf

Fiffico,

Aifarroia,

Acoftija^ ox mafia de naftga^
Dices ^

A date.

A piftachernut*

A carob.

A fweet acorn.

Service.

Ajubub.

Swoet-meats.

15 ,

Das A'rvores e Arbaftof.

Pdmafquctro^

AnundoHra^ '

Cerejiira^

(AfjtanhHro^
- Ctdreira^
. Sorviira^

Pa/meirar .

Figuiira^

hhrmeleiro^

Mdceira,

Mmciira da ndfega^

Romeira,

Linioeiro^

dmoriira^

OHviira^

NefptTeiray
. LaranjHra^

M^rta^

Negueira^

Zamhujiira^

Era^

PeceguiirOt

Rofiira,

jimeixiHra,
. Periira^

RofmianinhQ,
. PinhHro,

p* 1 1 > ■ ■

Dot Reptis, e Anim&^ am-
phibios.

Minhica^
S^plnte^

Of Trees and Struts.

An apricot-tree.
An aljnond-treq.
A cherry-tree,
A chefnut-tree.
A citron-tree.
A fervice-tree.
A palm-tree.
A fig-tree.
A quince-tree.
An apple-tree.
A jubub-tree.
A pomegranate-tree.
A lemon-tree.
A mulberry-tree.
An olive-tree.
^ A meellar-tree.
An oraage-tree.
Myrtle.
A walnut-tree.
A wild olive-tree.
Ivy;

A peach-tree.
Arofe-bulh.
A plum-tree.
A pear-tree.
Rofemiry.
A pine-tree*
Broom.

■ I ■■ I . ' ■ I ■■< I.

Of Reptiles and Amphili^us^
Creatures.

An earth-worm.
A ferpent.

Serpifjdi

16

PORT UG;U£S E

Serpinte com 6zas,

AJbide,

Ciha,

Cibra de caftaxH,

Vibord,

Lagirto,

jjagarto,
Alacrao,

Crocodth^

Jacfri^ or croofdUo 4a Ame-

rtca»
Cafltr,
CdgaJOf
Lontra^

A flying ferpent.

An afD,

A foake.

A ratde-fnake.

A viper.

A iifuurd.

An evet, eft, or newt.

A fcorpion.

A crocodile.

An alljgitor.

A beaver.

A land tortoifc.

An otter.

. Dos Inftctoi.

Ardnha, .

FormiMa^

Caracii^

Ma,

Sipo,

Oucid,

EJcaravilko,

CarHncko,

PtUhc, or lagiria da korta ttgfl.

Cigirra,

BorbolUd,

Grilto,

Piilho,

Piilholidro,

Undea,

Pilfa.

Mifca,

Perfa%ft}0,

Carraphto,

GafankiU^

P.0iUA0. or trdfM,

f^/pa* or ahijporaf

ZingCf CfT Banf49f

Tavad,

Biy^Dhs.

Of InftSs.

A fpider.

A pifmire or ant.

A fnail. '

A frog.

A toad.

Hand-worm.

A beetle.

Wood-worm.

Caterpillar.

Grafshopper.

A butterfly*

A criclcet..

A lottfe.

Crab4oufe.

A nit.

A flea.

Afly.

A' bug.

A tick.

A locufl.

M$Hh.

A wafp.

A bee.

A drorte.

Aoi ox fly.

A lady-bird.

A gnat.

' Gil A M M A R.

17

ios de Parent£fdo.

genito^

7 mais mofo,

/

com irmidf
con it mad y

doy

day

irmdo, «

iffa,
to,

0,

a,

'tCy mafc. aad fern.

(o,

r,

gemeOy

•; or irmao dc liite,

doy

dre^

Degrees of Kindred*

Father.
Mother.
Grandfather.
Grandnlother. !

Great grandfather.
Great grandmother.
Son.

Daughter*
Broftier.
Sifter.

The eldeft fon.
The youngeft fon.
Uncle.
Aunt. .
Nephew.
Niece.

Coufio. X

A female coufhi. . ' '

The male firft coafin.
The female firft coi|fin; »
Brother-in-law.
I Sifter* in-law.
Half-brother. ^
Father-in-law.
Mother-in-law.
A. fiep- father.
A ftep-mother.
A ftep-fon.
A ftep-daught^r.
A fon-in-Iaw.
A daughter-in-law..
A grand-daughter.
A grand-fon.
A great grand-fon.
A great grand-daughter.
A confort.
Huft>and.

Wife. ^ .

A twin-brother.
A fofter-brother.
A baftard.
A male goiSp.
* B ComddtCy

A

%

18

P O R T U G U E S E

Comidrf^
AAlhddo^
Afilhdda^
Padrinhoy
Madrinha^
O.parente^
A parente^

Parinte por affinidddc^ or
confanguinidadc.

Dos differcntes Generos de
Efiado de hum Homem,
ou de biima Molher, e das
fiias qualidadeSy

H^m homem^
Huma molher^
Hum homem de iddde^
Huma molher de iddde^
Hum velho,^
Huma velha^
Hum mq^o^ ou mancebg^
HUrna rapdriga^
Hum amanUy
mma ami^a,
Hiimafrianfa, ou menino,
Hum rapdz^
; Hum rapazinhOf
Ha ma menina^
Ha ma danzella^
Huma virgem^
A!mo^
'A ma J
Criddo^
Cr'idda^
Cidaddo,

Hum ejtrangeifo^
Hum vi&vOf
Huma viiiva.
Hum herdeira^,
Huma herdeira^

4/iddif dejoltiif.

,/ ■

A female goffip.
A god-fon. *
A god-daughter.
A god- father.
A god -mother.
A male relation.
A female relation.
A kin, a relation either of
affinity or confanguinity.r

Of the conditions of Man'
and JVoman^ as well as of
their qualities.

A man.

A woman.

An a^ed man.

An aged woman.

An oTd man.

An old woman.

A young' man.

A girl.

A lover.

A miftrefs.

A child, a little child*

A boy.

A little boy.

A little girl.

A maiden.

A virgin.

A mafter.

A miftrefs.

A malc-fervant.

A female-fervant*.

A citizen.

A countryman.

A ftranger, or foreigner. .

A widower.

A widow.

An heir. '

An heirefs. , *

A bachefor.

fiachelorfliip.

HinleB

■\

GRAMMAR.

23

As bdfbaSt
BigodeSf
O ptjcogo^
A nuca,
A/fargdnta^

Teta^

PettOt "

Bico de petto i

Eftomago^

Coftelas^

Embigo^

Barrtga^

brago^

O cotovilo^

Sobaco^ oifovaco^

A mao,

Pul/o,

A palma da maS,

Os dedos^

dido poUffar^

O dido mojtrador^

Dido do miyOj

Dido annular^

Dido meninkOf or minimo^

Pontas dos didos^

Juntas^ e nos dos didos^

Dido do pe^

A unhoy

As eojlast

Os ombros^

Jihargas, '* •

As nddegas^

Coxa,

Joelho,

Ba rriga, da perna^

Efpinndco^

Tornozelo^

pi,

S6la do pi,
coracoQ,
Osbifcs,

The beard.
Whiflceri. -
The neck.

The nape of the head. '
The throat.
The bofotn.
The pap.
The breaft.
The nipple.
The flomach.
The ribs.

The naval. - ^

The belly.
The groin.
The arm.
The/ el bow.
The arm-pit.
The hand.
The wrift.

The palm of the hand.
The fingers.
The thumb.
The fore- finger.
The middle-nnger.
The rinj» -finger.
The little-finger.
The tips, or tops of the fin-
gers.
.. The joints, and knuckles of
, the fingers.
A toe.
The nail.
The back.
The (houlders.
The fides.
The "buttocks.
The thighi
The knee.
The calf of the leg.
The ridge-bone of the back.
The ancle.
* The foot.
The fole of the foot.
The heart,
.The lungs.
•B4 Ojij^ai

3d

Que tern ciimes^

AdilUro^

SalteadSr^ . ^

MatadSfi

Murmurddor^

Calumniator^

Feiticeiro^

Trahidor^

MalvddOf

Rebelde^

Phfido,

BopOf

McniirSfo^

Altivo^ ,

Coxo^

Eftropiddo das maos^

Cego,

mouco^ or furdoj

CanhotOf or tjquirdd^

undo.

P O R T U G U E S E

Jealous.

Adulterer.

A htghwajntnan.

A murderer.

A cenfuret.

A calumniator.

A forcercr.

A traitor.

Wicked.

A rebel.

Perfidious.

A buffoon.

A lyar.

Haughty.

Lame of the legs^

Lame of the hands*

Blind.

Deaf.

Left-handed.

Dumb.

Dos Moradores de huma
Cidade.

Fidalgo^
' Nhbrt,
Mecdnico^
Tendeiro,
Mercadir or himem de nego-^

cio,
vulgo^ or a plike^
Candlha^ or a mais vil gente
' daplibe.
Official,

Jornaliiro^ . ^

OuriveSf y
Ourives do ourff^
Livreiro^
tmpreffor,
Barbciro^
Mercador defida,,
' Mercaiir depdnno^

Of the Inhabitants oj B
City.

*

A nobleman.
A gentleman.
A mechanic.
-A fhop-keeper.
Merchant, or tradefm^n.

The mob.
The rabble.

A work-man, a man tbi

labours with bis hands.
A journeyman.
A filver-fmith,
A gold-fmith.
A book-(eller.
A printer.
A barber.
A mercer.
A woollen-draper.

AlercaM

/'■

Mjctcador depdnno^ it Itnho^
€ roupas da India^oxjan-

Ai/aydU,

Alfaydtt rcmtnddo^

Cq/lureira^

Chapdeiro^ or Somirtir^irCf
. SapatiirOy
/ Remendda^[sapateiroy^

Atiiitdr, '
CerralheirOy

Tartetrat
' Mldico^
Charlaiad

Cirurgiam^ oifurgiiot
Tira denies^

CarpenUirOy [army.)

PioneirOy or gaftador^ (in an

PadeirOy

Carnicdroy

FrutdrOy

Mother que vendc Viirduras
' ou ortalifas,

Pajieleiro,

Taverndro, or venddro\

CervejeirOyOt o quejaz cervtja
■ EJiatajadetro^,

Mqfarinhdro^

Relojoeiroy

Prcgoeiro,

yoyeircy or jcyalhdrif.

ccticdrio^
. Vidraceiro^
* CarvodrOy ,

Jardineiro^

Letrddo^

ProcuradoTy
.Advogddo^

Carrd/cOy
MarUhf

GI^ A M M A R.

A linen-draper.

21

A taylor.
Botcher.
A fempfirefi.
A hatter.
Shoemaker.
A cobler.'
A blackfmith.
Farrier.
A lockfmith. .
A midwife.
A phyfician.
A quack.
A furgeon.
A tooth drawer*
A fadler.
A carpenter.
A pioneer.
A baker.
A butcher.
A fruiterer.
A- herb woman.

t /

Apaftry-cook.
A vintner.
A brewer.
An inn-keeper.
A pedlai.
A watch-maker.
A crier.
A jeweller.
An apothecary.
A glazier.
A coal man*
A gardener.
A lawyer. •

A folicitor. ,

An advocate, cr a pleadef«
A judge.
' A coaler.
A&mgman.
A porter.

N.

26

PORTUGUESE

Agilha dc toucdr^

Fichu fsorte de linfo para o

pescofo^
Tenazinkas,
Pcndentes^
Palatina^
Giidrdd infdnU^ox Guard in^

Jantc^ X
Vio,
Rindai
'Bilros,

Bilrosfeitos de SJfo,
Agoa da rainka de Ungria^
Agoa de chiifo^
Jupiho, .

Bodkin. *
Ribbons.
A necklace.

Nippers.

Bob» or pendant«»

Tippet.

Farthing^de, or hoop.

Veil.

Lace.

Bobbins.

Bones.

Hungafy water.

Scented watisr.

Bodice.

Os doze Signos Celeftes. The twelve Celejlial Signs.

Aries^
•Touro^

' Gemini or Geminis^
Cancer^
Leao,
Virgem^
Libra^
Escorpido\
Sagit^riOj
Capricornioy
Aqudrio^
Peixes^

'- /

Aries, or the ram.
The bull.
The twins.
The crab.
The lion.
The virgin.
The balance.
The fcorpion.
The archer.
The goaf.
The water-bearer.
The fiOies.

De huma Cafa e do que Ihe
pert^nce.

.aja,
A/icer/e,
Paredc^
TaitquCf
Pdteo, or Pdiio,
Anddr, or fobrado^
Fachdda^
Janilla^

Of a Housey and all that bt'
longs to it.

A houfe.

Foundatipn. ^

A wall.

A light brick-wall.
A court, or yard.
•A floor.

The front. ' /
A window.

AtihaiA

V

GRAMMAR.

23

- Ai h&Tb'as,

BigadtSf

O pefcogo,

A nuca,

Arargdnta,
' Seyt,

Tela,

PeiUf, ■

Bico de petto,

Eflomago,

Coftiias,

Emifgo,

Barriga,

VfTtlha,

irafo,

cotevelo,

Sobaco, ot/ov£c»,

A ma5,

Pulfo,

A p6lma da maS,

Os didos,

dido poUrhr, ''

dedo moJlTador,

Dido do miyo,

Dido annular.

Dido meninho,'ot minima,

Ponias dos dedes,-

y&nlas, e not dos diios.

Dido do pi,
A Unha,
As ejjios.
Os ombros,
IlkSrgas,
As nadegas.
Coxa,

Barriga da pirna,

Efpit^d^o,

Tornozeio,

pi,

SSla do p(,

O coracdS,

0s ii/ts.

The heard.
Whilkeri. .
The neck.

The nape of the head. '
The throat.
The bofom.
The pap.
The bread.
The nipple.
The flomach.
The ribs.

The naval. - ^ ■

The belly.
The groin.
The arm.
The- elbow.
The arm -1)11.
The hand.
The wrift.

Thepalm of the hand.
The fingers.
The thumb.
The fore-finoer.
The mlddle-fiijger.
The nnj-fin>.er
Thelitik-hngcr.
The tips, or tops of the fin-
gers.
.. The joints, and knuclilet of
, the fingers.
A toe.
The nail.
The back. ■
The Ihouiders.
The fides.
Thetuttocks.
The thigh.
The knee.
The calf of the leg.
The ridge-bone of the back.
The ancle.
- The foot.
The fole of the fool.
The heart,
The lungs.
• B 4 Oftg^'l

24

PORTUCJUflSE

CfiMdo,

b&fo,

Os rinSf

A boca da^eflSmago^

As iripdSy

A mddre^

Sdngu€y

Cufpo,

Ourina,

Excremento^

Monco or rdnho^
Lagrima^
Carepa^ or cafpa^

Dos Veflidos^

Hum vefiido^ ' '

CabelUira^

Cravdta;

ChapeOt

Abas do ^hapeo^ . [p^'o,

Cord^t mjita^ para o cka^

Bafr(t€,^

Capote^
' Qtbadf

ViJUa^ or oolite^

Camifa;

Cafdca^

Cafacdo^

Calfoens^

Ceroulas^

Meas^ or miyas^
, Mias dt cdbrejiilho,

Ligas,

Saphtos^

ChinHaSf

B.otas^

Fivelas^

Efpiras^

PunhoSf

Ta/im, or taly, *

The liver. ^

The'fplcen.

The kidneys. ,

The pit of the ftomach

The guts.

The gall.

The womb.

The bladder.

The blood.

Spittle.

Urine.

Dupg,

Sweat or perfpiratioD.

Mucus.

Tear.

Scurf.

I » " ■

OfCloatAs. .. '

A fuit of cloaths.

A wig.

A cravat or neckcloth.

A hat.

The brims.

A batbjuid.

A cap.

A cloak.

A doublet.

A waificoat.

A fliirt.

A coat.

A great coat.

Breeches.

Drawers.

Stockings.

Stirrup ftockings.

Garters.

Shoes.

Slippers.

Boots.

Buckles.

Spurs.

Ruffles.

A flioulder-belt.

. SoldrU,

GRAMMAR.

Boldrii,
Espdda,
LuvaSf

Lenfo, ^

Lenfp para o pcfcSfo^
Samarra, or peudu d§ cdmp^^

25

m I I— —»***«

Para Molheres,

Camisa de molheres^

Toucado^

Siya,

Mantilha,

MdntOy

Avental,

BraceleUs,

Anil

Brincos^

LequCy

Pentcador^

Toucador^

Sindes^

EspelkOj

Rcgdlo,

Espartilho^ .

PenUi

Alfinetes,

icsottra,

Ikdil

Agulha^

Fio de pirolas^
PolvilhoSy

CSr^

P^lito^

Roca,

Fiiso^

Atmofadinha para alfiniUSy

A sword-belt.

A fword.

Gloves.

A girdle.

Handkerchief.

A neck handkercliief. ,

A fliepherd's jacket.

- ' ■ *■ » <»*".. ■■■ I mf^^i^m^^

Fhr Women.

A fliift, or fmock.

A head drefs.

A petticoat.

A little cloak women wear on
their heads.

A mantle, a kind of cloak
women wear in Portugal,
covering their head and the
upper part of their body.

An apron..

Bracelets. >

Ring.

Ear-rings.

A fan.

A combing cloth.

A toilet, a dreffing table.

Patches to wear on onfc*s facA.

A looking-glass.

A muff. ,

Stays.

A comb.

Pins.

A pair of fciflars.

A thimble.

A needle.

Thread.

A necklace of pearls.

Powder.

Jewels.

Paint.

A tooth-pick. ,

A diftaff.

The fpindle.

Small pincufhion.

Agilkm

\

\ ■

26

FOR TV G U E S E

Agilha dc toucdrg

FUas,

Fichu (sorte dc Urifo para o

pescofOj
Tenazinhas,
Pendenies^
Palatina^
Giidrdd infdnie,oi Guard in*

Jantc^ ,
Vio,
Renda^^
'Bilros, •
Bilrosfeitos dc ojfo^
Agoa da rainku de Ungria^
A'goa de chiifo^

Bodkin. •
Ribbons.
A necklace.

Nippers.

Bob, or pendants

Tippet.

Farthings^le, or hoop.

' Veil.
Lace.
Bobbins. ,
Bones.

Hungafy water.
Scented water.
Bodice.

Os doze Signet Celeftes^ The twelve Celejlial Signs.

Aries^
Touro^

'Gemini or Geminis^
Cdncef^
Leao,
Virgem,
Libta^
Escorpidd\
Sagitariot
Capricirnto,
Aqudrio^
Peixes^

/

Aries, or the ram.
The bull.
The twins.
The crab.
The lion.' .
The virgin.
The balance.
The fcorpion.
The archer.
Thie goaf,
■f he water-bearer.
The fiihes.

De huma Cafa e do que Ihe
pert^nce.

Chfa,
Alicirje^

Paredty
Tabique^
Pdteo, or Patio ^
Anddr^ orfobrado^
Fachdda^
Jfanilla^

Of a Housey and all that be-
longs to it,

A houfe.

Foundation. ^

A wall.

A light brick-wall.

A court, or yard.

•A floor.

The front. ' /

A window.

Atobaic

V

GTl A M M A R.

iJt

Abih'ada,,
As escddasj -
DegrdoSf
- Telhido,.
Telhas,

J^adrUkos, or tijolos,
Sala or quarto^
Antecdmura\
Sala^
Tecto^
Alcova^
Balcab^
Gabinite^
Almdrio^
Gudrda-roupa^
Adi^a,
Cozinka^
Befpinfa,
Cheminet
Cavallarifa,
Gallin/ieero, or cd/a das gal'

linhas,
Poleiro,
Jar dim ^

Neccjfarias, ^

Cd/a dejantar,
Qudrto de cdma^
Andar rente da Rua,
Porta, ^
Po/ligo,

Limindr, or lumidr, .
Clara boia,
AlgeroZt

£eiras, or dbas do tclhado^
A couceira da porta,
Fechad(Lra,
Cadeado,
Ferrolho,^
Trdnca da p6rta,
Cdno da ckdve,
Chave meflra,
Gudrdas dajtchadura^
Palhetao da chdvc.

A vault.

The ftairs.

Steps.

A tiled roof.'

Tiles.

Bricks.

A room.

Aotichaniber.

A halK

A roof.

An alcove.

A balcony.

Clofet.

A cupboard.

Wardrobe.

A cellar.

A kitchen.

A pantry. '

A chimney.

The liable.

A hen-houfe.

A hen-rooft.

A garden.

Water cidfet.

A dining-room.

Bed-chamber.

A parlour.

The door.

A wicket.

The thrclhold.

Sky-lights.

The gutter tile. -

The eaves.

The hinges.

A lock.

A padlock. ^

The bolt.

The bar ot a door*

The pipe of a key.

A mailer- key.

The wards of a lock.

Key bit.

Vidrdga^

'i8

PORT U G U E S E

I «

EsciidajtUa a carracily
Escdda secrita^

Viga,

Parede meftra^
Paredes miyas,
A'rca^
Cdjna^

Sobreceo da cdma^
I lOortinas da cdma^

Cabectira da cdma^

Pi% da cdma^

Colcha^

ColckdOf

Cobertor^

Cobertor de felpa.

Cama de Armagao.

Travesseiro^ •

Tapcte^

Tapefarta^

PcderncUaj

tsca^ ,

Micha^

EnxergaOf

E/ieira^

Caens da cheminiy ,

Folks ^ .

TendzeT^

Ferra,

Abdno or abanador^

Panella,

Tejio,

Aza da panilla^

Ferro para atifdr p lume^

Escumadeira^

Colher grdnde^

Caldeira^ •

Scrtda^ ox fngidtiTa^

CoadSr^

Grelha^,

Ralo.

The glass of a window.
A winding ftair-case. '
Back-flairs, a private flatr-

case.
A beam.
The main wall.
The party walli.
Cheft.
Bed.

The bed's tefter.
Bed curtains.
Sheets.

The bed's head.
Bed's feet.

Counterpane, a* quilt. >
A matrafs.
A blanket.
A rug.
Bedftead.
A pillow.
A carpet. .
Tapeftry.
A flint.
Tinder.
Match.
A ftraw-bed.
A mat.
Hand-irons.
Bellows.
Tongs.
A fliove).
Fire-fan.
A pipkin. .
The pot-lid.

The ear of a pot, or pipkio.
A poker.
A Ikimmer*
. A ladle.
A kettle.
A frying pain.
A cullender, or ll;rainer.
Gridiron.
A grater.

Espiti

GRAMMAR.

29

Amojariz^

Mao do almofariz,

Rtdoma^

Bilde, -

&abao^

Rodilha^

Esfregdo,

Forno^

Pa dofSrno^
, Vascmho pa ra alimpdr ojor-

no,
^Farinka,

Trinckdnte,
' MordomOf

Escudciro^

Camareiro mir.

Esc ova,

Vassoura,,
' Dfspenseiro,

Pdgm,

Ldcdyo,

CockeirOf

Co c heir a,

AfSfo des cavillos^ ou da es-
trebaria,

Copeire,

Escudctro de h&majiddlga^

A mo, ou senhor da cdsa,

A ma, ou senhor a na cdsa^

Grimpa^

Cores.
Branca^

Azul celeste,
Azuljerrite,
Azil cldro.
Cor de camur^a^
Amarilo^
Cor de risa,
Cordcpdlha^

A fpit.

A mortar wherein things arc

pounded.
A peftle.
A vial,

A bucket, or pail^
Soap.

A kitchen towel*.
A difh-clout.
Oven.

The peel of the oven.
A maukin, a coaf^rake t4

make clean an oven.
Meal-flour.
A carver.
A lie ward.
A valet-de-chambrc.
A chamberlain*
A brufli.

A broom. ' ^

A fleward.
A page. »

A footman.
A coathman.
A coach-houfe.
A groom. ^

A butler.

A lady's gentleman ulber.
The mafter of the houfe.
The miftrefs of the.houfe.
Weather- cock.

Colours.

White. .
Blue.

Sky-colour*
• Dark bli^.
Light blue.
Lig^it yellow.
Yellow.
Rofy colour.
Straw colotir.

Virde,

30

PORTUGUESE

Virdt,

Cor de virde niar^ or virdt

• cldi 0^

CSrvermilhay or Incarnada^

Cor vermilha muih viva, or

carmin.
Cor dt tame.
Cor carmesin.
Cor negra, or prSia,
Cor dt mil,
Furta cores.
Cor viva.
Cor trifle.
Cor escura.
Cor carregdda.
Cor defogo,
Pdrdo^
Cor de ctnza^
Escarldtoy
Leonddo,
Cor de lardnja.
Cor de azeitona,
RSxo,
Roxo, or cSr de aurora.

Green.
Sea-green.

Red colour.

Carmine, a bright red colour.

Flefh colour.

Ciimfon red.

Black colour.

A dark yellow.

A deep changeable colour.

A lively and gay colour.

A dull colour. ,

A dark colour.

A deep colour.

Fire colour.

Gjey. i

Afli colour.

Scarlet.

Tawney,

Orange f:olour.

Olive colour.

Purple, violet.

Aurora colour. '

Roxo fometimes fignifies redox rosy fo/cfttr; particularly
in poetry, as m Camoens, Czvao 1. Stanza 82.

"' Para que ao Portuguez se Ike iorndsse,
Em roxo sdngue a dgoa, que bebesse.

Anim^es.

Bejla domejlica,

Befia brava,

Befta de cdrva,

Bejia de sella.

Gado,

Gddo grojfo, ^

Gddo miSido,

Rebdnho,

Mandda de gado groff'o,

Touro,

Bezcrrfi,

Beajis.

Tame beaffij

A wild bead.

A beafl of burthen.

A beaft for the faddle.

Cattle.

Great cattle.

Small cattle.

A flock.

A herd of big cattle.

Ahull.

Heifer,

Bezernr,

GRAMMAR.

31

Bevterro^

Boy,

Burro, . -
, Burra,
Porco,
PircGy
Fdcay
Egoa,
Cria,
Potra,

Cavdllo, . ,

Cavdllo anao,
Cavallo de pojta,
Garranhao, or cavallo it

langamento,
Ca*Oallo de alueuel,
' Cavdllo dt cochc, '
Cavdllo que dnda de ch6ut0,
Cavallo peaueno que serve

para stnhoras,
Cavdllo quetoma ofreio entre

denies,
Cavdllo rijo da b^ca,
Cavdllo doce dejreio,

Cavdllo que tern boa boca,
Cavdllo que tropica,
■' Cavdllo esfiantadifo,
Cavdllo ardente, oxfogozo,
Cavdllo que rkirde e da couces,
Cavdllo rebelldd,
Cavdllo que nao siffre ancas,

Cavdllo mal mandddo,

Cavdllo de albdrda,

Cayallo de carro,
* Cavdllo de sella,

Cavdllo de correr,

Cavdllo deguerra,
' Cavdllo djaezddo,

Cavdllo ae Barbaria,

Cavdllo capado,

Cuydllo sem ser capddo^

CavAlo que da aos folks.

A calf, a fleer, a young b\il-

lock.
An ox.
Anafs.
A (he-afs.
A hog, or pig.
A fow. •

A young mare, alfo a nag.
A mare.
A foal, a filly.
A colt, or young horfc.
A horfe.
A nag.
A poft horfe.
A (lallion.

A hackney-horfe.
A coach- horfe.
A johing-horfc.
A palfrey;

A horfe that champs th^it.

A hard-mouthed horfe.

A tender- moufhed horfe, one

that eafily fubmits to the curb.

A horfe that will eat any thing.

A ftumbling-horie.

A (lartling-horfe.

A fiery horfe.

A biting and kickiiig horfe.

A untamed horfe.

A horfe that will not carry

double.
A reftive horfe.
A pack-hbrfe.
A cart- horfe.
A faddle-horfe.
A race-horfe.
A war-horfe.

A horfe with all his furniture.
A Moorifli horfe, a barb.
A gelding.
A flone-horfe.
A broken winded horfe.

Cavdllo^

32 P O R T U

Cavdllo quiitrdlvo^

Cavdllo alazdo^
C(^vallo bdio.
Cava II castdnko^
Cavdllo bdlo e cajtdrihp^
Cavdllo rocim^
Cavdllo remendddoy
Cavallo rudo or rujfo porceU

Idno^
Cavdllo que /off ft ancas,
Cavdllo trotab^
Cavallo que fcrve para anddr

dcdfa^
Cavallo que dnda de furta

Caoy

Cdo dt quinta.

Odd 4c cdga^ * "

Cdo de agoa^

Cad de gddo^

Cdd de mojira^ podingo^ or

perdigueiro, .
Cdo dejila,
CdofacadSr^
Cdo de bifca^
Aldo,
. (^algo,
Cdo para cafdr rapozas e

lontras^
Cachorrinho^
Cachorrinho defrdlda^
Cachorro^
Mdcho^ or mulo^
Mula^
Corfa,

Corf a de tres dnnos^
^orfo de dSus dnno5\
Cdrfo^

Corfo on cira d^hUm anno,
Gdmo,
FeadOf

Cdbra montez,
Veddo grdnde de cinco dnnos,
fioninha^
Tnxigo^ or texUgo^

G U E S E

'A horfe' that has four white
' feet.

A forrel horfe.
A bay ]^oi'k,

A cbefnut- coloured horfc.
A chefnut bay.
A wortblefs nag, a poor jade.
A dapple horfe.
A dapple-grey horfe.

A double horfe.
A trotting.hoife,
^ hunter.

A pad, an easy-paced hotit,

A dog.

A houfe dog.

A hound.

A water fpanieL

A fhepherd's dog.

A fettmg dog.

A great cor« a maftiff iog,

A dog tumbler.

A finder.

A bull-dog.

A greyhound.

A terrier.

A little puppy, a whelp*.

A lap'dog.

A little dog.

A lie-mule.

A ihe-mule.

A (he-deer, a doe.

A fpade.

A pricket.

A wild buck.

A fawn.

A fallow deer.

A flag.

A wild fhe goat.

A hart.

A weafel,

A badger.

Gate,

QRAMHAH.

S6

toesptnhaieir^ ^

Ptaigo dt thd&Jim drvMts^ A glade in a wood*

dentro d$ hMmtfipfU€t
Pomdr^ or verged •

A precipice.

A wood.'

A grove, 6r thickets

• •

Pr&do,

Ftnte,

Trigo, • .
Trigo candial^
Trigo bretdnhai^

m

Tremiz^

muta,

Efpiga^

Cabcfa dn iff^(K

An orchasd.

A mf adow.

A bower.

A founcaifl.

•Wheat.

The beft Vheat.

Jle4wlieau

Rye. :

JylefliQ^ sii)iedcoini» at vbnt

TW ^mK of chmt MMihi

Spelt.

Earofcom.

The grain at the top Qi cIkd
ear of com.

Bainka, 4MiJdhd ^gft The hu& in' which tbectf^ilf

dtpois defa
Legumes^
Graos de bico^
LentUha^

Tramifo^ or tftmAf^^
Feijoens^

Fajaofradmka^y

E'ixo,

Kayo da roda^

Currdl de biys^

Currdl'de ovilhaf^

Curral de cdtrqst:

Chiqueiro depdt^^^,

Srv0^

corn is lodff A
Pulfe.

Spahifli peafe.
A lentil. r

A lupine.

Frencb^himiC
Kidney-beans.
A fort of fmall French bcuu

with a black fpot.
Chicklingi, a fort of pesti.
A waggqiu
A cart*
A wheel.

The j^oen of the wheat
The 9xlt^up(SB of a wheel*
^be jrpo]L|& cijt a wbeel«
An ox-flail.
ik (bcra-fbldb
A houie for gooUk *
A hog'fl-fiju
Graft.
Green cofnv

♦Ca^

Stttre.

\

^^

J4 PQRTU

Lavrador^

V

Piftos,

Arddo^

Ferro do arddo^

Rdbo do arddo^

Abegad^ or ojiciai qH$f^

arados^
JIguilhaddf
insmho^
Grade,
Stmeador^
RofadoTf
Fouce rogadoura^
Fouce,
Poddo,
Segador,

Mangoal,
Forcddo,

CafadSr,

Pefcador^

J%o,

Terra mfic(^.l<vmiAi^cn^

tre dous regoSp
Outeiro,
MonU^ or m,oniinJk^y

Ritetrq^

Idno, or pl(H(kK^
Penha, or rfcha,.
Penkdfcq^
De/irio,

(J y E S E

A rarmer, oRtli^ C^l^inlll

. tfraaoihif'i*

Feeding ground»^ fAO^UM^

iheep-wa(^«
, A plough.
The plough-fliife.
The plough-handle^
A plough^wright*

A goad.

A rak«.

A harrow.

A fower.

A wecdcn

A weeding-hook;

A fcythc or fickle.

A pruning-knife*

A reaper, or mowcr« iwA
man.

A flail.

A prong to ca{| up Oinv^ff
com with.

A huntfmati.

A fifliermay.

A furrow.

A Mk^tff fidjn ^ bai be-
tween two nirrows. '

Amountaiii^ .

A valley.

A mo6r, fen, or Wiifl^l

ftanding^ water, but foflM^

timet dry.

A lake or ftandingxpooli^lM
always full of water^

A brook, a ftream of ^nM
with a gentle or fiMit
current.

A rivulet, a ftreamlQ(^

A plain.

A rock.

A great rock.

A defert or wildern^^

Q R A Mid 4 H.

86

Desbenhadeir^ ^

Pedifo de thd&fem drv^ts^ A glade in a wood«
dcniro d$ ktm ^fifu^^

A precipice.

A wood.'

A grove, «r thicket. '

Pomdr^ or vtrgil^
Prido, .

Ftnte,
Trigo, •
Trigo candial^
Trigo bretinha^

m

TremiZf

Effilta,

E/piga^

Cabefa da. ^fjfii^(K

An orchatd.
A mf adow.
A bower.
A fountain^
•Wheat.
The heft Vheat.

&e4 wheat.
Rve. :

AacIKq^ sii)iedconi» at vbcit

aB^ ryre, &c.
TW ^WK of thmt siMdM

growth.
Spelt.

Ear of corn.
The grain at the top Qi chr

ear of com.

Bainha, Mmdijdhaa ^g^ The hu& in' wUchtbectf^ilf

dedois defa
' Legumes^

Graos de bico^

Lentilka^

, TramSfO, cm tffmAp0^
. Feijoens^

Fetjdifradmkc^s

XXfckarOf

Carrot
Rida,
CaimiaSt
E'ixo,

Rdyo da rida^
Currdl de biys^
Currdl'de obilhas^
Qurrdt de cdbri^
• Ckiqueiro depdt^^^

corn is lodge A
Pulfe:
Spahifli peafe.
A lentil.
A lupine.
Frencb^hisMC
Kidney-beans.
A fort of fmall French bcuu

with a black fpot.
Chicklingi, a fort of peav.
A waggon^
A cart%
A wheel.

The I^QQi of the wheal
The i»le*to:# of a whed*
^be jrpo]L|& ol a wbeel«
An ox-flail.
A (bcra-foldib
A liouie for goaUU *
A hog'fl-fiju
Graft.
Green cofn;

♦Ca^

Stttra.

S8

FOR T U GrU ES E

Tarro^ -
CinehOf

Standing corn.

A milk-pail.

A cbeefe-vat, to make eheeli

a«^ ft

Enxada^

Enxadio^ or alviao^
Cdnga,
Cangdlhos^

Sibe,

gucfaz sebeSf

A mattot^k, a hoe.
A mattock.
A yoke for oxen.
The arms of the yoke- ufed
for oxen.
. A hedge or fenoe.
Hedgcr.

tdrajazir s'tkts^
Tempo de tofquia e ajifta que The (heep-lhearing, the Ume

nelU/azem os riifiicos^ of (hearing (heep.

Caniigadosjigadire^defpiis^ Harveft home. ' '

de acabddo o tempo da

Sarfa^

Mata^

Mato, ^

Leira^ or iaboleiro^

Ckirro de dgoa^

Vereda^

Bafto,

CabdZf

Cabdndt or choupdna^

CabUfo^

f ,

Coufas pertencSntes a
Guerra.

A bramble.
A thicket, a foreft.
A heath.

A bed in a garden. - . '
A water-fpout.
A path.
The track.
A baftet.

A fiail, a pannier. *
A cottage* a hut.
A dry holJow gourd ufed tt
keep feeds id.

Things relating to War. '

Servifo ou vida miliidr^ War^re. .

Military ou fervir na gutrrd^ To ferve in the army.

.Artilharxa^ artelharia^ ou Artillery.
artiiheria^

Canhd^tOupecddeartilharia^ A cannon.

Cdnhdo dejtrro^ Iron cannon.

Canhai de bronze^ Brafs cannon.

Alma do cankdS^ The mouth of a cancon. '

Fogdd do canAaOf V ^^^ touch-hole of a '€a|iiKm«

CmJdira do cankii. The breech of a cannon.

Boidi^ ou -extrtmddde da

culdira, ,
Bdids €ncadiddtfs^
Bila dt €ankdo^

Carrita d^ canhic^

Pilvora^

Miyo canhdoy

Canhdb dobrddo^

Canh&o para batir hdma

profay
Canhao dt vtnte e qudiro^ .
Calibre,
Carregar^
Efcorvdr^
Fazir pdntarid,
Petrichos^ or munifoins dt

guerra^
Encravar hima pega^
Descavalgdr h£ima pi^a,
Despardr,
Tiro dt pi fa.
Trim dt arHlharia^
Celubrina^
Falconiity
Pttardo,
Ptdrtiro^
\.

Botnba,
Bembdrda^
'Morttiroy

Grandda, .^

Espingdrda^
Pijiila,
Carabifia,
Mo/gu€tt'y
Machadinha^
Ldnca^
Aldoirdaf
Pdrtasdna^
Pique.
Caldr , OS piques pdra refijfir

dcavalaria^
Al/in^e.
Espdaa^

GRAMMAR.

Tbeputnmd.

17

Chain-OioU.

A catinon bullet, caimoa.

bally or caDiion*fliot.
The cajrru^ of a Cjaunum*
Gun -powder.
A demi-cannon. . .

A dou^e cannon.
A battering cann0n#

A twenty* four pounded*

Caliber.

To load.

To prime.

To level.

Military ftores. .

To nail up a gun.

To difmount s^ gun*

To fire.

A cannon (hot.

The train of artillery.

A culverin^

A falconet. ' .

A petard.

A fwivel gupi pedeitro* iff

paterero.
A boqib.

A groat gun, a bombard.
A mortar-piece.
A granade.
A firelbck.
A pifiol.
A carabine..
Amuiket« '

Abattte*ax.

A lance.

An halberti

A partizan.

A pike.

To prefent the pikts ^g^dnft

tbe cavalry,
Scymeter*
A fword.

•C8

Desembainkar

•8

PORTUOUESE

Difembainhar m efpddM,
Finho da e/pdda^
Mafaa da ejpdda^
emdrmcaU 4a tfpiim^
Filhada^da,
Metir md9 a e/fiidm^

Matdr^
Ferir^
. DesbaraiSri
Saquear^
PunUU,
Bayoneia,
Calar a bayeniia^
Capacete^
morriao,
VisHray

Gorjal, or gola^
Petto dt irwms^
Ceurdqa^
Efpalddr^
Cvffolite^
Brogult,
EJcldo,
Adiga^

Saya dt mdlha^
Hey d(t iffl^as^ •

Ariuta.

G^nerah

Tenintc gew^rM,

Sargento mor dt batMtka,
Sarginto^
Sargento mor^
Marifcdl^ or Tnaritkil^ .
Me/ire de cimpo gmitil^
Coronet^

Mefire de campo^
Coronel de injimtart^f
Official de guifrM^
Brigadeiro^
Teninit eorMii^
Ajudante defapgilft^ fkor^
Ajudinte de tenenU 4h m^f
dfcdmpo.

Tt

Xo ^lalntih i)ie foorf *
The han4le of a fwwL
The pommei of a AmonL
The hilt of^a iimci.
The blade of a fword.
To dap M€'ft kami M miSi

fword.
To kill.
To wound.
Y»ro«t.
To fack. -
A iMniftrd w
A bayonet.
To fix the bayoneU»
A helmet*
A morrion*

The ^i^or ^f m \aMm^
The gorget.
A breal^^laic*
A cmrafi.
The back-plate«
A corflet.
A buckler*
Afiiield.

Dagger, a Oiort f Wwd*
A coat of mail.
The king at arms^vr iMf ^

heralds^
A herald,
A general.
A lieutenant geniftl.
A major general.
Aferjeant;
Major.

Marfhal.

Mailer de camp jgtmw^^
^Colonel.
Matter de camp.
Colonel of foot.
An officer.
Brigadier.

Uetiten^RtJcolwpK

Adjutant.
Aid de camp,

■

Capita,

GRAMMAR

S9

Captain.

Gapllkicf #• ttfpHaiAif .

Lieutenant

Contet. *

Enfigm

Colours. '

Standard.

Tofto de ca/Mh

Cornita^

Aljirts^

BanJeiraSf

Mfianddrte^

Atfires decavalaria f •! Infe Standard-bearer.

o eftanddrtCi
« Pagado/^ ^' Fay>illiiej

Pravedor^ 4os mantimcntos Purveyor.

de hitna armidm^
Commjfdrio^
Commffirio gerdl^
Engennei/o^

guatUt nujlri^
ib9 tk €sfUidrM,
Tmmtir, #pi rstmli
- Tamior ou o que t oca iamior^
iafuifi^

Ccrdeis de iami6r^
y Toques de tambor^
Tocdr 9 imMtt
Alvprdda^ ou gennrdii '

Mojira^
Pyfar mojlra^
Trombita^
^ TrombeteirOf ou trombitti
PifanOf

S«ld9,

Soldddo^

Commiflary.

Commiflary-generat.

EnginMf.

§[uarter-mafier«.

Dntm.

A dnMMNt.

Drum-ilicks.
Drum-ftrings.
Thebeaiitrfa Anigt
To beat a At^m,
The general, one «i( fltA Wik
of the drum. ^

Miifter;

To mufter, torevitlrigliiis.

A trumpet.

A trm6pem\

A fifer 9f ift»

Wagci, 9r pay f«r f<»f (llM«

A foldier.

Soldado queejla A s$9ti9liiite. Soldier on-duty*

Entrdr de gudfda^

To mount, or g9 upon ike

guard.
Dutyv centtfiii.

Y-

Senttne'lla^

Blocdtf or bloquedfi.

Jnfdnit, or ivMiti nk pt^

GranadiirPt

Bigtdi,,

Dragao,

Sotdadp di cm;m,

Montdr a eavdllot

To block up.
A foot folditri
Grenadier.
Whilkcrs.
Dragoon*

Trooper, or horfe fol4itf.
^ To get on horfebaftll.

40

PORTUGUESE

Guirda dapeffSa reih or

archeiro^
Cowraceirot

FuxiUiro^

Alabardeiro^

Gcnisero^

Soldado armddo com linfa^

Soldado que leva pique^ or
piquiiro^

Befteiro^ ou soldado qutpcli^
ja com bifta^

PtoneirOf

Mineiro^ ou minddSr^

Bombardciro^

O tiro da artilhariat ou a
espdfo que a bala despa^
rada corre ; Alcance^

Artilkeiro,

A irte da artilharia^

Generil dc ariilharia^

Voluntirio^

RecrHtaSt

Explorador^ ou corredSr dc

txirciio^
Espia^
que leva vweres io exir"

cito^ ou vivandeiro,
Soldado que/ax correrias^

Timbdle or atab&U^
Infanteria^
Cavalaria^
Cavalaria ligeira^
Vangiiarda^
Cfrpo de batdlhaf
Rctagudrda^
Cirpo de resirva^
Corpo deguirda^
Pique te^

■ • /

To alight.
Lafe-guard-maa.

Cuifalfier.

Muflceteer.

Fufelier.

Halberdier.

Janiflary.

A fpearman:

.A piketnan.

Crofa4K>w«inan.

A pioneer ••
Miner.

A bombardier.
Gunfliot, or the fpace (•
whichafliot can be tfarovm.

* ■ ■ • .

Matrofs, alfo a gunner, ^r

cannoneer.
Gunnery.

General of (he artiller}'.
A Volunteer. ,
Recruits.
Scout.

Sutler.

A marauder, a foldic^ that

goes a marauding.
Ki^lerdrum.
The infantry.
Cavalrv.
Light-horfe.
The vanguard. ,
The main body of an army.
The rear. . ,

The corps de referve.
The corps de guard.
The piquets of an army, or

piquet guard.
The wing of an army.
Battalion* ^

Deftacaminto.

G RAM M A R.

/

4S

JFila da Rcciaguards^ ^

Dereita^

E^uerda^

Tempos^

Exercicio,

Fechos^

Cao ou Perro da Armm^

Cronha^

A bicfiL da Arma^

cdno^

Varita^

PellotaS,

Batalkao^

Ala,

l)evisaSf

Linha ou Fiteira,

Cafadora^^

Flanco^

Mstado Mayor y

Frente^

Jnfantaria Ligtita^ .

m^ulamentcM^

B,ear rank*^

Right.

lift.

Motions.

Exercife.

Lock.

Cock.

Butt.

Muzzle. ^

The barrel.

Ramrod.

Trigg^.

Piatoon.

Battalion.

Wing.

Divifion.

Line.

Riflemen.

Flank.

Staff.

Front.

Light infantry.

Rc|;ulationf»

\ -

*m$ i i i»

\

tm .1

Palavras ^e Can»x»do. Military wordioJQommand.

Sentido^

Armas ao Homiro^

DesCanfar sabre as ArmitSf

M$t€T as Baypnttas^

Apreseniar as Armas^

Calar as Bayoneias,

Descanfar as Armas\

Tirar as Bayonetaji^

Cruzar as Armas,

Prtparar^

Carregar,

Ttrar o Cartucho^

E4corvar^

Tiraf as VareUp^

Atuchar o Cartuch$^

ArmasdCata^ ,

Attention.
3houlder arms.
Order arms.
Fix bayonets.
Prefent arms.
ChsCrge bayonets.
Support arms.
Unfix bayonets.
\ Pile arms.
Make reajy.
Load;

Handle cartridge. '
Prim'e. ^
Draw ramrods.
Ram down cartridge^
Fire*.

Prefent.

Meii

er

44 PORT

Miter e carticho^ '

logo por pellotS£St

Fogo de Filas,

Alto^

Format em linhe^

Fogo obliquo^

Formar^

Marcha, .

Ordem cerrada,

DesfiUr, '

Columna cerrada^

Man volta d esquerda^

Foliar,

Avanfar^

Cerrar as FiUiras^

U G UE5 E

•

Caft about.

furing by platoons*

File firing.

Halt.

To form in line.

Oblique firing.

Fonn.

March.

Clofe order.

To file.

Clofe column.

On your left backward wheel.

Wheel.

Advance.

Clofe the ranks*

Navegagao.

Navio, '

Ndo,

Ndo de guerra,
Navio ae carga^ on mer-
cantile
Navio veleirOf

Navio ronceiroj

Gale\

Galedfa,

Galeao,

Galeita,

Comitre,

Fragdta,

Carraca^

Fiijla,

Ptndfat

B&rca de pajfagem,

Barco^

Bdrca,

Canoa,

Gond$la,

E/quife,

Chaliipa, ou baldndnif

Chalipa pequina^

f ■ "

Navigation.

A (hip. ^

A laige (hip.

A line of battle (hip.

A merchant-Aip» a mer-
chantman.

A very good failcr, or a ftip ,
that fails well.

A bad failer.

A galley.

A galleafs.

A galleon.

A galliot, a fmall galley.

The boatfwain o( a gaHey.

A frigate.

A carrack.

AfoifJ.

A pinnace.

A ferry-boat.

A boat.

A bark, great boat.

A canoe.

Gondola, a fmall boat, much
ufcd in Venice,

A(kiff.

A (loop.

A (hallop.

Bergantim,

G RAM MA R.

4$

Bergantim,

Balfa^ *'

Capitdnia^

Almirdnta^

Armada^

Frota^

Efquadra^

A bordOf -

Proa,

Pcfas de proa para dar cafa

do inimigo^
Tart ana ^
BruiSu,
PatdxOf
Falua,

Batel, or bateira^
Ca rave la,
Sirte dt pataxo pdrajervigo

de hUrna ndo deguirra^
Nad de linha^
iSrudrda cojta^
Gale Ota da qualje I an f am as

bSmbas^
Navio que Jirve para andar

a corji^
Cor/ano^
' Hyaae,

Navio de tranfpirte^
Ndo da India Oriental^
Nao da India Occidental
Sirte de ernbarcafid pequena
Hallandeza dekum so mafiro^
Navio para levdr carvdo^
EnUfdritafiens pequinas^ •
, Embdrcafao^ ou barcogrdnde
' f^ Jirve pdra levar fa»

%endas a bbrdo^
EmbarcagdB grdnde, ou ca-
• ravcta^ que serve pdra

commercedr pella cifia^
Embarcagad de avizo^
Paquete\
BArco de pescar,
^ Ldncha^

A brigantine, or brig,

A float.

The admirars (hip.

The vice-admiral's (hip.

A fleet, a navy.

A fleet of merchant (hips.

A fquadron, partof a fleet.^

On board.

The poop, flern, or fteeragt.

The prow, ^r head.

Chafe guns.

A tartan. - ;

A fire-(hip.

A patache.

A felucca. .

A fmall bark, a wherry.

A caravel.

A tender.

A line of battleo(hip.
A guard -(hip.
Bomb-ketch.

Acruifer. "

A privateer.

Yacht.

A tranifport.

£aft India»mah.

Weft India.(hip.

A Dutch dogger. '

• ^ : '

A collier.

Small craft.

A barge, a lighter.

A coafting vefleU

Advice-boat.
Padcet-boat.
A fi(hing-boac.
Boat.

\..

Ktmft^^

44 PORT

Miter o carticho^

Fogo por pellotoe'Sf

Fogo it FtlaSf

jiito,

Formar em linhc^

Fogo obliquo,

Formar,

Marchdt .

Ordem cerrada^

DesfiUr,

Columna cerrada^

Meia volta a e'squerda,

Vcltar,

Avanfar,

Cerrar as FiUiras,

U G U E5 E

Caft about.

Firing by platoons*

File firing.

Halt.

To form in line.

Oblique firing.

Fonn.

March.

Clofe order.

To file.

Clofe column.

On your left backward wbeol.

Wheel.

Advance.

Clofe the ranks.

Navcgagao.

NavtOf

Ndoy

Ndo de guerra,

Navio de carga, ou mer^

cantil^
Navio veleirOf

Navio ronceiro,
Gale\
Galedfa,
Galeio^
Galeota,
Comftre,
Fragdia,
Carraca,
FUJla,
Ptndfa,
. Birca de pajfagem^
Barco^
Bdrca^
CanSa,
Gond$la,

Efquife,

Chalipa, ou baldndrq^

Chalipa pequina,

Navigaden.

A (hip. ^

A large (hip.

A line of battle (hip.

A merchant-Aip, a mer-

chantman.
A very good failcr, or a (hip

that fails well*
A bad failer.
A galley,
A galleafs.
A galleon.

A galliot, a fmall galley.
The boatfwainof'a gaHey.
A frigate.
A carrack*
Afoift.
A pinnace.
A ferry-boat.
A boat.

A bark, great boat.
A canoe.
Gondola, a fmall boat, mttch

ufed in Venice.
A(kiff.
A (loop.
A (haliop*

Berganiim,

G RAM MA R

4$

Berganitm,

Bai/dy '

Capitdnia^

Almirdnta^

Armada^

Frota,

Efquadra^

A bordo, •

f'Spti,

Proa,

Fcfas de pr 6a para dar cafa

do inimigo^
Tart ana ^
BruloU^
Patdxo^
Falua,

Batel, or bateira^
Ca rave la,
Sirte de pataxo pdra/ervigo

de hima ndo deguirra^
Nad de linha^
Gudrda cojta^
Galeota da qual/e Idnfamas

bSmbas^
Navio que Jirve p&ra andar

a corfo^
Corjarxo^
Hva^e,

Navio de tranfpirte,
Ndo da India Orientdl^
Nao da India Occidental
Sirte de embarcafio pequena
Hoilandiza dekum so majiro^
Navio par a levdr carvao^
EnUfdrtafiens pequenas^ .
EmidrcafaS^ ou barcogrdnde
'' f^ Jirve pdra lev&r fa^

%endas a bordo^
Embarcagdd grdndtj ou ca-
• ravcla^ que serve pdra

commercedr pella cifia^
Embarcagad de avizo^
Paquete\
Bdrco de pescar^
LdncAOf

A brigantine, or brig.

A float.

The admirars (hip.

The vice-admiral's ihip.

A fleet, a navy.

A fleet of merchant fiiipi •

A fquadron, part of a fleet,-

On board.

The poop, fiern, or fteeragt.

The prow, or head.

Chafe guns.

A tartan. - ;

A fire-fliip.

A patache.

A felucca. .

A fmall bark, a wherry.

A caravel.

A tender.

A line of battle* fliip.
A guard-fliip.
Bomb-ketch.

Acruifer. * .

A privateer.

Yacht.

A transport.

£aft India»man. -

Weft India.fliip.

A Dutch dogger. '

A collier.

Small craft.

A barge, a lighter.

A coafting veflel.

Advice-boat.

Padcet.boat.

A fi(hing-boat. ,.

Boat.

Remax^

♦ %

PORTUGUESE

49

Simos.

Pa do fim0^

Sentina^

Laftr^. 9u Z^ffiK

Laftdr, ou Umfar'la/lp0m To balM a (hip.

Oars.

The blade of the oar.
The well.
Ballaft.

A triaft. ^ •

The main maft.

The mizen mafi.

The fore maft.

Tha iMwrpcift, #r bok(pci».

The roinid-top^ naMMOfw or

fcuttle of a maft.
The keel.
A yard.
The vard-arms.

MofhpM^ or inw^rtp,
Majlrogrdnde^

Maftrodo HtۤiHkf

Gurupes^

Givea^

Ouilha,

rerga^ ou tntind^

LaiZf ou extremid0dt4 dm

Prdnchas^ que cih r um ok Side-planks, orfideof afli^

costddos do navia it^pirH

defira*
Vela*
Vila mijtra,^ or m vfU (k The main fiieet,

mqftro grdnd^ '
Vila da Gdvea^
Vila do joanete 4^ wdfipQ

grander
Papaj^igos^
Mezena,

Gala, ou vela d$ eimm dk Mizen-taji-*l«iL
mezena^

A fail.

The main-top-fail.
Iftuft-lOfNgaUaAt.iaik

The mizon and foreJGiSi
Mizen-failJ

Traquite^

Velicho, ^

yoanete do traqiiite^

Cevadiira^

Vilalattnai

Fa%erforf(^ dk ^Ha^

Mqftareos, The lo|HPaft«^ 9^ l0irpUftnt<

mafis.
Majlario i# IIMUM^ Wr m$r Mi^W-topHmiU

Tbd fim4aik

Tbei^Bt.{a«l.

A (hwM^ of QHitio% fiA»

Jlareo da gita^
PoTtinhbla^ ^
Bandeiras^
Flimmuias ou g/ttkfpJ^Hs^

ApoiihMey
The colousfl^

Streamers, pendant^.

By wda is Qt^a»69^c$ ineant the Aip itself.

JgilkM

Q%,XU MAR.

4¥

Bttacola^

Cu^ftck fdrriia^

EfcotilkdB^

Cqflillo de popa,
Caftillo de j^rQ4k.
Garrar a W^Q^v *

«

dncora,

Mttir a dncora n^ Id^iOt

. ou boUdepois de Uvwtih*

dncora de e/Pir^n^A%
Unkas da dncora^
Argila da dncora^
Enir a dncQra a piqw^x
jimdrr0^

Picar^ ou coridr as s^mAi^^A^
Sonda^ ou prumo,
Cutelos^

Bqfina^ -

Prepdrdr hum naviQi 4^ pfr

fas^ cdrdaSf &c.
Piloio,
ETcrivad^
Pilotdgem^
Carta de maredr^
Capitis. .
GfpitdS (Anif^^,
Ct(ntramejlre.
AfarinheirOf
Camarite.
Marinhetr^^Uth,Uima^4dw

Jormenta.
Borrdfca.
fi^nanfa.
talmaria,

The mariner'toMpftbi

Bitude.

Thft (wnt oC » iypw

Helm, or rudder.

The whip, (»r whip-iftft

Deck.

F4ufli fore and aft.

The batches ; fimtlba.

A room by the hatches^ t«

keep the prq^iftdlM*,
The hmd caftle. ^

The iov9 ctAk^
To dnne ; or Miktm % fkkp

drags her anclwif «
The anchor*
To boat the anchoiCk

A kfi4gf V.

Sh«et wi^ou

The flooju 0t£ v% mcIwL.

The ring of a^ anchou

Is for the apchortghtai ymt

A cable*

TocutthjC cables.

The founding Iead#

Studding fails*

The tide.

A fpeaking tmmpet.

To rig a (hip.

J?iIo4.'«f ^mmm^

A purfer*

Seab'Cmrt.
A captain*

A ho^ibmim^
Afiiilai.

A C^MIb^ '

A meflmater

A tempeft*
A ilorm.
fair weather.
Cain.

r4nto

48 PORTIPGUESE

Viniotm pipa^

Nawo arraf&io em popdy

. DerrSlay
Alar a bolina^

It pda bolina^

No da holina^
BarlavintOy
Ganhdr a barlavento^
Barlaventidr^ ou dtitar a

barlaventOy
' Sotavento^
^Jcovens^
EfcStaSt
t^eldme, cordas^ e o mdis qut

he necejfario para pre-

par at hum navio^
Qirda,
Enxdrcias,
Arribar^
Bombordo^ •
Efttbirdc,

Li.

Meter de 16,

Bomba.

Bar a bSmba,

B&lde p&ra deitir igva na

bomha^
Efcdma que sake da bomba

depots de ter tirddo a

dgoa,
Navioj cUja igoaje nao pide

tirdr com a bomba.
Manga de couro por onde

fine a igoa da bdw^a,
Brifo da bSmba, '
FarSi,
Vinto,

The wind full a-ftern, a fore-

wjnd.
A (hip that fails before the

wind.
The coutfe, or way of a (hip.
To (harp the main bowling,

to ]baul up the bowling.
To tack upon a wind, fail

upon a bowling.
The bowling knot.
Windard.
Togct the wind.
To ply to windward.

Leeward.
Hawfers.
Tacks.

Tackle, or tackling, the rig-
ging of a (hip.

A rope.

Shrouds.

To put into a harbour.

Larboard.

Starboard.

Loof. .

To loo& or keep the (hip

nearer the wind.
A pump. .
To pump.
Pump-can.

Pumpfuck.

A (hip that is ftoaked.

Pump-dale.

The 'pdmp handle.

Lieht, lantern, or Uehthottfe.

wind.

R66

<<j:r a mm aa.

410

■m \ mm *J •-■

R6sa da Agiilha^ ^ 4e^
VcntQi.

Norte^

jNorte j^a nordifle^

Nor nordejtf^

'^lf$rdefie4^ a nMt^

fJordme,}

HordefU /^a lefie, .

JUsndrdejie^

JJfU. 4^ a'nbrdffitf"

Susuefte^ •'^*'

. Sul /^a suejle^

Suit ••'•

Sul 4* a sudoifte^ ■^'■

Sufudoefte^ -•••'

Sudoe/teif^Ml^ -^-:'^:''\^
. Sudoifte^

Sudoijtc 4' a oifU^ • '

Ces sudoejte^ - -

Oefte 4' a sudoSftcr

0(fu,

OifU 4* a noToifte^

Ois noroS/te^

Noroefte 4' a oifie^

Noroifte, ^ ' ' :^

Noroefu ^ a nortCt

'Nor noroefte^

N6rie 4* a naroefU^

Vento travifSt PR fraveffi^^
Dar a emiarcagao (i travifs^,
Pairdr^ .

Esf0r4^,
Colher hum cibo^
Largdr mats cibo^
Ahrtr dgoa^ -
Faxir ag&ida^
Arpdo,

' ■ t

* \

.\

\

■> .. .

» ' • ■ •! » . •

7%e Fiy of the Mati»^^

^; by E.
N. N. E.
N. E. by N.
N..E.. .

•N. E:i)y :£.

•E. N;«/ .
E. by N.
Eaft.
E. by S.
£• S. £•
S. E. by E.
S. E:
S. E. by S.

■fi: «:£.■■•■■ '

S.byS;

South. '

S.byW.

S. S.W. , .

S. W. by S.

S.W.

S. W.byW. .

W. S.W.

W.byS.

Weft.

W. by N.

W.N. W.

N. W.byW. ,

N.W.

N.W.byN.

N. N. W.

N. by W.

Contrary wind.

To hull. '

To ply to and again *a ami'*

ftation.
Beak.

To toil a cable.
To pay more cable.
To leak, or fpring a leak.
To take in frefli water.
A grapple.

■A

P O R T U G tJ ES E

50

Arpdr hum navio^

Pedfo de lona breada que se
poem ao redSr do mdftp e
das bombas para que a
dgoa nio penctre^ ; *

PaffadSr^

Cor da com quesepren4^oioU^
ou Idncha dpopa do navio,
Afito, ;

jtbadernas^ '
Abita^ \\

Emprodr^

Guinir o naviOf

Parte superior^ ou mats dlta

da pita de hum navio,
ApagafanieSt
Arreigidas^
Brioes^
BarredSuras^
BartidSurOy
Bajtdrdot^
Bigota^
Botalos^
BraceSr^
' Brdgos^
Bragueiro^ or verguiiro.
Bran does t
Bugdrdas^
Cacholas^
Cadafte^
Caderndl^

Cavirnas^

Colhedores,

Compafdr hum navii,

Coffouros^

Crdca^

EJidr hum naviolanfddo d

banda^
'Cabrefiante^
Darcdfa^

To ficrapple a (hip.

Tarpaulin. - '

A fidd, or pin of ironio opea

the ftrands of rope^ ,
Boat rope, or gift-rope#

^ - "■

A boatfwain'ft call. ;

Nippers.

Bits.

To fteer right farif^rd, to
turn the prow ft^ght. for-
ward. ^

To yaw or maka jaws. .^,

The tiaffinrel.

Leech-lines.

_ • #

Puttocks.

Buntljnes.

Bow-ftudding-faiii.

Boat's ikit.

Parrels. ^

A dead-eye.

Studding-fail-boioms.

To brace. , »

Braces. >

The rudder's rope^

Back-ftays. . ^

Breaft.hooks.

Cheeks.

Stand-poft.

A large block with more ifa|9

one (hive.
The floor-timb^n's.
Lines of the (hrouds.
To triiT^ a fliip.
Trucks.
The . foulnefs of the {hq>*i

bottom.
Is for a (hip td heel.

The capilan.
.To chafe.

Curtlci^

i n H A MJM' A. R.

'/

Ml

*•» ■>■

\s da guamifdif
fmdes,

iroie Jo cirurgidS^

« > • <

»
•^

The kneet •
Chain* wales.
Boat's (kit.
ScupperJioies.
The bold of a 0up.
Hammock. ^
Detk i^r quarter-deck.
Cockpitvi /

Freignt*

• < • f

m fue o captido tttiht Sailing orders.
radar dvi&t • ' '^
fdm de imbarcirft^

Iha navdif

• V>| I

^^ *•■«< , ^ M J

« 'j • • • «

Embarkation.
Landmg.
Embargo.
Aiichdnige^ "
Naval battle.
c;//a mexertfueirHt^M 'de- A Ihip for efpiali or lodk out.

To veer.
Toftrikefail.
Tb^ ftrike tlie flag^

ar, ou arreir,

ir as vclas^

ir baniiirai • -

ntSr firro^ leva^ dncp" To weigh Aachoir.

r, levar firto^ Uvar^Ji^

levari

i -n

- • a '. • t A •

•• i

rr a pffa,
de Uva^' <'

'» ri

The afiion of ilreiffbing ar

taking up tb« jinenc^f.
To move a gun tolMMs ftar*^

.board or brixMritv^^
Tbefignalgun.

rar, ou levdr di reHfUi, To tow.

To fplice.

f«, * Voyage.*

S cdjo capUiaoie^ cdrids Letters of marque

represalias^

r cofiiraSf

\gem,

igeiro

enar hUm navfo,
r as coftiroi do navio^
a eijia^
:dr a nSB^

fragar^

frigior « • '

i9, on wifHre de ndi, ^

To careen a (hip.
To pay the (earns of 9 0iip. -
To run a.ground^r on ftore.
Is form ihip to roll, ^r to float

in rough v^ien "^
Tc fufier a wrieck^ to be

wrbckeid.
Shipwreck* . :
Shipma&er% v v ^

PORTUGUESE

52

Carpenieiro dc naws%
EHaUtro^
£mbaf cdr^
Embdrcdr,

Grumete,

Rapdx que ferve copto mof9

do navio,
R(iduz que Jerve ao cfi^ido^
Calajdte^

Calajetdr hum navto^
Cala/eiOt
Arftn&U ou ribeira das ndos,

Emmaftedr hum nofviQt

Remdr^\

Remador^

Forgddo^ ,

lenjeira^
(arinheiroit f i^da a ^uifA
genu quepertinudo navipf

Chu/ma^

Guarnifdo da ndo^

"• . - . - - . . . .

JokritKirga-do navU,

J9alepih4tir

QuadrdjkU^

Outdnte^ '-' ' »

I^^rer^

Paravdnte^

Situa^dd de hima eifla^ ilha,

&c. a re/petto dfi quatquir

outro tugdr^
Qjuarente^ar
£aliza,
Ldrga^
Amardri
Cafdr a vi/Mf

Cacear hum navU^

Zanfdf hum nwU 4^ nAr^

I J

Shipwright.

Stocks.

To {hip.

To ^ aboard, to i^ ili^

pmg.
The meaneft fort of railoiBl;
» or ferrant to the failoi»«
Ship-1^.

A cabin-boy.
A calker*

Tocalkafcif-

Oakham.' ,

An arfenal; a ftore-houfti

dock-yard.
To fit a fliip, or .y^elt Willi

mafts. ; ,

Tx>ffow:..

Rower.

Galley-flave«i . ^

Steward. . ,

The crew of % ft^p, ,;. . . ;

• . ■■ -••>■.

Crew of gallfty flavor

M^nnes, foldier$ w^ fov*

on board of (hips. /'
Supercargo.
Croft.ftaff. - . .

Siiadrant.
alley's quadr^iil^
Aft.
Fore.
The bearing. \*

\ ■

; Quarantine.

Sea mark.

Larffe.

To hear qC

To turn the fail to Htm vini
fide. i, ^

It is faid of a fliip that is hur«
ried away from hcrtomfi
by flrong winds 9 tideSi £?^

To launch a ihip*

ToWrtwair; * \ i

^ hUrif

: 6 R^ MM A R^ I

Entrdr com vtnU fresco V To bear in tfae litHiour*'

bom no potto ^

5S

Birdo^

Birdo^ ou bdnda^

Navio dt alto bordo\

Cifa^

Pre/a, ou tomadia^

Efldr dt vtrgaddlto^

Tact.

'Broadfide*

Fifft rate mait of wai,

Chace.

Prize, or captQre. v

To ftand for the6ffing.

Vint OS dt monctm^ ou girotit Tr^d^ winds*

Anddr dt conferva^ To keep company together.

jDar, oxxfazir humtirdo.

to fail under a convoy.
To tack tde {hip, #r tack
about, or to bring her head
about.
Efidr a capa^ ou porfe £" To lie by at fea, to back the
cdpa

fails.

t-*^

«a

Do Coniiii6Tcio,.e do que Iht Of Tradt^ and of Things re^

pert£nce

CSnta,

Conta dtvindaf

Fazcr h4ma cSnta^

Ptdir contaSf

Daraconta^

CSnta corrinttf

Dinhtiro dt contddo,

Fundes Publicos^

qut ntgocia tm comprit t Jobber

vtndtr acfdnSf
BalldnfOf
Fdrdo^
Mdnco^
BanqutirOf
(hiiora^

ralido, ou fuebrddo^
^^ff^f ou concerto^
irica^
Portador^

LanfadSr^

que Idnfa mais^

Letra dt cdmbio^

lating to it^

Account.
Account of falet.
To caft up an account.
To call to an account.
To pay on account.
Account current.
Ready money.
Stocks.

Balance*
B^Ie.
Bank.
Banker.
Bankruptcy.
*^ Bankrupt.
Bargain.,
Barter.
Bearer.
Bidder.

Out bidder. '

Bill of exchange, a draught.

Ntgocidr h4ma Utra diiim^ To negotiate a bill of ex.

Ho.
CSnta,
Partida,
Conhidmlnto^

change.
Bill.
Parcel.

Bill of lading.
•Dj

EJmttiTV

54 P 0,RTV GVESE

Efcrit&r4ii4^ abrigagao^ Boadi engagement;

GudrJaiivroSt ou o que em Boo^-keepe^•

kima cdsa de negocto iem

a feu cargo os Itvros^
Occupafio^tx negicio.
Comprador^
Dinheiro^
Pirte^OMcarreto^

Bufinefs.
Buyer.
Cafli.
Carriage!

Caxeiro, ou o que gudrda a A caOuer, or cafli-keeper

caixa^ , • '

CentOf

Certiddfff
^ Vdnibio^ -
Fre^uex.
Gaftos^
BardtOt

^

Recibo da aljandega^

CQmmiffiL9^

Mercancta^

CompromijfQ:^

Con/i^nafdo,

Confumo^

Conteidot

Contrdto^

Correfbondintia^

Gorrejpondente^

Preco^

Alfandega^

Guardas d' alfdndega^

Cenh

CerrificMe.

Change, exchange*

Chap, chapman, or cuftomer.

Charges.

Cheap. "

Dear.

Clearance, or cocktt.

Commilfion,

«

Commodity.

Compromife.

Conugnment.

Confumption. , .

Contents.

Contraa,

Correfppndcnce*

Correlpondent.

Price, rate,.

Cufiom-hpufe.

Cuftom-houfe officors. '^

Guardas que ejldo vtgidnda Tidefmen, or tide waikH*
aie que os navios^fftejao
de/carregddos,

Feitoria^

EfcritorU^

CreditOf

AcredSr^

Correnie,

Co/turn^

Data^

ContratadSTf

Xrdffgo, oMjnegkiQ.

Dividat

DevedSr^

Dinheiro defemb^tcdd^t

, ^ • * *■»

; ^ i <

L^^

/-•"• *»

Fa£lory, fettlement,

Countmg.faoufe.

Credit.

Creditor.

Current.

Cuftom.

Date.

Dealer».

XX^^Hog, traffiek*

Debt.

Debtor. , ^

Disbttrfement.

Dtfcount*

BxtriSo,

X

- -tJ R A M MAR.

• » •

Jbinkeiro que ft pagd ads Primage.

marinheiros pof tSrem

carregddo o navio,
Capital^

Fir das c ddnos,
Impottdncia^
Importancialiquida^
Promejfa^
Bens,

Pontualiddde^ '
CSmpra^
Rectio,
Re&dmbiOf

Arbitro^^OM louvddo^
Louvamento^ ou arbitrto^
RegatdOf
Quitafdd^
Remijsa^
Venda das coufaspor miida^

comajdzem as mercadires

de retalho^
Mercador de retdlho^
Riquezas,
Venda^

Padrdo^ \

AmSftray
Sinfie^
Ldcre^
. AjuJlaminU^ de cinias^

Mercador ^e tern toja^

Livro em que o mercador de Shop-booK.

loja temfuas cSntas^
ContrabandiJ{a\
Fazinda de conirahindo^

SV

Principal, or capital.

Lodes and damages.

Proceed.

Neat proceed.

Promife.

Property.

Punctuality;

Pui'chafe.

Receipt.

Re-exch^nge.

Referee or umpire.

Reference.

Regrater.

Releafe.

Remittance.

Retail.

lletaiter.

Riches, wealth.

Sale.

A pattern.

Sample.

Seal.

Sealing-wax.

Settlement of tccoiintl^

Shop.

Shop-keeper.

\

Fazer cohttabdndo\

Smuggler.

Contraband, or probibitedf

goods, goods imugglc4» of

rtin.

To run, to fmuggle
good^.
Modelo^ eu Jiil dos pizos e Standard meafure.

t^ J L^ Lt'

medietas piblicas^
Armazem or Almazifih
Sobrefcreverite^
Sobjcrip/do^
Tara,
Fazindd rom.

Warehoafc.

Subfcriber..

Subfcription.

Tare.

Trafh of goods<

Risc$s

P OR t VGU E H R

6«

InveniariOt

In/u^cienda, oufdlta it

meyospara pagart
Factira^
Arras^
Efcritura dc arrendaminto^

Arrendador./

Livro de razidi^

Empre/limOt

Dinheiro cmpreftddo^

Cdrta^

Sobrefcrito da cdrta^

Fechdr hutna cdrta^

FechdrhUma carta comjinite^

Mala em que o correii trda as

cartas^
Hypoihecat
Acredor hypOtJucirioi
que hypothlca\
Fiador^
Pagamento^
Falta de pagamenta^
EfcrUo ie Mvida^
Dono^ '
Pacote^
Serapilhcirat
Brahinte,
Mdgo ae cartas^
Compankeire de alguem np

negocio, onjocio,
Sociedade, ou companhia n$

negido^
PenhSr,
Contrdto do fegiro dc mer-^

cancids^'
Seg^ro, • "^

Segurar^

Protejiar Mma leira^
Ateitdr huma letra/
ProtefiOf
Smear Aimaittra^

*•»

Inventory*
Infolvencjr.

JokilurOrf

L«ffee. * '

Ledger-bodk.

Loan.

Money letiki

Letter.

The direction of a letter.

To taakc or tlo^Sip H kttef •

To make and fetl tip alettttf*

Mail,

• ■

Mortgage*

Mortgaged. '

Mortnerer.

Bail. ^,

Payment.

Non-payment. s

Note, or ptoinlffatf iKftr.

Owner.

Pack< a trdk.

Packcloth, wrapper.

Packthread.

Packet of letteirfr.

Partner.

Partnerfhip.

Fawn, <7r ple^lfB.*
Policy of murantt;

Inrurance.

To infure.

To proteft a tulh^

To accept a bill*

Proteft.

To draw a bill.

, A » V»

/

Correoaonde/elanfSoasedrtas Poft-office.

Correo que leva. cirta9^ . Poft-man, or letltt' tslftfJMr.

Porte de cartas, Poftagc.

Premio ou dinheiro ^wtjh Premium.

BiniSir0

» • r

=t>R A M M A R.

toinheiro que ft pagd ads Primage.

marinheiros pof terem

carregddo o navio^
Capital^

Pirdas e danos^
Impottdncia^
Importancialiquida^
Promejfa^
Bens,

Pontualidide^
Compra,
Recibo, . .
Re&dmbio^

jirbitro,' ou louvdao^
Louvamento, ou arbitrio^
Regatdo,
Quitafdd^
Remijsa^
Venda das coufas par miida^

comajdzem os mercadires

de retalho^
Merc a dor de retdlho^
Ri^uezas^ ,
Venda,

Padrdo, ' \

AmSftroy
Sinfie^
Ldcre,
.Ajujiaminto^ de cinias,

MercadSr ^e tern toja^

Livro em que o mercador de Shop-booki

loja temfuas tpntas^
Contrabandtfta\
taxenda de conir&l&ndo^

%i

Principal, or capital.

Lodes and damages.

Proceed.

Neat proceed.

Promife.

Property.

Punctuality;

Pui'chafe.

Receipt.

Re-exchknge.

Referee or umpire.

Reference.

Regrater.

Reieafe.

Remittance.

Retail.

lletaifer.

Riches, wealth.

Sale.

A pattern.

Siample.

Seal.

Sealing-wax.
Settlement of tccounts^
Shop.

Shop-keeper.

••. ^ ♦.

Fazer contfnbdndo.

Smuggler.

Contraband, ^r probibitedf

goods, goods imuggic4» 0f

rtm.
To run, to fmuggle pi

good^.

Modelo, eu Jiil dos pizos e Standard meafure.

medidas publicas,
Armazem or Aimazemt

Sobrefcrevente^
Sobjcrip/do^
Tara,
Faz^dd rotm,

Warehoafc.

Subfcriber..

Subfcription.

Tare.

Trafh of goods<

■•■':A t'l

S - T

£8

PORTUGUESE

R(fco.

Ufufdrio^
mra,

MercancidSf

Avaria^

Diratos^

TribHto, on contributfdo^

Tdxas^

Stfa.

Siftiro,

Cdes^

Dircito quefe pdga^por de/i

embarcirfazindas nocaes^
Collector do mi/mo direiio^

ou tribHiOf
DizimoSf , <

Dizimador, ou dizimciro^
Lou fa tndrida^Jtm J^r da

China^
Mercador deatacddo^'
Venda qucfefazpor partidas^

Da Mo^cla, ^s Dinheiro Por-
.tugijfiz. •

Thii mark * is prefixed

* Real,

Des reis, '- ,

Vintem,

Tofido^ Qu 5 vintems,

iiofidtns, ou hum crufado^
rutado novo^ ou Hj^mntems,
8 Tvjoens, -

Huin quarto de Suro, ou 12
ioflms,

* mitreis, ou 10 to/leens,
16 TofioenSf

Mtya, moida de ouro,
S^aoo, ou 32 tqftoens,
moida de ouro de 4,800^
Pifa de 6,400.

ou 12,900.'.

4

Rifle.

Intersil.

Ufance.

Ufurcr. •

Ufury.

Wafer. '

Wares. "

Worth, or value.

Average.

Duties or cuffiom.

Cefs, tribute^

Taxes.

Excife.

Exciletnan.

Wharf.

Wharfage.
Wharfinger.

Tithes.

Tithe-gatlierer.
Dutch ware. ^

•

Wholefale dealer.
Wbolefale.

Of the Portuguefc Coin*

to the imaginary money.

A ree, equal to 7^^/.
10 rees, l^irf.
A vintin, i^^^.
A t^ftoon, 6\d.
A crufade, si. 3^.
A new crufade, 2j. 87^.
8 tefioons, 4J. 6d*
12 teftoons, 6j. ^d.

A milree, ^$. y^d.
16 tefioon8y^9^. ^,

Half moidore, i^i. 6^.
32 tefioons, 18 J. '
A moidore, i/. /x.
Joanefe, 1/. tSs. '
128 tefioons, 3/.. 19/^.

v\

? • ' • » ♦.

G R A MM A It.

S9

■•— 1-

C O L L E C

D£.

/ 0*

5A0

Adigios Portugueses.
jf A'goa dd^ a dgoa leva,

Na dgoa tnvSIta pifta pef-

ca

dSr,

Eftd c6mo petxe if &goa^
Trazir a dgoapdra moinho^ '
Levdr igoa do mdr^
As igoas tfidd biixas,
^ gue nao podt aljit^ dives

foffrer^
Come cSmo hum aldrve^
Meter a pdlha na albdrda^
AiataS iofiddo antes morio
- auecanfido^
ffuma difgfdqa alcdnga a

outra^
Efidr na aldea^ e nao ver as

cdfas^

Quern traidlka, tern alfiya^
rallO'lheem dlkos^ rejponde^

me em bugdlhos^
Em tempo jnevddo dlho vale

kumcavdllo^

.i..

fl'

r V .

COLLECTION

OF

Portuguefe Provcrbi.

TTTHAT It ffot over the

^^ devil's bck will be
fpent under his belly; alfo
lightly come^ liffhtfy go.

To fi(h in troub&d waters,
(to make a benefit of pub«
lie troubles.)

He lives in cloVer.

To bring grift to the null. -

To carry coals to Newcafile.

{le or yx^ is at a low ebb.

What can't be cured muft bft
endured.

He eats likA a ihrefhicr.

To cheat, to impbfe ^upon.

A dark forrel horfe will die
befoire he'll jade.

One mifchief draws on ano-
ther.

We fay ; you can't fee wood

for trees: ^r to be like the

butcher that looked fof hit

kn^fe when he had it in his

^ mo^lh•

He that wbrks has farniture.

I talk of chalk and yoo' of

ipheefe. .. .'

Garlic k in ithe foggy winillier
is as good as a horfe ;^ it
i^eans that ^Kck if a^
good defencefor ^travellers
^\v^nft dampaeft and cold
weather. " . . !

Tt%9

•^ »

6d

P O R TUG UBS E

Tito coma hum alho^

Sia clma, sia pdlma^

As ftiff as garlick ; t^at is a
Wattfey, ftroBg, rebtift^r-
fon;

As you brew, even fo bake.

Na almoida Um a barha At a fale keep your beard on

quida

Pagir OS altos de vasio.

your 4iiiii> fill I if tbat is, 1ft
not your beard wag too
fad in bidding, left you
overbid and repent.
To have but little or no fenfe
at air.

Qucm dmaa.beltrdo^ ^^^^ Love me, love my dog.
CAda qual lima sin senuU Like will to like, or l!k^

hdniCt

loves to liker-

TambimosatneafidoscSmem Threatened folks eat bread;
piB^ we fay, threatened folks

^ ^ live long.

^Snias de pirto^ t amigos de Even reckonings make long

Unge,

fricDds,

NHo se dtviperder a amizdJe An inch breaks t^ fquarcs.
, par dd cd aquelld pdlkq^

'2^tt bom he fedro como seu Like raafter, like man.

imOf

Furidr carnefro, edaros We fay, to (leal a goefe and

pis felloamSr de Diosi give tke giblets in almi.

Kern hum dedofa% mdi^ nem One fwaflow does not wtkdkt

fummer. Unahifuhdomon
fac'U ver^ fays Horace,
To fweep {lakes.
Naareaabirtaojiftoplcca^ That is, it is opportunity

that makes the thief*
JDehum arguelrOfJazer hum We fay to make moomains

kima andonnha verad^
tevdr pdlhasy e ardlhos^

' cavajtleiro^

of mole-hills.

i^om drtt^ a com eng&no se That is, all a man's life is a

vive meyo anno; com en- cheat.

.; gdid^ e com arte si vive a ■

%tirafdrte,

jQfiem a boa drvore se cAiga^ That is, he that relies on good

tifd sSmbra o cibre worthy people, reaps a bt-

• ' nefit.

A'sfioiitSrtOf cevidaio rdbo^ A day after the fair, or after

meat, mullard.

Asho iqui tern Jimt^ cArdos ^ We fay, hunfr}* dogs will eat

^mc, ' dirty pudcung.

ssp^

\

GRAM ATrAlR.

«1

Sip^ 4i^ w/ »#? Hjit fir a

Mats quero dsno que^e live;
> qtUcatfdUif^Henuderrukii

Miis val mdavinfa que i^

sentenfa^
Quern nap 4€ ^veniura^ nao
AndMca^uilo^ netn enkm&la
Nao deitis aectiie nofoga^
USca nao admiiU JiadoT^
JDa mdo a ioca M fifde a

JEm boca cerrddm nao intra

mSsca^ I

Qjuem tern boca vdi a Rima^

Pilla bSca mirre o^pefx^^

Cdda bofariiiheSro loum ^^^

alfinetes^ .m- ..$
Huem teiH^auHr^9 egdftacin-

co^ nao na miftirboU^ nem

, ^ibolsinho^ , .^

jC^bdrvdipella vinhaforonde

:;..V^/ « fn^y, vii.ajilha^ '

Matdr dStks c^lkosde Mma

cajadada^' i,/
Quern cdnta^ sens mdUs ef-

pdnias

fieiidr a cdpa &0 i6uto^

yUta tlriy^ cM cda cdpa^

Good things are not fit for

fools.
Better be an old man's dar-

ling» thaJR 9:]^4>iilig VlailVf

warling.
It is better td agree att«0f

rate, than go to law.
Nothing venture, nothing

b^ve.
Ho not t)}F0w oil into the fire.
The >elly haa tf0 cars.
Much falls between the cup

and the lip.
A clofe mouth catches no

flies.
That is, a man may go ainy

where, if be has language

to {peak for himfidf and

aft: bis way.
Much talking brings- much

^lyoe.
£vi^ Blan thinks tus ^mth

geefe fwans.
H^.^hat haih four andipisnds

five bath no need of a

purfe.
Like father like fon*

We fay, to kill two birds
with one ftone.

The perfon who fings maekes
eafy his misfoTtuiies ; Uiat
is, finging cattfes him not
to reflefi on it fo much as
he otherwife would.

To throw one's cloak at the
bull; that is, to ventjure
all a man has to^ bve hip
life.

Let the king live, anddve
roe the cloak ; that is fpo-
ken of perfons who, under
a pretence of authority,
fob and phmder other peo-
ple, ana at the fapse 43mc

b't

P O RTU GU ES E

\ " . •

JtkMr it cdpa eahiJa^

'^d& com raivu dt seu done

Q^uem com c&ens st tdfffa^ €om

pHtgaj 9t Uv&nta; ^< *
J cirnt de^ lSb0 dinU dt cdi\

-.1 • •

f^itmjat cdsa na- prdca,
kuns diteni gut hi aUa,
Sutros que At baixa^- ■

Aeavdllo dddo nao ilhts

dintt,
Qutm^jfutr caySllosem tdcha^

stnitUt St %cha^
Na tSrra dos ci^osy o tor to

htriy^
Cobra boafdma^ t dtita^tt a

-dormir^
Faxtr as conths stm a kos^

ptda^
Dd contddo comt libo^

i 1

Em eisa dt ladrad naofdlles "
tm corda^

Do tinr^ Ikt sd/um as tor^
rtas, , r :

tice to the pbwer tefoM

• m their handls.

To be behind-hand in the
world.

A tx^d 4<3!g bites his own ttef-
ter ; there is no t rafting to

' madmen, ^rpeople inn ragcv

We fay; lie with beggars and
yoQ wiU get fleis*

That is, to return raiUng for
railing; or^ as our modern
proverb fays, give hiin a
Rowland for his Oliver^
the Latins fay, par pari
rtferrti '^ \ •• • ■ ^ ^)

That is, a man in public bu-
finess can't pleafe every
body; or as Solon fayMi
'tis rare thai A^efmen can

, all parties pleafe.

Never look in tbe mouth •#(
a gift horfe. .

Tis a good lioffe that lievei'
itunibles.

In a country oWind men/he*
that has one eye is the kidg^.

When your' name is up, ^ou
may lie a-bed till noon. ^ '

To reckon without the hof.
tefs I ^r ^sx^efay, the hoft.

The wolf eats of wbit. is
counted ; that is, thieves
will Aeal, though they
know it will be mi flea,
much mote if they thiid^
it will not.

You (hould not mention a
halter to any whofe rela«
tjons or friends have fiif-
fered by it ; that is, no man
(hould be hit in the teeth
of his dijgrace.

The thongs come out of Us

^ (kin^ t&t is, he pays for it.

Cortdr

x>

GU&^M^^.

9S

Coridr o veftido confSrme » To cut one's coat according

pAnno^

tot^ccfoth;

Cridi c'Srvo^ Hrttif^S'/ld o It is faid of a perfon that, b^.

jS/Ao^ ~ ing jreceived in difireia,

' ' defrsliidi or grows too great

f6r him that entertained

' ' him. . !

Tinia cilpa tcni ^ fadrdS The receiver! ii as bid as the
•' cdmd cofisentidSr,

thief.

Dddivas quetrdntio fhkqs. Gifts break rocks; that u,

' . « kindrifefs overcomes tic

. hardeil hearts; and bribes

! .. ^^ prefents corrupt the

' moft refolv>5d.

Melhorhifaxirde.baldeque It is better to work for oo-

tjlar ieb&lde^ | -v. :....t.__ ... ,

Dtitdr a%tite nojogff^

thing than be lazy and do

nothing at all. ,

To inike bad worfe. Hotact

fays, Oleum addtrt c amino.

NaoheodemotamfeioScimo We fay, the Hon is not fo

b pintao^

fierce as his picture.

Primeiro sao denies^ que pa- We fay, near is my coat, but
yintes^ ' tiearer is my fkin, 6?r. 7>-

rente hyji, netis proxifnus
Jum egomet mi At,
La vdi a lihgoa, dnde o dinte To fcratch where it Uches..

grtta^
f^uafidO' c&idas meter o dente Harm watch, harm catch,
cm segUTo\ iopariz o du ro^ Horace fays,

> — etfragili quarens illi^

dere dent em ^ ^

— OJfehdet folido

Ddr com alingoanos denies^ To contradift one's felf, to

belie. v

Qtiem nao Jhlla^ na0 o ouve A man may hold his tongue
Deos^ in an ill time ; aljjc> fpare to

fpeak and fpare to fpeed.
Veniira te di Deos^filho ; God^ give you good luck,
que saUr pSuco te vdfta^ child, for a little learning

will ferve your turn ; be-
caufe it is fortune that raif*
' \ ' es men more than merit.

CSdaqual porsi^e Deos por Every one for him felf, and

todos^
Em tons dias, Has tbr&Sp

God foe all.
The better days the better

H

PORT v^ Of y BS E

We fay, ' when two, Sufi4%t
com^ together,, tliiif j^>t-
ven

. ^ „ Money ^governs the worl^.

P h6mcfn> pfofStm% e Dios Man propofes. and God dif-

Para diM it sai c$rij0i
tuJo pide dinMrp^ ' *

dispSem^
DirmecSmo hum argandx^

poles.
He .»leepyike ^.dQjmpuff^

A torn enUndedor poucus pa- A worQib.dve wi^ is eoQqgib.
G4to escaldddo ia igoafria We fay/al^urnt child dreads

ka mtdot

the fire.

No escudclldr veras .q^m te That is, people's affeSions
quir h'em^ ou maL ! are difcovered by their Ii«

bcFality. ».
EsmoUu s63 MatikiuSt ts^ Charity begins at bonwe.
molou p&ra os seus^ t •

Nap ha mtlhor cspilho que o There is no better lopking
amigo velhOf glafs than an old frlenaj

that is, fuch a opc will not

flatter a man, but t^U Ipim

the truth.

Jfemeftopa com iifoens^ nem That is, converfatioa of wo-

fnolhir com varScns^ men is dangerous J it is not

good jefling with edged
tools.
falldr stm cuiddr^ he atirar To let one's tongue run, with- .

sem afrontar.

out reflecting oh whsit qiI(B
fays, is Ijlke ./hpotiq^ 'at
random.

Fdlla pouco e hem^ tirte hdo Talk little and well, and

por algucm^

I

ou'll be counted fome-

)ody \ that ii, you'll l(e
efteemed.
Ouim a Jama tem perdida^ He who has loft his reputs-

motto an da nefta vida^

tion is as good as devl

whilft living.

jf, quem mi fama tem^ nem Do not keep (rompajny with*
accomp&nhes^ nem digas nor be foi^d, oi one that
hem^ has an ill name.

. — » — —

Aproveitador de farilos^ ThSit is, one that faves at the

esperdifador de Jarinha^ fp'gRO' ^"d lets it run out

at 4he bung ; alfo, peniqr

wife and pound foolifli.

Th^y cap't fet tbe^r borfo

duem

Naojaum boBfarinha^

GRAM MA R.

«t

aperta^^
No afougue^ quern maljdlla^
mat oMVC^

Qjuem em mSis alto nida^
m&s presto se afoga^

Hospede com sol^ha honoris
Hospeda formosa^ Stdno fa%

a bSlsa, ^ • .

O hospede e o peixe aos ires

Mas Jide^

Horta sem dgoa, c^sa sem
telhddoy mother sem amor ^
marido sem cuiddde^ de
grdfa he cdro^

HSnra ao bom para que te
honre^ e ao moo para que
ie nao deshonre^

SSnfa hi dos amosy a que se

Jaz aos eriddoSf
Officio de conselho^ honrm
sem pfoviito^

I

JHomeniapercehido^ meyo com*
iatido^

outward appearance.

AH grafp, aH lofe ; at corvet
all, and lofe all.

He that fpcaks knavifhlyfliali
hear knaviOily. Terence
fays, Qui per git ea^ quce
vuit, dicere^ <?j, qua ngn
vuU^ audiet.

That is, the higheft charges
are the more liable and
nearer tp the downfall.

Firfl come, firft ferved.

A beautiful hoftefs, or land-
lady, is bad for the purfe.

Frefli fiOi, and new come
guefts, fmell when they

' are three days otd.

That is, a garden without
water, a faoufe untiled, a
wife without love, and a
carelefs hulbatld, ate all
. alike, being all ftark
nojMght.

Honour a good man, that he
Ai^y honour you ; and an
ill man, that, he roiay iKtt
diflionour you. ^

The honour done to fervants
redounds to their mafiert^

Ah office in the counci) ii
honour without profit ;
that is, to be of the coun-
cil of a town, by which
nothing is £0t in rortugal.

A maa thait is prepared, ttas
half the battle oy^r.

♦ Ea

««

P O R T U G y E S E

pays aofumtiro^ *
Phto vat ojimo da chdma^

Quern huma viz Jdrta^fiil
ninca^

Matvai ao fuso qudndo a
barba nao dnda cm cima,

Cdda tirra com seu iiso^ cddd

roca com scufuso^
Quduias cabcfas^ tdntas ca-

rdLpugas^
Qjnem Iht doer a cabiga que

a aperte^

Se qnires saber quern he o
xnlldo^ metelhc a vara na
maOf

$iio ha rosa stm espinhos^

^nddr^ anddr^ 'vjr morrer a
, beira^ »

\uem nao deve, nao teme^
[uem qudndo pode, nao que'r,
audndo.quir^ nag poae^
Homcm honrddo nao ha mis-
ter gabddo^.
tiamemgrdnde, besia depdo.

^ebdixo de md cdpdjdz btm
k^bedir^

We fay there is no.fmoke

without .Xbme fire.
He who, once ileals is never

trufty; or^ once a thief,

9lway8 a thief.
Alas for the fpindle whenth«(
. beard is not over it ! By

the fpindle is meant the

woman, and. by the beard .

is meant the man.
So many countries, ^ m^xif

cuftoms.
Several men, feveral minds.

We fay, if any fool finds the
cap fit him, let him put it
on.

Set a beggar on horfeback,
and he will ride to the
devil.

There is no rofe without
thorns, there is no fweet
without fome fweat«/. .

To eat an whole ox and
faint at the tail. This^pro-
verb is fpoken wheq^^ny
body falls fliort of a thing
aher having ufed all his
endeavours.

Out of debt out of danger.

It \i good to maNb hay while
the fun (bines;

We fay^ a good Bice needf
no band.

This proverb intimates, that
things are not to be valued
by their bulk, hut accord-
ing to their intrinfic WGurtK
and vahie ; and fo we ^y,
a lark is better than a
kite.

A tattered cloak may cover a
good drinker ; that is^ men.,
are not to be judg/^ by

putW(ir4

GRAM MA R.

«7

^perta^'
No afougue^ quern maljdlla^
mat auve^

Quern em mSis alto nida^
mdis presto se afoga^

Hospede com sol^ha honoris
Hospeda formisa, ddno fa%

& bSlsa,
O hospede e o peixt aos ires

.dias fede^

Horta sem dgoa, c^a sem
telhddd^ mother sem amor^
marido sem cuidddo^ dc
grdfa he cdro.

Hinra ao bom para que te
honte^ e ao moo para que
te nao deshonre,

SSnta he dos £mos, a que se

faz aos eriddos^
Offtcid de conselho^ honrm

sem proviito.

SomemapercetidOi miyo com*
batido^

outward appearance.

AH gmfp, an lofe ; w corvet
all, and lofe all.

He that fpcaks knavifhlyfliali
hear knaviOiIy. Terence
fays, Qui pergit ea^ qua
vutt^ dicere, ea, qum non
vult^ audiet.

That is, the higheft charges
are the more liable and
nearer tp the downfall.

Firfl come, firft ferved.

A beautiful hoftefs, or land-
lady, is bad for the purfe.

Frefli fiOi, and new come
guefts, fmell when they

• are three days otd.

That is» a garden without
water, a faoufe untiled, a
wife without love, and a
carelefs hu(batld» are all
. alike, being all ftark
nought.

Honour a good man, that he
Ai^y honour you ; and an
ill man, thati be may iKtt
diflionour you. ^ *

The honour done to fervants
redounds to their mafieri.

Ah office in the council i$
honour without profit ;
that is, to be of the cOua*
cil of a town, by which
nothing is got in rortugal.

A maa that is prepared, ttas
half the battle oyer.

£&

««

P O R T U G y E S E

pays aofumdrot *
Phto vai ojimo da chdma^

Quern huma vez Jdrta^Jiil
ninca^

Mat vai ao fuso qudndo a
barba nao dnda cm cimat

Cdda terra com seu iiso^ cddd

rica com scuf&so^
Quduias cabcfas^ tdntas ca-

rapucas^
Qiicm ikt doer a cabiga que

a aperie^

St quires saber quern hi o
xnlldo^ metelhc a vara na
maOf

Nia ha risa stm espinhos^

JLnddr^ anddr^ vir morrer a
, beira^ \ • ■

Vuem nio dive, mo teme^
^uem qudndo pode, nao que'r,

andndo.quir^ mo poae,
Homem. honrddo nao ha mis»

ter gabddo^ .
iiamemgrdnde, besia depdo.

^ebdixo de mdcdpajdz b$M
hbeddr^

We fay there is no. fmoke

without .Xbme fire.
He who^ once deals is never

trufty; or^ onc^ a thief,

9lways a. thief.
Alas for the fpindle when tlM(
. beard is not over it ! By

the fpindle is meant the

woman, and by the beard ,

is meant the man.
So many countries, fy manf

cuftoms.
Several men, feveral minds.

We fay, if any fool finds the
cap fit him, let him put it
on.

Set a beggar on horfeback,
and he will .ride to the
devil.

There is no rofe without
thorns^ there is no fweet
withoiit fome fweat« ^

To eat an whole ox and
faint at the tail. This^pio-
verb is fpoken wheq'iiny
body falls fliort of a thiiq(
aher having ufed aU his
endeavours.

Out of debt out of danger.

It \i good to maNb hay while
the fun (bines;

We fay^ a good Bice needi
no band.

This proverb intimates^ that
things are not to be valued
by their bulk, hut accord-
ing to their intrinfic wort^
and val^ue ; and fo we tay,
a lark is better than a
kite.

A tattered cloak may cover a
good drinker ; that is^ men.,
i^e npt to be judged by

putWiird

GRAM MA R.

«t

Huem mdii^ airdfa, p6ue0

4iperta^^
No afSugue^ quern maljdlla^

mat auvCf

Quern em mSis alto nida^
m&s presto se afoga^
%

Hispede com sol^ha honSr^s

Hospeda formosa, &dno fa%
& bolsa,

O hospede e o peixe aos ires
.dias Jide^

Horta sem dgoa, ca^a sem
ielhddo^ mother sem amor^
marido sem cuiddde, dc
grdfa he cdro^

HSnra ao bom para que te
honre^ e ao mao para que
te nao deshonre,

% ,

SSnra he dos amosy a que se

faz aos eriddos^
Officio de conselho^ honrm
semproviito^

HomeniaperceHdo^ nieyo com*
iatido^

outward appearance.

AH grafp, an lofe ; w corvet
all, and lofe all.

Hethatfpcaks knavifhlyfliali
hear knaviOily. Terence
fays, Qui pergit ea^ quce
vult^ dicere, <?j, iqum ngn
vult^ audiet»

That is, the higheft charges
are the more liable and
nearer tp the downfall.

Firfl come, firft ferved.

A beautiful hoftefs, or land*
lady, is bad for the purfe.

Frefli fiih, and new come
guefls, fmell when they

■ are three days old.

That is» a garden without
water, a faoufe untiled, a
wife without love, and a
carelefs hulbatld, ate, all
. alike, being all ftark
nojMght.

Honour a good man, that he
tn^y honour you ; and an
ill man, that he may not
diflionour you. ^

The honour done to fervants
redounds to their mafiert.

Ah office in the council is
honour without profit ;
that is, to be of the cOun*
cil of a town, by which
nothing is £0t in rbrtugal.

A maa thait is prepared, lias
half the battle oyer.

♦ Ea

68

PORTUGUESE

^ D I A L O G O S

YAMILIARES.

FAMILIAR

DIALOGUES.

D I A L O G O. I.

rENHA vm* muUo tons
dias, •
Como cstdvm, ? ou cSmo pas^

sa vm, f
Bern, nab muito bSm^ voji pas*

sdndo^
Mutto bempara serviravm.
• As or dens ue vm.

SkoJhe muito obrigido^

Agradecido^

Como estd, ou pdssa o senkSr

siu irmdb ?
Muito bim^ nao muito bem^

ElU terdgosto de ver a vm.
Nad terei tempo para hir a

velo hoje^
Fica favor de assentdr-se^
Da hima cadeira ao scnhor^

Nad hi necess&rio^
Tenho que hir afa%ir huma
visita aquinesta visinhdnfa
Vm. tem prissa^
Eu logo voltarii,

Adios meu senhor^

Fblgo de ver a vm, com boa

SMude^
Beijo as mads de vm»
Sou criddo de vm.
Sou muito seu cridd0^

DIALOGUE I.
r^ OOD morrow, fir.

How do you dd, fir ?

«
Well ; not very well ; fo, fow

Very well to ferve you.

At your fervice-.

I am obliged to yoiu

I thank you.

How does your brother do J

He is very well ; not very
well.

He will ha glad to fee you. '

I (hsjl have no time to fet
. him to day. .

Be pleafed to fit down.

Give a crfaair to the gentle-
man.

There's no occafion*

I must go to make a vtfit in
the neighbourhood.

You are in hafte.

ril be back, ^r return pre-
fently.

Farewell, fir.

I am glad to fee you in good
heaiih.

I kife your hand.

I am your fervant.

Your mod humble fervant.

<\

CRyAMM A R.

n

i) I A LOGO IV. DIALOGUE IV.

O Senhor e o Alfaiite.

'rRAZEiS miu vefiido f

Sim,Jimior,eilottqMi. ,
lid fnHito tempo que efiou

e^triniolpor iiU,
Nao pude vir ate agora^
Nao ejtava acabdda^
Ainda nao ejiavaforrddo^
Quer t/m, vejiir a casdcapara

virfi Ihe eftd bim f
y^dmosje tfld btmfeita^

Tenho para mim que Ihe hdja

df agraddr^'
Pdrtce^me m^ito cafkprida^

He coflume agira de trazS"
las comprtdas^

He muito apertdda^

Aff'tm dive fir para que the

ejteja hem ao corpo^
Ka&jao as mdngas demafid-

damente Idrgas f
Naojtnkor^ estaS-lhe admu

ravelmittU^
Os calf Sens JaS midto aper-

tados?
EJta he a mdd^ de agira^
lyie veJHdo eftd'lhe bizar^

ramente^
Be miito cirto^ m^Uo com*

pridOf miitogrdndiymdite

fequeno^
T^ndesfeito a vbffa contaf
Nao^Jenhor^ nao live tempo ^
Jlrazeua amanhad'^ epagdr*

V0S hii^

K.

The Gaitlemdn and the '

Taylor.

T^O you bring ray fuitof

•*^ clothes ?

,Yc«, fir, here 'ti«. ^^

You make fn« wait a great

white.
I could not cootie fooner*
It was not finiflied.
The lining was not fewed*
Will you pleafe to try the

clofe coat on ?
Let us fee whether it be well

made. »
t believe it will pleafe you.

It fecmi to me to be very

long.
They wear them long now.

Button it.

It is too clofe.

To fit properly^ it ought t#

be clofe.
Are no^the fleeves too wide ?

No, fir, they fit very' well.

The breechca are very nar-
row.

That is the faffaion.'

This fuitbecoroea you migli<<
ty well.

Tis too (hort, too lopg, tod

. big, too little.

Have you made your bill P
No, fir, I had no time.
Bring it to-morrow, Til pay

you.
E4/ D I A^

, -1

70

PORTUGUESE

D I A L O G O III.

Q.

Para vcftir-fe.

UEMestuahi?
Que quir vm, ?

Dcspaxa-Uf acinde o lume^ e

veste-me^
Ha mHito torn lume,
Dd'tne a minka camisa^
• Eila aqui esia^ scnhor,
Naoestaqiienie.esta muxtojria^
Eua,aqufntArii^sevm.qu%zir
'NaOf nao; traze-me as min^

has miyas de seda ,
Huma deltas esid rota,
Da-lkchumpSntOyConcirta'a^
Dei-a ao que as concerta,

FizhU-bem,

O'ndeestaoasminhas chinelas
O'nde estd a minha roupa de
. chdmbre^
Pentea-^e,
Procura Sutro pinte^
Di-me miu lenfo,
Eis aqui hum lavado^
Dd-me o que estd na minha

atgibeira^
Dd'O dlavandiira^ ille estd»

va fujo,
Trouxe ellajaaminha rSapa?
^im, senhor^enaS/ditanada^
Trdze-me os meus calfdeAs^
Que veftido quer vm. para

hSjef ■
mesmo de intern,
O al/ai£te ha de trazer ligo
■\ seuveftidOi
Bdtem[d porta, vela quern he,

' Quern he?
Hi al/aidtf^
Deixa-o entrdr^

DIALOGUE III.
To dress one's /e//l

WHOistberc?
What will you pleafc
to have ?
Be quick, make a fire» dref»

me.
There is a fine firew
Give me my ihiit.
liere it is, Sir,
'Tis not warm, 'tis quite cold.
If you pleafe I'll warm it*
No, no ; bring me my silk

{lockings. • I

One of them is torn.
Stitch it a liule, mend it.
1 have given it to the flock*

ing mender.
You have done right.
Where are my flippers ?
Where is my night gown.

■•
Comb my head.
Look for another comb.
Give me my handkerchief.
Here is a clean one.
Give me that which is in my

pocket.
I gave it to the wather«wo*

man, k was fouk
Has (he brotight my linen ?
Yes, there Vants nothing*
Bring me'my breeches.
What clothes will y«u wcir

tO'day?
Thofe I wore yefterilay.
The taylor will bring your

ctmh fuit prefently.
Somebody knocks, fee wbt

it isr

Whp ift it ?

It is the taylor^ - v

Ikiei hioi come in.

• ■*

GR^AMU AJi.

ri

1) I A LOGO IV. DIALOGUE IV*

O Senhdr e Alfai£te. The GcntUmdn and the '

Taylor.

nrRAZEiS miu wfiidof T\0 you brbg my fait of
•^ 1^ clothes?

Sim^fsmkor^ eilo aqni. . ,Yc«, fir, here 'tis. ^

Hd M^ito tempo que efiou You make fn« wait a gteat

white.
I could not comie fooner*
It was not finiflied.
The lining was not fewed*
Will you pleafe to try the

cloie coat on ?
Let us fee whether it be well
made. *
TenhoparaT^mquelhehdJA I believe it will pleafe you.

esperando.por ille^
Nao pude vir ate agora^
Hao ejiava acabdda^
Ainda nao ejiava Jorrdio^
Quer trm. vejiir a casdcapara

vet ft the eftdbemf
. V^dmosfe ijld bemfeita^

df agraddrj
Pdrece^me m^ito coniprida^

He cojtunu agira de traze-
las comprtdas,

He muito apertdda^

It fccms to me to be very

long.
They wear them long now.

Button it.
It is too clofe.

Affim dive fir para que Ike To fit properly^ it ought tf

e/leja hem ao corpo^
Naojao as mdngas demafid-

damente Idrgasf
Naojtnhor^ estaS-lhe admi-

ravelmeaUt
Os calf Sens faS m&iio aper-

tadosf
EJta he a moda de agora,
EJie veftido efid'lhe bizar^

ramente.
He miiio curto, miiito com*

prido, miiito grdnde^miiito

pequino^
Tondesfeito a viffa conta f
Nao^Jenhor, nao tive tempo ^
Jjrazeua amaniad'^ epagdr-

vos hii^

be clofe.
Are no^the fleeves too wide ?

No, fir, they fit very' well.

The breeches are very nar-
row.
That is the faffaion.'
This fuit becomes yoirmigli<<

ty well.
Tis too Ihort, too lopg, too
, big, too little.

Have you made your bill P
No, fir, I had no time.
Bring it to-morrow, Til pay

you,
4, D I A-

>7

72

P O Jl T U€ U E SE

D I A L Q G V.

Pari.alniogin

n^RAZE^nos alg^ma coufa
•^ para almofdr^
Sim^Jenhir^ ha iinguifas e

faftelinkos^
Gijla VM, de pre/into f

/Sim^ trdze-o ; comer emos
hiima tdlhada diilt^

EJiende hum guar dandpofo-
bre aquella, mifa^

Da-nos pratos^fdcas^ e gdt-

Lava OS cipos^

Da kutna cadeira ao fenhSr^

Ajfintt'fe vm. ajfintt-jt ao

pi do lume^
Nad tinho frio^ aqui jicarii

miiito bem^
Vejdmosfe o vinho he bim.

Da cd aquilla garrdfa com

aquelle copo^
Fafafavor de prcvdraquelle - Taile that wine, pray.

vinho.

DIALOGUE V.

To break/aft^

BRING us fomething for
breakfaft.
Yet, fir, there are fome (au-

fages^and petty-patees.
Do vou choofe the gaipmoa

of bacon ?
Yes, brin^ it; we will eat a

dice of It. - y

Lay a napkfn on that table.

Give us plates, knives, and

forks.
Rinfe the glafles.
Reach the gentleman a^chair.-
Sit down, fir; fit by the fire.

I am not cold, I (ball be veiy .

well here.
Let us fee whether the wine

be good.
Give me that bottle and a

glafs.

Come (he agrdda ; que dix
^ vm. deile?

Nao he mdo, he muito bom^

Eis aqui as iinguifas^ lira
aquelle prdto.

Coma vm. Iinguifas,
" Ja comi algumas^ ellasjai
fwuito boas.

Dd»mt de beber^

A Jadde devm.

Bom proveito fa^a a vm.
' Da- de beber ao fenhor^

E'u bebi ainda agora,
Ospafielinhos erdo btm bofis,

Eflivao hum pSuco mqts co-
zidos que deviag ejlir^

How do you like it ? wbat

fay you to it ?
It is hot bad, it is very gopd.^
Here are the faufages, take

away this plate.
Eat foine faulages, fir.
I have eat fome, they are very
. good.

Give me fome drink*
Your heahh, fir.
Much good may it ^ you.
Give the gentleman fouMk.

drink.
I drank but juft now.
The petty-patees were very

good.
They were baked a lltUe to»

mi|ch.

V-

• '

G R A:M M A R.

71

Tinho comida tdnto^ que nao
poderiijaniir^

Vm. eftd zpmidndot tr^r naS

^tem c§mido ndda^

Tinho comido com mdito
gofio^ tdnto das linguifas
como do presunto^ .
"■ ■ - ■ ■ ■ - .

D lA L Q G O VI.

Para falldr Portuguee. ^

' /^MO vdi vm. com o sen
^ Portuguez ?
Efia vm,ja muito adiantddo

nilUf
Ainda mefdlta muita; nao
iiiquajtndda^
H . Dizcm.porim que vm, of alia
' miiito bem^
ProuverOi a Dios que qffim

'Mi! . .

Os que dizem ijfo^eft&c muito

enganadoSf
> IJteja vm, na certeza que

^inimo dijfirao^
Pojfo fallar algdmas paldv-

ras que dprendi de c6r^
£ unicamente o que hi neces^

Arioparafomefdrajaliar^
comefar ftao he bastdnte^

he precis o que vm. acdbe^
Palle vnh sempre ou bem^ du •

mal^ . '
f Tinho mcdo de dar irros^ '

Naotenhd. x^m* medo / a tin-

gea Portugucza nao ^ ht

diffidl, ^

Conhcfo ijfo^ e tambem que

ilia he miito engrafdda^
duefelicidade serta a. minha

se eu a soubisse bem !

You do not eat.

I have eat too much, I {hall

not be able to eat any din-

ner,. ,

You only jeft, you have eat

nothing at all.
I have eat very heartily both

of faufages and gammon

of bacon.

D I A L.O G UE VI.

To spea^ Portuguese.

TTOW goei on your Por-

**• ^ tuguefe ?

Are you much improved in

it now ?
Far from it ; I know nothing

almoft.
It is faid» however, you fpeak

it very well.
Would to God it were true !

Thofe that fay fo are much

.miftak^n*
I aiTure you I was told fo*

I can fay a few words^ which

I have learnt by heart.
And To much as is neceflary

to begin to fpeak.
The beginning is not all, you ^

muft make an end.
Be always fpeaking. Whether

well, or ill.
I am afraid to commit blun*

ders.
Never fear ; the Portugueft

language is not hard* ;

I know it; and that it has
abundance of graces. ^

How happy fl^ould I be, if I.
were mailer ot \v\

A ap*

"V

74

PORTUGUESE

A applicag'aShto ^nico mlyo

para aprtndiUa^
Qudnth timpo ha que vm. a-

pre tide f
Aftenas hd hum mez,
Co mo sf chdmd o sen mestre?

Ckdma-se

Hd'muito tempo que o con*

he^o^
Elle tern enfinado a miiitos
. dos tnfus amigos^
Naolke dizelUserpreciso que

fdlle simpre Mprtuguez ?

Sim^ senkir^ affim me diz

muitas vezes,
Pois^ porqMe naofdlla vm, ?
Com quern quit vm, que iu

falie, • .

Com OS quejallarem com vm.

Eu qui%crafalldr^ mas nao

me utrivo.
He preciso que vm. nao tenha

mcdo^ nem se peje dos que

ouviremjallar.

Application is the only way -

of learning it.
How long nave you been

learning ? •
Scarce a month yet.
What is your mart's name ?
Hit name is
I have known him a great

while.
He has taught feveral friends

of mine.
Does not he'tell you that you

mud confiantly ulk Por-

tugucfc?
Yes, sijr, he often Cells me so.

Why do not you talk then ?
Who would' you have me

talk^vitb?
With thofe who (hall talk to

yoti.
I would fain ulk, but dare

not.
You muft not be afraid, you

muft be bold.

DIALOGO VII. DIALOG tJE VII.

Q

Do T^rapo.
UE tempo fat ?

tempo estd admirdvel^

temps estd roim^

Fazjrio ? fa% edlma f

NaSJizJriif, nao/az cdima^

Chove f nao chive ?

NaS criyo^

venib estd mudiio^

Teremos chtiva^

HSje nati hide chovir^

Cheve^ Chivea cAntikrcs^

Estk nevdndo^

Trovijd^^

Of the Wta^ihir.

WHAT (bit of weather
is it?
It is fine weather.
It is bad %ir<eather.
1% it cold ? is it hot ?
It is not cold, it is not hot.
Does it rain ? does it not raii^ ?'
I do not believe it.
The wind is changed. '
We fhall have rain.
It, will not rain to<4ay«
It rains, it pours.
It snows.
It thunders.

Caht

/

G R AM MAR.

7S

Relampaguea^
Faz miita cdlma^
Geou a noite pajfdda f
NaS, senhSr, mas agora estd

gidndOy
Parece'tfie que hd nevoiero^

Vm. naS st engdna^ qffim hi^

Vm. tem hum grdnde catarro^

, ou dtfidxo^

Hd f^inxe dias (jut o ttnho^

Que horas sad^

He cedfft naS he idrde^

He timpd de al^ogdr f

foucofdltapara serem hints

dejantflr^
Qjuefaremos depois de jan-

tdrf
• Daremoshumpajeyo^orx ire^

mos paffedr^
Vdmos dar huma vilta^
Nao vdmos fir^ com iste

tempo^

diAlogq viil

Para^ p^rgunlar que n6vas hi.

r)UE vdi de novo? ou que
- ,\^ novas ha?
Sabevm. alguma cousa de no-
vo?

Nad ienho ouvido n&da de

«

novo^
De que tefilla petla cidade ?
* Nd& sefalla dg ndda^
NdS tendes ouvidof altar d^

guerra,
Nat oUfofall&r ndda dijfo^
Potemfi^Ua''Se de hum cerco.

It hails.

It lightens.

It is very hot. 4

Has it freezed laft nigh^ ?

No, fir, but it freezes now.

It appears to me tolie a great

fog.
You are not miftaken, it is

v?ry true.
You haye caught a violent

cold.
I have had it this fortnight.
What's o'clock ?
^Tis early, 'tis not late.
Is it breakfaft-time ?
'Twill be dinner .time inttne-

diately.
What (hall we do after din.

ncr ? »

We'll take a walk.

Let us take ^ turn now.
We muft not go abroad thii
weather.

Falliu'se niffo^ mas smS he
vfrdddit .

DIALOGUE VIIL

To enquire after news,
TT7HAT news is flirring ?

Do you know any newt t

p

/

I have heard none. ^

'What's the talk oF the town ?
There's no ulkof any thing.
Have you heard no talk of

war?
I have heard nothing of it.
There's a talk however of'k

fiege.
There was fuch a ^lifcourie^

but it iwas not tnie» ^

• Mties

7«

PORTUGJUESE

A'ntes pith contririo JilU-
Jede^pdz,
Anim crtyo^
Qut ft di% na corte ?
Falla-Je (te hdma vi&gem^
Qii&ndo vos par if e que el rey

partira f
Naofejdbe. Naofedizqudn^

do^
(yndc^ ou para Snde Ji diz

que elle ird?
Huns dizem que ird para

FLdndres^ e Sutros para

Alem&nha.
E qtte dix a Gazeta ?
E'u nao a lt\
' . He verdade o que Je diz do

Sr.^ — ?
Pdts quefe diz dilte ?
Dizem qu€ ejidjerido mor-

talmenle^
* Miiito me pejaria dijfo ; elle
* he hum homem de bem^
Ojiem oferio f
ISous marStos que o inveftU

rdOf
Sabe-Je o porquef

A noticia que corre he^ que
deu num dilles hum bo-
JetaS,

E'u naS creyo i/so; nem eu
iaS poucot

Eil9 vdi^ cedo saberemos a
verdade^

On the contary thereat i

talk of peace.
I believe so^
What fay they at court ?
They talkof avG^ragc^ .
When do you thukthe king

will fet but ?
'Tis not known, they do not

say^en.
Where do they fay he'll go ?

Some say into Flanders,
others into Germatiy.

And what says the Gazette?

I have not read it.

Ift it true what's I'eported of

Mr. ?

\yhat of him ?

They fay he is mortally
. wounded.
i (hould be sorry for that,

he's an honest man.
Who wounded him ?'
Two rogues that set upos

him.
Is it known upon what ac-
count ?
The report is that he gave

one of them a box on the

ear.
I don't believe it. Nor I

neither;
However, we Ihall soon know

the truth.

•DJALOGO IX.

Para escrever.

jyAUME himafolha de
•^-^ papil^hUmd pinna, e hi-

ma pouca de tinta^
tde ao m^u quart o^eachareis

em cima da me/a t&do o que,

vcsfSr prccijo^

D I A L O 6 U E IX.

To write.

/^IVE me a flieet of pa-
^^ per, a pen, and a little

ink.
Step to my eloseti you'll find
on the table whatever vou
vf«nt% . Aa*

GRAMMAR.

•J7

JVdS hd pennaSf
mgrdn<Uquantidddcdillas

na cscrtvamnna^
Nad prtfiao para nada^ »
La hi Sutras^
Nd6 efiao aparddas^s
Ondt eftd o vijfa camviitf
Sabiis vos apafdrfinnas?
E'u apiro-as a mtu modai
EJla naS efia mi,
Em ijlkdnto acibo ijla cdrta,
faviiimt o favor de fechdr

as, iutras, e fa%€r~ hum

miqo deltas,
Qucfilloquir vm. que in the

ponhd?
S/lla'O com o miu siniU, bu

com as minhas armasy
Com que Here quer vm, que

as fecke,
Fechiuas com o vermilho ou

corno preto:Jejaqudlf6r,

nao impirta, »
Tim vm. pofip a dataf^
Tarice-meouejim, mas ainda

nao a affinei,
A qudntos ejidmos koje do

mezf .
A outoi a deZj a quinze^^a

vinte,
PSnde sobrescrito ?
(fride eftd a area ?
Vis nUnca tendes area,

Ahi hd algHma no areeiro,

' Ahi ejia o feu criado ; quer
vm, que etle live as cartas

• ao correo.

Leva as minhas cartas no
correo, e nao te esquefas de
pagdr parte,

Nao tenhodinheirp,

Ahi ejid huma moedade duro,

Vai depreffa^ e vcm lig6.

Th^re are no peiii#

There are a great mai^y in
the ftandifh.

They are good for nothing.

There are some othertf.

They are not made. .

Where is your penknife.

Can you make pens ?

I make them my own way.

This is .not bad.

While I make an end of this
letter, do me the^favour to
make, a packet of the rest.

What seal will you have me '

put to it ?
Seal it with my cypher, or

coatx>f arms.
What wax fhall I put to it ?

■ \

Put either red, or black, no
matter which.

Have you put the date ?

I believe I have, but I hare
not signed it.

What day of the month is
this ?

The eighth, the tenth, fif-
teenth, twentieth.

Put the stddrefs.

Where is the powder ? i

You never have powder or-
sand.

There's some in the sand
box.

There's your' servant, will
you let him carry the let-
ters to the poll- office ?

Carry my letters ^o the poft>
office, and don't forget to
pay poftage.

I have ho money.

There's a moidore^ .

Go- quickly, and return as

soon ^^ ^o%^iXA^%

^ /a \ few-

7»

PORTUGUESE

diAloco X.

Para coroprir.

fi

U E quir vm.

Qjuero hum bom pdnno Jino

para hum veJHdo^
Tenha vm. a bqndddt de en-

irdr^ e vera 9 miis belo

pdnno que hd em Londres,
Diixc^me vir melhor que

vm, tem,
Aqui iemvm,* hum excellinU^
" que agorafe coftHmatra^r^
He hum bom pdnno^ mas a

cor nao me agrdda,
Ahi tern vm. Sutra pS fa que

tern a cor mais glara^
Agrddame a cSr^ mas panno

nao hi Jorte^ nao tern cor*

Veja ifla piga; vm. naoac-
. hard em nenhuma parte

iutra tao boa como elUt .
Qudnto pidt tm. pot cada

ana ?
OJea jujh prifo A^— ~

Sr. naohemiu coJlumepSr^me
a re^ate&r ; Jaca-mejavor
de atzer me ultimo prego^

Ja dtff'e a vm. queaquiilehe
seujufto prifo^

H^'m^ito caro, aarlhe hii a

vm* —
Nad pijf6 abater hum ceitU,
Vm. nao hd de vender por f j-

seprefo^,
Vm. quiz saber ultiMo pre*

fo^ e in difc'lho^ ■

DIALOGUE X. :

To buy.

TXTHAT do you want, fir?
^ ^ Whatj would you pleasi

to have ?
I want a good fine cloth to

make me a suit of clothes*. '
Be pleased to vralk in, fir,

you'll see the finest in

London..
Shew me the heal you have.

There's a very fine one, and
what's worn at present.

'Tis a good c)oth».Dut'I don't
like the colour, «. •

There's another lighter piece.

I like that colour well, but

the cloth ift not ftrong, 'tis

too thin.
Look upon th|s piece here,

sir, you'll not find the, like

any where else.
What do you afk for it an
♦ ell ?
Without exacting, it is

worth ■ ■
Sir, I aha not used to (land

haggling ; pray tell me

jour loweft price.
I have, told you, sir, 'tis

worth that.
'Tis too dear. Til' give you —

I can^t bate a brthing^
You (hall not have whiit you

alk.
You a(ked me the loweft

price, and I havje told

yoik ^

H^ra

. k

GRAMMA R.

7^.

•

•Hira vimcs^ corte vm. Id
duas anas dille^

AffigUTO'lhe a vm. como hi-
mem dt hem qui Jou, que
nao gdnho hdda com vm.

Ahi tern vm. cincQ moidas de
ourot di-me a demasia^ -

Tinka a iandade de dar-mc
Sutra em lugdr dejla^ por-
quenaS he depizo^
• Ahi ^sia ouira^

A DeQs^ criddo de vm.

Come^ come, cut off two

clU of it. .
I protest, on the word of an

honed man, I don't get

any thing by you«
There's five moidore;, give

me the change,
fie pleased, sir, to let me have

another for this, it wants

weight.
There s another.
Farewell ; -sir,, your strvant.

DIALOG O XI.

Para huma Jornada.,

eUANTAS Ugoas ha dn^
qui a NJ •
ffa duto Ugoas,
Nos nao poderimos chegdr Id

hoje^ hi muito tdrde^
Nao hi fends meyo dia^ vm'"
ainda tern bastdnte^ tempo ^

Hi d estrada tod?

Nao he muito boa^ pojf^ofc

bSfques e rios^
Ha aigiim perigo nella ?

N^aS hi HOtici^s diffoi hi

estrdd^ Viii ^^ y^^ se^en-

contra ginte a cdda pdlfo^
' JPois nao dizem que ha laUrO"

ens nos bisques?.
' /laS ha de que tir mido^ nan

de dia^ nem de noite^
i^or ondefe vdi ? . . .
Qudndo vm"' chegarem ao
^ fi do ouiiiro^ he pret^

que iomem a maS direita^
fats nao hi ntceffdrio fukh

^umautiirof ,

DIALOGUE XL'
for a J$urney\

TJ O W many leagues is it
'*^. -from this place to N. ?
It is eightxUagues.
We (hall not be able to get

thither to day, it is too late.
It is not more than twelve

o'clock, you have time

enough yet.
Is the road good?
So, so ; there are woods and

rivers to pass.
Is there any danger upon tfatt

road?
Tbere*s no talk of it, it is a
: highway, where yoa meet

people every moment.
Do not they say there are

robbers in the woods ?
There's nothing to be fe^urci

either by day or night.
Which way muft one tak« ?
When you come near the

hill, you muft take to tht
. right hand.

Ift it not neces«Bry to asctii4
^billtben?

80

P O R T U G U E SE .

Na8, Sr. naShdSutro outti^

ro fena& huma pequina

ladeira^ (ou descida) no

bisque^
Oifta a atindr com o eaminho

pillo miyo dos basques?
Fm"" wflS podem errdJo^
Logo que vm"^ Jahirem do

bifquejembrem-fe de tomar

a mao e/querda,
Vm"' muitos dnnos, fico^lhe

tnuito obrigddo^
Vdmos^ vdmos^fcnhSreSt to-

memos hum cavillo,
Onde estd o mar quiz f
EUe foi adidnte^
E'lle ha de estar efperdndopor

vis logo all fora da cidade^
Pot que esta vrri* agora ejfe-

rdndof hora^ vdmo-nos

daqut^ acabemoSf
Fiquem-fe embira, fenhores^

a Deos^
Fagao vff^ miiio boa jor*

ndda^

DIAlOGO XII.
X)a Cea e da Pousada.

CO'MQUE ajfim estdmos
chegddos aestaligem^
ApeemO' nos^fenhotts^
Pega nos cav alios disies sen^

nireSy e trdta delles,
Vejdmos agora o que vm. nos

hade dar para cedr^
Hum capao, meya duzia de

pombos, huma /alada.Jeis

codornizes^ e huma duxia

de calhAndraSt
Qjuirem vm*^ mats algima

coufa f
Isiotu bastAnte^ ddi^nosaU

iUM vinho quefija bom^ e
ima soifremisa^

No, 0r, there is no other
hill but a little declivity in
the wood. '

Is it a difGcult way through

the woods ?
You can't lofe your way.
As soon as you are out of -the

wood, remember to keep

to the left hand.
J[ thank you, fir, and am veiy

much obliged to you.
.Come, Gcniie, gentlemen, let's

take a horfe.
Where is the marquis?
He is gone before.
He'll wait for you juft out

of town.
What do you day for now?

come, come, let's be gone,

let's have done*
Farewel, gentlemen, fare.

wel. ^

I wifli you a very good jour-
ney.

D I A L O G U E XILv^
0/iAe Supper and Lodginj^^

Cp, we are 'arrivisd at
•^ inn.

Let's alight, gentlemen.
Take tbefe gentlemen's Boir<<

fes, and tSkit care of i
Now let's fee what youl

give us for (upper.
A eapon, half a dbzen of wy^.

geons, a fallad, fix quaik|9>4

and a dozen of larks. J

Will you have nothing elfe -^'l

That's enough, give as ibod^
good wine, ami a deflert*

G R AM MA R.

81

Heixem vm'^ isso por minha
. Conta^ eu Ihes prometo que

fiquem bemfervidos^
Alumia aosfenkSres, ^ "
Dai-nos dt cedr o mdis dc-

pressa quefSr possively
Antes que vm^" tenhao def-
calf ado as^ bkas, cstard a
' £ed na mefa^
Tende cuidddo que tragdo
para cima as nossas mdlas
' e prs tolas ^

'Oescalfdi-me as botas^ e de^
Jpois ireis vir fe tern \dddo
• algumjino aos,cavdllos^.

Levdi'OS ao rio, e tende cuu

- dado que Ihes dim alguma
avea^

E'u terei cuidddo de tudo^
estejao vm^" descan^ados^

Senhores^ a ceaestdprSmpta^
estd na mesa^

Nos vdmosjd,

Vdmos cedr^ senhores, para
nos hirmos dcitdr cedo^

Dai" nos dgoa para lavar as

- tnaSSfi •

Sentemo-nos^ senhores, sentc-

mono s a mesa^
Ddi-nos de beber,
AsaMe de vm"* mens senhores,
He bomo.zjinho?
Nao he mao^
^ capao, na5 esta bem ajfado^
Dai-nos humas poucas de
lardnjas^ e huma pouca de
pimenta,
P.o'rque nao come vm^ destes
k pombos?

^£i^ tenho comido hum pombo^
H e tres calhdndras^
BD;%^ ao estalajadeiro que the
H fuerem osjalldr^

Let me alone, Til pleafe you,
I warranbyou.

Light the gentlemen.

Let's have our fupper as

foon as poflible. .
Before you have pulled your

boots off, fupper (hall be

upon the table.
Let our portmanteaus and

piftols be carried up fiairs.

Pull off my boots^, and then
you (ball go to fee whether
they have given the horfes
any hay.

You (hall carry them to the
river, and take cate they ^
give them fome oats.

ni take care of every thing,
don't trouble yourielf.

Gentlemen,. fupper is ready,
it is upon the table.

We'll come prefently.

Let's go to fupper, gentle-
men, that we may go to
bed in good time.

Give us water to walh our
hands.

Let us fit down, gentlemen, \
lei's fit down at table.

Give us fome drink. » .

To your health, gentlemen.

Is the wine good ?

It is not bad.

The capon is not done enough

Give us fome oranges with, a '
little pepper.

Why don't you eat of thcfe

pigeons ?
t have eaten ocfe pigeon and

three larks.
Tell the landlord we want t6

fpcak with, him, *
F DIA-

>■

83

PORTUGUESE

\

DIALOG O XIII. DIALOGUE XItt

Do faltaf e 60 corr^r.

Of jumping and rMmWg.

■ I

Zl/ O R Jl vamos^ quer vm.
^" falidr,
Nio hi b6mfaUdr logo def^

poif.de comir^
De que modo dt /altar gofia

VM. mdisf
mSis comm^m keapesjun^

ioSf
Quer 9m> ^ueJaMmos sS com

hum pi 9
Como tym* qm%er^
Eflehe-humfiUo muitogrdnde
Qjudntos pisfaltSu vm. ?

Mdh de qudtroj

Apofto que/alio p9r cima da--

qmeite harrdnco^
Vm.fdlta com humpio com*

prido.
Demos huma carrdra^
Quer vm. qaeeotrimos a pe '

cu a cavdUo^
Dt hdma e owtrafirte^
Digd vm. dondt Jt hd de

comefdr^ e Snde/e ha de

a<alfdY^
Comegimos a-corfir da qui,

CorrerhHos Aii chegdr a tfia

arvQre,
Tfnho carrido tte^ vAj^jt

defde o lugir affinalddo

aii a dfuoYel-

/^ O ^ E, will yon go to

^ jumping?, ;

It is not good' to jump imme-.

diately after dinner. ^
What leaping do you like

beft?
The moft ufud is with one

foot clofe to the other.
Shall ¥re hop with one leg ?

Ai y6u pleaie.

This is a very ^^nedt leap^

How manf teet hshre y^

leapM?
More dian ibtir«
I lay I leap clearly over that

ditch.
You jump with a long Qick.

Let us rim races.

Shall we run on foot or on

borfeback?
Both ways.
Appoint the rac^.

This fliall be the Ibutiog
' place.
This tree fliail be the goal. -

/
I bave run three times from
the flartiiigrplace to tb«
tree.

€{ ft A Kt tt A R.

8S

Vm. nddefperSupeUoftndipO' You did not flay for the fig.

nptwdfUiT a carter ^ * naltoftart.

AguelU cavdlU corrio muito That horfe has run his race

bem^

very well.

Qudntas carreirUs tern Sik £[ow miny heats has he run ?
d&dof

Tris ou quairo,
Vm. tern ganhido^

Three or four.

You have won the plate.

' f

• Ft

CARTAS

'»»

83

P O RT UG U E SE

\

D I A' L O GO Xill. D I At O G U E Xltt

Do faltaf e io corr^r.

Of jumping and rniimnig.

ZJ O R A vamos^ quer vm,
^" fdHdr,
Nid hi bdm/altdr logo def^

poU.de comir^
De que modo de/aUdr gofia

vm. mdisf
m&is comm^m heapisjun-

tos^
Quer 9m> fueJaMmos sS com

hum pi 9

EfteheJiumf^o mtUtogrdnde
(ludniospisJaltSuvm.?

Mdh de fudiroj

Apijlo que^/ttltc p0r cimm da^^

qneite tairfdn0o^
Vm.Jdlta com humfio com*

prido.
Demies huma earreita^
Quer vm. qtilf CdtrSmiS a pi '

0A a caffdUo^
De huma e ouiraforte^
Diga vm. donae Je hd de

comefdr^ e Snde/e ha de

a<aMry
Ccmegemos a-e^tfir da qui.

Carter ^os Aii chegdr a efiii

arvQre^
Tfnh^ carridd tte^ vAses

difde o lugir ajjfnalddo

ait a dfvoye'i' •

/^ O ^ E, will ^ou go to

^ jumping?, ;

It is not good- to jump imme-.

diately after dinner. ^
What leaping do you like

beft?
The moft ufuai k with one

foot clofe to the other.
Shall we hop with one leg ?

Ai y6u pleafe.

This is a very j^^t leap.

How manf mt ks^ve y^

leaped?
Moredianibtin
I lay I leap clearly over that

ditch.
You jump with a long flick.

Let us rim races.

Shall we run on foot or on

borfeback?
Both ways.
Appoint the rac^.

This fliall be the flartiiig

place.
This tree fliail be the goal^ -

I bave run three times froib
the flartiiig.place to the
tree.

GRAMMA R.

85

LETTERS

OK

Business, or Mercantile Affairs.

Mr, F. F. London. The 30th of January, 1811.

YOURS of the 3d and 15th of last Month, came
to Hand on the 5th Current by the Ship F. F.
Captain B. B. ; and therein I take iNotrce, that yoji
intend to put on board the next'^^ood 5hip bouncf
< hither, the Goods I recommended to your Care in
my last.* Herewith L send you more Patterns, but
I would desire you to be solicitous with your Dyer,
that the Colours may be lively and durable. By the ^
last Ship I remitted you Account of Sales, of the
Parcel of Silk Stockings, and the three Boxes of
Hats, by the Ship A ; and if you meet with
a Parcel of either, or both, to your Mind, please to
send them, such Articles beingnow in Demand, but

freat Care noust be taken of the Fashion and Make,
have taken care to*' secure your twenty Pipes of
Oil for the first Ships in the Season, and put on
. board the Ship N* Capt. F. your twenty Pipes of
^Red, and twelve Pipes and three Hogsheads ©f
White Wine, of which the Invoice .goes here-
with, and the Bills of Lading shall be sent by
the post, and I hope' will come safe to hand; .
which being all that is necessary at present, I
remain, . .

, " SIR, . .

Your humWe-Servant.

\ *.F 3 Senhdr

\ ■

84 P O R T U G.U E S E

CARTAS

P E '

Commercio.

Scnhor F. F. Londres. 30 de Janeiro de 1811.

RECEBr as suas de 3 e 5 do passado^ no dia 5
do corrente, vindas pelo Navio F. F. capitao
B. B. pelas quies vejo, Vm^. pretende carregar as
fazendas que recomendei ao seu cuidado pela minha
ultima, no primeiro Navio para esta.

Inclusas remeto a Vm^®. mais algumas amostras,
porem dezejo queira recomendar .ao Tintureiro, que
^s cores sejao vivas e firmes.

Pelo ultimo Navio que daqui partio Ihe remeti a
conta de venda, da sua partida de meias de seda»
e das tres Caxas de Chapeos, pelo Navio A ; c
achando Vm^e. algumas partidas de qualquer
destes dous generos, que Ihe agradem, as pode
mandar, pois sao agora mui procurados ; deve
comtudo ter muito cuidado em que s^jao da ultima
moda. Tenho verificado o ajuste das 20 Pipas de
Azeite da safra prpxima, parem partirem pelos
prin^eiros Navios : igualmente tenho carregado no
Navio N. Capitao F. as suas 20 Pipas de Vinho
tinto ; assim como tambem as doze e tres quartos
de bronco, cuja Factura remeto inclusa : Os conhe*
cfmentos, Ihos remeter^i pelo correio. Heide es-
timar chegue tiido a salvamento. r

He quanto por bora se me ofFerece a di^z^rlhcj
no cntretanto sou

De Vmc«. muito Veneraddr e Criadg.

GRAMMAR. 85

LETTERS

OK

Business, or Mercantile Affairs.

Mr, F. F. London. The 30th of January, 1811.

YOURS of the 3d and 15th of last Month, came
to Hand on the 5th Current by the Ship F. F:
Captain B. B. ; and therein I take Notice, that yoji
intend to put on board the next'^^ood 5hip bouncf
' hither, the Goods I recommended to your Care in
my last,* Herewith I send you more Patterns, but
I would desire you to be solicitous with your Dyer,
that the Colours may be lively and durable. By the
last Ship I remitted you Account of Sales, of the
Parcel of Silk Stockings, and the three Boxes of
Hats, by the Ship A; and if you meet with
a Parcel of either, or both, to your Mind, please to
send them, such Articles beingnow in Demand, but

freat Care noust be taken of the Fashion and Make,
have taken care to*" secure your twenty Pipes of
Oil for the first Ships in the Season, and put on
.board the Ship N* Capt. F. your twenty Pipes of
^ Red, and twelve Pipes and three Hogsheads ©f
White Wine, of which the Invoice .goes here-
with, and "the Bills of Lading shall be sent by
the post, and I hope^ will come safe to hand ;
which being all that is necessary at present, I
xemain, .

> SIR,

Your humWe-Servant.

> I

*,JF 3 Senhdr

\

86 P O R T U P U e S E

Senhdr Didgo Jones.

VOU por esta avis&r a Vm<*. que p^lp Navio

Derby, Ine remeti duas saquinhas de diam^tes,

. import^ndo em, Pagodas 4396. 25 Fan. }0 Casks,

em retdmo dos seas fondos em me« poddr ; os

qu&es fiz registrar nos livros da Companhia em con*

formidade com as suas ordems.

Inclusos achara o Conhecimento* Factura e a sua

* Conta coirrente fechada, que desejo cfaeguem a

salvapiento e me alegjrarei de que fajga gr^p^^f ior

ter6ce^. ' .

Cdmo eu estou p^ra volt^r para a £ur<$pa^ ^

- mmha cbegada a Ldndres, terei ^ hdnrfi de o vMj^ %

Ihe darSi entao^ huma relasao exacta do qqqiin^FciQ '
^ da India.

Teiihp o gdsto de ^6r,
Forte de S. Jorge. De V m^© . Rjev^rdnte Crd^
1 2 de Jano. 1811. f Yeqeraddr.

*

m ill ^ I ■i

Snr. Joao Ferrier, Lisboa 4 de Marfo de 181 1.

Londres: *

ACHO-ME favorecido c6m a sua de 8 dopassado,
e vejo, que em execu9ao as minhas 6rdems, Vm^.
t^m comprado os quinhdntos Barris de Afdnques de

fumo.

O R A ¥M 4 ft. 87

t
I
I

JAr. J^mes Jones.

THESE will advise you, that by this Ship the
Perby, I bjavemade the returp of vbur.Stock m my
Hands |p two 3ulses of piamonas, amounting to
F^godas 439^6, 25 f*an. 10 Casks, having registered
tbeo} according to your Order in the Conrpanv's
Bpoks ', inclosed is a Bfll of Lading, together wiA
Invoice, aini your Account current dosed, wtfich I
IWigJi .rosy come safe t6 you, and turn to a good
Account. A? I am Veiurning to Europe, at my
Arnval in London, I shall have the honour to see
you, q^nd give you an exact Account of the Trade
windCa. I am entirely,

' Sir,

i

Fort St. George, Your humble Servant.

J«n. 12, 1811.

^ ^ ■ ij !■ I ■ I p^^tmrnmrn i i ■ i ■ ■ ■■ i wmtf^ifamt wi ■ ■ i i^^wP^^i^— ^h^

Mr. John Ferrier, Lisbon, 4 March, 1811.

»

London.
Sir, .

I AM iaroimd wkb fwn ^f tb^ 94 pi iatt
moatb, smd &ul, in Compj^ance tq my Order, you
have bought the five hundred Bwri^s of red HerW

-* F 4 , - rings.

88 PORtUGlTESE

»

fdmo, a ^11 por Last. Estou certo que esse he o
menor prdco por que Vmce . os p6de obter, e nao
tenho a menor duvida que hao de corresponder na
sua qualidade.

O meu Navjo se esta a aparelhar para os ir buscar,
e visto elle nao demandar mais de nove pes d' agua,
podera mesmo carregar no seu Caes (como Vrti^e. i
t6ve a bondade deme dizer) o' que poupara quatro
pehnys por barril, de desp6sas. Julgo que elle^
podera carregar sette centos fiarris, pu niafs. O
Capitao visto nao ter despezas a' fazer, nao nedessi-
tara de dinheiro.

Agrade90-llie muito^a sua informa9ao' relativa-
mente ao c^mbio 6ntre Ldndres e esta Pra9a, mas
* c6mo julgo as remessas sobfeo Exchequer hum
. pduco arriscadas, Vm^e. se servira sacar sobre mim ,
ao cambio mais vantajoso possivel, fic^ndb na cer-
teza, que as suas Lettras serao pagas coin a ponqtu-
alidade do costume.

Tenho o gosto de ser,
De Vm^e. m^o. Attento Venor/

Snr. J. Morrice.

Cadiz. . Londres 18 de Mar50 de 1811.

TENHO reccbido em s6u devido tempo as suas
differdntes cdrtas^ assim como tamb^m a minha cdnta
corrente, a qudl tenho lap9ddo nos mSus Livros em ^
conformiddde' cdm Vm<^«. % '

Asda.

G R A MM A R. 89

rings, at 11/. per Last. I make no doubt, but that
was the 4owest Price you could get them for, and
the goodness of them does answer it. . My Ship is^
getting ready with all speed to go down to fetch
them, and she may be laden at your Quay, as she
draws no more than nine Feet of Water, (as you are
pleased to niention,) which will save the Charge
of four Pence per, BarreU I j^^^g^ she will carry
seven hundred Barrels, or more. The Captain will
not have Occasion for any Money, so will want no
Supply. I thank you for the Information you gavq
me in relation to the Exqhange' between London .
and this Place, but as I look upon the Remittance
of the Money hence, as hazardous in Exchequer
. . Bills, you will be pleased to draw on me at the
most commodious Exchange possible, und your
Bills at the usual Course, which sh^U meet with all
due Honour from, - , .

Sir,

Your huniible Servant

■ /
^* ■ '

Mr. J. Morricc. London, March 18, 1811

Cadiz.

Sir,

^

»' *

YOUR several Letters came to hand Indue
Time, as did my Account Current, which X have
noted in conformity with, you j your last to nje was

. ' "of

so PORTUGUESE

A sda ulUcna he de 29 do paasido, 6 nejl^ ine
Inioda recibo ds^ U^ L^tras, bmport&odo em
s^is mil Pe^as de Oito,c|ue sndulrmao Joze Ihe re.«
Baei^ por niinha C6nta e ordem : espero fazejr trisl0
Neg6cio cotti ellas depdis de hvm deseinbdl90 de
t&nto tjBmpo, e de hum c^bio tao desfavoriveL
Acho que os limites que idllc IKe d£u» forao nuiilio
^b4xo do c^bio, e pr^^o da prdt^ : porfim visto
cu ter esper^do todo ^ste t^po> e nao bav4^r prcU
babilid&de de hum ou dutro baixir^ Vm^. se servin
temeiir-me o meu dinh^iro, ao c^cabia CQifc^al«,
para egta Prd^a^'ou Anisterdam^ icomo Ihe psaecdr
m4is conveni^e aos mSus inter6sse$«

Se # pr^o da cophenilha, ou da Prdta descdsse
tinto, que Vmct. julg4sse ^r m^is pen venifinte para
mim, empregar o meu 41066^-0 em qualquir HAsus
do^is g^neros, do que remet6r->me Ldltras, ntese cdzo
o poaera fazer, deicbSndo eu isso inteiramSnte 4 sua
disposi9ao9 na certeza de que tratard dos m6us in-
ter^sses, com o mesmo disycto como se fdssem seus
proprios.

^^iil^sM4a s?tb^ da ^hegada do cambpy, porque
poderia s6r prodiizisse alguma mud&n9a favoravel
po Commercio, e que c^a hum podesse fazer uso
dos s6us capitdes 5 pois ao pres^nte as clrcumstan-
cias nao coavidao a ndda* ,He qu^nto por agora
«e me ofFerece. a dizdr-lhe. No entretanto tenho a
gosto de ser .

©e Vm<^-^- .n>.*^. Attento Ve,n<>^ e Crpi^o.

^n^. Mills & C«.

P^o. Londres 3 de Abril de 1811.

SSTA serve de informar a Vm». qUe de Se:^ta
^^a a ioto dhs, se haS de abrir os Livros do Banco de

Inglatena,

, GRA MM A R. , fti

of 39 of last MoPJbi wherein you give me Recftipt,
49f the three B^Us^ ,^|i)aut>ti9g tp six thousand Piecea*
pf EigWf which my Brother Joseph sept to you
Iqt my AccQUOt an4 by ;qiy Order; I shall mak.e
h^t^spxry B^rgdin of them, after sip longf a Dis-
bursement ; besides they cost me a dear Exchtoge $^
i £ad his Limits to you .were much under the
Price of Plate «nd Exchange: Now since *I
have wilted ajl this Tinje, and there being
liqr Probability of their falling, be pleased to send
my Money, a^ the Exchange comes, either for> this
Place or Amsterdam, which you judge will turn
most to Account. If the Plate or Cochineal should
fiall to a Price, which you may conceive will answer
better than by Remittance at a due Exchange, in
•udi case invest my Money ip either of them, whicji
I do en^rely ^ea^ to }^du,, being perfuaded, you
will act in my Afbks equ^ 1 to your own. I should
be glad to hear of the Fleets Arrival ^ for perhaps,
it might give some favourable turn to business, so
that one could make some use of one's money, , for
at preseut, it does not invite one to any thing;
which is all from.

Sir»

■ t

Your bunible Servant.

i«» Miimi "* II *■

IJ^I^ieufa Mills SiQo:

Pporto.

London ^he Sd of April, 1911.

THIS may serve to inform you that the jBooks '
will be opened at the Saok of England on Friday

se^hnight.

92^ P O R T U G U E S E

Inglaterra, para pagar os devidendos vencidos art
iquelle dia, em que eu nao deicharei de receber o
que Ihes pertence dos juros respectivos at6 a esse
tempo, em virtude dos poderes que me conferirao
para esse fim» e depois de os ter recebido^ Ihos
remetrei.

Dcos guarde a Vmc«». m'^. annos.

De Vmce. mto. Veno^ e Crdo.

Hum Escrito, ou BUnete aberto, a bum Amiga ou
Vezinbo, em qualquer ocasiao.

_ /

AO Senr, G. S. que seu creado T. M, Ihe roga o
favor, de iKe enviar pelo Portador

de que agora precisa, e por que Ihe
ficarif muito obrigado*

Carta, ou Instrumento de Procuragao.^

SAIBAM todqs quantos este instrumento, ou
Carta de procurs^ao virem, que eu A.J8. de Londres,
horaem de negocio, tenho nomeido e constituido e
poresta presente nomeo, ordeno, constituo e fa90 o
Senhor B. C. de Negociante, meo Verdad^iro

e legitimo procurador, ppr mim e em meu Ndmc e

'/ ao

V

: G R A M M A R. 95

se*ftnight, to pay the dividends due up to this time
to the parties concerned, wnen I shall be ready to
receive whatever belongs to you both, with the
respective interests thereon, by virtue of your powers
:given to me fgr that purpose, ^nd on receipt thereof,
shall remit the same to you, whom God preserve
;many year3.

* ■ • -^ •

Your most humble Servant."

A short open Escrito, or Message ^ to a Friend
or Neighbour^ for any Thing upon Occasion^

TO Mr. G. S. that T, M. his^most humblrf*
Servant, desires the favour of him, to send by the
Bearer , n

having at present immediate occasion for it, and he
shall always remain obliged to him as his

Humble Servant.

4 Letter of Attorney.

\

KNOW all Men by these Presents, That I
A. B. of London, Merchatif, have named and con-
stituted, and by these presents do name, ordain,
•appoint, and make rtiy trusty friend, i^ Ci^of
.Merchant, my true and lawful Attorney, for me,
and in my nai)()e» and to my Use, to Demand, sue

for.

• #■

9* \ P OR TU G U ESE

no itieu use; pMt defrhiY)^/ mtii^ t' rii^iiJtt'At
T. B. Negt>ciante a 86ma de ' a mira dfeVidk ^16
diftaT. B. dimdo 6 pOT em 6bnc<^ndd ao ifi^tt
dittb Prbcuraddr 6 itata pdS^ fitaSktio t mtdrididt
d« «x«rciraf, de tksar d^ tod^ fi^s 2Kf^dSi.i dtitr^
tousas tm direitb Mteidsfo)^, ^ra a c6l^dia9a d&
ditta divida^ e em meu nome, de dar, e fa^er quitsi^oS^
6u 6utras descirgas^e geraltnente de fazer € executar
na roatertflt sobr^ditta tao piendriam^tite como'se
eu m^smo fizesse ou pudesse fazer, estaniio pessoal*
m^nte presenter ratific^do, confirm&ndo, e outdr«
gaitdo toda e qualquer cousa que o ditto meu prcK
caraddr legttimami^nte fiz6r on causar de se fazet
nSlla per esta presente. Em testemunha do que
Assinei e sellei esta em aos 20 dias do m6z de
Mar96 de 1808. .^^ Jxif A. R

A^siihiido e Sbllado atfilnt^

M R f T^stemunhas.

^ ■■' ' ■■' » ■ ■ ■ , -. 1 -1 I - -

Carta ou 6 Jhstrumento de Fretamento.

ESTA carta ou Instirumfento de Fretamfento
contratado, feito aos dias do mtz de

do Anno de do naciro6nto de n66^

so Senhor Jes6^ Chtirtb, he. txiXr€ T. B. Mestre;
debaixo de Deos, do navio nomeado,
d^ doz^tas e cxmco^xtVA torieladas q(Q6 ^ pre-
^dtite eista Sfirto e zncotisih no Rity de
de huma pkte, e E. T; M. B. JL. ice. lu^nlekis
de'^negdcio da 6atra p&fte: Ga-tifioiS qu^ 6 ditto
M6strd tem dido etn aliigue) e fretado 6 ditto
Navb jSbi dittos h^tt^n^ dtf iie]gdei6 e qu^ dies

OS

GRAMMAR. »$

fot, recovferj and nfeceiVe of T. B. of
Merchant^ the Sum of to m6 du^ tod ow«>

ing bj and from the said T. B. ^iving^ aad hereby
gra^tid^ unicJ tj^y said Attorney, fifty fuJl PoiHner
and Authorify to usb and exercise a^l suth A&s,
Thin^9 and Device^ in the Law» as' shall be Ac-
cessary fqfr the recbverihg of the fiud ^b^^^and give
Acquittance, or bther Discharges-, in my Name ; to
make and give^ and^nerally t6 do and e^ecate on
th^Premm^, ^s" Ailly as myself might or could do,
were I personally pi^sent ; ratify ingyConfirriAif^ and
allowing all and whatsoever my s^id Attorney shall
lawfully db« or cause fd be done therein, by these
Presents. In witness whereof t have hereunto sfct
my Hand arid Sedl, in th6 2Dth of March, 1807.
Sealed and delivered

In the Presence of A. B*

T. A.

M.Bi

->'>■ ..^ «V.^t.v.. r., t.«^ .>..^i»^. V'^,.l, .

The Copy of a Cbdrtdr-Party of AffriightrAm.

THIS Charter Party of Affreightment^ iri-
dent^, made the of ^

Mi6rith of Anno Dorbini^

between T. A% Master, under God, of the good
Ship or Vessel^ cailled the of the Burthen

of ' Ttibs), or thereabouts^ now riding at An-

chor, in the ]ft.iver of of the one rartj arid

Ej, T, M, B, L, &c. Merchantdj of the other Part,
witriessethi that the said Master has granted and
let the said Ship to fiteight qnto the said Mer*
chants^ aAd thdt they the raid Merchants have ac*

Gordingly

96 PORTUGUESE.

OS dittos Homens de neg6cio tern tornado em alu-
gucl p^lla viagem aos concertos e as condi9oes9 a-
saber; o ditto Mestre faz concerto, promete c '
ot6rga, por elle'm^smo, seus -Testament 6iros, c
Administraddres, e com os dittos homens de ne»
gocio, e qUalquer ddlles, ou. sens; e a qualquer dos
seusTest&menteiros, Admrnistraddres, e Constituin-
tcs, por estes presentes ; que o ditto Navio forte* e
sao oe quilha, e bem provido de mahtimentos,
cfnxarcias e g^nte, le aparelhado de tddas as cousas
convenientes e necessarias para faze r a viagerti
adiante declarada ; com o prim^iro. vento favo-
ravel e bom tempo que Deos premittira desp6i^
da data da presente, partira do porto de
com tfidas as taes faz^ndas e Mercadorias que os
dittos homens de negocio ouos Seus Constituintes,
entrem^ntes carregarao ou meterao abordo delle,
e com elle em direitura dara a ve)a e aplicara ao.

com, o vento e o tempo mais favo-
recerem ao ditto Navio na sua viagem , e em
chegando ta5 perto do ditto lugar de cUe

o ditto Mestre ou os Seus Constituintes dentro de

Dias de trabalho para se contarem logo,
despols de tal sua chegada, nao somente descaregti«
rao, entregarao as dittas fazendas e mercadorias
metidas abordo do ditto Navio ao s6bfe ditto,

aos dittos homens de .negocio, aos seus Feitores ou
Constituintes, ou a alguns ou algum dalles a Sal-
vamento e b6m acondicionadas, salvo o risco dos
mafes, e o tolhimento de principes e Govcrnadores,
tnas tambem receberao, tornarao a caregar, e toma-
rao abordo do ditto Navio, de e dos dittos homens
de negocio, dos seus Feitores ou Constituintes, ou
de alguns ou algum dalles, tddas as taes fazendas e
mercadorias que ^Iles ou qualquer delles ali carega-
rao, ou meterao abordo d^Ue ale o comprimSnto
inteiro da carga do ditto Navio; asaber: tSnto
quanto bem se poder arrumar debaixo da cuberta

no .

G R A x\f M A R. 97

cordiflgly hired her for the Voyage, Md- upon the
Teton and Conditions following : That is to say,
the said Master does covenant, promise, and gi'ant
fb? hiWKdf, his Executors, and Administrators, to
and- with the said Merchants,and either of them^
their and either of their Executors, Administrators,
and Assigns, by these Presents ; That the said Ship,
strong ami! sound, and Well and sufficiently victu-
alled,- tackled, manned, and apparelled, v^ifh all
Things fit, needful arid necessary for the Per-
fomidnce of the Voyagte hereafter mentioned, shall,
with thl3 first fair Wind and Weather, which God
^all stfnd'v aft^r the Datd of these Presents, depart
from thef Port of with all such Goods

and Meikshamdlae as th^ said Merchants,- or theit
^JigsigMf shall in the mean- time lade and pat on
board of her, and therewith directly sail, and apply
W\to , ds Wind-and Weat^r shall test

arwfbt tAe snid Ship to' sail, and being ah*ived as
tkfm^ to the said ^lace ef be thie said Mas-

tfeti-or Assigns? shall and will, within
nmrkmg Days next from and after sudh her Arri-
ve* to be accounted,' not only unlade and deliver
th6'S£irtd Good's and Kfetx:handize put on board the
said Ship at* aforesaid, unto the said Mer-

chants, their Factors, or A'ssigns, or sdme or onfe
of them, in Safety, and v^ell conditioned, the Dan-
gers of the Seasi, and Resttaint of Prindels^irid R\i-
fers^i£ceptigd;.but also shall andwill'ritfoeiVe,reladtf,
smd takeo^n boatd the said Ship, of and from'thb
€tAd' Merchants, their F^retbrs, or Assigns,^ or some
ct-6ne of them, pW such -Goods and Merchandi^te,
^* they or any df' them shall there please to lade
and put on board her,- to the said Ship's full and
compleat Lading ; that' is to say, as much ast Can
conveniently be stowed in the whole Hold, and
between Decks, afore' the main mast. Room only
TOfeWVed-for' the said Ship's 'Provisions^ Tackle, arid -

* G Apparel,

n PORTUGUESE

no conv^s, e adiante do tnastro grinde» Salvo o lugar
para os mantimSntoS} enx^rcias e apar^Ihps do ditto
Navio, e os dittos dias de trabalho

;^Mdo acabados, ou o ditto navio sendo ali mais de-
pr^ssa despachado^ o que primdiro suceedSr, elle o
ditto Mestre ou os seus constituintes com a pritn^ica
boa occasiao de t^mpo c vento fa^oravel em derci-
tura navegarao e tornarao a vir cdm o ditto Navi6
e a Sua Carga, do ditto porto de descaregar^ e reca-
regar de aqui d^ntro de

dias de trabalho logo despdis da entrada
do ditto Navio dada na alflindega desta ditta

elle o ditto Mestre ou os s6us Constituiates .
descarcgarao e entregarao as dittas fazendas e met-
cadorias carregadas abordo do ditto Navio ao stti
descarregar e recarregar sobre ditto, aoi

dittos hom.ens de neg6cio, e os seusTestainent^fros,
Administradores, ou Constituintes^ a salvamSnto,
salvo o risco dos mares e o tolhimento de Principeff
e Governadpres, e assim se acabara a ditta destir
nada Viageni E os dittos homens de negd-

cio concertam» prometem, e otorgam por 611es m^
mos e qualquer dalles, ou s6us, e qualquer de s6ui
Testamenteiros^ Administraddres^ e Constitiuntes
por esta presente : que os s6us Testamentei-

ros, Administraddres, Feitores ou Constituintes nao
somen te descaregarao e recaregarao o ditto na^
ao seu pdrto, de descaregar, e recaregar de
sobre ditto, e despachardo e descaregardo o mdsmo
neste na man^ira e forn^a acima decl&p

rdda : e dSntro dos certos dias ^e tempos sdbre no-
meddos ; Mas tamb^m por int^iro de tddo 6 frete •
que se vencdr, para se pagar e pedir por e dur&nte
esta presente destindda viagem ; bem e verdadeirA-
m^nte pagardo ou causardo que se pdgue ao ditto
Mestre, aos s£us Testamenteiros, Administrad6res '
ou Constituintes a somma de

de dinheiro corr^nte de na msm^ira c

fbvmt

GRAM MAR. 99

AppareU and the said working Days

being expired, or the said Ship there sooner dis*
patched, which first shall happen, he the said Mas-
ter, or his Assigns, shall and will, with the then
ncit Opportunity of Wind and Weather from her
said unlading add relading Port of afpresaid, ,

directly sail, return, and come back with the said
Ship and Lading unto the Port of * and here .

within working Days next after the said

Ship shall be entered in the Custom-House of this
•aid he the said Master, or his Assigns,

shall and will unlade, and deliver the said Goods and
Merchandizes, laden on board the said Ship at her
lading^ and rcladinrg ' aforesaid, unto the said

MerchaflVS, their Executors, Administrators, or
Assigns,, ifa safety, and well conditioned, the Dan-

Ers of jthe'Seas; aijd Restraint of Princes and Ru-
js, excepted, and so end the said intended Voyage ;
and the said Merchants do covenant, promise, and
grSint, for themselves, and either of them, their,
and either of their Executors and Administrators, .
to and with the s^id Master, his Executors and Ad-
ministrators, and Assigns, by these Presents, that
! their Executors^ Administrators, Factors,

or Assigns, shall and will not only unlade and re-:
lade the sarid Ship, at her unlading and reladingPort^
of aforesaid, and dispatch, and discharge the .

sanpe at this in the Manner and Form as

^boye expressed, and within the respective Days
aind Times above mentioned, but also shall and
^li, in full of all Freight to be dQe, payable, or
dcmandable, for or during this present intended
Voyage, well and duly pay, or cause to be paid,
unto tne said Master, his Executors, Administrators,
or Assigns, . * the Sum of

of lawful money of in the

Manner and Form following: That is to say.

Part thereof within

* G 2 Days

100 PORTUGUESE

forma seguinte; AsabSr p&rfce d61I&

d^ntro em dias despois da eatrdds^

do ditto navio d4da na alf j^ndega de

Item nri4is dSntrp. em dias proxi-

mos seguintes, e o rest4nte do ditto frete int6iro
dcntro em dias logo despdis da descdr^

do ditto Navio aquiem. sobre ditto» b

ac6rdase reciprocamSnte por e^ntre d:mba6 a^ par-
tes por dlles m^smos, os seus particulires Testamen-
teiros, e Administraddres que tpdos os g^tos dos
portos que se vencerem para pagarse ou pedirse^ dur
rinte esta pres^nte destjndda. vidgem ; serdp p&gos
e satisfeitos na mantra e forma seguinte ; A^^bj^
delles, pellos dittos homens de neg6cio ou
scus Testamenltdiros ou Constituihtes : Alem disspi
por esta se concerta que podera s^r e si^}^ i|cij;o a(Wf^
e pellos dittos homens de negocio, ossi^^s.&itdrc^
ou Const] tuintes de ret^r o ditto navio em detenj^.
ao seu pdrto, descarga. e. r^carga sobr/edit^a, e tafjOr
bcm em ... . sobredittp^ tgpto tempo etantos cjia^qiifi
se requ^iraoi aldm dos dia$, cerjtos acim^ apoiptddo%
salvo que nao passem. dias,pQr int^jko.;.

Elles OS dittos homens de negqcio, os seus FeitdreSi.
Constituintes por c^da hum.e cada t^l djfi pagindo
ao ditto Mestre ou aos seus Constituintes de di^^eqi.
dia, como mesmo se veneer para se pagar> qualque]:;
c6usa ^obreditta emcontr^riq nap obstante ; e p^lk
comprimento de tddas, e de cada, huma das oduw
acima decjaradas, as quaes por parte e p^llo que,t6-
ca ao ditto Mestre; aos seus TestamentSiros^- A^
ministraddres ou Constituintes. e c^da hum dalles,
sao e devem de ser avidas^ tida$^ observadas .0
compridas, o ditto Mestre se obrig^^a.si m6s.aH)».<9
seus Tcstannenteiros, e Administrad6res> juntam^te.
com- o ditto Navio, o seu frete, enxai cias e .apar^lhos.
aos dittos homens de negocio, aos seus Testamen-
teiros, Admipistradores e CJpnstituintes^.e cida.huB
delles na sdraa ou pena de dinheiro corrSnte de

part

fek A M M A ft. 101

pkys d^et* the said ship shall be entered into the
'Custottl Hotise of Item^

tactrt thereof within Days then next fol-

ilbwing, and the remaining part of the said whole
FHaight within I>ays next after the

s&id Ship shaH be delivered after lading here at
aiorea&id ; and it is mutually agreed by and
between the said Parties to these Presents, for therti-
Ifelves, their several Executors and Administrators,
"That all Port Chalrges which shall grow due, pay-
)A)te, or demandable, during this present intended
ybya|;e, sh^U be paid and satisfied in the manner
jUdd R)rm follovfring ; That is to say, thereof by
iiie slEiid Merchants, their Executors, Factors, or
A&sig^ns, and the other thereof by the said

Master, hils Executor or Assigns : Further, it is
beteby agreed, that it shall and may be lawful unto
and for the said Merchants, their Factors, or As-
signs, to keep the said Ship in Demurrage at her
liTiIading and relading Port above mentioned, and
also at aforesaid, over and above the re- •

spected Days aforementioned, such other Time and
Number of Days as will be requisite, so as the same
exceed not Days in the whole, they the

said Merchants, their Factors, for each and every
such Day, paying ^unto the said Master, or his
Assigns Day by Day, where the same shall

grow due and payaole, any thing aforesaid to the
c6ntrary notwithstanding; and for the Perform-
ance of all and singular the Premises, which on
the Part and Behalf of the said Master, his Execu*
tors. Administrators, and Assigns, and every of
th^m, are and ought to lie well and truly holden,
observed, and performed, the said Master doth bind
and oblige himself, his Executors, and Administra*
t6rs, tbgethet with the said Ship and her Freight,
Tackle and Apparel unto the said Merchants, their .
Executors, Administrators, and Assigns, and every

of

\.

102 PORTUGUESE

I

para se pagar bem e verdareirimente por ^sta prc-
sente, e tambem pello comprimentode tddas e.de
cajda huma das cousas sdbre dittas^os qudes por pdrte
e pello que toCa aos dittos homens de negocioj abs
seus Testamenteiros, Administradores, Constituin-
tes ou qualquer delles, sao e devem de s^r gufix*
dadas> pagas, e Compridas; os dittos h6mens de
negocio se obrigao a si mesmos, os seus Testamen*
teiros, e Administradores^. junta e separadamSnte
cdm a su^s fazendas que se caregarao abordo do dit-
to Navio n^sta presente destindda viagem, ao ditto
Mestre aos seus Testamenteiros, Administraddfes e
Constituintes, e a c^da hum di^lles, na semelhaote
Soma da pena de de Semelhante dinheiro

corrente de para ser pago bem e verdadei-

mente por esta presente; Em Te^temunha! do que
as pdrtes Sobredittas assinarao e Selarap reciproca*
mente estas pres6ntes Cdrtas de fretamento contra-
tddas^ ao dia e anno prim^iro acima declarddo*

XB.
Sellido e entregue
diante de
A. B, C. D.

Apolice de Segura,

» •

Em o N6me de Deos, Jmen.

Tanto no seu proprio ndme, €6mo» por,
ou em o. nome, ou nomes de todos e cada pessda
ou pessoas a quem o m6smo pertencer» p6ssa ou po-
dera pertencer, em parte ou em t6do, faz .o Seg^ro,
causa asi mesmo e a elles, e a cada hum d611es» de
assegurdrse, perdidos ou nao perdidos

sabre qualqujcr g^nero de fazendas e M^r-
cadoriasquaesqu^r^carregddas6u para se carregdrem
ab6rdo do bom Navio por ndpae. . . do portc

de

GRAMMAR. 101

mt tbein> in the Sbm or Penalty of *' . Pounds
of kwful Money of well and truly to be

paid by these Presents, and likewise for the Per*
tbrmance of all and singular the Premises, which
on the Part and Behalf of the said Merchants their
Executors^ Administrators, and Assigns, or any
of them, are and ought. to be kept, paid, and per*
formed, the said Merchants do bind and oblige
themselves, ,their Executors, and Administrators,
jointly and severally, together with their Goods* to
be laden on board the said Ship, this present intend-
ed Voyage, unto the said Master, his Executors,
Admin is tiators, and Assigns, and every of them,
in the like Sum and Penalty of of like

lawful Money of also well and truly to

-be paid by these Presents. In Witness whereof, the.
Parties aforesaid to these present Charter-parties in-
dented, have interchangeably put their Hands and
Seals the Day and Year first above written.

T. B.
Sealed and delivered in i

the Presence of
A.B.aD.

A Policy of Assurance.

In the Name of God, Ameny
as well in his own Name, as for and in the Name
mod Names of all and every other Person and
.Persons to whom the same doth, may or shall ap-
pertain, in Part, or in all, does make Assurance,
, and causes himself and them, and every of them,
■' to be insured, lost, or not lost upon

any kind of Goods and Merchandize whatsoever,
' laden or to be laden aboard the good Ship called
the Burthen Tons^

Of

104? PORTUGUESE

de / ^one]4das, de <|ue b^ M^tre

debdixo de D^os P. M. o\i quem ^er que 4dr
por Mestre do ditto iN«Vio, ou o MestFe^ddJleM'
Dom^e ou nomeara ; principi^ndo a ffvent\lFa -sdbre
as dittas faz^nd^s ^ Mercadorias de> e logo despdis
de carregallas abordo do ditto Nam e assrai

se continuarde Gcaxk at6 que o dittfi Navlo c6m as
dittas faz^ndas 9 Mercadbtlas qu4esqii6r^iiegaf

e' as mesRias abi descarregad&s aem Salva-
m^nto ; e serA licito parao ditto navio^ nesta viA-
geni, de pardr e detme em quaesqu6r poito^sfkL^u-
gdres s&m prejuizo a dste Seguro. ' As

dittas /faz^adas e Mercadorias por conc^rto^ s^ e
serao avaliadas em S6m que se dt di^tra

conta d^ll ^smesSfnas, tocante as Aventuras e liscos
com que fl6s os Seguradores nos contentamosegue
tqm^mos sobre nos ni^sta vidgem; £llas S££ dos
"Mkres, das Ddos de gu^rra, de fi&go, inimigos^
Cprsarios, LadroeS) Roubad6res^.A]{janu^tos oufa-
zdndas perdidas e deitddas no mdr, lettras de Marea,
e contra Marca, sobresaltos^ tomadks no Mdr^ cita-
9oes, tolhimentos e deten9as de t6dos os R^ys,
Principes e p6vos de na9ao, condi9a5 ou qualidade
qualqu6r, barratria e contrdstes engan6sos do mestre
e dos Marinh^iros, e de tddos os 6utros perigos ; p6r-
das e desdstres que ja vi^rao ou que virao, ou pre-
juizo^ desaproveitam^nto ou d&no das dittas taz^n-
das e mercadorias, ou de algua parte d^llas. £ se
acdso succeder alguma p^rda ou desventfira, sera li*

^ cito aos Asseguraddres, Feitdres, Servos e Constitu-
intes de manddr faz6r dilig^ncias e trabalh&r per,

^ 6m, e &c£rca da defeza, Salvam^nto, e reeobramdnto
das dittas fazendas e mercadorias, oude alguma pdrte

-di^Uas s^m prejuizo d^ste Seguro, aos gistoe do
que nos os Asseguraddres contrtbuir^mos cada hum
cpnforme a Sua quantia n£lle assegurdda ^ e n6s-QS
AssegurQddres eataraios de acdrdo e conc^nb qu€
^staescritura e seguro terd tinta for9a e valor cdmo

a mais

C R A M M A R. 105

or thereabouts ^ whereof P. M. is Master, u&der
God, for this preseht Voyage or ii^fao*

soever "else •shall go fof Matster in the said. Ship, or
by whatsoever Name or N^Etmes the said Ship, or
the Master thereof, is or shall be named or cdJed ;
beginning the Adventure upon the said Goods Bod
Merchaiidise from and immediately following the
Lading thereof aboard the said Ship
and so shall continue and endure until the said Ship,
with the said Goods and Merchandise whatsoever
shall be arrived and the same there saroly

landed ; and it shall be lawful for the said Ship in
this Voyage to stop and stay at any Port or Places

without prejudice to this Assurance.
The said Goods and Merchandise by Agreement,
are and shall be valued at without fur-

ther Account to be given for the same, touching
the Adventures and Perils which we the Assurer©
are contented to bear, and do take upon us in this
Voyage ; they are of the Seas, Men of War, Fire,
Enemies, Pirates, Rovers, Thieves, Jetsons^ Let-
ters of Marque and Counter-marque, Surprisals,
Takings of !Sea, Arrests, Restraints, and Detain*
ments of all Kings, Princes, and People of what
Nation, Conditions, or Quality soever, Baratryof
the Master and Mariners, and of all other Perils,
Losses and Misfortunes, that have or shall come
to the Hurt, Detriment, or Damage of the said
Goods and Merchandise, or any part thereof ;' and
in Cslse of any Loss or Misfortune, it shall be law-
ful to the assured Factors, Servants, and Assigns,
to sue, labour, and travel, for, in, and about the
Defence, Safeguard, and Recovery of the said
Goods and Merchandise or any part thereof, with*
out Prejudice to this Assurance, to the Charges
whereof, we the Assurers will contribute each one
according to the Rate and Quantity of his^Sum
herein assured : And it is agreed by us the Insurer?,

that

106 PORTUG.UESE .

a miis authentica Apolice ou Escritura de Segiir^
^ dantes feita em qualquer parte de £ asstm nos os
Asseguradores somos coDtentes e por efta prometS*
mos e nos obrig^mos cadahuoi por sua propria parte,
OS Dossos Herdeiros, TestamentSiros, Admrnistra-*
ddres e Constituintes pello verdadeiro comprimento
das cousas acima declaradas, coiifessando que esta-
mos pagos e satisfeitos do que se nos deve aconta
d^ste Seguro.

Em testimunha do que nos os Seguradores^ aiS-
namos ao pe d^ste, com as quantias assegu^as^

Eu A. B. Sdu Contente com este Seguro?^ -^
por cem livras Esterl. L. em de)^'

ConJiecimento.

DIGOeuT. B. de Mestreou

Capitao qi^ sou do Navio que Deos salve por
N6me que ao preseute e&k surto e .

/ancor^do no porto de para cojn o favdr

de Deos seguir a sua viagem .ao pdrto de:
a6nde be miuha direita descarga, que he verdade,
qqe recebi, e t^nho carregado dentro do ditto
Navio debaixo de cuberta enxuta e bSm acondido*
sado de Marcado comamarca de fora, o

qual me obrigo e prometbi levandome Deos a bdm
salvam^nto e ditto Navio ao ditto Porto, de entrc-
gar em n6me do sobreditto a T. M .
auzente a qu6m seus poderes tiv6r pag^ndo-

me de frete para assim comprir c guardar,

obrigo minha pessoa, e bems e ditto iNavio ; cm cer-
t^sa^ qual dei trcs conhecimentos de hum thedr,
assioadospor mim ou por meu Escrivao ; hum com-

* prido

GRAMMAR. t07

^ ■ • -

that this Writing and Assurance shall be of as much
Force and EflFect, as the surest Policy or Writing:of
Assurance heretofore made in . or

elsewhere in and so we the Assurers

are contented, and do hereby promise and bind
ourselves, each one for hi§ own Part, our Heirs,
Executors, and Assigns, to the Assured, their Exe^-
cutors, Administrators, and Assigns, for the true
Performance of the Premises, confessing ourselves
paid the Consideration due unto us for thi$ Assu*
ranee, by - In Witness whereof, wc

the Assurers have subscribed our Names and Sums
assured in

1 J. B. am contented with this Assurance for
One hundred Pounds. Witness my Hand> -

The 15th of March, 1811. S^"^^^

• \

A Bill of Lading.

SHIPPED, by the Grace of God, in good Or-
der, and well-conditioned, by in and
upon the good Ship called the where-
of is Master under God, for this present Voyage

and now riding at Anchor in
arid, by God's Grace, bound for
to say being marked and numbered as in

the Margin^ and are to be delivered in like good
Order, and well-conditioned, at the aforesaid
Port . of the Danger of the Seas only

excepted, unto Mr. or bis Assigns, he

or they paying for the said Goods
with Primage and Average, as is accustomed. In
Witness whereof, the Master and Purser of the
said Ship has^ affirmed to three Bills of Ladinc^, *
all of this Tenor and Date; the one of which,
three Bills being accomplished^ the other two to

<- ' iUnd

Wft PORTUGUESE'

]>rido OS dutros ndo vdlliam ; feit5 em , ' .

14 de Mar90 de 181 1 Annot

Ign6ro o contfetido.

Instrumenfo ou Escritura ^ Compromhso.

A TODOS quantos ^ste presetitc Instrutn^ntd
DU. Escritura de Compromisso virem, de n65 Acre*
ddres de G. M. Negociante de StedAe ;

C6mo o ditto- G- M. ao pTes6ntfe fica deTendo e
cm dereito d6ve a' nos os Acredores delle ditto Gi
M. varias c diversas sdmmas de Dinb^iro, fee. As

^ quaes em rasao de muitas divrdas e algdmas d61Ia^
mui gr^tides, que tambi&m em derfeito se Ihe d^vem
a elle^ nao se podem arrecadar sem alguma dila^ao
de t^po, e por s^em algtimas dellas irrecuperliVfeis

« sem demanda, elle efta por ora muito desabilitado
de fazer pagamento a n6s os seus Acreddres da
nossa intSira e justa divida conforme a sua vontade
c des^joj a respeito de qae,elle nos pede cbto todo
o encarecimento que n6sos dittos. Acred6res> e cada
hum de nos fossemos servidos &t dar e tonced^t a
illc o Ditto G. M. aos seus Tes^mentdiros, Admi-
nistradores, ou Constituintes, t^dta largu^sa ou di-
la9dode tdmpop^llo pagiam^nto e satisfa^do de nossas
dividas particulares, que Ihe parecer jtisto, e rasdo
p611o atclince e cobrStnca das dittas dividas ; AsabiSr^
que nos e cSida hum de n6s ficassemos contdntes a
tom^T e receber de nossas dividas intdiras eiti
para se r^partirem em p&rtes^ plira se pa-

garem em pagam^ntos diversos na man^ira

e forma Seguinte : Asab6r, o primeiro pagam^nto
della ha de set e 6 resto pagar-se-ha em

proximo p^lia intigira paga e Satisfa9io

das dittas dividas especeficddas ; E'p^llo mai$ pie-
:oirio eomprim6nto dos v4rios pagam^ntos sobfe-

dittos

G,R A M.M A;R.. H)»

stsmd void. Aod so God. send, the good. SlhJ^ito-
her d^ired Port in Safety. Amen. Dated in .
the 14 of March 1811.

tnside and Contents unknowa.

W ■»'

A Leittar of Licence,

TO all People^ to whom, this present. Wiidbg,
shsdl conie> We the Creditors, of G. Ml of

Merchant, send greeting..^ Whereas- the
sc^id G* M, at this present Time, does stand in-
debted*, and dojes justly owe unto us. the said Credi-
tiors of him tbei, said 6. M. diyers and sundry Sums
of Money,, &<:• which». by reason of many Debts^;
and. some of them very greats that are likewise
justly owing luito. him^ and cannot be had or re«
cpv^red without some Respite of Time^.and some
of them, not without Suit, he is very much, disabled
at present to mal^e Payment unto us the said Cre-
ditors,, our. whole and just Debt, as he seems, will-
ing and desirous ; in consideration whereof^r he
instantly desires us. That we the: said Cr^editors, and
every 'one. of i^s^, would be pleased.to give and.gr^nl;
untO'the said G. M. his. Executors, Administrators^
or Assigns j, such Liberty or Respite of Time, for the
Payment. and.Satisfactioa. of our several Od^ts^.as
he thinks reasonable for the obtaining, .^tti^g, 31^4
TACpyering^of the said Debts : viz. That we. and
every, one of us would be content to. take, andacr
cept of our whole Debts in. to^,be diyided

in I * Parts, to-be paid at several

Payments, in Manner, and Form following r\viz«
The fifsti Payment thereof to be anithc

Residue to, b^piiid at next in

fuU Payment and Satisfaction of the said several
Dcihts : And for the more full Perfprniance.of'tbe
said several Paymeats aforesaid, in such Manner, and

Form

110 PORTUGUESE

dittos em tal man^ira.e forma cdmo acima fe Iiinita
c declara; ao verdad^lro intteto deltas presenteselle
o ditto G. M. ao ou 4ntes do sera obri^ado

a nos OS dittos acreddres na me^ma conformidsidey
por hdma obriga^ao que se fara na melhor forma
de derSUo com todos e cada hun) dos pagamentos,
na maneira acima limitada, eih hum certo ]ugar ou
lugares convenientes de nos os dittos Acredores no-'
me&dos, e a pSna de cada htima das obrigacoes ha de
ser dohrada daSomma inteira, inclusa nella roesma,
para sfir aaios entregue e a cada hum de nos, os nos-
sos Testament^iros, ou Constituintes, ao ou antes do
proximo Seguinte da data desta ; poresta
c&usa Saiba se ; que nos os dittos Acredores aqui
a baixo assinados> e cada htim de nos para si em
particul&r, c por seus Testamenteiros, Administra*
ddres e Constituintes ao resp^ito do enicica especi-
ficado e declarado, por estes presentes, de vont&dc
pr6pria consentimos, contratamos, prometemos e
concord&mos ao e com o ditto G. M. ou seus Testa-
ment^iros, Administradores e Constituintes por es-
tes pres^nteisqiie nos os dittos Acredores, ecada hum
de nos, os, nossos Testamenteitos, Administradores
e Constituintes, aceitaremos do ditto G. M. dos s6us
Teftament£iros, AdministradiSres e Constituintes, to-
das e cada'huma de tdes dividas e quantias de din-
h£iro do ditto G. M. a nos e cada bum de nos, de-
vidas evencidas em virtude de taes obriga-
fdens, Segur&n9a ou Seguran9as sobredittas,
para se pagdrem em tal modo e maneira, c
ao8 tdes dias e tempos que acima se limitao e
requerem. ' E al6m disso, que nos os dittos Acre-
dores e cada hum de n6s, ou nossos e cada htim de
n6ssos Testamfenteiros, Administradores e Consti-
tuintes, em conformiddde d entrega da ditta Obri-
ga^do a n6s e a cada htim de nossos Testamenteiros,
Administraddres, e Constituintes ao ctisto do ditto
G. M. OS seus Testamenteiros, Administradores, e '

Constituintes,

GRAMMAR. ill

Form, as is^ above limited. and declared, according
fo the true meaning of these Presents, he th« said
G. M. shall ahd will, at, or before the • be^

. come bound uoto us the said Creditors respectively,
by One Obligation in due Form of Law to be made,
including all and every oneof the Payments in such
Sort as is above liniited at some convenient Place
or Places * . by each of us the said Creditors

to be nominated and appointed, and the Penalty of
every Obligation to be doubled the whole Sum in-
cluded in the Condition of the same to be delivered
unto us, and every one of us, our Executors or As^
signs, at or before the next ensuing the Date

hereof: Know ye therefore, that we the said Cre-
ditors, • whose Names are here under- written, and
every one of us for his own Part, and for his Execu-
tors, Administrators and Assigns, for the Conside-
ration above specified and expressed, do by these
Presents willingly consent, covenant, promise an4
agree to and with the said G. M. his Executor^,*
Administrators, and Assigns, to accept of the said
G. M. his Executors and Assigns, all and every of
the said Debts and Sums Of Money by the said G.
M. unto us, and twery one of4is^ owing) and paying
upon such Obligations, Assurance and Assurances,
as aforesaid, to be paid in such Planner and Sort^^
and at such Days and Times^ as is above limited
ahd required. And further, that yye the said Cre-
ditors, and every of us, our, and every of our Exe- '
cutors, Administrators, and Assigns respectively,
upbn the Delivery of the said Obligation to us, and
ta every of us, and every of our Executors,, Admi-
nistrators, and Assigns, shall and will, at the
Charge of the said G. M. his Executors, Adminis- .
trators, and Assigns, seaU subscribe, and, in due
Form of Law, deliver to the said G. M. our suffici-
ent general release, for him,. his Executors, Admi-
nistrators, or Assigns, to bear Date and Limitation,

before

112 PORTUGUESE

Gonstituintes, Sellar^mos, assinar^mos e na-melbdr
£Snna e dereito entregar^mos bo ditta €k ]Vfc. a>n6ssa
geral e sufHcidqte descarga^ para s6r rendidia' pac
£I]e o ditto G* M. ou sdus Test amen tt^ivosy Admi-
oistradores, e ConstituiDtes, k data' e a Vimitsti^io,
antes do dia e data defsta abriga^ao n6ira ;. em tes-
timiinha do que temos assinado e sellddb;esta^

Daladk'aos 15 de Maiode 1811*.

r

■ * ■ > i — ^ ■ - , -| ■ - - . ^ ■ . - ^^^

Letra de Cambio.

Landra, S de Junho 1811. por 300 Milreii.

A VISTA desta minha pricaeira Eetra de
Cambigr, pagard- Vm. ao Senhor T. M. ou OVdem a
soitima de tresi&ntos Milreis em' dinh^iro corr^nte
dfe^ Porfugdl, Va!6r recebidodo SeiiHor T. D. como
p^r aviso de . Seu Venerador e CrtSA'Of^

Axx Senhor T. Ml .... T. M>:

Neerociante em Lisboa.

. .1' ; •>il--

V

■ 1 •

t ■ .1

y

'

■ f . •;;• . ..

lMoa>7 dfe Junho leit.' • -

\

2^£.8tmM.

A, QUARENTA Dias Vista desta minha Se-
£unda Letra de Cambio^ (a. primeira n&6 sendo
Ipaga^pagard Vm. ao Senhor F. G. & Companhia^
6a Ordfim a Somma de* dozSnta& e Cinquenta- livras
EaterHnas em moeda corrente de Inglaterra, valdr
^reoebida do Senhor J;II>. corao por aviso de:

Ao, Senhor T. K Negpciante.

em Londrcs, Seu Venerador e Creado.

H.S.

G-R A M>M A ft. Ill

before the Day of the Date of this new Obligation
to be made for the Debt In Wi theM hereof, we
have hereunto set our Haod$ 4^ Seals; - Dated
tU X*rt)>f May 1811, &c.

I ■

r • ■ V

■ • • ... ,

..f,^ | *li i^iili M iiii . Jj'i ' ' * "! M ' " '* ■ ! >»!■ . '% C>i> li> rf ii -.'i

!• . .

/.);- . Bitii Iff SJctiM$ge. .::!>

( : I . • ; J . . . .

i ,1 ... .V-*"«'.'l

AT Sight of this my first Bill of fiiechmgei
^ctoe.tb pay to.Mn T. M.or Orders tbe 8mn lof
^Thscc Hundred Mlbeais in current Mom^^of Por*
ftttgHU Value received of Mr. T« U.'fiiang it tB

Asc^aunt, as per Advlc^^iriom^ . SIR, < : .

*tb Mf . t. M. Merchant Youri, H. &

» . I

I •

. '. .J

.r''>4i(' = t * "..*: : ^ . .

Lisbon 7th of Jooe Idlt* ' for S50& Sterliag

AT Forty days Sight, of tiiis m^ second Bill of
,£aa:hange, ngrfissHindtliArdaiot being pdkl,{>leate
4d pay to Mii<it.cG/ and Oompany, or Od^' tile
Sum of two Hundred ^and fifty jPbundt Ste]Oifig> in

Tours, H. S»

\

114 PORTUGUESE

I.

Protesto de hnma Letra de Cambh. r

.. »»

SAIBAM todos a quern 6sta ^resente es(;rit\^
ra tocar que aos do mtz de, do knr

no de a requerim^nto de P. C. Nego-

ciante de eu M. N. Tab^Uao de

n6tas jiirado e admitido'pMia-antoridade del Rei,
&c. fui a casa da morada do Senhor T. B* sobre

3u6m a Letra de Cambio acima referida be saca-
a, e mostrei a original ao ditto T. B. requerendo
a sua aoeita^ao.della : o qual me respondeo que nao
acdttria* a ditta Letra por huma^ ras6ens*q\)i^ e^re*
veria ao Senhor T. P. sacador ; pella ^ual rasa6
eu o ditto Tabaliao protestei^' por ^^$te'' prfesente
prot£ftoyt4nto cdntra o ditto F; P. 6 sac^ddrxdmo
tamb^m cdntra o ditto T. B. s6ln^ quern he'sacada,
deroiis cdAtra todas as outraspessdas; Endos saddce^
ou outras nella interessadas^jpor^'todos os C^ktnbiaSf
Rec^mbois, danos e inter^sses q.uaesquer^ VHm- pre-
'sfen9a de H, J. S. T. chamados por T^sternunliijas a
€ste presente acto, f(§ito no meu flscritorio em 6 dia
e inno acima declarado.

M. N, Notario Publico.

aha

Vartas For mas de Rccibou .

* - >

Dinheiro recebjdo tor inteiro. ^ ■ ^ . .

^4). .: RECl^I, .do , Sbotoih ThoAapi Crcwv Seis
tluv/^ /Setc $bi]lns iSdsi , .pernios .inbstsci :de : tod^s^ ds

. to b'f^:miiayorAem'^^^ .'

RECEBI do St. Jonas Lee,5ltlifttro Livns t
iCippo Sbilips por Conta de meu amp Moises.Tnist

. ^

G R A M^MrATIC "1

» ,«. , . •» . \^

A Protest of a Bill of Exchange. ^ ^ . ^ ,

K^JOW all Persons whom this present, Wi;it^ji
ipg may concern, that the or ^ iji^lwr

Year at the Request of Mr. P. C. of

Merchant, T. M. N. Public Notary, sworn and ad-
mitted by Authority of his most sacred Majesty,
did go to the^ Dwelling-housfe of Habitation ot Mr.
T, B. upon whom the above named Bill of Ex-
change is drawn, an* shewed the Original unto
the said Mr. T. B, demanding his Acceptance of the
same, who answered me he 'should not acce'pt the
6ame Bill, for someReasons he should write Mr. F. P.
the Drawer, Wherefore I the ss>id Notary ^(Jid pro-
test, and by these Presents protest, as well against
t^tf.^9Mi F. P. the Drawer, as ljike\vise agaiiist t,he
'-^ said T. B. upon whom it is drawn ; , as also again^ltl;
all other Persons, Indorsers, or others therein con-
cerned,' for all Changes, Rechanges- :Damajgf€i» and
Interest whatsoever, in Presence of H- L and S. T.
c^led for Witnesses to this present Act, Hone in
iny'Office in the Day and Year above men-

tioned* . . ^. M. N. Notary Public*

Various Forms of Receipts.

V Money received in Full.

RECEIV ED 1 St Januarv 1 8 11 , of Mr. Thomas;
Cr0WySix Pounds Seven SBillin^s and Sixpence, in
' . full of all. Demands per .

1 -

For another's Use.

RECEIVED 22d February, 1 8 1 1 , of Mr. Jona«
Lee, Four Pounds Five Shillings, for the Use of my
- Master Moses Trust, per

:..■.'■- • w.«.

% - • H 2

lltt pOjRItU'G.U.ESE

Dinheko t^cibtdo & c6nta.

RECEBI a SO dis Marco, 18U, do Sr. Jacinto
Cbok; Cinco Livras Cinco Shilins, 4 cdnta de doze
JlivVasc dez Shilins, per Conta de men par Antonio

Tfuclove,

SO de Mar50 1811.

^ ■ •

pkhiin recibidB k cSnia de Cent as fue naS istaB

MJHsiadas.

RECEBIt da Scnhora Martha Rich, por mao$
db Pedro Cornet* onze Livra& a Conta,

,fl4deAbril J8ll.

Quando hum Rol ou Coniafepaga por inteiro.

RECEBI. & 15 de Mayo, 1811, o etttpbrte
d*«sta Conta, por '

V Quandofepaga dmhiira a Cents de hum rSt.

RECEBI, Sete livras a conta deste Rol

6 de Junho de IftlK

•w«^<i^— ^AMPM

liotas tm Ohrtga^ens que faz hum Homrn quando tarns

dinheiro emprejtado.

Londres, 4 de Junho, 1811.
EU a1;)aixo firmado prom^to pagar aoSr. E. D.
Banqueiro do Thesouro de sua Majestade, do Excise^
on d sua 6rdem quar^nta dias despdis da ddta desta
obriga9ao qu4tro c^nfas c trinta livras por valdr re^
cebido

• *

;^.430 p Christovao Wade.

EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. PaiHo
Barker ou 4 sua ordem em sendo requerido> ire-
^enta^, e noventa, e quatro livras dous Shilins e

^ . Scis

ti^ R A KM A 1L '. tn

• \

y RECEIVm. SOth of March, lall, of Mr,
James Cook^ Five Pounds Ten Shillings, in Part of
Twelve Pouirfs Ten Shillmgs^foir mjr father Antho-
ny Tniek)v4, per

• • ' . ,. It.

I . ... • ■ -.

/ »

Mon^ receivfd on 4ccounts wfettjtd.

\ RECEIVED a+th April 1811, of Mrs. Mtr-
thftiRich, by t;hc Hands of Peter Cornet, Eleven:
Pounds on Account, per

When a Bill is paQ in Full.

*

RECEIVED 1 5th May, 1 8 U, the full Contents
hereof, per

When a BUI is paid in Part.

RECEIVED 26th June, 1811, Seven Pounds
in Part hereof, per

Promijfory Noles/or a Man^s Self.

\

s

London, Jun^ 4th 181 L

I PROMISE to pay to Mr. Edward Draper,
Cashier of his Majesty's Revenueof Excise, orOrder,
forty Days aft^r Date, Four Hundred and Thirty
Pounds. Value received ^

jf .430 per Christopher Wade,

I PROMISE to pay to Paul Barker, Esq. or
Order, on demand. Three hundred and, ninety-
four Pounds^ Tveo Shillings,' and Six-pence,

Value

lis

P aR'TxUlCU E» E

Seis pcnnys ppr r, ya^dr reqebido . "hoje 17 de
Julbo, 1811.

*.f.

£U abaizo firmado ptom^to pa^arao'^lr. J; T.
au d sua ordem, quar^nta e nove livras, e tre$
Sfhilins 6 mezes despois da ddta desta dbVigafao, por
valor recebido em verdide ^6 que asignei esta 24
4e Aeosto 1811.

£A9 3

N. B^ '■ 'Obs^Hr^sb que em ii6tai ou' bbrigacoem
ttlmprici ^decldra a sdma redebic^d, setki a^quai niio
sao de nenhuma for9a nem tern Autfaoridade.

- <r . ^

» »

\ /

■«. *

^ . • .

1'

.1 «

• »

t r

I. .

G R A-M M A.R. 119

Value received this 17th of July, 1811.

/.S94 2 6 per Philip V^nhatn.

I PROMISE to pay to Mr. J. T. or Order,

Forty nine Pounds Three Shillings, six Months after
Date, Value receiyed. Witness my Hand this 24th
of August, 1811. per William Jones,.

£A9 3

N. B. Observe in Promissory Notes that the
words " Value received** are mentioned, or they are
of no Force.

f \

I

' •

a ■

I .

S -4

I t .

.• .It., o)

'^r

' » r •

• • »
t

.1 •&

* .•

^ , - ' ')*/» Ot.'t^)

J

■ •» '■» I »

'\

ANEW

\

G R A M M A ll. 121

^HT i T't^ r m^T n ^TTil^TT m Y^ r ^^i^r^ ' frr^!^^^'^^

A N£W

PORT^JGUESE

GRAMMAR.

I

■ ii n iMHfii iiy»iiiiii<nilri 11,1 II luml " II i" iiinl, i'fi hJML-

^

PILRT IV.

C0NTAINIK6

^iwrU m^l m£ wtmaifmg Phages ^ xMtiUifrm

the ^ ^ortvigtiese Wrim^. ^

Jp" NTB£ OS boQs ditQs i4e Seuzdm^ po^tit Ptftr
Mq, se cdotOs que ^b^odk) com outfo :p<^tB\
^u amigqj caerto licorj^Quoisdva* de ^^ ^a imi-
jto ^aioAe & dizjfeniolhe, aa^gOj pobf^ de ti que
dmm a JI0UCO8 dias. te^^ heller no infi^reo a^pons
sullureaiS, $c ar44^Qtes, ^^ue |e abnusarao at esteftn-
faas^ oao ioapdrta, f eplfcdtt Sousi^ ; bttstardque
ine lginbre-a)gum4dos tens verao9# ^ue tSksse Smo
mais 1^19^ ^ue neve*

K]xittmmi Part%duiy sdbrinfha da e£1ebre Jfma
'Pnrthenuy, dftu esta b<3ia resp6sta a Kinripte IV.
safiavos^a inag^ que iu s6u muito fobre para ser sua
tons6rtei eque no memo tempo desctndo de mmaJamHia
muito illistre, para ser sua dama.

* I Huma

122 PORTUGUESE

Huma Princ6za Catholica, e de rara virtude ven
do reduzido o Marichal de Saxonia as agonias da
fri6rte, disse, qyc era pafk sentir o nao se podfir rc-
zar hum De profundis pella alma de hum que tinha
feito can tar tantos 2> Dcum,

A Dom Christovao de Moura^ Marquez de Cas-
tello Rodrigo, e Vice Rey de Portugal por Dom
Philipe Terceiror indo per huma sala do Pa90 de
Lisbda, hum soldido honradp, que tinha bem ser-
vido na India, Ihe dava hum memorial, e pedia, que
se lembrasse dos seus papeis, pofque hayia, largo
terppo, que andava pretend^ndo. Respondfeo-lhe
o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para despachar,
' e ttko se podiao despachar todos com brevidade ; o
soldado adiant&ndoiO passase atravessdti dtsnte sem
dcscomposi9ao, e fazdndo parar o Vice Rey Ihe dissc
com grande confi^nfa v senhorDom CAristovao desph'
eke Vs. gs komensy e deixe a Gente^ O Marquez aceitou
o memorial, e o despachdu no mesma dia.

Mandando hum Fidalgo em Lisboa abrir em hu-
ma rua OS Alicerces para w faz^rem humas casas,
sem licen^^dac^meraypasslLndoporallio procdraddr
da cidade, poz p^na aos ofjiiciaes, que nao.trabal-
htssem na/obra sem lic^n^a dos Vereaddres ; eos
officiaes dizdndo*b ao Fidalgo mand6u-Ihes elle que
nao deixassem de trabalb&r, e que nao fiz6ssem' ca^
so do que dizia ^quelle villao ruim ;, tornado o
procuraddr da cidade por alii e ach^ndo os officiaes
trabalb&ndoy fnanddu que dessem com dies no trbn-
co 5 e nao faltindo quem ihe contasse o que o Fi-
dalgo diss^ra^ t6ve-o em diho ; e no tempo que ri-
le hia atravessando pello Rocio para sua casa, sahio-
Ihe ao camipho a cavalloy e com huma lan^a que
kvava/dando na sua sdmbra^ Vo^ disse i .poique o
que dissesles, foi em minha aus^ncia, ddu cn^ v6s-
1^ sombra ; se mo ti vessels dito no rosto> dera na
Yossa pessba. * '

Abcfd'

GRAM MAR. . U23

Ahu tiahifahi o mais ci&lebre douldf dos Mus-
su)manes, t^ndo recebido huma bpfetada, dissQ ito
que o tinha iiisultado: eu poderia vingarme, pa*
gindovos na mestna moeda ; mas nao o quero fazdr.
Poderia atcusarvos ao calife : mas nao quero ser ac-
• cusador. Poderia nas minhas ora9den9 queixarme a
Ddos desta affrdnta ; mas nem isso quero fazi^r. Por
fim poderia pedir a Deos, que se quer no dia do jutzo
vo$ castigasse ; porem o mesmo senhor me livre de
semelh^nte pensami&nto ; mas antes, se succed^s^
que neste inst&nte chegasse aquelle formidavel dia ;
Jt se a minha intercessao tivesse alguma efficacia para
com D^oSf nao quisi:6ra por companheiro s6 nao a
Tos para entrar no Paraiso. Que admhraveV ex6m-
plo para os Christaos aprenddrem a perdoar as injd-
riasJ . * '

Jba Peregriuagam.

Pass^das quese daoperegrinando,sao degr^os pai^a
a cdsa do desengano. Das suas fdntes sahem os rips
muito pequenos, e crescem corrdndo^c levao mares
ao mar. Hotnens, que da sua terra nao sahem, sao
fiavios, que acabao no estaldirp. A sabedoria c6mo
vinda^ do ceo, anda neste globo terrestre perigrina i
nao be facil achala senao peregrinlLndo ; err^ndo por
este mundo, se appr^nde a nao cometter erros. Va»
pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della se
fazam estrellas. Aos h6mcns que querem luzir,
digve a p&tria servir, como ios planetas o horizdnte^
Ide ber90, para ensayo do seu luzin)ento, longe do
poQtoortivo, e remontados a mais alta regiao, apurao
as influ^ncias, e duplicao as luzes. Quenome teriao
hoje no mundo Socrates^ Pith&goraSy e Plata^^ e ou-
tros sibios da aptiguidade, se a modo de cdpos, ou
francos, que adnde nascdrao fazem raiz e no seu
primdirocbaoapodrecemynao buscarao foradaPatria
as noticias, que Ihes falt^vao. , Nao se orndra //if; -
luUs com 08 despojos dos Monstroij que domdU| se

1 2 os

M4 PORTUGUESE

OS iiao fdra buscar pdo mundo; a sua dilat&davttgenx
devem 06 Argonautas a conquista do tii&ello de ouro;
Se nao canr6ra l/iCjriJ^i rein6tos dimas, font a Ald^
de lihdca de toda a sua gloria x) thedtco. H6fnens
perpetviamente ca8^ir68, sao gallos, que;s6^bem
do aeu poleiro. Sabioa peregiinosr imitao ^no sou
.curso as ^ntes^^ue paasando por vdaadeprata, ouroj
esmeraldas^ e saffiras, tomao.e comaigp levao a flor
4e suas preciosas quididides. Zooibe .embera Pirn-
iarc$ dos que Iduvao a peregrina9iio, e dj^ 4|ue
se parecem com os que jdlgao as .estrdllas striates
aiais nobtes^ e felices, que as fixas. Nao ha esoob
mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou iDodos
de viv6r, que na variedade ,das Na9QeDS se obsenra.
Vem-se muitas cousas nunca vistas; aprSndemtae
muitas, que se nao sabiao, faz* se o homem capaz .de
toda a casta de negocios, e folga de ver este mundo^
antes de sahir delle. Ate para os piincipes, que das
anas cortes fazemna terra o seu.ppraiso, bomheque
^peregrinem, para conhec^rem o mundo, que dlfis
governao. Os commodos, ^ delicias, os obsi^qui-
os dos subditos,p6dem dara conhec6r a hum hoaaena,
. que nasc6o soberano, mas com este conhecim^oto,
n&o o fazem digno da soberania : ^ oao sabirn JU-
-txandre da sua MMcedmm^ nao passara dos limitos
de regulo e naS ch^pra a avassaUar o mundo.

Do Tempo fmiro.

Trate o homem do presente, e nao qud^ira pcttt-
trar no futuro; quern de tao longe p6em a.ttioi,
iiao pode dar no alvo. Muitas vezes bom hk ifjjmy
rar o que ha de succed^r ; porque se f6r JMm, a AU
lafao he torm^ato; e sefor.maoj.o trabattio hej«em
prov^ito. Para futuros, nao ha «egurftafa. Ao
Embaixaddr, que na guerramovida porLuixKI.
Rey de Fr4n9a, a Carlos Duque de B^gdofaa^ pro-
curava attrahir ao Etnperaddr Frederico, xua {Ma-
in eas^ de se repartirem com elie'os jdeap^^^je^os

estadosy

\

O^ ft A M M A^R. US

est6dosi respbttd^o a dito ' Emperaddl' com este
ap6l6go : tres ca^addres com a esperkfi^^ de apan«
li^rem huirt* urso^ se compromctt^rao na reparti9ao
delle. Cbegadosa boca dk caverna; sahio'afgra'oom'
taS grande iropetc, que btim dos' ca^addresr botdtta^
fogif, outro subib a'lifumaarvore e ooutrose^estenddo
no ch^ flhgihdo-se m6rto; cbegduse o urso a elie;
pt)2^1be o focinlw) no narizi e nos ouvidbs, e naS Ihe-
conhcc^hrib folego, nemsihal dt vida, o defxdu^por
inorta. O qut estiva ma • arvone, disse^ ao compan^'
Mtro ; b6mem^ que te disse d urso^ quando te falldtt<
a- purid&de, com o foeinho nbs^ ouvidos? Disseme
<]tie era^ mai feito; dispdr dapelle, e carne do urso^ '
antes de o v6rem morto; Com isto o Emperaddir
ddu a CDtend6r ao- Embaitoddr, que era precisa
apanfiaf primeir& aoDuquede Bdrgdnha,que depdis*
seHratam da reparfi^aodos seu&estados. Dos suc^
cessos da tempo futuro, so Eteostem cert^za*

D^s Ricos.

Em lug^es estereis, sem her:vas> nem plantas
produz a natureza o ouro, para mostfar que os
amaddres^das rtqu^2Sa9 nao tern f^^ nem honra. Os
ribos' faotnordsbsv que ainda- que celebrados nar
bf^oriae) sao' b^ppr6bf id d^* sua posteridade^ pode-
ri^ter-bda fMtta', se Ihes naofacilitara este metal<a>
execu^fiS^' de seus danados int^ntos. Em todas as
iditd^s fbta&- as- riqu^isas antagomstas da virtude^
cutis' inventaraSr' os- mais-endrmes delitos; dlas' en«
siha^^o OS filhos a tirar a seus pdis a^ vida;
eWilharaS^ os*^ poderosos^ a» opprimir os itanoc6htes».
arruihar as famitiiiss sequear' os templos/&^ despir os;
aKBrresf; ellasitidui^raS'os amigos a qi!^e faltassem a>
Wi incit&raS' os vdssaltos> a- negar aos principes a
obedt^ci^j a OS libkilnosos'del'aS'.mbyos para violac
a' pudictbia^das doiis^eUas, e estragar a honra dos-
roaridbs: fihalmtote ellas ainda^ que bdas para a
vfda civile sao causa de tddosos^ miles,; e fSdstoque
09* 6ibios se souberao aproveitar dellas^ a cobi9a9

12« P 6 R^T U O U E S E

e o mao uso das mesmas, encherao o tnundo t6de
de crimin6sos. Hbmens ricos ordinariam^nte se
p6rdem, por terem muito» e saWrem pooco y des-
prezao o sabdr, porque Ihes parcce, que para todo
o genero de vida, Ibes ba8ta o t6r. A Aristippo
perguntdu Dionysio, porque raz^to os filosofos fre-
quentavaoas cazas dos rieos, e nao os ricos as dqs
filosofos. Responddo Aristippo, que os Blosofos
conh6cetn o que Ihes falta> e os ricos ignorao o de
que necessitao. Senhdres ricos, e filosofos pobres^
nao p6dem fazer cousas grandes, pdrque aestes Ibes
falta dinheiro, e aquelles espirito. Dizia Diogenes,
que muitos ricos sao como as plan tas, que nascem
em desertos, e despenhadeiros, porque dos frutos,
que ellas dao, nao comem os horr.ens, mas corvosi
milhafres, e feras ; tambem as riqudzas de muitos
^nao sao para sug6itos benem6ritos, mas para cho*
carreiros, espadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes.

Estado da Lusitania 4ti ao tempo em que foi reduzida
em Provincia Romanay Por A, C. do Amoral.
Extrahido das Memorias da Academia de Lisboa,

«

Huma historia sincera envergonba^se da gloria
v^^ que $e busca em antiguidades mentirozas :
Desgosta^^se desses sonhos agradaveis, pasto de
huma esteril recrea^ao; e se sabor^a s6 com a ^r-,
, dade pura. Tal h6 a sorte deste escrito, derigido a
fazer prezentes aos Portugueses os verdadeiros cos*
tumes> e Leis de seus Maiores : rejeita tiido quanto^
a iDflpostura, ou a credulidade moderna Ibe conta
dos 3eculos, que a Providencia 'quiziesconder-Ihe;,
e se contenta com as escassas memorias, que ppde
colhdr dos raros monumentos antigos que Ihe restao.
Nao tenta eritrar pelas esp^ssas trevas dosprimeirosi
S6 Seculos do mundo, em que nao acha quern o
encaminhe. Pois que os Hebreos untcos guias,
iSeguros, que introduzem em muitos outros paizes,
nem hum s6 pass6. dao para este que habitamos; c

V apenas.

GRAMMAR. 127

kpenas dao motivo a conjecturar, que das Colonics
sahidas do Oriente para povoar a terra algumas Se
estend^rao ate a esta extremidade ; n)as netn donde,
nem quando viessem o pode colher a historia.

Nao aclia dejpois dos Hebreos outros, de quem se
fie, senad os Komanos : e ainda estes pouco Ihe
sabem dhzSr de hiim Paiz tao apartado, em quanto
a ambi^ao de o senhorear os nd5 avizinba a elle t
mal conservao huma obscura tradic&o de que a estas
partes -vierao Ccltas, Iberos, rersas, Lusos, e
Gregos: de huns apenas ficara resto na derivagfto
do ndme; de outros na beran^a de alguns costumes.
A navega9p5 com que alguns Povos do fundo do
Mediterraneo com^jao a enriquccer, a# traz ate
estas ultimas Costas, e vai logo espalhar pello
Mundo, a fama das f icas minas, e do fertil torrao
deste Paiz desconbecido ainda antes que da qiftli-
dade de seus babitantes: nao tarda com tudo a .
niostrar-se esta ; continda a vir em busca dos tho*
sourps descobertos a ambi9So/estrangeira; e v^ '
erguer daqui, quaes feras acossadas nos seus covis,
homens bravos para defender os bens que ^ Provi-
dencia Ihes destinara« E esta he a primeira Scena
que se nos representa no Terreno Lusitaqo 5 hum
Canipo de Bataiha, continuada ja com os Fenicios,
ja com OS Carthaginezes s que depois de disputarem
por largo tempo com estes Barbaros a sorte das
armas, os deixao ainda por domar aos Romanos
quandd Ihes cedem a conquista de Mundo. Mas
ao justo motivo da defeza propria succedem depots
outros, que facilmente poem as armas jia jnao Va
huns homens, a quem a falta do commercio, e de
artes quasi nao deixa outro melo de ^jiriquecer, que
a pilhagem ; ndme com que muitas das suas guerras
sao infamadas pelos P6vos mais polidos que elles.
E o mesnio habito de peleijar Ihes vai alimentando
hum natural feroz^ que ja os n4o deixa accommodar

clb

128 PORTUGUESE

com o soc^go da pzz, e que os faz buscar inimi^os.
dentro emcaza, quando Ihes faltao osde fora.

Estcs vicios, e virtudes dc guerra» he o que de
princififo nelles distioguem os Romanos» nao os
vendo senao armados no campo ; e de que nao po-
dem deixar de dar testemunho estes mesmos.vai^
d6sos desprezadores de tudo o que nao he Romano.
Mas em fim a medida que se Ihes choesS- mais.
perto, e se envolvem com elles^ la v&6 divjsando
por entre alguns claros^ que as armas deixaS^^ Sorv^
do seu governo interidr.

V^m que este Tcrreno, que deaignao; pelo Qome,
de Lusitania^.he habitado de Povos dtffbrentes in^s
dependentes buns dos outros» e goveraadoa cadft
hum por suas Leis^ costumes particulates; leis.
raras, e costumes sin^elos^. ainda com a marca. da
Natureza nao contrafeita^

Como a 8eguran9a propria he quem. s6t forma
estes c6rpos3 nao largao da Iiberdade q;ue receb^ao.
da natureza^ mais que o puramente preciso, para
conservar essa mesma seguran^a. Aguerra a qiiie
sao dados he que os obriga a criar hum. Superior,
a que jurao fidelidade ; mas conseguida a pa^
expira o govemo do Generalj^ e a obediencia. dos
Soklados.

Se ha que estabelec^r de npvo paramo bem comr
mum da Sociedade* servem-se do meio u^o das.
puras Democraciasj Assembldas geraes^. em quiS
cada pessoa tem o arbitrio de approvar,. ou rejeitar
o que se propoem : e ainda nesta ac9^; respira o ar
militar> em que sao criados y hum bater da espads^
no broquel he o signal de approva93os hum.susurra
inquieto o de desapprovar.

A' simplicidade da Legj[sla9lLo segue a; <las
penas; sao os reos do crime capital apecirejado^.e
^ara que o honor do crime se extenda alein ainda
do castigo^ todo o que passa depois da execu9aQf
h€ obrigado a Ian9ar alguma pedra sobre o cadaver
do justi9ado.

1 N^

C R A MM A R. • , 12ft

N^ desmenta fla parte Le^jslativav, a. do Com-
niercio interior aiada: pouco sujeito a: fraudes; nao
OS move a.contratar. a sede insaciavel do ouro,. que
ixiaL conhecem : as mutuas necessidades, a que so
procurao soccorr^r, os ensina a trocar entre si as
cousas precisas a vidj^ Estas Ihes dictao tambem,
o que devem conceder ao corpo ; comeres, c bebi-
das simples, quaes a Natureza as produsia : vesti-
^ossem mais estudoqaeodo fim para que os iisaa;
cama sem regaJo, nem^ despeza ; emfim a tudd o
preciso para a conserv^ao se accode com o.meQos^
apparato que pode sen

A esta sobriedade bem propria de si para dar a^
saude, e. vigor do.corp(^ ^untao.o trabalho aturado;^
OS hom^DS o daguerra quasi continua, e nos intef-^
vallos della o de exerdcios semelhantes a guerra ;
as mulheres o da cultura dos campos, e de todo o
trato domesticos que com discretareconomia Jibes he
cedido peloshomens occupados com as armas. £
se faz memona dos seus^ bailes* e cantares^. nao sao
taDto fructo do ocio^oomo do innocente prazer da
vida social

Deste modo) sobrio,. e trabalbado de. vida era
consequencia araridade de dpen9as: para ^Iguma,
que accaso haja, nao he venal a.cura,. nem o reme-
dio, nao se tendo alguem. por desabrigado. de con«^-
correr. para Inimi officior- de rigorosa, hnmanidade :
he. o enfermo exposto em publicQt^ e 09 que tarn
sido feridos do mesmo mal; ensinao os. remadiocr
com qpe conseguirao a saiide^

Nos q]iie habitavao a& vizinhan^asr do Minho^
cpmo eraa osGronios^ ou-Gravios, os»AmphiloGiDS».
e outros, se vem assazretratados^os^ costumesrdas.
Gregos, de quem^ oe& Aiitigps. querem^ que elle$i
descenda5> Jogos^ e certames- p\d3diaos> cazasneA**.
tos„ai;l>e de augurar tudQ>h4de Gregos. IdolaUat)
como seals Maiofea» nada-coa^e^vao di^Religiiao pursk
q.uea Razao Ihes.mostrarai, mai$ qiie o recoiaheair-
mento de que ha hum^ Epte maldi^ cg^ elk6)c«a»

que

ISO PORT U G U E S E '

qoe dcvcm dar culto : porem estragado este na-
tural scntimento pela corrup9ao do coragao, imagi-
nao Divindades indignas, a que bonrao com bum
culto' igualmente indigno. Sc querem dar-lbes gra-
mas pello feliz successo de buma batalba, as maos
direitas dos prizionejros sd5 o tristc trofeo que Ibes
lev&ntao. Se antes de qualquer ac9ao procurao saber
o seu bom ou mao exito, dentro as entranbas de
bum inimigo be que vao buscar este fatal segredo :'
se querem fazer religioso hum juramento, he pre-*
ciso que as entranbas quentes de bum homem, e de
bum cavallo Ibesy^ sirvao de banbo» em que depois
de mettidas as maos, as poem sobre o altar, junto
ao qua! se deve fazer estaridiculaceremonia. Em-
fim be'sempre sanguo o que applaca buns Deoses,
que estes Idolatras guerreiros formavao a sua seme-
]han9a.

Estes sao os poucos vestigios, e quasi apagados,
que se encontrao dos costumes domesticos dosLusi-
tanos, que de ordinario so se viao no campo de ba*
talba, detendo, ou fazendo retroceder os passos aos
Conquistadores do mundo. Mai o podera crer quem
mede a for9a de bum Estado pelo fausto de seus
babitadores, pela magnificencia de suas obras, e por
todo o explend6r que encanta os sentidos; quem
nao avalia quanto pode bum Povo, em que todos os
individuos sao aptos para adcfesa da Patria,em que
ba tantos Soldados como bomens endurecidos todbs
no trabalho, e todos animados do amdr da liberdade.

Hum Povo, como este, foi o que sem arte, e sem'
disclplina, em tendo na frente hum homem que o
soubesse mandar, escarnece por muitas vezes das
tropas mais bem reguladds, e deu muitos dias de
mdgoa, e de deslustre aos soberbos Romanos. Viri-
ato, Sertorio, i ainda outros de menos n6me forao
instrumentos da gloria Lusitana, que sobrepujando
4 emu]a9^ ficou eternizada nos escritos de seus
mesmos iniraigos, e nos marmores que o tempo con-
sumid6r nao acalmu de gastar.

Por

GRAMMAR. 131

For mais de Seculo e meio andarao os Romano^
na porfiada lida de subjugar este ultimo peda9o da
Hespanha que ja contao toda por huma por9ao certa •
dps seu9 dominios : todos os annos Ihe nomeao Go*,
vernaddr: mas por mais que tentem mandar Pretor
como para Provincia pacifica, a cada passo se vem
obrigados a Ihe mandar Consul armado ^ depois ^e
terem separado o* seu Governo do de quasi todo o
resto da Hespanha. Esedequandoem quandoalgum
destes Generaes consegue a gloria de^a pacificar,* e
sujeitar 4s Leis Romanas, pouco tempo Ihe dura
verde o.louro 5 na sua mesma cabeca Ihe murcha,
ou ao mais tarde na de seq successor : 4te que a
longa experiencia os desengana, que he preciso mu-
dar de systema; e que so costumando primeiro os.
Lusitanos a se sujeitar como amigos, he que os po*
derdo ipsensivelmente ir passando a obedecer como
Vassalos.

So^u a Poesia Bucoltca dos Poetas Portugu^zes Por
Joaquim de Foyos. ExtrakidQ das Memorias de
Litter atura da Academia de Ltsboa,

Assim como entre as dilas especies de ora9ao,por
que o homem tanto excede aos outros animaes, se-
cultivou primeiro o Verso, assim de todas as sortes
de Poesias pafece ter sido primeira a Bucolica.
Ainda que o genero humano nao nasc6o da terra, e
dos duros tronco3 das- Arvores, como imagindrao
muitos Poetas, e parece que chegdralo a cr^r alguns'
Filosofos; comtudo depois do diluvio, espalhados.
os homens por toda a face da terra, e perdidos pouco
apoucoosconhecimentosque herdarao de seqs ma*
iores, e s6 conserv4vao naSociedade,he summamente
provavel,que huma grande parte delles viesse succes*
sivamente a passar por astes^tres generos de vida r Sel-
vagem. Pastoral, Agricola. Os muitos Povos, que
ainda hoje babitao, e se achao na primeira^ ou se-
gunda destas vtdas, confirmao a verda^e desta con-

jecHira.

isa. POR'TU^GUESE

jectura. Mas x> homem^ vivendo hmnatvidaailveMie
no8 tiosqueSy separado de toda aSooiedadei 6 sost^-
tando-fie UDicamente de ca^a^ e dos fhictoa espon.
taneos da terra, nem se acha em circuimt&dcias d^
adiantar OS seu8 conbecimeDtos, nem^tem tetnpopara-
cultivallos, occupadO) e at^ento todo em busoar o
necessario fysico, que n^ pode acfaar semmuit8'
difficuldade, e trabalho. E ainda queaconte^a^'que*
por vezes Ihe sobre algum espa^o livre desta9 ooq^
tinuas fadigas^ satisfeitos todos os seusnatunfes de^
stjoSf e appetites, can^ado o cdrpo, e eotoispecidt>fr
OS membros» Ihe entorpecerao juntamente* as faeul^
dades da alma, desacostumadas a^ discoti^r, e a
exeroitar-se em outros objector, e se entregard^ooe*
mente a o somno. N45 succederi assim- ao& P^
tores, que tenda gado^ que com seu leitelbes' sub-*
ministre o sustt^nto, e com suss pelles a vestidc^^
passarao huma boa parte da sua vrdaquietos, e>d^«
caQ9ados, sem mais outro cuidado que o de condu«
zir, e defender os seus rebanbos^emanadas. Obri-
gados de necessidades mutuas, e attrahidos do natu-
ral deleite, que causa a companhia dbs que tern as
mesmaS' preci^s que nos, e nellas nos* podem dar
algum auxilio, e recebelio^ se chegarao, quando o
permittir a abundancia dos pastos^ buns para os^
outros, communicarao entre si os seus pensamentos^
e descjos^ praticarao ^obre as cousasque mai& amiaoy.
e celebrarao a suafelicidade.

Huma vez juntos os homens^.e em ocio; contentes^
t^ sem: can9a90y impossivel he, que n^ inventem^
diversos jogos, e toda a sorte de-desenfado^ e reerea^
9^5 para evitar? o tedio de huma vid^ sdcegada, e*
satisfeita* Entre estes divartimentos^n4o'devia tor*
ultimo lugar &' Foesia. As faouldades do bomemf
tern. huma natural disposi^o para ella-; ouaPoestai
consista na imita^ao, como querem Piat^y ehn^
toteles, aindar queclara e distinctamente nunca xiosi
diseessem o que esta imitai^ SjS^a ^ ou enr huma)

ora94o

G R A M M A R. nss

orsLqiS levantada sbbre as expressoes vulgaris, in-
vertida coin -figiuraG, e faarmoniosamente moduladiia,
e >cocnpas6acki xx)fl[i o metro, e com orbythmo. Em
qjualqiter destas cousas^que fa9amos coasistir a Poe-
\UA, ou em. todas elias^ paca todas recebeo o homem
da Natureza huma>admiravel propens^o.

A^ nossas aensa^es sdo tido «6meiite a orfgen;i» e
fimdaroento. de;tedas as nossas id6as, mas ^mnsiPoF-
sundo^se de div^rsos :modos, ^sdo todos os nossips.
juizos; « raciciciaios, as: nossas* artes, a9 nossas Soieh-
cios, e, ^em^hunaa palaYra, >tudo:quanto sabemos^e
^onfaecemos. Mas a imita^io be huma 8ensa9ao
^il, ^e p^na que :estk xiUposia .« confbrma^ dos
nossoa orgaSs; e das nossas potenicias, e por come-
quencia huma .8ensa94o, que n6s ach&mos por ex-
daremo ^gnita, e deleitavel. Deste mesmo prmcipio
iae«egue oatro,:o fqual aqui igualoiente pertence, e
•vema ser, que ^he -natural ao homem n6o 66 a otbn.
^do^e^a'barmom'a^mas tambem essamesma ore^dB
vaviaxia jcom differentes ^tropos, e figuras ; isto h^^
com diveiE806 modes de egcprimir as cousa^/e os
peasamentos, jk com a iinpsma burmonia ; isto he,
com o rhythmo, e ja com o metro.

Conbeoei^se-ha claramente a dependeacia que
estes dous principles tem eutre^i, se considerar-<ino8,
^ue^imitagioyi^qual eu ja mostrei serhvm exerct-
caOiSummameDte gostoso ao hoenem, e htrni modo
fadllimo jas^itn de elle apprender, como de cQmm!^'
jiiear aos ou^oe os *seiis sentimentos) huma wez
-fieika, .e prakicada com a ora9io, traz necoMarkb-
mente cpmsigo toiias aquellas vartedades da niesma
, i>Ta94D, qjie taponteiadma. Daqui vem affirmarem
Jig4ulamente, e com Faz4o jus^ima os mais ceiebrag
{"ilosofos, x{ue qufzerao descer ja, discassoes deste
^nef)o,x{ue a Poesia eta tdo ant^a, como o genero
liumano. Ceitamehte parece ter nascidb logo com
MB primeiras Sociedades, que eUes formiraSy e qbanfdle
clles comeimiisaS amda ^llDHiito, aisim da rusticidade^

como

134 PORTUGUESE

c6ino da singeleza, e ionocenqia natural. Do que
parece, ou claratnente provado, ou dedu^ido com
•assaz probabilidade, qua a Poesia nasceo, e se in-
ventou entre Pastores. Mas em que genero de
Poesia se exercitariao estes prtmeiros hon[ien&? N4o
sera difiicil conhecello, se reflectirmos, qual seria a
materia que, segundo as circumstancias em que se
achavao, se Ihes offerecia para os seus cantos. Aris-
toteles foi de parecer, que dos primeiros inventores
OS que tinhao genio elevado imitavao accoes illiis-
ti'es, e feitas per personagens grandes^e pelo con-
trario os que tinhao engenho mais rasteiro, cantavao
as accoes dbs bom^ns vis, em cujo vituperio com*
punhao obras vridiculas, assim como os outros sc.
exercitavao em hymnos e encomios.

Porem este erudito, e intelligeote Fiiosofo ndo
fala naquelle/lugar da primeira origem da Poesia
rigorosamente/mas sim do modo com que ella, de*
pois de inventada^ se foi dividindo em diversas es-
pecies ; porque suppoe tempos em que he ja grainde
a disigualdade dos homens ; o que nao tern lugar
nas primeiras e simplicissimas sociedades de Pas-
tores.

He pois summamente verosimil, que estes homens
quizessem imitar aquellas cousas, que com mais
frequencia se ofTereciao aosseus sentidos.que satis-
fazido as suas necessidades, e que constituiao a bem-
^venturan^a da sua socegada vida^ e felice estado,
por que nellas empregavao toda a sua atten9d5, e
cuidado. Canfariao pois os seus rebanhos> os mon-
tes e os valles, em que os apascentavao, os rios, e
fontes, a que os levavao a beb^r y a alva, e serdna
madrugada, que os cbamava ao trabalho ^ a sesta,
que OS convidava ao descanfb ; e os rafeirosp, que
Ihes guardavao o g^o. Cantariao^ como era natu-
ral, a^ paixoes e affectos da sua alma \ porem n^
affectos violentos, e d^sesperados, que ndo erao pro-
prios daquella vidai mas ddces e suaves, e que so

Ihes

GRAMMAR, 135

\

Ihes caus^vao aquella inquieta9ao, e desasocego^ ai
que se nao pudesse seguir fim alguta funesto,

Como estes argumentos sao todos prpprios da
Poesia Bucolica, segue-se ligitamamente, que ellafoi
a primeira, que no Mundo inyentafao os homens.
Sendo pois a Poesia Pastoral a primeira origem de
toda a erudi9do hun^ana^ e os primeiros esfor^os,
que fis^rao as faculdades do homem para se puli-
rem, e cultiyarem, justamente me persuadi, que a
Academia, instituida toda para utiiidade publica, e
que alem de outros mais gloriosos» e louyaveis ejna-
penhos, tomou a si o de dar a conhecer os princi-
pios^ e progressos da nossa Litteratura, havia de
levar em gosto que hum Socio seu tratasse dos mere-
cimentos dos nossos Poetas Bucolicos. Deste tra-
balho> Senhores, posto que maiorque minhas for9as9
me quiz encarregar, por ser dos mais leves e faceis,
que tao illustre corpo podia commetter a algum de
seus membros. .

Vos tratareis verdades sublimes, por extrerao re-
motas» e escondidas a commum comprehensdo dos
homens i medireis o e9pa90 immenso dos C^os ;
poreis Leis aos corpos mais vastos, mais distantes,
e ate mais rebeldes do Univeho j com vossas por-
fiadas investiga^oes, e rara sagacidade obrigareis a
Natureza a que yos dcscubra, e patentee aquillo
mesmo, em que ella punha maior estudo em occul-
;tar. Assim para feticidade dos outros homens aug-
mentareis, e aperfei9oarei$ os seus conhecimentos ;
mas sereis muito particularmente Felices v6s, e feliz
a Patria, em cuja utiiidade haveis de empregar os
vossos talentos^, e todos estes trabalhos, e fadigas :
e ella vo-lo sabera agradecer com o prcmio, que sov
desejao as almas grandes, do louvdr^e da gloria. Eu,
gozando-nqie, e comprazendo-me do vosso alto mere-
cimento^ de que vos quizestes me coubesse tambem
giguma parte, me contentarei com examinar a pro-
priedade, e elegahcia de buma palavr^;' a verdade,

novidade.

136 PO R T tr G U ES E

novidade, e 'belleza de 'hum pensamento ; a fnoo-
cencia, e sS singeleza de Inim Pegureiro ; e isto
propter aquie rivim, ouquando muito, s$ii tamis arboris

Mas tornando ao meu assumpto, de que tne fize*
rao desviar os vossos justos louvdres, nao sao poaco
r^levantes, nem concorrem medianamenite para a
insVruc^aoy e cultura dos homens os trabalhos dos
Poeftas. Negallo seria nlio conhecer o mode, par
que se dilatao, e apef feicoao as nossas faculdades, e
ignorar inteiramente a riistoria dos varios progres*
'SOS do entendimento humano. A restaura9ao das
lethiSy com que se desterrou a ignorancia, e bar-
baridade, a que nos tinhao reduzido as Na^oes
do Norte, e as continuas irrup9oes dos Sarracenos,
tetn as suas semetltes nos Trovadores 'Proveofaes,
e Lombardos, que fructificando felizmente che-
garaS a produzir os dous abalisados engenhos de
Dante, e Petrarca- Cultivada per estes dous-^an-
des homens, e por algunsmaisseuscontefnporaneos
a Lingua Toscana, preparou a Italia, e a sua imi-
taj(ao a toda a Europa para hum conhecimento pro*
fundo da Lingua Latina, e da Grega. Com taes
disposicoes, e auxilios se instruirao as Na9oes Euro-
peas nas Artes, e Sciencias, e em toda a sorte de
erudi9ao daquelles sabios P6vos; e inflammadas
cada vez mais nodesejo de saber, tern levadomuitas
das Artes, ^ Sciencias dos antrgos a hum ponto in-
crivel de perfei9a5, &c.

dnalyit ^ amhmafves Jilosojum s^ire a ehcugao e estylo
de Sa de Miranda , Ferrtka^ Bermrdes, Cammia
e CamSes. Pr Francisco Dias.

Quando eiltrei nesta composicao, julguei que
devia tomar bum ponto fixo, donde viesse deduzin-
do a sua analyse, e que o Sa de Miranda devia
indispensavelmente formar a 6poca, donde, seguodo.
a ordem do tempo, bavia de dimanartodo o seu

progresso>

! OKA MM AH. 137

progresfio,^ como.de huia ^scritor^ que lan^oa os
fundamentos da Pdesia Portugue^a.. ^ Mas antes que
entraase nesta diltgencia, vi que me. era de^ precka
oecessidade fazer hucna descrip^ap. ex^cta do est?*
do^ em que se achava a Lingua, qu^do o Poeta
Miranda appareceo e sondar as qualidades prinql-
paes da C0mposi9ao e estylo daquelle Padre da Po€i»a
^Portugoezb, donde paasou? para Ferreira^ para Ber-
nardes^para Cammhftj e ultimamente para Canioes,
o maior Poeta da Na^ao, e o que mais enriqueceo, e
apufou o nosso Idioma; discorrendo por aquelles
pontci^^ que mals me pareceraq dignos de compara-
9ao :no genero Sublkne^ como mais nobre, e conao
aquelleque mais esfbr^a pede.da fantasia humana ;
fazendo juizo de cada hum dos Poetasda Analyse,
e finalmente indicando as origenjis donde nasceraoas'
. expressoes^e £Srmulas.combinadas ; no que julgo ter
.satisfeifto ao Assumpto, que he certampnte mais
difficultoso do que parece.

Na execufao de^te tao trabalhoso argumento me
conduzi, segundo as luzes, que pude adquirir na
lif^o de.Ari^toteleSftCicerps Longjtno, Quintiliano,
e mutto niais na de I^ocke, CondilJac, Du Marsais,
e em especial na dor sobre todos sabio Commentario,
que*o grande Voltaire fez ds Obras^de Pedro Cor->
neille/dnde se Yem as regras do gosto pa sua maior
^va^ao.

Todasestas. mater ias sao novas em Portugal, e por
consequencia nao tive a quem seguir : e apezar dos
ddfeitos, posso dizer

/ que aqui vereis presence

CousaSy quejuntas^se achat raramerUe, Camoes Lus.

InlroJucfao.

Hio talentoda palavra a mais nobre faculdade
do ence racional, como instrumento, com que nao
BO e^)oe as suas ideas, mas ate pinta ots mais occultos
8entimeritx>8 do espmto com rasgos tao vivos, e

^ K sublimes

158 PORTUGUESE

sublimes, que os faz passar aos cora^oes roais izen-
tos de interesse. At]uella Filosofia inata ao cora^ao
do homeni, que preside a todas as ac9oes, que mais
o elevao, foi queen formou os sindes representativos
das suas ideas simplices, e compostas ; e quem, d
for9a de infinitas combiDa9oes, Ihe . fez conceber o
' grande pensamento do transumpto mental consign
nado nas palavras por huma successao de ideas nao
interrompidas, cujo nexo constitue a pintura eteraa
nao so do fysico> mas, o que be mais prodigidso, do
moral bumano.

Aquella mesma filosofia, que dirigindo e elerando
o espirito bumano desde as ideas simplices ate &s
implexas, Ibe d^o as primeiras nocoes da expressao
simples e primitiva, como mais addptada as necessi-
dades do bomem ; d propor9ao que Ibe foi aid-
pliando a esfera dos sens conbecimentos, Ibe fbi
ministrando expressao complexa, isto be, figurada
com a qual pinta aos olhos, e.dd corpo, e vida &$
mais sublimes abstrac9oes, que pode conceber o en-
tendimento bumano.

Deste immenso aggregado de id6as simpleces, e
compostas, como consequencia natural, procedeo a
vivacidade da expressao, e va riqueza das Linguas,
que seelevdrao ao mais distincto grao de perfei9ao,
segundo o numero de acontecimentos, e revoIu9oe5
notaveis ; e muito mais segundo o trato frequentc
com as na9oes estranbaSj e communica9ao social dos
povos entre si ; por isso mesmo que das graindes
crizes procede a effervescencia das patxoes, que
pondo em movimento,eactividadea massa das ideas,
gera novos pensamentos, e nova elocu9ao.

. Daqui se infere, que os melbores de todos os
idiomas devem for90samente ser os daquelles povos j
que mais revolu9oes experimcntdrao, e que melhor I
conhecerao as leis da Sociedade. V^-^e pois pello

3ue nos ensina a bistoria, que as Na9oes nfiais puli-
as e sdbias, tanto na linguagem, como nos cos-

tumesi

r G RA^M M-A R. - 139

tumes, forao -quasi sempre.ast que situadias junto. ao
mar conbecerao mais cedb a necessidade da com-
municafao Hos povos estranhos, por meia do Com-
mercio ; ou aquellas, . cujos acontecimentos Ihes
derao lugar distincto nos apndes do genero hu-

mano.

Por isso vemos, que as Linguas geraes do Malabar,
Coromandel, e da China, regioes.,mafittmas,.. assimi
como.tambemaArabe, sapasmais bellas^ e.aritigas
detodasas Linguas da Asia. Os F6vos da Grecia,
que gozando do mais formoso espectaCulo d^ Na-.
tureza^ experimentarao tantas; e tao notaveis revo«
lu9oe^, inventarao a mais significativo, e b^rmbnico
de todos OS Idiomas, onde se achao consignados os
ibais insignes monumeatos do genio^ e donde pro-
ceddo a magestade da Lingua dos Romanos, nao
mais famosos pelas suas conquistas» que pelos es-
criptos immortaes, com que illustrar^o os Seculps.
O mesmo se deve considerar dos Italianos, Fraa-
cezes^ Hespaohbes, e Inglezes, cujos Idiomas tendo
origem na Lingua Latina, se tem elevado ao mais
alto ponto de perfei9ao possivel;e nos quaes exis-
tem monumcntos para.quem todo 6 loavdr he dimi-
ntito.

Mas este concurso de circunstancias parece, que
ainda nao foiacausa sufEciente da perfei9ao jdas
Linguasj ainda ali se diviza hum vacuo, que.pre-*
ciza ser occupado; Aqui vem a Poesia com toda
a sua pompa e magestade, desatando or vdos, pulin*
do e aperfei9oando os Idiomas, diaado a tudo alma,
ie vida, ja elevando-se aos maiores assumptos nos
louvdres do Ente Supremo, e no Panegyrico dos
grandes bomens, persuadindo a imita9ao das ac9oes
nobres, e dignas dos mais distinctos applausos. Ella
Ibe abreos'seus tbesouros; elIaosenriquece;ella]hes
da for9a, elegancia, e harmonia, sem o que seriao buns
cadaveres seccos, e inanimados. Sem a Poesia, nada
seriao talvez os Gregos,. e os Romanos, que tanto

* K 9 encbirai

140 PORT U .b U E S E

ench^rao o mutido com a fbma das^uas vfctorias,
com a grandeza das suas ^9005, e muito ntais com
a perfei9aS, com que cultivarao todas as Artcs de
genio, de que tantos, e tao admiraveis teslemunbos
nos deixarao principal men te nos seus escrkos. A
Poesia pois, que tendo entre os antigos hum carac-
ter de harmonia muito diverso da roesia moderna,
veto pella ijgnomncia dos Seculos a tal decadencia^
que pouco raltou paf ficar inteiramente ignorada.

Das reHqiiias da Lingua Latina, c Gr^gd se
formarad as Idiomas modernos, com diversa Syn-
taxe ; e com elles resuscitarao, ou por melhor dizer,
formarao os Proven9aes huma Poesia toda nova na
disposj^ao das cesuras, e combina9des harnidnicas.

Os Italianos restaaraddre^ de quasi todas as
Artes, fSrao os primeiros, que tratarao a Poesia com
dignidade,aperfei9dando os metros, e harmOnia^que
os mesmos rroven9aes, eSiciiianostrnhaoinventado;
e tanto se applicarao a ella, que ja no decimo quarto
Seculo era famoso Poeta o celebre Dante, quern
JBxou todas as accentua9oes harmonicas do hende
casyllabo, que ficou sendo 6 mais necessario metro
da Poesia italiana, Castelhana, e Portugueza*

Entrdrao os Mouros em Hespanha, e com elles a
Poesia : porem o desassoc^go da guerra niS dfeo
lugar aos antigos possuidores desta Regido, tdo
.inrestada de Na9oes estranhas, a cultivar a Poesia
seriamente^ nem a pulir os seus Idiomas tdo cede
como OS Italianos. Da longa domina9^09 que os
Romanes tiverao em Hespanha se havia neila intro-
duzidb o uzo da Lingua Latina, que veio & ser vul-
gar : della, e de varios dialectos barbaros, se formd-
rdo OS dous mais bellos, e sonoros Idiomas de Hes-
panha, e talvez da Europa, o Castelhano, e o Por-
tuguez.

B)stas duas Linguas se forao igualmente aper-
fei9oaiido, de sorte que a burn mesmo temjpo che-
gdtaoao seu auge. Com tudo, sendo a Na9do Por-

tugueza

iiWAM MAR.: 1*1

tugucza fnais moderna, e occupaDdo muito : mbnos
espa9o de terreno, que a Castelhana, veio roaisceda
a produzir nionumentos, que assaz distinguirao, q
acreditarao o seu Ididma. As historias de Jo45 do
Barros dadaa k luz no meio do Seculo decimo sextQ^
if traduzidas em todas as Linguas cultas da Europa,
fizerao mostrar ao Mundo litterdrio, quc^ aJUingu^
Portilgueza era .a mais filha da Latina. Hum
fiuga^ro ■ sufficiente de Escricores, que logo depois
vierao^ acab^rao de determinar o genio da Lingua^
cujo.caracter he elegancia, e perspicuidade. Sen-
do pais a Lingua Portugueza desde a sua origem
mui doce, e sonora, resultado natural aaquantidada
proporcionada das suas vogdes, e c6nsoantes> das
qu%es as pjrimeiras, nao sao tao frequentes, e con*
JAinctas, que enfraqud^ao a harmonia, e a fa9ao lan^
guidaepouconotada,como se ve na Lingua Italiana^
netii as segundas com nimia frequencia se atro^
pellao> e produzem sona nides e asperos, como nas
Linguas do Norte. Todas estas felices disposicoes,
al^m do genio, conviddvao a Na94Q a cultura da
Poe^ia pata que sempre teve natural inglina^ao.
Deixemoa a miiida investiga^ao destas causas, a
(|ual sera mai$ propria de quern tentar esprevdr a
}ii$toria da Lingqa. Oeix^mos taoibem as Poesias
anterl^r^s ao Deculo de quinhentos, muitas das
quaes exi^tem em algumas Bibliothecas antigas,
como as d' El Rei p. P.ini? na do Cohvento da
'Qrdeip d^ Christo em Thomar^ e outras andaS em«>
pregadas no c^lebre Canciopeiro de Kescnde^ col-
lecf ap preciosa, donde se podem extrahir as maiores
liiz^ a r^p^itp da Natureza, e origerQ da nossa
f oesii; e come^^ndo a tratar do auge a que esia
f levQu a Lingua Portugueza ; as graf as, e numero,
qu^ Ihe communipoa ; principlaremos a discorr^r
d0 huma^p&i^a (tiais vizinba a nos, e esta seja deter*
0uoada peip iftq»^0 $4 de Miranda.

4 Veja

142 PORTUGUESE

Ve)&-tno8 pois os s^ssumptos, que este Poeta tra*
tou, a qualidade de sua imita^ao em geral, o uzo
que fez do hendecasyllabo, ate ao seu tempo pouco
ou nada conhecido em Portugal, e etn toda a Hes-
panha ; como tratou, como aperfei9odQ o Son^to,
do qual se deve reputar inventor entre nos, novas -^
grafas que accrescent ou a nossa l^ingua, e coma
finalmente preparou aos Poetas, que Ihe succed^rao,
' hum novo caminho para se ejevarem ate a immortal
Lusiada.

Mas antes que entremos neste exaine, veikmos

{irimeiro estado em que o Sa de Miranda, acoou o
dioma.

A Na9ao Portugueza, que ate ao fim do reinado
de D. Fernando jazia na ignorancia, oceupada uni-
camente da cultura das suas terras, quanto Jhe era
preciso para o .consomo interior do H^ino, e para
entreter huma ligeira sombra de commercio ex-
terior, continuamente vexado pella tyrannia Ara-
bica, que infestando os mares, era eterno obstaculo a
navega9ao ; vivendo como desterrada na solidao dos
campos, sem communica9aO; nem policia, fallava
huma linguagem informe, e grosseira, ch^a desons
rudes, que as Linguas barbaras Ihe tinhao commu-
Aicado 3 e a pezar de^ Cer huma origem tao pura,
comQ a Lingua Latina,*donde proced|a^ so conser-.
vava alguma energia natural nascida das significa-^
9oes primitivas das suas v6zes, ique, alem de serem
maculadas de infinitas anomalias, e dissonancias,
erao privadas de transla^oes, que dao for9a e eleva-
9ao ^08 Idiomas. Chea pois de construccoes erro-
. neas, de dithongos asperos, e desinencias rudes,
pobre de termos, sem idea de nexo, que subsiste
nas particulas, sem ^yntaxe, jsem harmonia o seu
periodo incerto, e desunido vacillara sem caracter.

A grande reyolu9ao de Dv Joao I. fazendo a mais
viva commo9ao kio genio dos Portuguezes^ cotn ella

fixe

Q R A M M A R. 143

ihe vierao novos estimulos de gloriai que eleva o
espirito ; novAs emprezas, novos pensamentos, nova
for9a, nova energia as suas. enuncia9oes; novos
objectos do discurso, e ' nova linguageid. Hum
Latim barbaro at6. alii organb das Leis, • e mstru*
mentos publicos^ cessou de ser a linguagem do
Fdro, .

Da conquista de Ceuta pasceo a idea> a grande
idea dos descubrimentos, que mostrando a nccessi*
dade de cultivar as Mathematicas, e a Astronomia,
taes, quaes existiao naquelles tempos obscuros»
alargou a esf6ra da Mechanica^ que fazendo novas
investiga^oes sobre a ac^ao dos yentos> e resistencia
das agoas» extrahindo a somma da combina9ao dos
movimentos resultantes da ac9ao, e reac9ao destes
dous Elementos^ alcan90u mais perfeito conheci-
mento das leis dos liquidos, e do equilibrio, e aper-
fei90du finalmente a Arte.de navegar. Novos
Astros, novos mares e costas^ novas ilhas, novos
mundos enchem de adniira9a5 tddo o universo.

From the %d Canto of the Luciad of CamSes.

Estavas linda Inez posta em sossego,
De tens annos colhendo o ddce fruto,
Naqu£ll« engino da alma, ]£do, e cegOj
Que a fortdna naa deixa durar muit6:
Nos saudosos cam pos do mond^go,
De teus formosos olhos nunca enxutb,
Aos montes ensinindo, e as ervinhas.
O nome, que no peito efcrito tinhas. ^

Do teu principe alii te respondiao
As lembr^n9as, que na alma Ihe moravao.
Que sempre ante sens olhos te traziao :
Quando dos teus formosos se apartavao :
De noite em doces sonbos^ que mentiaSj^

De

144 P 6 R T U G U E S.E

De dia em pensamfent >s, que voavaS:
E quanto^m ficn cuidava, e quanto vk,
E'rao' tudo mcm6rias da ategria.

* * * «

D'outras bellae senbdras, e princ^zas,
Os dezejados talamos eng^ka^
Que tudo em fim, tu puro amor desprezas,
Quando hdm g6sto, suave te sogeita :
V6ndo estas namoradas ^Btmnhtzds,
'O velho pay cesudo, que respeita,
O murmm&r do povo e a fantasia^
Do (ilho, que casarse nao queria*

Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, , . '
For Ihe tirar o -filho, que tetn p/eso,
Crendo co*sangue ^ da morte indina»
Matar do firme amor o fogo aceso :
Que furor consendo^ que a espada finai
Que pdde susteutar o grande peso
Do furor Mauro* fdsse kvantada^
Contra huma fraca dkma delicada ?

Traziao-na os horriferos aligdzes
Ante o Rejr, ja movido a ptedade,
Mas o p6vo com falsas, e terozes
Razdens, a morte crua o persuade.
Ella com tristes^^ e piedosas vozes^
Sahidas86de magoae saudade
Do s^u Principe e filhos que deixava, . .
Que mais que a propria morte a magoava.

Para o ceo cristalino levantiindo.
Com lagrimas OS alhos piedosos,
Os olhos, porque as roaos Jhe estava atando
Hum dos duros ministros rigurosos:
E depois nos mentnos atentindo.
Que taS queridos tinba> e t&o mimosos^
Cuja orfandide como tnai temia, '
JPara o ard cttiel affi diaa.

Se

GR A MM A R. 1*5

Se ja ioas brutas feres; cuji mente
Natdra fez cruel de ctascim^nto ;
E nas avies agr^tesyqu^ 66niente
Nas rapinas aerias tern o ipt^oto.
Com pequenas cri§Ln9as vip a gente,
Terem tao pieddso sentim^nto,
Como coa may de Nino ja mostrarao, .
E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao :

O'tu que tens de hum&no o gesto^e o peito,
Se de hum4no he matdr huma donzella
Fraca, e sem for9a so por t6r sug6ito
O cora9ao, a quern sdube venc^Ila
A estas criancinhas tern resp^ito ^

Pols o nao tens d morte escura della,
Mdvate a pied4de sua, e minha,
Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao tinha,

E se venci^ndo a Maura resistdncia,
A morte sabes dar com fogo, e ferro,
Sabe tambem dar vida com clemdncia,
A quem para perd^Ua nao-fSz erro,
Msrs se te assi merece esta innocdncia^
Poe-meem perpetuo e misero destSrro,
Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardSnte,
Onde em lagrimas viva eternamdnte.

Pde-n)e onde se nsc toda' a feriddde,
Entre ledens, e tigres ; e ver6i
Se nelles achar posso a pied^de,
Que entre peitos hum&nos nao achei ; - •

Alii CO* amor intrinseco, e vontade^
Naquelle por quem mdrrp, criarei
Estas reliquias suas, que a qui vistc^
Que refrigerio sejao damai ^riste.

Queria perdoar-lfee o rev benino,
Movido das f^aiavras; que o magdao,

^ Mas o pertinii^ pdvo, e s^u destine,
(Que destn sort^ oquiz) Ibe tiiS perddao :

Arrancdo

146 PORT UG U fi S E

* Arrancao das espidas dc a^a fino,
Os que por boib tal feito allt pregdao.
Contra buma dama, o peitos caijrniceiros^
Ferozes vos tnostrdes, e cavaUeiros ?

Qual contra a linda mo9a t^olicena,
Consola9ao extr^mst da may velha,
Porque a idmbra de Acbiles a cond^na,
C* o ferro o duro Pirrd se apar^Iha : ''
Mas.ella os^ olhos/ com que o ar serena
(Bern cdmo'paciSnte, e mansa,ov6Iha)
Na misera may postos, que endoudece^
Ao duro sacrificio se offerece :

Taes contra Inez os brutos mataddres^
No coIo de alabastro, que sostinha
As obras, co que amdr matdu de am6res
A'quelle, que depois a fSz rainha :
As espddas bailbando, e as brancas fldres.
Que ella dos olhos seus regddas tinba^
Se incarni94vao f6rvidos, e irosos^
No futuro castigo nao cuidosos.

Bern puderas, 6 sol^ da vista d^stes,
Teus rdyos apartdr ^qu61lc dia,
Cdmo da seva mesa de Thyestes
Quando os'filhos pormao de Atreu comia;
Vos 6 concaves valles que pudestes,
A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria,
O nome do seu Pedro, que Ihe ouvistes,
Por muito grande espa90 repetisites.

Assi como a bonina, que cbrtdda
Antes de tempo foi, Candida, e bella,
Sendo das maos lascivas mal tratdda.
Da menina, que a! trduxe na capelta^
O cheiro traz perdido, e a cdr murcl)id9y
Tal esta morta a pdllida donzella^
S^cas do rosto a& rosas, e perdicj^
A brdnca, e viva cor, co' a doce vidg*,:.

\,

As

'■ G R A MM A R. 1*7

As filhas do Mond^go a morte ^scdra,
Longo tempo chor^ndo memor^rao, ' '
]$ per ipemoria etdrna em fotite pura.
As lagrimaschorddas transformdrao: \ '
O nome Ihe puzerao» que inda dura,
Dos amdres de Inez, que <i,lii passarao ;
V^de, que fresca fonte rcga as Acres,
Que lagrimas sao agoa, e o ndme amdres.

From the 5th Canto cf the same.

Porem ]k cincos soes erao passddos.
Que dalli nos partiramos, cortAndo
Osmares nunca de dutrem navegddos,
Prosperamente os ventos assoprando :
Quando huma noite /cstando desctiidados^
Na cortaddra proa vigiindo,
Huma nuvem que ds ares escurcce^
Sobre nossas cab^^as apparece.

Tarn temerosa vinha, e carregida^

Que poz nos cora9dens hum grande medd^
Bramindo o negro mar de Idnge bra^a,
Como se desse em vao n'algum roch^do:
O' potestade, disse, sublimada.
Que amea90 divino, ou que segredo,
Este clima, e este mar nos apresenta.
Que mor cousa parece, que torm^nta?

Nao acabava, quando huma figura,
Se nos mostra no ar, robusta, e valida^
De dUforme, e grandissima estatdra,
O rosto carregado, a barba esquallida :
Os olhos encovados, e a postura
Medonha, e ma, e a cdr tetr^na, e pillida»
O boca negra, os. dentes amarellos. , • ;

Tarn grande era de m^mbros, que bem p6sso
Certificdrte, que este era o segimdo^

Dc

148 P Q RTU G U ES E

De Rhodes e$Ltranhi8$>EDO Col6$60,

Que hum dos set^ mil&gres foi do muodo :

Co' hum torn de v6z dos falla borri^ndo, e grdsso.

Que parecdo sahir do mar profiwido,

Arrepiaose as ci^rnes, c o cabeUo»

A mi, e a todo3, so d^ ouvilo, e velo.

E disse, o* gente ousdda mais C{ue quintas
No mundo comeltdraS gr&ndes cousas ;
Tu, que por guerras cruas, taes, e tantas,
E por trabalhos vSos nunca reppusa^y
Pois vedados terminos quebrantas,
E navegar meus longos mares ousas,
Que eu tanto tempo hi que guardo^ e tepho
Nunca arados de estranho ou propriolenho;

Pois vens vdr os segr6dos escondidos
Da natur^za, e ao humido elemento,
A nenhutn grande hum&no concedidos
De nobre ou de immprtal merecimento :
Ouve OS damnos de mi, que apercebidos
Estao a teu sobejo atrqvimentOj
Por t6do a largo mar, e pela terra.
Que inda bas-de subjugar com dura gu^rra.

Sabe que quantas nios esta Viagemi
Que tu fazes, fizcrem de atrevidas,
Inimiga teraS esla paragem
Com ventos, e tormdntas dcsmedidas.
£ da primeira armada, ((ue passagemi
Fizer por estas ondas inspffridas^
£u farei de improviso tal ca$tigo^
Que s6ja mpro damno que o perigp,

Aqui espero toi&ar, se nao me e^g&no,
De quern me descubrb aha ving^n^a^
E nao Bt acabara s6 nisto o damno
De vossa pertinace '€onfiah9a j '
Antes em yos^a^ ndos verei^ c^da anno
(Se he verdaik f> qu^ m^u jujzo alcaQCi?)
; Naufragics,

f

Q ti A MM A 11;^ - 149

Nkufragios, peTdi9oes de toda &orte,
Que o menor mal de tMot seja a moftct.

E do priraeirb iUustre que a xentiira f
. Com fatna alta fizer tocar 6s Ceos^

Serei et^rna e nova sepultura, .

Porjuizos incognitos de E)6os!
' Aqui pord da Tufca tffmada dura

Os sobdrbos e prosperos tropb6os :

Comigo de seu$ damnos o amea9a

A destrukja Quilda^ com Momba9a.

Outro tambem vira de bonrdda fama.
Liberal, Cavalleiro, ehamorado, .
E comsigo trafa a form6sa Dama, •
Que Amor por gram ftierce Ihe terd dado : ^
Triste veqtura c negror fado os chama
Neste terr^rio meu,que duro, e irado,
Os deixara.de hum crunaufragio vivos, ...
Para verem trabalhos excessivos. • >

Verao morr^r com fome os filhos charos,
Em tan to am6r gerados, e nascidos :
Verao os Cafres asperos, e avaros, , * '
Tirar a linda Dama oS seus vestidos :
. Os crystallinos membros^ e preclaros^
A' calma, ao frio, ao ar verdo despidos^
Despois de ter pi2;ado longamdnte
Co' OS delicados pes a area ardente.

E verao mais os 61hos que e^capifem
De tan to mal, de tanta desventura,
Os dous am&ntes misefros ficarem " '

Na ftrvida e implacabil espessura.
AlJi, despois que as pedras abrand^eofi
Com lagrimas de ddr, de magoa piira,
Abra9ados> as almas soltarao
Da fprmosa e misefrima prisaS.

Mais hia por diante o motistro borrindo
Dizehdo n6ssg6 fadoii, quando alf&da

- Lhc

MO PORTUGUESE

Lhe dice eu: quern ^s tu que esse estupenda
Cdrpo, certo me t^m maravilhado ?
A bdca, e os 61hos n^gros retorc^ndo,
E d&ndo hum e^nrdso e gr^ade brddo",
» Me responddo com \6z pesada e amdra^
Como quern da pergunta llie pezdra :*

Eu sou aquelle occulto e grande Cdbo
A quern chamdis vos outros Tormentorio ;
Que nunca a Ptolem^o, Pomponio, Estrdbo, .
Plinio, e quantos passdrao fui not6rio.
Aqui toda a Afric^oa costa acabo
Neste meu nunca visto ftomontorio.
Que para 6 Polo Antarctico se estende^
A quern vossa ousadia Unto offlSnde.

Fui dos filhos asperrimps da Terra,
Qual Encelado, Eg^o, e o Centim^no ;
Chameime Adamastdr^ e fui na guerra
Contra o que vibra os rdios de v ulcSno ;
Nao que puzesse serra sdbre serra^
Mas conquistaodo as dndas do Occi^no
Fui Capitis do mdr, por onde andava
A armada de Neptuno, que eu buscava.

Amdres da alta Espdsa de Pel to

Me fiz6ram tomar tam&nha empr^za,

Todas as Deosas desprez^i do Ceo>

S6 por amdr das aguas a Princ6za :

Hum dia a vi, co'as fiihas de NerSo,

Sahir nua na praia ; e logo prSza

A vontade senti> de tai manSira

Que inda nao sinto cousa que mais queira.

Cdmo fdsse impossivel alcan^alla
Pela grandiza fda ide meu gesto.
Determine! por armas de tomalla,
E a D6ris este caso manifesto :
De mSdo a D£osa entao por mi lhe falla ;
Mas ella co' hum formd^o riso honesto

* Respondeo

:: -GiR A M-M A R. ( i5i

*

Resp'ond^o ^ Qu^ai sera o aihor bast^ot^

De Nympha que sustente o dc hum^ Gigante ?

Com tudo,^ "pot liVrarAioft Occe&no
De tanial ^fuerfa, eu l^uscstfei ttianeira.
Com que com mihha hddfa escuse o dimno :
Tal resposta me torna a 'mdnlsageira^ •
Eu que cahir uao p^e n^te engano
(Que h6 grande do3 am&ntes a cegu^ira)
£nch6ram*me cpm: gr&nde^ abond^n^as
O peito de dezejosi e esperan9a8.

Ja nescio, ja da guerra de&istindo,.
Huma noite de Doris promettida.
Me apparece de- longe b geato lindo.
Da br^nca Thetis, unica despida :
Cdmo doudo corri, de longe abrindo
Os brd96s, para aquella que era vida
Deste cdrpo , e 00111690 os olhos bellos
A Ihe beijar, as fades, e os cabdilos.

Oh que ndo sei de n6jb como o cdnte !
Que cr^ndo ter nos bra9os quern amava,
Abra9ado me achei co' bum duro mdnle
De aspero mato, e de espessura brava :
Est&ndt) CO* hum penddb frdnte afrdnte.
Que eu pSlo rosto ang^licQ apertava,
Nao fiquei homem nao, mas mudo, e quedo,
E junto de hum pen6do outro pen^do.

Xy Nympha a tnais Formosa do Occeano :
ja que minha presen9a n^ te agr^da.
Que te custava ter-me nesfe engano, •
Ou fdsse mdnte, nuvem, s6nho, ou nada ?
De aqui me parto ir^do, e quasi ins^no.
Da m^oa, e da deshdnra alii pass^da, .
A busc^r dtitro mundo, dnde n^ visse
Quem de meu pronto, e de meu mdl se risse.

Erao ]k ndste t^mpo mens irmaos

Vencidos, e em miseria extrdma postos ^

E,

152 . P OK T U G U ES E

E, por mats segurar-se os IMos^s vacis^
Agunsa v^rios m6ntes6otop6stos:r: :

E como contra o Ceo Tiio valem maqs^
Eu que chor^n6o andiva roeus desg^tos
Comecei a sentir dofado imi^o^, , .. - .
Por meus atrevim^otqs, o castigo.

Converte-se-rae a carric em t6rra ddfa;
Em penddbs os 6ssos se fiz6ram :
Estes m^mbrbs que \&s, e esta figiira^^
Por estas longas aguas se estenderam :
Emfim minha grandissima estatdra .
Neste remoto c&bo convertdram
Os D6oses ; e por mais dobrddas mdgoas^
Me anda Thetis cercando destas dgoas.

Assim contava^ e co' hum meddoho chdro^
Subito dante os dlhos se apartdu ;
Desf^z se a nuvem negra, e co' bum soD6ro
Bramido muito longe o mar sodu.
Eu, levantaildo as m aos ao sancto coro
Dos Adjos, que tao longe uos guidu,
A D6os pedi, que removesse os duros
Casos que Adamastdr, contou futuros.

From the 2d Canto of the same.

Ouvio-lhe estas palavras^piedosas
A formosa Dione, e commovida,
De entre as Nymphas se vai, que saudosas
Ficdrao desta subita partida.
Jd penetra as estrdllas luminosas;
Janatercdira Esf6ra recebida
Avinte pdssa ; e Id no sexto Ceo
Para 6nd€ estdva o Padre se mov6o.

Ecdmo hia afFrontada do caminho^
Tao formosa no gesto se mostrava.
Que as estrellas, o Ceo, e o ar vizinbo
£ tudo qu&nto a via namorava.

^

Dos

~ Dos- 61ho8 dttde £i9^'^.filho q: oiahA

Huns espiritos vivos in^irava, , .

Com queosP6lb^g<llWcli'iidtt<fflati',- ' .^

Etomavadefdgba'^fisfiShifM^'r ! ' -

E por m4is namordr o Sober^no . . ,

P4dre, de quetA'fdisMpti'Mkdia^, e'cHiM,' *
Se Ihe apresSh'ta'a^si cdmddtftibiitii}' ;
Na selva Idea j4^ $^ apresdift4itf.
Se a vira o ca9addr»que'd vulto'htun&ob' ^ v
Perd^o, v6nudba Diaiik na agua cl&ra, n .*
Nunca os £ammtos galgof o mat&ram't •.. W ^
Que primeiro desdjos o acabaram. - /

Os ctSspos fios de diiroiie e$pifa(2iaixf ^ w . ' :

P6Io colo, querarneye .escur^tiatf . (f :

AndSndo, as lacteas tetas Ibe tremiam
Com quern Amor brinca^, e nao se via: * ,
Da alva pretinach^fna^ Ih^'satili^irL' "
dnde o menmo as aTma^ accendia :
Pdlas lisas colikMinai Ihe txtphrnrnk ! /. i :; f.: ll
Des^jos, que cdmo hem s^r!enrdl3^a3n;> . '

Co' hum delgidS'cehd&l aS p4'ttes'fc6tii*e/ - '^ ^ '
Dequ6m vergdoha h6^.natii^'k-eparo:. ;,ij . .' ,
Por^m nem'tiido escdnde, ]6^inidesd6bf^ j..r
O veo dos rdxbs Hrios pduco arart) i 6::»-i' ; *
Mas para que o desejo acc^nda^ e dobre^ .
Lhe pod' diatite aquelle ob|ecto rato. *'' '* .
Ja se «6ntem no Ce6, pof tdda a parte, ' *^ '^ • 1;
Ciumes em Vulcfttfd, artidr^eitf mrte; * * ' ''

E mostr^ndo no angelifco s^fhfcl^tit^ '
Co' o riso hdnda trist£za m'lsturada ;
Como Akmk qde fdi do in^alifo amlnte' .
Em brincos am6r6sos mal tratada; ^ . :-

Que se queixa, e se ri n' hum m^smo inst&nte/'
£ se m6stra 6ntre alegre magoada ; v.

Desta arte a Ddosa^ a quern nenhuma iguala,
Mais mim6sa que ttiste a o Padre f&la.

* L From

t:

1S4 PORTUGUESE, 8cc.

Fr$m ihi Ui Idyl of Boccage.

K f6z do Tejou em brdnca peoedia,
Minada p^Ias 6ndas salitrosasi
IVision£iro de Amdr, Tritao gemia.

LuziaQ-lhe as espadoas escam6sas,
Sustentava o marltimo instrum^oto,

O buzio atroaddr nas maos callosas :

•

Conchas da c6r do liquido Elemdnto
Parte do.cdrpo enprme Jhe vestiao,
Igudl nd Jigeirdza ao ptdprio v6ntb:

Da barba salsas gdtas ihe cahiao,
£ nos 61hos, que Amdr affogueava,
Em borbotoes: as l^rimas ferviao.

Lilia que hum B6sque proximo habitavaj
lilia a Napia, desdenhosa, e b^lla,
Amordsos damdres Ihe arrancava :

Hum dia a vio na praia, e s6 de vSIfa
Seu cora9ao feroz enfeiti9ado,
Vodu, gemendo, para os olhos d6lla«

Das< entr&nhas do Peiago salgado,
Ldvco .de Amdres, Iduco de suadades.
O queixdsa Amaddr tinha saltado^

Do Pai, que abafa as nSgras tempest&des,
Ja» seu voraz tormento era sabido>
E das dutras Equoreas Divipdades.

De aereas espcran9as illudido,
Grao tempo seu espirito sauddso,
Rastej^do a criiel, vagdu perdido s

Grao t^mpq glorias vis^isonhdu teimdso»
Antes que desse fructuosa entc4da
A o acre desex>g&QO^ o pdito ancidso. '&c«

FlM.

^

PORTUGUESE AND SPANISH LANGIJACfii.

.... , Lately pub (ipud. . *

1. A Dictionary of the Portuguefe and Englimjtl^#.

guages, in Two Parts; Portturuefc and Englifh, «n4 Elnglilh

arid ft)rtuffaere : wherein, Plwl — ^The Words are" explained,

in their different niekni^gs, by Examples from the beft I^or^

tuguefe and Englilh Writers: Secbfidly^The EtymolGjJjr^

of the Portugueie generally indicated froitilbe Latin, Arabid'

and other Languages. ^Thudii^hout tbc' whole are intdr-

fperfed, a great number of Phrafes and Pn&yetbs* ' By An*--

THONY ViEYRA. In Two large Voliimes, 8vb. a new Edl.*^

tion, carefully revifed, and greatly improved wilh ujnoards

oF 6,000 new words, and Cpnjmercial Phrafes, by Mr. J^

P, AiLLAUD, and the Portuguefe words properly .ag^eq^^dt

to facilitate the Pronunciation to Learners.
• • " .'■■''■' *

2. An Abridgement of the fame in a pocket^VoIuine.

3. fi. New Grammar of the Port uguefer and EngfUb Liui*
guagesr By Mr* Vieyra, 8vo. A New Edition, grtftljr
improved by Mr AillauD, with the PortQguefe Wotm.
properly accented. , .,

4. Exercises upon the different Parts of. fpcecb oCtht.
Portuguefe Language, referring to Mr. Vxsyra'9 Gram*
roar. 12010. 1 ., '

5. Nova Grammatica Ingleza, a qual ferve para Inflruif
raos Portuguezes na Lingua Ingleza, 8vo. Nova Edifao re«
vifta, e confideravelmente augmentiada.

6. ^isTORj A de Portiigal, por Antonio de Moraes Sz^va,
natural do Rio de Janeiro, e continuada at£os nossos tempos,
por Hippolyto Joi£ da Costa, 3 torn. ismo.

' 7. Hiftoria de Gil Braz de Santilhana traduzida em
Portuguez, 4 tom. if mo.

8. Selections in Portuguefe and Englifli, with the Por«
tuguefe Words properly accented, for tbc Ufc of Pcrfons
learoiof tiiofe Lianguages, 8vo. ^ . . . .

Booh PfinUifQT /*• Wingrwe.

g. A New DiCTiONART of tbe Spanifli and Englifli Lan«
guagesJnTwo P^rtt— 1. SpaniOi and Eoglifli ; 2. EngHfli
and Spanifli. A New Edition, 8vo. coirecicd and improved. '
By JPHM Barkttu s volt.

10. The (ame abridged in a fmall fize.

11. A New Spanifli Grammar; or, the Elements of the
Spanifli Language. By Mr. ITelpino. A new Edition,
improved by DeTpueyo. 8vo.

la. Fernandez's New PrdcUcal Grammar of the Spani(h
Lanffu^ ; a New Edition, confiderably enlarged by the
Atenofp oVO.

t'0V ExERdi^ES opon the Rules of CoriflruCtion of the
^aoifli Languages ; with refcfrences to. the above Gram-
mar. By Mr. Fernandez^ A New Edition, greatly im«
p^ed by the Author.

ti|« Laa AvENTURAS'de Giiir Blas deSantiliana'; Rew
ftifttudas al CaiMl^MN), por el Sapitatifimo' Padre Ifla, y ea>
eSR'NiMiva Edtcion^ revifadas pof el Rev. Don.FfiLfPB'

FRR||ANDElty4Vol. laillOb

Sj.'Thtlame vols a, 3, and 4 to complete fefs.*

ift Don -Quixote de la Mancha, compuefto por Miguel
de Cervantes Saavie(]ra. Nueva Exlicion pc^r M. F£Ri4AVf-
OEZ, 4tom. iflirao;

17'. NovELAS NuEVAS.'porMr. DeFlorian, trad^cidas
liliirewente, 6 illuftradas con algunas notas curiofas 6 in-
llMftlvas; por Don-Gafpar Zavala y Zamora, i2mo.

18. GoNZALVO de Cordova, por Mr. DeFlorian, trad.
ptPt'D* Jofan Lop^z de Penaivon, s torn. lamo.

19: HJrsToRiAde la ConqUista de Mexico, pof Doh'
Antonio de Solis^ 3 torn. 8vo.

^

London s

far F. WiKO&AVi, StnM, by T. C. HsriMi;

Peterborough Court, Fleet'itreeL

THE NEW

This book ■■
Ok

YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY

en Irom the BuUdinl

'"'■"-

THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY

RBPERBNCE DEPARTMENT

taken from the BaUdint

*"--